Transcript
Order User Manual Yard/Customer Hull no. Customer reference Order No. Document name Revision Author Date First Issue Comments
(6 of 7)
: ULSTEIN DESIGN & SOLUTION AS : CO001/CO002 : U10662 - PX105 : 202121 : BRI-201041-01SU :A : HAB : 06.05.2015 :A
This page left intentionally blank
Communication, GMDSS Power (System 51)
1
Communication, GMDSS MF/HF (System 52)
2
Communication, GMDSS SAT-C (System 53)
3
Communication, GMDSS VHF (System 54)
4
Communication, GMDSS Navtex (System 55)
5
Communication, GMDSS EPIRB (System 56)
6
Communication, VHF Portable (System 57)
7
8
9
10
11
12
This page left intentionally blank
Revision history manual : Rev. (A,B,C..) A
Description A
Date (dd.mm.yyyy) 06.05.2015
Sign. HAB
This page left intentionally blank
Enclosed documents : Section
Document name
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
BRI-D51001 (GMDSS power supply_Sailor 6000)\BRI-D51001-01IU (B).pdf BRI-D52001 (GMDSS MF HF_Sailor 6000)\BRI-D52001-01IU (A).pdf BRI-D53001 (GMDSS SAT-C_Sailor 6110)\BRI-D53001-01IU (A).pdf BRI-D54001 (GMDSS VHF_Sailor 6222)\BRI-D54001-01IU (A).pdf BRI-D55001 (Navtex_Furuno_NX-700B)\BRI-D55001-01IU (A).pdf BRI-D56005 (GMDSS EPIRB_Jotron Tron 60S and 60GPS)\BRI-D56005-01IU (B).pdf BRI-D57001 (GMDSS VHF portable_Sailor SP3520)\BRI-D57001-01IU (A).pdf
This page left intentionally blank
Index divider: Section 1 N
Document Type:
Document name:
SYSTEM USER MANUAL
BRI – D51001 – 01IU
Project Title:
Date First Issue:
Author:
Revision:
06.09.2011
EKI
A
GMDSS power supply for Sailor 6000 series
Enclosed documents from sub-supplier & revision history: Revision: (A,B,C,……..)
Description / Enclosed documents:
Date: (dd.mm.yyyy)
Sign.:
A
Sailor_TT-6081_Installation and user manual_Rev 14.01.2011 Sailor_6101 and 6103_Alarmpanel Installation ans user manual 98130981-A_Rev-A Sailor_Moxa_EDS-205A_208A_HIG_4e_Installation Oeverland_UPC-5000P_Specification_AJ080307 Phoenix_MINI-PS-12-24DC-24DC-1_Specification Sailor_TT-6081_Installation and user manual_Rev 14.01.2011 Sailor_6101 and 6103_Alarmpanel Installation ans user manual 98130981-A_Rev-A Sailor_Moxa_EDS-205A_208A_HIG_4e_Installation Oeverland_UPC-5000P_Specification_AJ080307 Phoenix_MINI-PS-12-24DC-24DC-1_Specification EB12-115 Battery Maintenance AGM battery
06.09.2011
EKI
06.11.2012
YLB
B
Component picture:
Ulstein Power & Control AS
This document and its content is the property of ULSTEIN. Nonpublic information contained herein shall be treated as Confidential Information. No use, copying, citation or publication of this document or its content is permitted without prior written consent from ULSTEIN. Any conflicts arising from unauthorized use shall be governed by the laws of Norway.
File Name:
Page:
BRI-D51001-01IU(B) System User Manual.doc
Page 1 of 1
7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP]9RMX ERH'LEVKIV
7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
-RWXEPPEXMSRERHYWIVQERYEP
(SGYQIRXRYQFIV % 6IPIEWIHEXI .ERYEV]
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
'ST]VMKLX 8LVERI 8LVERI%7%PPVMKLXWVIWIVZIH
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
7EJIX]WYQQEV]
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` TSWMXMSR1EOIWYVIXLITS[IV W[MXGLMW3JJ 3 JMVWX
MMM
%FSYXXLIQERYEP
-RXIRHIHVIEHIVW 8LMWQERYEPMWERMRWXEPPEXMSRERHYWIVQERYEPJSVXLI4S[IV 7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV-XMWMQTSVXERXXLEX]SYSFWIVZIEPPWEJIX] VIUYMVIQIRXWPMWXIHMRXLIFIKMRRMRKSJXLMWQERYEPERHSTIVEXI XLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIVEGGSVHMRKXSXLIMRWXVYGXMSRW ERHKYMHIPMRIWMRXLMWQERYEP%PPMRWXEPPEXMSRQYWXFIHSRIF] UYEPMJMIHWIVZMGITIVWSRRIP
1ERYEPSZIVZMI[ 8LMWQERYEPLEWXLIJSPPS[MRKGLETXIVW d
-RXVSHYGXMSRGSRXEMRWEHIWGVMTXMSRSJXLITVMRGMTPISJSTIVEXMSR ERHYWIWERHJIEXYVIWSJXLITS[IVWYTTP]
d
-RWXEPPEXMSR GSRXEMRWWXITF]WXITKYMHIPMRIWLS[XSMRWXEPPXLI TS[IVWYTTP]EWEWXERHEPSRIYRMXSVMREGSQFMRIHWIXYTERH HIWGVMFIWXLIGSRRIGXSVW
d
7IVZMGIERHVITEMVGSRXEMRWMRJSVQEXMSRSRWYTTSVXLS[XS VIXYVRYRMXWJSVVITEMVERHMRWXVYGXMSRWLS[XSI\GLERKIXLI JYWIW
d
%TTIRHMGIW[MXL8IGLRMGEPWTIGMJMGEXMSRWERH9TKVEHI MRWXVYGXMSRW
8]TSKVETL] -RXLMWQERYEPX]TSKVETL]MWYWIHEWMRHMGEXIHFIPS[ &SPHMWYWIHXSIQTLEWM^I[SVHWERHXSMRHMGEXIGSRRIGXSVREQIW SJXLIYRMX -XEPMGMWYWIHXSIQTLEWM^IXLITEVEKVETLXMXPIMRGVSWWVIJIVIRGIW
6IPEXIHHSGYQIRXW 7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP]-RWXEPPEXMSRQERYEP
MZ
8EFPISJ'SRXIRXW 'LETXIV
-RXVSHYGXMSR +IRIVEPHIWGVMTXMSR *IEXYVIW 7]WXIQGSRJMKYVEXMSRhI\EQTPIW
'LETXIV
-RWXEPPEXMSR 9RTEGOMRK -RWXEPPMRKXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
'LETXIV
7IVZMGIERHVITEMV 'SRXEGXJSVWYTTSVX 6ITEMVERHWIVZMGMRK 7XEXYWMRHMGEXSVW 0)( %PEVQQIWWEKIW )\GLERKMRKXLIJYWIW 6IXYVRMRKYRMXWJSVVITEMV
'LETXIV
'YWXSQM^MRKFEXXIV]WIXXMRKW &EXXIV]WIXXMRKW 'LERKMRKFEXXIV]WIXXMRKW
%TT%
8IGLRMGEPWTIGMJMGEXMSRW 7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV 7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP]
Z
8EFPISJ'SRXIRXW
%TT&
9TKVEHI 9TKVEHISZIVZMI[ 9TKVEHMRK[MXLEHHMXMSREP7%-036 YRMXW
%TT'
%TTVSZEPW -)' ;LIIPQEVO
+PSWWEV]
-RHI\
ZM
'LETXIV
-RXVSHYGXMSR
+IRIVEPHIWGVMTXMSR 8LI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIVTVSZMHIW('TS[IVEXJMZI('TS[IV SYXPIXW EPPWITEVEXIP]JYWIH ERHE:('TS[IVSYXPIXJSV7%-036QMRM '8VERWGIMZIV-XEPWSGLEVKIWEYXSQEXMGEPP]EGSRRIGXIHFEXXIV]-JXLI%' TS[IVJEMPWXLITS[IVWYTTP]HIPMZIVW('TS[IVJVSQXLIGSRRIGXIHFEXXIV] =SYGEREGGIWWGSRXVSP ERHQSRMXSVMRKHEXEZME XLI)XLIVRIXMRXIVJEGI 8LIVIEVIVIPE]SYXTYXW JSV%'SYXEKIERH FEXXIV]ZSPXEKIEPEVQ
4S[IVWYTTP]
8LITS[IVWYTTP] TVSZMHIWYTXS ; MRXSXEP8LIJSPPS[MRK QSHIPWEVIEZEMPEFPI 1SHIP
'SRRIGXSVTERIP
4IEOSYXTYXTS[IV
7%-036
1E\ ;
7%-036 [MXLEHHMXMSREP7%-036
1E\ ;
7%-036 [MXLEHHMXMSREP7%-036
1E\ ;
7%-036 [MXLEHHMXMSREP7%-036
1E\ ;
(ITIRHMRKSRXLISYXTYXTS[IVRIIHIHXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV MRGPYHIWYTXSJSYV7%-036 YRMXWERHSRIGSRRIGXSVTERIP8LI7%-036 GERFIYTKVEHIHSRWMXIXSQSVISYXTYXTS[IVF]EHHMRKYTXSXLVII
'LETXIV -RXVSHYGXMSR
7%-036 YRMXW8LIGSRRIGXSVWJSV('TS[IVEVITPEGIHEXXLIWEQIIRHSJ XLIYRMXJSVIEW]QSYRXMRKERHMRWXEPPEXMSR8LIGSRRIGXMSRFIX[IIRXLI 4S[IV7YTTP]YRMX W ERHXLIGSRRIGXSVTERIPEVITVSXIGXIHEKEMRWX[EXIV MRKVIWWF]ETVSXIGXMSRGSZIV%GEFPIVIPMIJFVEGOIXXSWIGYVILIEZ]GEFPIWMW MRXIKVEXIHMRXLI[EPPQSYRXXVE] ;LIRQSYRXIHZIVXMGEPP]XLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIVERHXLI7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP]JYPJMPP-4MREVIEW[MXLQSVIXLER :ERH-4MRSXLIV EVIEW
7%-036 8LI7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP] GERHIPMZIV ;SYXTYXTS[IV SREZIVEKI[MXLETIEOSJ ; JSVEQMRMQYQSJ QMRYXIW-XMW %'TS[IVIH8LI4S[IV7YTTP] LEWERSRSJJW[MXGL-XMWPMX [LIRXLITS[IVMWXYVRIHSR
&EXXIV]GLEVKIV -RGEWISJ%'TS[IVJEMPYVISVSZIVPSEHEFEXXIV]GSRRIGXIHXSXLI7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIVHIPMZIVWXLIVIUYMVIHTS[IVWIEQPIWWP]2SXI XLEXSYXTYXTS[IVLEWELMKLIVTVMSVMX]XLERXLIGLEVKMRKGYVVIRX 8SPSEHHIITP]HMWGLEVKIHFEXXIVMIW FEXXIV]ZSPXEKIPS[IVXLER : XLI 4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIVLEWETVIGLEVKIQSHI6IKYPEVGLEVKMRK WXEVXWEWWSSREWXLIFEXXIV]ZSPXEKIMWEFSZI :8LIQE\MQYQGLEVKMRK GYVVIRXERHXLIRSQMREPFEXXIV]ZSPXEKIGERFIEHNYWXIH*SVJYVXLIVHIXEMPW WII'YWXSQM^MRKFEXXIV]WIXXMRKWSRTEKI Note
-JXLIGLEVKMRKZSPXEKISJXLIFEXXIV]XIVQMREPMWFIPS[ :XLI GLEVKMRKTVSGIWW[MPPRSXWXEVX
+IRIVEPHIWGVMTXMSR
'LETXIV -RXVSHYGXMSR
*IEXYVIW 8LI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIVLEWXLIJSPPS[MRKJIEXYVIW 3YXTYXZSPXEKIEGGSVHMRKXSFEXXIV]VIUYMVIQIRXW VERKI h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
-4 ERH-4 JSVSXLIVQSYRXMRKTSWMXMSRW
*IEXYVIW
'LETXIV -RXVSHYGXMSR
7]WXIQGSRJMKYVEXMSRhI\EQTPIW 8LI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIVMWHIWMKRIHXSFIYWIHMRMRWXEPPEXMSRWXLEX RIIHEWXEFPIERHTS[IVJYPTS[IVWYTTP][MXLFEXXIV]GLEVKIV8LIHVE[MRK FIPS[WLS[WEWIXYTMR[LMGLXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIVKIRIVEXIW XLI('WYTTP]MRE+1(77W]WXIQ
8LIHVE[MRKFIPS[WLS[WERI\EQTPILS[XLMWTS[IVWYTTP]JMXWMRXSER MRWXEPPEXMSR[MXLX[SWIKQIRXW[LMGLMWE+1(77VIUYMVIQIRX)EGLWIKQIRX LEWMXWS[RTS[IVWYTTP]FYXSJXIRXLIX[SWIKQIRXWWLEVIXLIFEXXIV] Segment 1 (primary) MF/HF radio
VHF radio
Segment 2 (duplicated)
Inmarsat C system
SAILOR 6081 Power Supply Unit and Charger + -
VHF radio
SAILOR 6081 Power Supply Unit and Charger + -
Cross link
+
Battery
Inmarsat C System
7]WXIQGSRJMKYVEXMSRhI\EQTPIW
'LETXIV
-RWXEPPEXMSR
8LMWGLETXIVTVSZMHIWMRJSVQEXMSREFSYX d
9RTEGOMRK
d
-RWXEPPMRKXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
9RTEGOMRK 8LIJSPPS[MRKMXIQWEVIMRGPYHIHMRXLIHIPMZIV] d
7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
d
4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV-RWXEPPEXMSRQERYEP XLMWQERYEP
d
-RWXEPPEXMSROMXJSVEHHMRKYTXS7%-036 YRMXW
*SV7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV[MXLEHHMXMSREP7%-036 YRMXW]SYQYWXSVHIVXLIJSPPS[MRKSTXMSR d
-RWXEPPEXMSROMX 4EVXRYQFIV
'LETXIV -RWXEPPEXMSR
-RWXEPPMRKXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV =SYGERQSYRXXLITS[IVWYTTP]MREZIVXMGEPSVLSVM^SRXEPTSWMXMSR;LIR QSYRXIHMREZIVXMGEPTSWMXMSR[MXLXLIGSRRIGXSVTERIPTSMRXMRKHS[R[EVHW XLI4S[IV7YTTP]JYPJMPPW-4MREVIEW[MXLQSVIXLER :ERH-4MRSXLIV EVIEW
;EVRMRK 2IZIVMRWIVXSVVIQSZIETS[IVWYTTP][LMPIMXWTS[IV W[MXGLMWMRXLI3R ` TSWMXMSR1EOIWYVIXLITS[IV W[MXGLMW3JJ 3 JMVWX
Important
8SIRWYVIEHIUYEXIGSSPMRKSJXLI%'('4S[IV7YTTP]ER YRSFWXVYGXIHWTEGISJQMRMQYQ GQQYWXFIQEMRXEMRIH EVSYRHEPPWMHIWSJXLIYRMXI\GITXJSVXLIFSXXSQWMHI
8LI7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIVGERFIQSYRXIHEWEWMRKPI YRMX-J]SYRIIHQSVITS[IVXLERE7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH 'LEVKIVGERHIPMZIVYTKVEHIF]EHHMRKYTXS7%-036 YRMXW*SVHIXEMPW WII9TKVEHISRTEKI
-RWXEPPMRKXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
'LETXIV -RWXEPPEXMSR
3YXPMRIERHHMQIRWMSRW 8LIJSPPS[MRKHVE[MRKWLS[WXLI[EPPQSYRXXVE]SJXLI7%-036 4S[IV 7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIVERHXLI7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP]
7%-036
-RWXEPPMRKXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
'LETXIV -RWXEPPEXMSR
'SRRIGXSVW 'SRRIGXSVSZIVZMI[hI\EQTPI 8LIJSPPS[MRKMQEKIWLS[WEGSRRIGXSVTERIPSJE7%-036 [MXL EHHMXMSREP7%-036 Status indicators (LED)
SAILOR 6080 control data
DC input from SAILOR 6080
15 V DC output
Control interface and alarm connectors
DC output
Battery
-RWXEPPMRKXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
'LETXIV -RWXEPPEXMSR
'SRRIGXSVWSRXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
-RWXEPPMRKXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
'LETXIV -RWXEPPEXMSR
+VSYRHMRK 'SRRIGXGLEWWMWXSWLMT[MXLEGEFPI QMRMQYQ[MVIGVSWWWIGXMSR QQ SVIUYMZEPIRX8LIQE\MQYQGEFPIPIRKXLMWQ 'SRRIGXXLIHVEMR[MVIJSVIEGLGEFPIXSXLIHIWMKREXIH+2(XIVQMREPSV FSPXMXXSXLIQSYRXMRKTPEXIEWWLS[RFIPS[
+VSYRHXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIVXSWLMTJSVI\EQTPIEXXLI WGVI[LSPHMRKXLIQSYRXMRKTPEXIEWWLS[REFSZI
'SRRIGXSVWERHNYQTIVW
d
%'MRTYX SR7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP]
d
('SYXTYX % <
d
\('SYXTYX % <ERH<
d
\('SYXTYX % <ERH<
d
:('SYXTYX % <
d
&EXXIV]GSRRIGXSV <
d
&EXXIV]XIQTIVEXYVIWIRWSV7 <
d
)XLIVRIXMRXIVJEGIJSVQSRMXSVMRKERHGSRXVSP <
d
-RXIVJEGIJSVPIKEG]FEXXIV]TERIPERHVIPE]SYXTYXJSV%'EPEVQ <
d
6IPE]SYXTYXJSVFEXXIV]ZSPXEKIEPEVQ <
d
'''ERH'JSV'SRXVSPHEXE
d
444ERH4JSV('MRTYXJVSQ7%-036
d
'VSWWPMROMRXIVJEGI < [LIRWLEVMRKEFEXXIV]
d
.YQTIV.JSVGVSWWPMROMRXIVJEGI <0-2/43;)6
d
.YQTIV;JSVXIVQMREXMSRSJGVSWWPMRO
-RWXEPPMRKXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
'LETXIV -RWXEPPEXMSR
%'MRTYX SR7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP] 8LI7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP]MW%'TS[IVIH8SGSRRIGXXLI%'MRTYXHSEW JSPPS[W 6IQSZIXLIYWLETIHGYXSYXJSVXLMWMRTYXJVSQXLITVSXIGXMZIPMH 'SRRIGXXLI1EMRWGEFPIXSXLIGSRRIGXSVQEVOIH1%-27%' 1EMRW%' 'SRRIGXSVX]TI
7TVMRKPSEHIHXIVQMREPHYEPVS[GSRRIGXSV
;MVIGVSWWWIGXMSR
9TXS QQ
0
0MRI%'TS[IVGSVH
2
2IYXVEP%'TS[IVGSVH +2(%'TS[IVGSVH
*YWI
%-XMWEGGIWWMFPIJVSQSYXWMHIXLILSYWMRK-XMW TSWMXMSRIHRI\XXSXLISRSJJW[MXGL 8SVIQSZIXLIJYWIXYVRXLIHIZMGIXLEXLSPHWXLI JYWIERHI\XVEGXMX
8LMWGSRRIGXSVMWYWIH[LIREHHMRKE7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP] HYEPVS[ WTVMRKPSEHIHXIVQMREP 8SGSRRIGXXSEHHMXMSREP %'('4S[IV7YTTP] %'MRTYX
-RWXEPPMRKXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
'LETXIV -RWXEPPEXMSR
('SYXTYX % < ('SYXTYX < 'SRRIGXSVX]TI
'EFPIWLSIFSPXIHXSXLIFSEVH
('SYXTYXTPYW
('SYXTYXQMRYW
1MRGLEWWMW
+2(JSVHVEMR[MVI GEFPIWLMIPH
*YWI
3RI %JYWITPEXIJSV('SYXTYXTPYW=SYQYWX YWIXLIJYWI[MXLXLI8LVERI 8LVERITEVX RYQFIV7
\('SYXTYX % <ERH< ('SYXTYX <ERH< 'SRRIGXSVX]TI
7TVMRKPSEHIHXIVQMREP
;MVIGVSWWWIGXMSR
9TXS QQ
('SYXTYXTPYW
('SYXTYXQMRYW
1MRGLEWWMW
+2(JSVHVEMR[MVI GEFPIWLMIPH +2(JSVWEJIX][MVI
*YWIW
8[S %JYWIWSRIJSV('SYXTYXTPYWERHSRI JSV('SYXTYXQMRYWE
E 8LMWSYXTYXMWVEXIHYTXS %XLYW %JYWIWQE]FIYWIH
-RWXEPPMRKXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
'LETXIV -RWXEPPEXMSR
\('SYXTYX % <ERH< ('SYXTYX <ERH< 'SRRIGXSVX]TI
7TVMRKPSEHIHXIVQMREP
;MVIGVSWWWIGXMSR
9TXS QQ
('SYXTYXTPYW
('SYXTYXQMRYW
1MRGLEWWMW
+2(JSVHVEMR[MVI GEFPIWLMIPH +2(JSVWEJIX][MVI
*YWIW
8[S %JYWIWJSV('SYXTYXTPYWERHSRIJSVXLI ('SYXTYXQMRYW
:('SYXTYX % < :('SYXTYX < 'SRRIGXSVX]TI
7TVMRKPSEHIHXIVQMREP
;MVIGVSWWWIGXMSR
9TXS QQ
:('SYXTYXTPYW
:('SYXTYXQMRYW
1MRGLEWWMW
+2(JSVHVEMR[MVI GEFPIWLMIPH +2(JSVWEJIX][MVI
-RWXEPPMRKXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
'LETXIV -RWXEPPEXMSR
&EXXIV]GSRRIGXSV < 8LI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIVGERGLEVKIEGSRRIGXIHFEXXIV] &%88)6= < 'SRRIGXSVX]TI
;MVIXIVQMREP
7GVI[WM^I
QQ
&EXXIV]TPYW
&EXXIV]QMRYW
1MRGLEWWMW
+2(JSVHVEMR[MVI GEFPIWLMIPH
*YWIW
3RI %JYWITPEXIJSVFEXXIV]TPYWERHSRIJSVXLI FEXXIV]QMRYW=SYQYWXYWIXLIJYWI[MXLXLI 8LVERI 8LVERITEVXRYQFIV7
-RGEWISJSZIVPSEHERHSVQMWWMRK%'TS[IVXLITS[IVWYTTP]WIEQPIWWP] HIPMZIVWTS[IVJVSQXLIGSRRIGXIHFEXXIV] 8LIHIJEYPXQE\MQYQGLEVKMRKGYVVIRXMW %8LIHIJEYPXJPSEXZSPXEKIMW :EX '8LIWIZEPYIWHITIRHSRXLIWM^ISJXLIFEXXIV]GLIGOXLI HSGYQIRXEXMSRJSVXLIFEXXIV] 8LIQE\MQYQGLEVKMRKGYVVIRXERHXLIJPSEXZSPXEKIGERFIGSRJMKYVIHJSV JYVXLIVHIXEMPWWII'YWXSQM^MRKFEXXIV]WIXXMRKWSRTEKI
&EXXIV]XIQTIVEXYVIWIRWSV7 < -RSVHIVXSSTXMQM^IXLIFEXXIV]GLEVKMRKTVSJMPIEXIQTIVEXYVIWIRWSVQE]FI QSYRXIHSRXLIFEXXIV]ERHGSRRIGXIHXS< 7-XMWTEVXSJXLIHIPMZIV]ERH EZEMPEFPIEWERSTXMSR=SYGERSVHIVMXJVSQ8LVERI 8LVERI TEVXRYQFIV Note
3RIFEXXIV]XIQTIVEXYVIWIRWSVWIVZIWEPPGVSWWPMROIHYRMXW
-RWXEPPMRKXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
'LETXIV -RWXEPPEXMSR
)XLIVRIXMRXIVJEGIJSVQSRMXSVMRKERHGSRXVSP < 8LIVIMWSRI)XLIVRIX 1& GSRRIGXSVSRXLI GSRRIGXSVTERIP1SRMXSVMRKERHGSRXVSPHEXEEVIEZEMPEFPIEX XLMWMRXIVJEGI )XLIVRIX
;MVIGSPSV
'SRRIGXSVX]TI
6.JIQEPI
4MR
8\
[LMXISVERKI
4MR
8\
SVERKI
4MR
6\
[LMXIKVIIR
4MR
2SXGSRRIGXIH
FPYI
4MR
2SXGSRRIGXIH
[LMXIFPYI
4MR
6\
KVIIR
4MR
2SXGSRRIGXIH
[LMXIFVS[R
4MR
2SXGSRRIGXIH
FVS[R
-RXIVJEGIJSVPIKEG]FEXXIV]TERIPERHVIPE]SYXTYXJSV%'EPEVQ < %XXEGLXLIGEFPIXSXLIGSRRIGXSVQEVOIH<EGGSVHMRKXSXLIWTIGMJMGEXMSRWMR XLIXEFPIFIPS[ %'%0%61< 'SRRIGXSVX]TI
7TVMRKPSEHIHXIVQMREP
;MVIGVSWWWIGXMSR
9TXS QQ
8IVQMREP
:&%8
-RWXEPPMRKXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
'LETXIV -RWXEPPEXMSR
%'%0%61< 8IVQMREP
7,928
8IVQMREP
7,928
8IVQMREP
:&%8
8IVQMREP
'PSWIH[LIRSO %'EPEVQ
8IVQMREP
3TIR[LIRSO %'EPEVQ
8IVQMREP
'SQQSR %'EPEVQ
8IVQMREP
:
8IVQMREP
: +2(JSVHVEMR[MVI GEFPIWLMIPH
8LIGYVVIRXWLS[RMRXLIGSRRIGXIHFEXXIV]TERIPMWXLIWYQSJEPPGYVVIRXWXS SVJVSQXLIFEXXIV] )\EQTPI 4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIVYRMXWWLEVISRIFEXXIV]IEGLYRMX GLEVKIW[MXL %8LIWYQSJEPPGLEVKMRKGYVVIRXWWLS[RMRXLI FEXXIV]TERIP[MPPFI % )\EQTPI 4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIVYRMXWWLEVISRIFEXXIV]SRIYRMX GLEVKIW[MXL %XLISXLIVYRMXHVE[W%8LIWYQSJEPPGLEVKMRK GYVVIRXWWLS[RMRXLIFEXXIV]TERIP[MPPFI %
6IPE]SYXTYXJSVFEXXIV]ZSPXEKIEPEVQ < %REPEVQMWKIRIVEXIHMJXLIFEXXIV]ZSPXEKIMWSYXWMHIXLIEPPS[IHZSPXEKI VERKI
d
(IJEYPXZSPXEKIJSVFEXXIV]EPEVQPS[IVPMQMX :
d
(IJEYPXZSPXEKIJSVFEXXIV]EPEVQYTTIVPMQMX :
-RWXEPPMRKXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
'LETXIV -RWXEPPEXMSR
8LIWIPMQMXWGERFIGLERKIH*SVJYVXLIVHIXEMPWWII'YWXSQM^MRKFEXXIV] WIXXMRKWSRTEKI 'SRRIGXXLIGEFPIXSXLIGSRRIGXSVQEVOIH<EGGSVHMRK XSXLIWTIGMJMGEXMSRWMRXLIXEFPIFIPS[ &EXXIV]%PEVQ 'SRRIGXSVX]TI
7TVMRKPSEHIHXIVQMREP
;MVIGVSWWWIGXMSR
9TXS QQ
8IVQMREP
'PSWIH[LIRSO
8IVQMREP
3TIR[LIRSO
8IVQMREP
'SQQSR
8IVQMREP
+2(JSVHVEMR[MVI GEFPIWLMIPH
'''ERH'JSV'SRXVSPHEXE 8LIWIGSRRIGXSVWEVIYWIHJSVGSRXVSPHEXEJVSQXLIMRWXEPPIH7%-036 YRMXWXSXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV 'SRRIGXMRK7%-036
'SRRIGXSV
7%-036
'
7%-036 7%-036
''
7%-036 7%-036
'''
7%-036 7%-036
''''
*SVMRWXVYGXMSRWLS[XSGSRRIGXGSRXVSPHEXEJVSQEREHHMXMSREP7%-036 [LIRYTKVEHMRKWII9TKVEHMRK[MXLEHHMXMSREP7%-036 YRMXWSR TEKI
-RWXEPPMRKXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
'LETXIV -RWXEPPEXMSR
444ERH4JSV('MRTYXJVSQ7%-036 8LIWIGSRRIGXSVWEVIYWIHJSV('MRTYXJVSQXLIMRWXEPPIH7%-036 YRMXW XSXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV 'SRRIGXMRK7%-036
'SRRIGXSV
7%-036
4
7%-036 7%-036
44
7%-036 7%-036
444
7%-036 7%-036
4444
*SVMRWXVYGXMSRWLS[XSGSRRIGX('MRTYXJVSQEREHHMXMSREP7%-036 [LIRYTKVEHMRKWII9TKVEHMRK[MXLEHHMXMSREP7%-036 YRMXWSR TEKI
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
=SYQE]EPWSYWI)XLIVRIXGEFPIFYXXLIRXLIGSPSVGSHMRK[MPPRSXQEXGLXLI XI\XSRXLITVMRXFSEVH*SV'%2C,ERH'%2C0YWIEX[MWXIHTEMV
-RWXEPPMRKXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
'LETXIV -RWXEPPEXMSR
'SRRIGXXLIGEFPIXSXLIGSRRIGXSVQEVOIH< SJIEGLTS[IVWYTTP]EGGSVHMRK XSXLIWTIGMJMGEXMSRWMRXLIXEFPIFIPS[ 'VSWWPMRO '%2FYWGEFPI 'SRRIGXSVX]TI
7TVMRKPSEHIHXIVQMREP
;MVIGVSWWWIGXMSR
9TXS QQ
6IH
'%2 :
&PEGO
'%2 :
;LMXI
'%2C,
&PYI
'%2C0
.YQTIV.JSVGVSWWPMROMRXIVJEGI <0-2/43;)6 8LINYQTIV.LEWX[SJYRGXMSRW )REFPMRKTS[IVXSXLI<0-2/ GVSWWPMRO GSRRIGXMSR -HIRXMJ]MRKXLIHIJEYPXTS[IVWYTTP]EWXLITS[IVWYTTP]MRXLITVMQEV] WIKQIRX -RSVHIVXSTVIZIRXKVSYRHPSSTWXLI<0-2/43;)6MRXIVJEGIMWMWSPEXIH*SV XLIMRXIVJEGIXS[SVOTVSTIVP]TPEGIXLINYQTIV.MRSRITS[IVWYTTP]MR XLITVMQEV]WIKQIRX Important
1SYRXXLINYQTIV.SRSRITS[IVWYTTP]hERHSRP]32) TS[IVWYTTP]MRXLITVMQEV]WIKQIRX
8LMW[MPPFVIEOXLIMWSPEXMSRSRXLIYRMXERHTVSZMHIE:('JSVXLIMRXIVJEGI 8LMWWYTTP]MWJYWIHF]EREYXSVIWIXJYWI[MXLEQE\MQYQFVIEOGYVVIRXSJ Q% 8LINYQTIV.QEVOWEPWSXLIHIJEYPXTS[IVWYTTP]MRXLITVMQEV]WIKQIRX 8LI7%-036 GERTVSZMHIZEVMSYWWXEXYWERHEPEVQMRJSVQEXMSR8SJSV[EVH EPEVQWGSVVIGXP]XSXLIGSRRIGXIHHIZMGIW 1*,*:,*-RQEVWEX'IXG MXMW MQTSVXERXXLEXIEGL7%-036 MWGSRJMKYVIHGSVVIGXP][MXLMRJSVQEXMSR
-RWXEPPMRKXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
'LETXIV -RWXEPPEXMSR
EFSYXXLIGSRRIGXIHIUYMTQIRX*SVGSRJMKYVEXMSRW[MXLSRI7%-036 MR SRIWIKQIRXXLMWGERFIHSRI[MXLXLI<0-2/NYQTIV. d
.YQTIV.QSYRXIH 8LI7%-036 HVMZIWEPPIUYMTQIRXMRXLI TVMQEV]WIKQIRX
d
.YQTIV.RSXQSYRXIH 8LI7%-036 HVMZIWEPPIUYMTQIRXMRXLI HYTPMGEXIHWIKQIRX
-RGSRJMKYVEXMSRW[MXLWIZIVEP7%-036 YRMXWMRSRIWIKQIRX]SYQYWX GSRJMKYVIXLIMRHMZMHYEP7%-036 YRMXW[MXLEWSJX[EVIXSSP*SVJYVXLIV HIXEMPWWII7IXYTSJWIZIVEP7%-036 YRMXWMREWIKQIRXSRTEKI
.YQTIV;JSVXIVQMREXMSRSJGVSWWPMRO 8IVQMREXIXLIGVSWWPMRO[MXLENYQTIVMR;MRXLIJMVWXERHXLIPEWX4S[IV 7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
Cross link
Cross link T-connector
Cross link T-connector
1MGVS21)% 8GSRRIGXSV 4EVXRYQFIV 22)%1MGVS(IZMGI'EFPI Q 4EVXRYQFIV
-RWXEPPMRKXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
'LETXIV -RWXEPPEXMSR
'SRJMKYVMRKQYPXMTPI7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP]YRMXW )\EQTPI 7%-036 [MXLSYXWLEVMRKXLIFEXXIV] RSGVSWWPMRO Segment 1 (primary) MF/HF radio
VHF radio
Segment 2 (duplicated)
Inmarsat C system
VHF radio
SAILOR 6081 Power Supply Unit and Charger J500 W503 + -
+
InmarsatC System
SAILOR 6081 Power Supply Unit and Charger J500 W503 + -
+
-
Battery
Battery
)\EQTPI 7%-036 WLEVISRIFEXXIV] GVSWWPMRO Segment 1 (primary) MF/HF radio
VHF radio
Segment 2 (duplicated)
Inmarsat C system
SAILOR 6081 Power Supply Unit and Charger J500 W503 + -
VHF radio
SAILOR 6081 Power Supply Unit and Charger J500 W503 + -
Cross link
+
InmarsatC System
Battery
-RWXEPPMRKXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
'LETXIV -RWXEPPEXMSR
)\EQTPI 7%-036 WLEVMRKEFEXXIV] Segment 2 (duplicated)
Segment 1 (primary) VHF radio
Inmarsat C system
SAILOR 6081 Power Supply Unit and Charger J500 W503 + -
MF/HF radio SAILOR 6081 Power Supply Unit and Charger J500 W503 + -
Cross link
+
MF/HF radio
Battery
Important
VHF radio
InmarsatC System
SAILOR 6081 Power Supply Unit and Charger J500 W503 + -
+
Battery
*YVXLIVGSRJMKYVEXMSRMWRIIHIHEWXLIVIMWQSVIXLERSRI 7%-036 MRSRIWIKQIRX RSNYQTIVMR. 6IEH GEVIJYPP]XLIJSPPS[MRKWIGXMSR
7IXYTSJWIZIVEP7%-036 YRMXWMREWIKQIRX =SYQYWXWIXYTIEGL7%-036 [MXLXLIJSPPS[MRKMRJSVQEXMSRWSXLEXIEGL 4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIVGERTVSZMHIEPEVQWIXGXSXLIVIPIZERX GSRRIGXIHIUYMTQIRX d
-WXLI 7%-036 TEVXSJXLITVMQEV]SVHYTPMGEXIHWIKQIRX#
d
;LMGLHIZMGIW 1*,*:,*-RQEVWEXQMRM' HSIWXLI7%-036 TS[IV#
3RGIGSVVIGXP]WIXYTXLIEPEVQWERHWXEXYWMRJSVQEXMSRJVSQXLI7%-036 EVIGSVVIGXP]HMWTPE]IHMRXLIVIWTIGXMZIW]WXIQ
-RWXEPPMRKXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
'LETXIV -RWXEPPEXMSR
)\EQTPI 7%-036 EPPWLEVMRKEFEXXIV] Segment 1 (primary) VHF radio
Inmarsat C system
SAILOR 6081 Power Supply Unit and Charger J500 W503 + -
Segment 2 (duplicated)
MF/HF radio
VHF radio
SAILOR 6081 Power Supply Unit and Charger J500 W503 + -
Inmarsat C system
SAILOR 6081 Power Supply Unit and Charger J500 W503 + -
Cross link
MF/HF radio SAILOR 6081 Power Supply Unit and Charger J500 W503 +
Cross link
+
Battery
Important
*YVXLIVGSRJMKYVEXMSRMWRIIHIHEWXLIVIMWQSVIXLERSRI 7%-036 MRSRIWIKQIRX RSNYQTIVMR. 6IEH GEVIJYPP]7IXYTSJWIZIVEP7%-036 YRMXWMREWIKQIRXSR TEKI
-RWXEPPMRKXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
'LETXIV -RWXEPPEXMSR
'SRRIGXSVWSR7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP]
%'MRTYX
%' EPEVQ 2SXYWIH
('
('
&EXXIV]
2SXYWIH 2SXYWIH
8LIJSPPS[MRKGSRRIGXSVWSRXLI7%-036 EVIYWIH d
%'MRTYX
d
&PEGOTMRTPYKJSVGSRXVSPHEXE
d
3RI('SYX ('SV('
8LIJSPPS[MRKGSRRIGXSVWSRXLI7%-036 EVIRSXYWIH d
%'EPEVQ
d
&EXXIV]
d
3RI('SYX ('SV('
Note
8LIX[S %JYWIWSJXLI7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP]EVIRSXYWIHMJ XLI7%-036 MWTEVXSJE7%-036 MRWXEPPEXMSR
-RWXEPPMRKXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
'LETXIV
7IVZMGIERHVITEMV
8LI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIVMWHIWMKRIHXSSTIVEXI[MXLSYXTVIZIRXMZI QEMRXIRERGI 6ITEMVSVVITEMVEXXIQTXWTIVJSVQIHF]YRUYEPMJMIHTIVWSRRIPQE]PMQMXXLI [EVVERX]8LI[EVVERX]SRXLIW]WXIQMWHIJMRIHERHSYXPMRIHF]XLI HMWXVMFYXSVXLEXWYTTPMIHXLI4S[IV7YTTP]
'SRXEGXJSVWYTTSVX *SVWYTTSVXGSRXEGXXLIHMWXVMFYXSVXLEXWYTTPMIHXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH 'LEVKIV *SVJYVXLIVMRJSVQEXMSRSR[EVVERX]ERHWIVZMGI]SYQE]EPWSYWIXLI 8LVERI 8LVERILSQITEKIEX[[[XLVERIGSQ
6ITEMVERHWIVZMGMRK 8LIHIZMGIHSIWRSXVIUYMVIQEMRXIRERGIERHEHNYWXQIRXETEVXJVSQVSYXMRI GLIGOMRKSJMXWMRWXEPPEXMSR ;EVRMRK 2IZIVMRWIVXSVVIQSZIETS[IVWYTTP][LMPIMXWTS[IV W[MXGLMWMRXLI3R ` TSWMXMSR1EOIWYVIXLITS[IV W[MXGLMW3JJ 3 JMVWX
Important
-RGEWISJQEPJYRGXMSRHSRSXSTIRXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH 'LEVKIVFYXWIRHMXMRJSVVITEMV*SVMRJSVQEXMSRLS[XS TVSGIIHWII6IXYVRMRKYRMXWJSVVITEMVSRTEKI
'LETXIV 7IVZMGIERHVITEMV
7XEXYWMRHMGEXSVW 0)( 8LIWXEXYW0)(WEVISRXLIGSRRIGXSVTERIPYRHIVXLIFPEGOGSZIV
+IRIVEPWXEXYW0)( d
)VVSVJVIISTIVEXMSR 8LIKVIIR0)(MWGSRWXERXP]PMX
d
3TIVEXMSR[MXLIVVSVW 3RIJPEWLSJXLIKVIIR0)( %'EPEVQ 8[SJPEWLIWSJXLIKVIIR0)( &EXXIV]EPEVQ 8LVIIJPEWLIWSJXLIKVIIR0)( (IZMGIIVVSV
&EXXIV]WXEXYW0)( d
&EXXIV]MWJYPP]GLEVKIH 8LIKVIIR0)(MWGSRWXERXP]PMX
d
&EXXIV]MWFIMRKTVIGLEVKIH 3RIJPEWLSJXLIKVIIR0)(
d
&EXXIV]MWFIMRKGLEVKIH 8[SJPEWLIWSJXLIKVIIR0)(
d
&EXXIV]HIPMZIVWTS[IV 8LVIIJPEWLIWSJXLIKVIIR0)(
d
&EXXIV]RSXHIXIGXIH 8LI0)(MWSJJ
)XLIVRIXWXEXYW0)( d
)VVSVJVIISTIVEXMSR 8LIKVIIR0)(MWGSRWXERXP]PMX
d
2S)XLIVRIXGSRRIGXMSR 8LI0)(MWSJJ
d
3TIVEXMSR[MXLIVVSVW 3RIJPEWLSJXLIKVIIR0)(
<0-2/WXEXYW0)(
d
%GXMZI)VVSVJVIISTIVEXMSR 8LIKVIIR0)(MWGSRWXERXP]PMX
d
2S<0MRO 8LI0)(MWSJJ
d
3TIVEXMSR[MXLIVVSVW 3RIJPEWLSJXLIKVIIR0)(
7XEXYWMRHMGEXSVW 0)(
'LETXIV 7IVZMGIERHVITEMV
%PEVQQIWWEKIW 8LIJSPPS[MRKEPEVQQIWWEKIWGERFIHMWTPE]IHMRXLI1IWWEKI8IVQMREP 8MXPI
(IWGVMTXMSR
%'TS[IVWYTTP]EPEVQ
%TS[IVSYXEKILEWSGGYVVIH
&EXXIV]EPEVQ
8LIFEXXIV]ZSPXEKIMWEFSZIXLIGSRJMKYVIHPMQMX SJ WIXZEPYI :
&EXXIV]EPEVQ
8LIFEXXIV]ZSPXEKIMWFIPS[XLIGSRJMKYVIHPMQMX SJ WIXZEPYI :
&EXXIV]EPEVQ
8LIFEXXIV]XIQTIVEXYVIMWEFSZIXLIGSRJMKYVIH PMQMXSJ WIXZEPYI '
&EXXIV]EPEVQ
8LIFEXXIV]XIQTIVEXYVIMWFIPS[XLIGSRJMKYVIH PMQMXSJ WIXZEPYI '
)\XIVREPEPEVQ
%9<EPEVQ
)\XIVREPEPEVQ
%9<EPEVQ
%'TS[IVWYTTP]EPEVQ
4S[IVWYTTP]GVSWWPMROIVVSV
%PEVQQIWWEKIW
'LETXIV 7IVZMGIERHVITEMV
)\GLERKMRKXLIJYWIW 8LI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIVLEWWITEVEXIP]JYWIH('SYXTYXW8S I\GLERKIEJYWIJSVSRISJXLI('SYXTYXWHSEWJSPPS[W 1MRMQM^IXLIGYVVIRXHVE[RF]W[MXGLMRKSJJEWQER]HIZMGIWEWTSWWMFPI ;EVRMRK 9WIMRWYPEXIHXSSPWERHTE]EXXIRXMSRRSXXSMRXVSHYGI EGGMHIRXEPP]EWLSVXGMVGYMXEXXLIFEXXIV]XIVQMREPW 0SGEXIXLIJYWIXSFII\GLERKIHSRXLIGSRRIGXSVTERIP 8EOISYXXLIFPS[RJYWIERHTYXMRERI[SJXLIWEQIWM^I
'SRRIGXSV
*YWIX]TI
*YWIWM^I
<<
%83FPEHI
%
4444
%83FPEHI
%
<<
%83FPEHI
%
<
7
%
<
7
%
)\GLERKMRKXLIJYWIW
'LETXIV 7IVZMGIERHVITEMV
8LI4S[IV7YTTP]LEWEJYWIXSWIGYVIXLI%'MRTYX
*YWI%'MRTYX 2SXYWIH
)\GLERKMRKXLI%'JYWI 8SI\GLERKIXLI%'JYWIHSEWJSPPS[W 0SGEXIXLIJYWIMXMWEGGIWWMFPIJVSQSYXWMHIXLILSYWMRK-XMWTSWMXMSRIH RI\XXSXLISRSJJW[MXGL 8YVRXLIJYWILSPHIVERHI\XVEGXMX 8EOISYXXLISPHJYWIERHMRWIVXERI[SRI X]TI \ QQ %8 -RWIVXERHJEWXIRXLIJYWILSPHIV 'EYXMSR
-JXLI%'JYWIMWFPS[RHMVIGXP]EJXIVFIMRK VITPEGIHXLIVIQMKLXFIEGVMXMGEPJEYPXMRXLI 4S[IV7YTTP]6IXYVRXLIYRMXJSVVITEMV
)\GLERKMRKXLIJYWIW
'LETXIV 7IVZMGIERHVITEMV
6IXYVRMRKYRMXWJSVVITEMV 7LSYPH]SYV7%-036)<4036)68LVERI 8LVERITVSHYGXJEMPTPIEWIGSRXEGX ]SYVHIEPIVSVMRWXEPPIVSVXLIRIEVIWX8LVERI 8LVERITEVXRIV=SY[MPPJMRH XLITEVXRIVHIXEMPWSR[[[XLVERIGSQ[LIVI]SYEPWSJMRHXLI8LVERI 8LVERI7IPJ7IVZMGI'IRXIV[IFTSVXEP[LMGLQE]LIPT]SYWSPZMRKXLI TVSFPIQ =SYVHIEPIVMRWXEPPIVSV8LVERI 8LVERITEVXRIV[MPPEWWMWX]SY[LIXLIVXLI RIIHMWYWIVXVEMRMRKXIGLRMGEPWYTTSVX4-2GSHIWEVVERKMRKSRWMXIVITEMV SVWIRHMRKXLITVSHYGXJSVVITEMV =SYVHIEPIVMRWXEPPIVSV8LVERI 8LVERITEVXRIV[MPPEPWSXEOIGEVISJER] [EVVERX]MWWYI
6ITEGOMRKJSVWLMTQIRX 8LIWLMTTMRKGEVXSRLEWFIIRGEVIJYPP]HIWMKRIHXSTVSXIGXXLI4S[IV7YTTP] ERHMXWEGGIWWSVMIWHYVMRKWLMTQIRX8LMWGEVXSRERHMXWEWWSGMEXIHTEGOMRK QEXIVMEPWLSYPHFIYWIH[LIRVITEGOMRKJSVWLMTQIRX%XXEGLEXEKMRHMGEXMRK XLIX]TISJWIVZMGIVIUYMVIHVIXYVREHHVIWWTEVXRYQFIVERHJYPPWIVMEP RYQFIV1EVOXLIGEVXSR*6%+-0)XSIRWYVIGEVIJYPLERHPMRK Note
'SVVIGXWLMTQIRXMWXLIGYWXSQIVtWS[RVIWTSRWMFMPMX]
-JXLISVMKMREPWLMTTMRKGEVXSRMWRSXEZEMPEFPIXLIJSPPS[MRKKIRIVEP MRWXVYGXMSRWWLSYPHFIYWIHJSVVITEGOMRK[MXLGSQQIVGMEPP]EZEMPEFPI QEXIVMEP ;VETXLIHIJIGXMZIYRMXMRLIEZ]TETIVSVTPEWXMG%XXEGLEXEKMRHMGEXMRK XLIX]TISJWIVZMGIVIUYMVIHVIXYVREHHVIWWTEVXRYQFIVERHJYPPWIVMEP RYQFIV 9WIEWXVSRKWLMTTMRKGSRXEMRIVIKEHSYFPI[EPPIHGEVXSRSJOKXIWX QEXIVMEP
6IXYVRMRKYRMXWJSVVITEMV
'LETXIV 7IVZMGIERHVITEMV
4VSXIGXXLIYRMX[MXLGEVHFSEVHERHMRWIVXEGQXSGQPE]IVSJWLSGO EFWSVFMRKQEXIVMEPFIX[IIREPPWYVJEGIWSJXLIIUYMTQIRXERHXLIWMHIWSJ XLIGSRXEMRIV 7IEPXLIWLMTTMRKGSRXEMRIVWIGYVIP] 1EVOXLIWLMTTMRKGSRXEMRIV*6%+-0)XSIRWYVIGEVIJYPLERHPMRK *EMPYVIXSHSWSQE]MRZEPMHEXIXLI[EVVERX]
6IXYVRMRKYRMXWJSVVITEMV
'LETXIV 7IVZMGIERHVITEMV
6IXYVRMRKYRMXWJSVVITEMV
'LETXIV
'YWXSQM^MRKFEXXIV]WIXXMRKW
&EXXIV]WIXXMRKW 8SGYWXSQM^IWSQITEVEQIXIVWERHEPEVQXLVIWLSPHWYWIXLI7%-036 1IWWEKI8IVQMREPSVEWSJX[EVIXSSP8LIGSQQYRMGEXMSRMWZMEXLI)XLIVRIX MRXIVJEGI8LIJSPPS[MRKTEVEQIXIVWGERFIGLERKIH 4EVEQIXIV
(IJEYPXZEPYI
%PPS[IHVERKI
1E\MQYQGLEVKMRKGYVVIRXE
%
%h %
1E\MQYQGLEVKMRKZSPXEKIF
:
:h :
*PSEXZSPXEKIF
:
:h :
1MRFEXXIV]EPEVQZSPXEKI
:
:h :
1E\FEXXIV]EPEVQZSPXEKI
:
:h :
6IGLEVKIZSPXEKIG
:
:h :
1MREPEVQXIQTIVEXYVIH
'
h '
1E\EPEVQXIQTIVEXYVIH
'
h '
E 8LIGLEVKMRKGYVVIRXQE]FIPS[IVHITIRHMRKSRXLIGYVVIRXP] EZEMPEFPISYXTYXTS[IV F %PPZSPXEKIWEX '-JEXIQTIVEXYVIWIRWSVMWQSYRXIHXLI ZSPXEKIWEVIGSQTIRWEXIH[MXLQ:' G -JXLIVIGLEVKIZSPXEKIMWLMKLIVXLERXLIJPSEXZSPXEKIVIGLEVKMRK WXEVXWSRP][LIRXLIFEXXIV]ZSPXEKIVIEGLIWXLI6IGLEVKIZSPXEKI PIZIP H 3RP]VIPIZERXMJEFEXXIV]XIQTIVEXYVIWIRWSVMWMRWXEPPIH
'LETXIV 'YWXSQM^MRKFEXXIV]WIXXMRKW
'LERKMRKFEXXIV]WIXXMRKW Note
=SYRIIHXLITEWW[SVHJSVXLI1IWWEKI8IVQMREPXSZMI[ERH IHMXXLIFEXXIV]WIXXMRKW
:MI[MRKFEXXIV]WIXXMRKW =SYGERZMI[XLIFEXXIV]WIXXMRKWMRXLI7%-036 1IWWEKI8IVQMREP9WI XLIXSYGLWGVIIRXSIRXIVXLIQIRY7]WXIQXLIR4S[IV
8SHMWTPE]XLIWGVIIRJSVIHMXMRKFEXXIV]WIXXMRKWTVIWW&EXXIV]WIXXMRKWSV ER][LIVIIPWIMRXLI[MRHS[4S[IVWYTTP]
8LIVIGLEVKIZSPXEKIMWRSXHMWTPE]IHMRXLI7%-0361IWWEKI8IVQMREP
'LERKMRKFEXXIV]WIXXMRKW
'LETXIV 'YWXSQM^MRKFEXXIV]WIXXMRKW
)HMXMRKFEXXIV]WIXXMRKW )HMXXLIFEXXIV]WIXXMRKWF]YWMRKXLIXSYGLWGVIIR
8LIVIGLEVKIZSPXEKIGERRSXFIWIXMRXLI7%-0361IWWEKI8IVQMREP
'LERKMRKFEXXIV]WIXXMRKW
'LETXIV 'YWXSQM^MRKFEXXIV]WIXXMRKW
'LERKMRKFEXXIV]WIXXMRKW
%TTIRHM\%
8IGLRMGEPWTIGMJMGEXMSRW
%
7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV 8LIJSPPS[MRKXEFPIWLS[WXLIIPIGXVMGEPERHIRZMVSRQIRXEPWTIGMJMGEXMSRWSJ XLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV 7TIGMJMGEXMSRW JSVSYXTYX TS[IV
7%-036
7%-036 7%-036
7%-036 7%-036
7%-036 7%-036
h :%' GSRXMRYSYW TIEO QMR
; ;
; ;
; ;
; ;
h :%' GSRXMRYSYW TIEO QMR
; ;
; ;
; ;
; ;
7TIGMJMGEXMSRW
:EPYI
('SYXTYX RSQMREP
:SVEGGSVHMRKXSFEXXIV] VIUYMVIQIRXW
%PEVQ
-RGEWISJ%'TS[IVJEMPYVISVMJFEXXIV] TS[IVMWSYXWMHIEPPS[IHVERKI
-4VEXMRKMRLMKLZSPXEKI " :
-4 QSYRXIHZIVXMGEPP]SR[EPP
-4VEXMRKMRSXLIVEVIEW
-4 QSYRXIHZIVXMGEPP]SR[EPP
%TTIRHM\% 8IGLRMGEPWTIGMJMGEXMSRW
7TIGMJMGEXMSRW
:EPYI
3TIVEXMRKXIQTIVEXYVI
XS '
7XSVEKIXIQTIVEXYVI
XS '
'SSPMRK
2SJSVGIHGSSPMRKVIUYMVIH
7YVZMZEPXIQTIVEXYVI TS[IVSR
XS '
(MQIRWMSRW 7%-036 7%-036 7%-036 7%-036 7%-036 7%-036 7%-036
, QQ0 QQ; QQ , QQ0 QQ; QQ , QQ0 QQ; QQ , QQ0 QQ; QQ
;IMKLX
7%-036 7%-036 7%-036 7%-036 7%-036 7%-036 7%-036
OK OK OK OK
'SQTEWWWEJIHMWXERGI
GQ
7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV
%TTIRHM\% 8IGLRMGEPWTIGMJMGEXMSRW
7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP] 8LIJSPPS[MRKXEFPIWLS[WXLIIPIGXVMGEPERHIRZMVSRQIRXEPWTIGMJMGEXMSRWSJ XLI4S[IV7YTTP] 7TIGMJMGEXMSRW
:EPYI
3YXTYXTS[IVEX :%' :%'
;GSRXMRYSYW ;TIEO QMR
3YXTYXTS[IVEX :%' :%'
;GSRXMRYSYW ;TIEO QMR
('SYXTYX RSQMREP [MXLSYXGSRXVSPMJRSX YWIHMR7%-036 [MXLYTXS7%-036
:('EX % :('EX % :('EX %
%'MRTYXZSPXEKI
:%'RSQMREP :%'STIVEXMRK
%PEVQMRGEWISJ
%'TS[IVJEMPYVI
-4VEXMRKMRLMKLZSPXEKI " :
-4 <
-4VEXMRKMRSXLIVEVIEW
-4 <
-4VEXMRK[LIRQSYRXIHZIVXMGEPP]SRE[EPP
-4 <
3TIVEXMRKXIQTIVEXYVI
XS '
7XSVEKIXIQTIVEXYVI
XS '
'SSPMRK
2SJSVGIHGSSPMRK VIUYMVIH
7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP]
%TTIRHM\% 8IGLRMGEPWTIGMJMGEXMSRW
7TIGMJMGEXMSRW
:EPYI
7YVZMZEPXIQTIVEXYVI TS[IVSR
XS '
(MQIRWMSRW
, QQ0 QQ ; QQ
;IMKLX
%TTVS\OK
'SQTEWWWEJIHMWXERGI
GQ
7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP]
%TTIRHM\&
9TKVEHI
&
9TKVEHISZIVZMI[ 9TKVEHMRKXSSV ;TIEOSYXTYXTS[IV =SYGERYTKVEHIXLI7%-036 4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIVSRWMXI[MXL YTXS4S[IV7YTTP]YRMXWXSMRGVIEWIXLI('TS[IVSYXTYXYTXS ; 8LI YTKVEHIGERFIQEHISRWMXIF]XVEMRIHWIVZMGITIVWSRRIP 1SHIP
4IEOSYXTYXTS[IV
9TKVEHIOMX
7%-036
1E\ ;
h
7%-036 7%-036
1E\ ;
7%-036 7%-036
1E\ ;
-RGPYHIH 7TEVIOMXWGERFI SVHIVIH 7
7%-036 7%-036
1E\ ;
2SXMRGPYHIH3VHIV RYQFIV
%TTIRHM\& 9TKVEHI 8LIJSPPS[MRKMQEKIWLS[WE7%-036 [MXL7%-036 GSRRIGXIHERH ERSTIRGSRRIGXSVTERIP
;LIRYTKVEHMRK]SYQYWXGSRRIGX 1EMRW%'JVSQEHHMXMSREP7%-036 XS1EMRW%'SRXLISVMKMREPTS[IV WYTTP] 'SRXVSPHEXEGSRRIGXSVJVSQ7%-036 XSXLIGSRRIGXSVMRXLI7%-036 QEVOIH''SV' ('SYXTYXJVSQ7%-036 XSXLIGSRRIGXSVMRXLI7%-036 QEVOIH 44SV4 *SVEHIXEMPIHHIWGVMTXMSRLS[XSTVSGIIHWII9TKVEHMRK7%-036 [MXL 7%-036 HIXEMPIH SRTEKI
*SVIEW]EGGIWW]SYQE]GSRRIGXXLIMRGSQMRK%'4S[IVXSXLIYTTIVQSWXYRMX
9TKVEHISZIVZMI[
%TTIRHM\& 9TKVEHI
9TKVEHMRKE7%-036 [MXL7%-036
9TKVEHISZIVZMI[
%TTIRHM\& 9TKVEHI
9TKVEHMRKE7%-036 [MXL7%-036
9TKVEHISZIVZMI[
%TTIRHM\& 9TKVEHI
9TKVEHMRKE7%-036 [MXL7%-036 SAILOR 6080 AC Power
Mains AC
C 1
DC1
DC2
C 1
DC1
DC2
DC1
DC2
DC1
DC2
SAILOR 6080 Mains AC
SAILOR 6080 Mains AC
SAILOR 6081 SAILOR 6080 Mains AC
Connector panel
C 1
C1 C2
P4
P3
P2
P1
C3 C4
9TKVEHISZIVZMI[
%TTIRHM\& 9TKVEHI
'SRRIGXSVWMRZSPZIH
9TKVEHISZIVZMI[
%TTIRHM\& 9TKVEHI
9TKVEHMRK[MXLEHHMXMSREP7%-036 YRMXW 8LIJSPPS[MRK HVE[MRKWLS[WXLI 7%-036 4S[IV 7YTTP]ERHXLI TSWMXMSRSJXLI QSYRXMRKLSPIW
9TKVEHMRK7%-036 [MXL7%-036 HIXEMPIH 8SEHH7%-036 HSEW JSPPS[W 7[MXGLSJJXLI4S[IV 7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV (MWGSRRIGXXLIFEXXIV] 6IQSZIXLIQSYRXMRK FSPXWLSPHMRKXLITS[IV WYTTP]SRXLI[EPP QSYRXXVE] 4VITEVI7%-036 E 8EOISJJXLITVSXIGXMZI
9TKVEHMRK[MXLEHHMXMSREP7%-036 YRMXW
%TTIRHM\& 9TKVEHI PMH F 'SRRIGXXLIGEFPIJSV1EMRW%'JSV7%-036 4VITEVI7%-036 E 8EOISJJXLITVSXIGXMZIPMH F %XXEGLFPEGO('TS[IVGEFPI QQPIRKXL XS(' G %XXEGLFPEGOJPEXGEFPI QQPIRKXL XSGSRXVSPHEXETPYKMR7%-036 'SRRIGXXLI7%-036 YRMXWXS7%-036 E 4YXXLI7%-036 MRTPEGI F 'SRRIGX%'GEFPIWEWWLS[RMRXLIMPPYWXVEXMSR G 'SRRIGX('JVSQ7%-036 XS4MR7%-036 H 'SRRIGXGSRXVSPHEXEJVSQ7%-036 XS'MR7%-036 %XXEGLXLITVSXIGXMZIPMHW[LIREPPGEFPIWEVIGSRRIGXIH *EWXIRXLI7%-036 YRMXXSXLI[EPPQSYRXXVE][MXLXLIQSYRXMRK FSPXW 1\ QQ Important
8SIRWYVIEHIUYEXIGSSPMRKSJXLI%'('4S[IV7YTTPMIW ERYRSFWXVYGXIHWTEGISJQMRMQYQ GQQYWXFI QEMRXEMRIHEVSYRHEPPWMHIWSJXLIKVSYTSJYRMXW I\GITX FIX[IIRXLIYRMXWERHXLIFSXXSQWMHI
9TKVEHMRK[MXLEHHMXMSREP7%-036 YRMXW
%TTIRHM\& 9TKVEHI
9TKVEHMRK7%-036 [MXL7%-036 YRMXW HIXEMPIH 8SEHH7%-036 TVSGIIHEWHIWGVMFIHMR9TKVEHMRK7%-036 [MXL 7%-036 HIXEMPIH SRTEKI 6ITIEXWXITWXSJVSQ XLITVIZMSYWTEKI Note
7XIEH]XLI YTTIV7%-036 QERYEPP] YRXMPXLI EHHMXMSREP 7%-036 MW TPEGIHSRXST ERHXLI QSYRXMRKFSPXW EVIMRWIVXIHERH JEWXIRIH
'SRRIGX7%-036 XS 7%-036 E 4YXXLI7%-036 MRTPEGI F 'SRRIGX%'GEFPIJVSQ7%-036 XS7%-036 G 'SRRIGX('JVSQ7%-036 XS4MR7%-036 H 'SRRIGXGSRXVSPHEXEJVSQ7%-036 XS'MR7%-036 %XXEGLXLITVSXIGXMZIPMHW[LIREPPGEFPIWEVIGSRRIGXIH *EWXIREPPYRMXWXSXLI[EPPQSYRXXVE][MXLXLIQSYRXMRKFSPXW 1\ QQ Important
8SIRWYVIEHIUYEXIGSSPMRKSJXLI%'('4S[IV7YTTPMIW ERYRSFWXVYGXIHWTEGISJQMRMQYQ GQQYWXFI QEMRXEMRIHEVSYRHEPPWMHIWSJXLIKVSYTSJYRMXW I\GITX FIX[IIRXLIYRMXWERHXLIFSXXSQWMHI
9TKVEHMRK[MXLEHHMXMSREP7%-036 YRMXW
%TTIRHM\& 9TKVEHI
9TKVEHMRK7%-036 [MXL7%-036 YRMXW HIXEMPIH Note
;LIREHHMRK7%-036 ]SYRIIHXLIMRWXEPPEXMSROMX [LMGLMRGPYHIWEQSYRXMRKFVEGOIXERHPSRKQSYRXMRKFSPXW
9TKVEHMRK[MXLEHHMXMSREP7%-036 YRMXW
%TTIRHM\& 9TKVEHI
9TKVEHMRK[MXLEHHMXMSREP7%-036 YRMXW
%TTIRHM\& 9TKVEHI 8SEHH7%-036 HSEW JSPPS[W 7[MXGLSJJXLI4S[IV 7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIV (MWGSRRIGXXLIFEXXIV] 6IQSZIXLIQSYRXMRK FSPXWLSPHMRKXLITS[IV WYTTP]SRXLI[EPP QSYRXXVE] 1SYRXXLIPSRKFSPXW JVSQXLIMRWXEPPEXMSROMX MRXLI[EPPQSYRXXVE] 4VITEVI7%-036 E 8EOISJJXLITVSXIGXMZI PMH F 'SRRIGXXLIGEFPIJSV 1EMRW%'JSV7%-036 4VITEVIXLI7%-036 YRMXW E 8EOISJJXLITVSXIGXMZIPMH F %XXEGLFPEGO('TS[IVGEFPI QQPIRKXL XS(' G %XXEGLFPEGOJPEXGEFPI QQPIRKXL XSGSRXVSPHEXETPYKMR7%-036 H 'SRRIGXXLIGEFPIJSV1EMRW%'JSVXLIRI\X7%-036 WII MPPYWXVEXMSR 'SRRIGXXLI7%-036 YRMXWXS7%-036 E 4YXEPP7%-036 YRMXWMRTPEGI F %XXEGLXLIQSYRXMRKFVEGOIXERHJEWXIRMX[MXLXLIGETRYXW F 'SRRIGX%'GEFPIJSV7%-036 YRMXWEWWLS[RMRXLIMPPYWXVEXMSR G 'SRRIGX('JVSQ7%-036 XS44ERH4MR7%-036 H 'SRRIGXGSRXVSPHEXEJVSQ7%-036 XS''ERH'MR7%-036
9TKVEHMRK[MXLEHHMXMSREP7%-036 YRMXW
%TTIRHM\& 9TKVEHI
%XXEGLXLITVSXIGXMZIPMHW[LIREPPGEFPIWEVIGSRRIGXIH Important
8SIRWYVIEHIUYEXIGSSPMRKSJXLI%'('4S[IV7YTTPMIW ERYRSFWXVYGXIHWTEGISJQMRMQYQ GQQYWXFI QEMRXEMRIHEVSYRHEPPWMHIWSJXLIKVSYTSJYRMXW I\GITX FIX[IIRXLIYRMXWERHXLIFSXXSQWMHI
6IQSZMRKXLITVSXIGXMZIPMHERHGYXSYXJSVGEFPIW 8SVIQSZIXLITVSXIGXMZIPMH YRWGVI[XLIX[SWGVI[W 1\QQ8SV\ EWWLS[R MRXLITMGXYVI
8SQEOIVSSQJSVXLI GSRRIGXSVGEFPIWVIQSZI XLIETTVSTVMEXIP]WM^IH9 WLETIHGYXSYX)\EQTPI XLI GEFPI%'1EMRWMRXLITPEWXMG TVSXIGXMZIPMHWERHSRI(' GSRRIGXSV %'1EMRW ('
9TKVEHMRK[MXLEHHMXMSREP7%-036 YRMXW
%TTIRHM\& 9TKVEHI
9TKVEHMRK[MXLEHHMXMSREP7%-036 YRMXW
%TTIRHM\'
%TTVSZEPW
'
-)' 8LI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIVMWGSQTPMERX[MXLXLI-)'WXERHEVH
;LIIPQEVO 8LI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMXERH'LEVKIVMW;LIIPQEVOETTVSZIH6IJIVXSXLI GIVXMJMGEXISJXLI;LIIPQEVOETTVSZIHW]WXIQSJ[LMGLXLI4S[IV7YTTP]9RMX ERH'LEVKIVMWETEVX
%TTIRHM\' %TTVSZEPW
;LIIPQEVO
+PSWWEV] +PSWWEV]
(
% %'
%PXIVREXMRK'YVVIRX
( ('
(MVIGX'YVVIRX
+ +1(77
+PSFEP1EVMXMQI(MWXVIWWERH7EJIX]7]WXIQ
+2(
+VSYRH
, ,*
,MKL*VIUYIRG]8LIJVIUYIRG]FERHFIX[IIRERH1,^9WIHJSV QIHMYQERHPSRKVERKIXIVVIWXVMEPVEHMSGSQQYRMGEXMSR
-)'
-RXIVREXMSREP)PIGXVSXIGLRMGEP'SQQMWWMSRMWERMRXIVREXMSREP WXERHEVHWSVKERM^EXMSRXLEXTVITEVIWERHTYFPMWLIW-RXIVREXMSREP 7XERHEVHWJSVEPPIPIGXVMGEPIPIGXVSRMGERHVIPEXIHXIGLRSPSKMIW
-4
-RXIVREXMSREP4VSXIGXMSR6EXMRKWSQIXMQIWEPWSMRXIVTVIXIHEW -RKVIWW4VSXIGXMSR6EXMRKGSRWMWXWSJXLIPIXXIVW-4JSPPS[IHF]X[S HMKMXWERHERSTXMSREPPIXXIV-XGPEWWMJMIWXLIHIKVIIWSJTVSXIGXMSR TVSZMHIHEKEMRWXXLIMRXVYWMSRSJWSPMHSFNIGXW MRGPYHMRKFSH]TEVXW PMOILERHWERHJMRKIVW HYWXEGGMHIRXEPGSRXEGXERH[EXIVMR IPIGXVMGEPIRGPSWYVIW
0 0)(
0MKLX)QMXXMRK(MSHI
+PSWWEV]
1 1*
1IHMYQ*VIUYIRG]6EHMSJVIUYIRGMIW 6* MRXLIVERKISJO,^XS 1,^2EZXI\[LMGLMWTEVXSJXLIGYVVIRX+PSFEP1EVMXMQI(MWXVIWW 7EJIX]7]WXIQSGGYTMIW O,^ERH O,^JSVMQTSVXERXHMKMXEPXI\X FVSEHGEWXW
2 21)%
2EXMSREP1EVMRI)PIGXVSRMGW%WWSGMEXMSR WXERHEVH %GSQFMRIH IPIGXVMGEPERHHEXEWTIGMJMGEXMSRJSVGSQQYRMGEXMSRFIX[IIRQEVMRI IPIGXVSRMGHIZMGIWWYGLEWIGLSWSYRHIVWSREVWERIQSQIXIV [MRH WTIIHERHHMVIGXMSR K]VSGSQTEWWEYXSTMPSX+47VIGIMZIVWERH QER]SXLIVX]TIWSJMRWXVYQIRXW-XLEWFIIRHIJMRIHF]ERHMW GSRXVSPPIHF]XLI97FEWIH2EXMSREP1EVMRI)PIGXVSRMGW %WWSGMEXMSR
: :,*
:IV],MKL*VIUYIRG]1,^EWXVEMKLXPMRIWMKREPYWIHJSV WLSVXHMWXERGIXIVVIWXVMEPGSQQYRMGEXMSRERHREZMKEXMSR
< <0-2/
'VSWWPMRO
-RHI\ -RHI\ % %'EPEVQ HMWTPE]IH, EHHJYVXLIVTS[IVWYTTPMIW, EPEVQ HMWTPE]MRGSRRIGXIHYRMXW, QIWWEKIW, EPEVQXIQTIVEXYVI FEXXIV], ETTPMGEXMSRW, ETTVSZEP QEVMXMQI,
& FEXXIV] WLEVMRK, FEXXIV]EPEVQ TVSKVEQ, XIQTIVEXYVI, ZSPXEKI, FEXXIV]GLEVKI, FEXXIV]WIXXMRKW,
' ')GSQTPMERGI, GLEVKMRKGYVVIRX QE\, GLEVKMRKZSPXEKI QE\, GLEWWMW KVSYRH, GSQFMRMRK WIZIVEPTS[IVWYTTPMIW, 'SQTEWWWEJIHMWXERGI, ,
)
GSRJSVQMX], GSRRIGXSV SZIVZMI[, GSSPMRKVIUYMVIQIRXW WIZIVEPYRMXW, , , WMRKPIYRMX, GVSWWPMRO GEFPI, 8GSRRIGXSV, XIVQMREXMSR, GYWXSQM^MRK,
( HSGYQIRXRYQFIV XLMWQERYEP, M HVEMR[MVI KVSYRHMRK,
* JIEXYVIW, JPSEXZSPXEKI, JYWI %'MRTYX, %'I\GLERKMRK, FEXXIV], , , FEXXIV]GSRRIGXSV, ('SYXTYX<, ('SYXTYX<ERH<, ('SYXTYX<ERH<, 1%-27%',
+ KVSYRHMRK, MMM,
-RHI\
-)' , MRTYX %', MRWXEPPEXMSR QSVITS[IVWYTTPMIW, -4VEXMRK, , , ,
TVSXIGXMZIPMH VIQSZI,
6 VIGLEVKIZSPXEKI, VITEGOEKMRK, VITEMV, VIXYVRMRKYRMXWJSVVITEMV,
0 PMH VIQSZI,
1 QERYEP HSGYQIRXRYQFIV, M QE\MQYQGLEVKMRKGYVVIRX TVSKVEQQMRK,
2 21)%8GSRRIGXSV, 22)%1MGVS(IZMGI'EFPI,
3
7 WEJIX]WYQQEV], MMM WIVZMGMRK, WLEVMRKEFEXXIV], WTIGMJMGEXMSRW, WYTTSVX GSRXEGX,
8 XIGLRMGEPWTIGMJMGEXMSRW, XIVQMREXMSR GVSWWPMRO,
9
SYXPMRI,
YRTEGOMRK, YTKVEHI,
4
;
TIEOSYXTYXTS[IV MRGVIEWI, TVSKVEQQMRK FEXXIV]EPEVQ, QE\MQYQGLEVKMRKGYVVIRX,
[EVVERX],
%
8LVERI 8LVERI%7dMRJS$XLVERIGSQd[[[XLVERIGSQ
INSTALLATION AND USER MANUAL
SAILOR 6101 and 6103 Alarm Panel
SAILOR 6101 and 6103 Alarm Panel Installation and user manual
Document number: 98-130981-A Release date: August 19, 2010
Disclaimer Any responsibility or liability for loss or damage in connection with the use of this product and the accompanying documentation is disclaimed by Thrane & Thrane. The information in this manual is provided for information purposes only, is subject to change without notice and may contain errors or inaccuracies. Manuals issued by Thrane & Thrane are periodically revised and updated. Anyone relying on this information should acquire the most current version e.g. from http://www.thrane.com or from the distributor. Thrane & Thrane is not responsible for the content or accuracy of any translations or reproductions, in whole or in part, of this manual from any other source.
Copyright © 2010 Thrane & Thrane A/S. All rights reserved.
Trademark Acknowledgements •
Thrane & Thrane is a registered trademark of Thrane & Thrane A/S in the European Union and the United States.
•
Inmarsat is a registered trademark of the International Maritime Satellite Organisation (IMSO) and is licensed by IMSO to Inmarsat Limited and Inmarsat Ventures plc.
•
SAILOR is a registered trademark of Thrane & Thrane A/S in the European Union, the United States and other countries.
•
Other product and company names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners.
Safety summary
1
The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment. Thrane & Thrane assumes no liability for the customer's failure to comply with these requirements. DO NOT OPERATE IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE Do not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases or fumes. Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard. KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS Operating personnel must not remove equipment covers. Component replacement and internal adjustment must be made by qualified maintenance personnel. Do not service the unit with the power cable connected. Always disconnect and discharge circuits before touching them. DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY EQUIPMENT Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the equipment. COMPASS SAFE DISTANCE Minimum compass safe distance: 1 m. Failure to comply with the rules above will void the warranty!
iii
About the manual Intended readers This manual is an installation and user manual for the two types of Alarm Panel, SAILOR 6101 and SAILOR 6103. The manual is intended primarily for installers of the system and service personnel. Personnel installing or servicing the system must be properly trained and authorized by Thrane & Thrane. It is important that you observe all safety requirements listed in the beginning of this manual, and install the system according to the guidelines in this manual.
Manual overview This manual has the following chapters:
iv
•
Introduction - a short description of the two types of Alarm Panel.
•
Using the Alarm Panel - a short guide on how to use the Alarm Panel to send distress alerts, receive distress or urgency messages, set up light and sound and test the Alarm Panel.
•
Installing the Alarm Panel - a description of how to unpack, store and install the Alarm Panel.
•
Connecting cables - descriptions and pin-out for the connectors, guidelines for connecting the Alarm Panel and descriptions of the buttons.
•
Service and repair - a short description of how to handle defective units.
•
Specifications - technical specifications for the Alarm Panel.
2
Table of Contents Chapter 1
Introduction The Alarm Panel ................................................................. 1
Chapter 2
Using the Alarm Panel Starting up the Alarm Panel ...............................................6 Sending a Distress alert .....................................................7 Receiving Distress or Urgency messages ............................8 Displaying faults ................................................................9 General functions ............................................................. 10
Chapter 1
Installing the Alarm Panel Initial inspection ...............................................................14 Storage .............................................................................14 To install the Alarm Panel .................................................15
Chapter 2
Connecting cables Connectors ....................................................................... 22 Cable requirements ..........................................................26 Connecting the Alarm Panel ............................................. 27 Connecting multiple Alarm Panels ...................................28
Chapter 3
Service and repair Introduction .....................................................................29 Repacking for shipment ...................................................30
v
Table of Contents
App. A
Specifications General specifications ...................................................... 31
Glossary
.........................................................................................33
Index
.........................................................................................35
vi
1111
Chapter 1
Introduction
Introduction
1
The Alarm Panel The Alarm Panel is used for sending distress alerts and showing visible and audible indication of incoming distress messages. Normally the Alarm Panel is installed at the conning position on the bridge. The distress buttons are protected by spring loaded covers to avoid unintended activation of a distress alert. The distress buttons must be pressed for 3 to 6 seconds before the distress alert is initiated. The Alarm Panel is supplied from 10.8 - 32 V DC. The input is protected against reverse polarity. Note
In Inmarsat C GMDSS systems it is mandatory to have two distress buttons. If you have a Mini-C GMDSS system, only one alarm panel is required, because the Message Terminal, which is part of the system, has a distress button.
Single or Multi Alarm Panel There are two variants of the Alarm Panel: The SAILOR 6101 and the SAILOR 6103. •
The SAILOR 6101 Alarm Panel has one distress button and can send distress alerts and receive information on incoming distress messages via the Inmarsat C satellite system only.
•
The SAILOR 6103 Multi Alarm Panel has three distress buttons and can send distress alerts via Inmarsat C, and distress calls via VHF and MF/HF. It can also receive information on incoming distress messages.
1
Chapter 1: Introduction
SAILOR 6101 Alarm Panel The SAILOR 6101 Alarm Panel is dedicated to Inmarsat C. It has one distress button for sending distress alerts over the Inmarsat C satellite network. The display shows distress alert transmission in progress and distress alerts received on the Inmarsat C network.
Through the Ethernet connector you can interface to two Inmarsat C systems. Note
2
If a distress alert is initiated on a system with duplicated units, only one of the units will send the alarm. The display shows a marker next to the name of the selected unit.
The Alarm Panel
1111
Chapter 1: Introduction
The SIALOR 6103 Multi Alarm Panel connects to VHF equipment, MF/HF equipment and Inmarsat C equipment, and has a distress button for each type of system. The display shows distress messages received. It also indicates equipment type (VHF, MF/HF or Inmarsat C) when the equipment is detected by the Multi Alarm Panel.
Through the Ethernet connector and a connected Ethernet switch you can interface to two Inmarsat C systems, two VHF systems and two MF/HF systems. Note
If a distress alert is initiated on a system with duplicated units, only one of the units will send the alarm. The display shows a marker next to the name of the selected unit.
The Alarm Panel
3
Introduction
SAILOR 6103 Multi Alarm Panel
Chapter 1: Introduction
4
The Alarm Panel
2
Using the Alarm Panel
Using the Alarm Panel
2222
Chapter 2
This chapter provides a description of how to use the Alarm Panel. It has the following sections: •
Starting up the Alarm Panel
•
Sending a Distress alert
•
Receiving Distress or Urgency messages
•
Displaying faults
•
General functions
For information on how to install the Alarm Panel, see Installing the Alarm Panel on page 13.
5
Chapter 2: Using the Alarm Panel
Starting up the Alarm Panel To start up the Alarm Panel, do as follows: 1. Switch on the Alarm Panel. Use the remote on/off switch, if installed. otherwise, the Alarm Panel is automatically powered with the system. 2. The first column of the display shows which systems are connected to the Alarm Panel. A marker next to a system shows that it is the primary system for sending distress alerts or distress calls.
In the example above, two VHF radios and one Inmarsat C system are connected to the Alarm Panel. VHF 1 and Inm-C 1 can be used for sending a distress call/alert.
6
•
On the SAILOR 6101 you can connect two Inmarsat C systems.
•
On the SAILOR 6103 you can connect two VHF systems, two Inmarsat C systems and two MF/HF systems.
Starting up the Alarm Panel
Sending a Distress alert Important
Never send a Distress alert if you are not in distress!
2222
Chapter 2: Using the Alarm Panel
Using the Alarm Panel
To send a Distress alert, do as follows: 1. Open the cover for the Distress button you want to use (VHF, Inm C or MF/HF). 2. Press and hold the button until the light is steady and the buzzer stops (more than 3 seconds).
Behavior
Meaning
Button light flashes, buzzer sounds.
The Distress button is pressed. Hold until light and sound changes (more than 3 seconds).
Marker in the display flashes with the button light. Button light constant, buzzer is silent
The Distress alert is being sent (normally within 10 to 30 seconds)
Button light shortly off every 15 seconds
In Inmarsat C systems: The Distress alert is confirmed
For further details, see the user manual for the system you are using (VHF, Mini-C GMDSS or MF/HF).
Sending a Distress alert
7
Chapter 2: Using the Alarm Panel
Receiving Distress or Urgency messages When a Distress or Urgency message is received, the display of the Alarm Panel shows a flashing Distress text and the buzzer sounds periodically. The Distress text is shown next to the system on which the message was received.
Check the connected system to see the contents of the message. In the example above check the Message Terminal in your Inmarsat C system to see the message.
8
Receiving Distress or Urgency messages
Displaying faults
Using the Alarm Panel
The display of the Alarm Panel can show faults in the connected VHF, Inmarsat C or MF/HF equipment.
2222
Chapter 2: Using the Alarm Panel
Check the connected equipment for the cause of the fault. In the example above, you should check MF/HF radio number 1. Note
If the defective system is configured to be the primary system for sending distress, the other system of the same type (if any) is automatically selected in stead. In the example above, MF/HF 2 is automatically selected because MF/HF 1 is defective.
Displaying faults
9
Chapter 2: Using the Alarm Panel
General functions Buttons in front panel Apart from the Distress button(s) described in Sending a Distress alert on page 7, the front panel has four other buttons: Test, Mute, and .
Testing the Alarm Panel Note
This test only verifies the function of the Alarm Panel itself, not of any connected equipment or the total system. For information on how to test the system, refer to the manual for the individual system (Inmarsat C, VHF or MF/HF).
To test the light and sound indicators in the Alarm Panel, do as follows: 1. Press and hold the Test button. Verify that all light indicators and alarm buttons are flashing. 2. While holding the Test button, press any other button, including the Distress button. The buzzer sounds to indicate that the pressed button and the buzzer is working.
Muting the alarm sound To mute the alarm sound while it is on, press the Mute button. Note
10
Alarm sounds are muted on all connected units until they are activated by a new event.
General functions
To increase the light intensity, press and hold the
button.
To decrease the light intensity, press and hold the
button.
Note
Using the Alarm Panel
Adjusting the light
2222
Chapter 2: Using the Alarm Panel
The light always goes to full intensity if there is an event such as a Distress message, a fault or the Test button is pressed. You can always use the Dim buttons to dim the light again if you want to.
General functions
11
Chapter 2: Using the Alarm Panel
12
General functions
1111
Installing the Alarm Panel
1
This chapter provides a description of how to unpack, store and install the Alarm Panel. It contains the following sections: •
Initial inspection
•
Storage
•
To install the Alarm Panel
For information on cable connections, see Connecting cables on page 21.
13
Installing the Alarm Panel
Chapter 1
Chapter 1: Installing the Alarm Panel
Initial inspection Warning! To avoid electrical shock, do not apply power to the Alarm Panel if there is any sign of shipping damage to any part of the front or rear panel or the outer cover. Read the safety summary at the front of this manual before installing or operating the Alarm Panel. Inspect the shipping carton immediately upon receipt for evidence of mishandling during transport. If the shipping carton is severely damaged or water stained, request that the carrier's agent be present when opening the carton. Save the carton packing material for future use. Check that the contents of the shipment are according to the enclosed packing list. If the contents are incomplete, if there is mechanical damage or defect, or if the Alarm Panel does not work properly, notify your dealer. After unpacking the Alarm Panel, inspect it thoroughly for damage and loose components or fittings.
Storage The Alarm Panel may be stored or shipped in temperatures between -40° C and +80° C. Protect the Alarm Panel from extreme temperature variation which can cause condensation. We recommend that you unpack the Alarm Panel immediately on delivery.
14
Initial inspection
Installing the Alarm Panel
1111
Chapter 1: Installing the Alarm Panel
To install the Alarm Panel General installation requirements Normally the Alarm Panel is installed at the conning position on the bridge. You can mount the Alarm Panel as a flush-mounted unit integrated in a console, on a desktop or in an overhead position. Make sure the Compass Safe Distance is maintained. See General specifications on page 31.
Mounting the Alarm Panel Note
The mounting procedure is the same for the Alarm Panel and the Multi Alarm Panel so the descriptions in this chapter cover both types of Alarm Panel.
The next pages describe how to mount the Alarm Panel on a desktop, in an overhead position and flush mounted in a console.
To install the Alarm Panel
15
Chapter 1: Installing the Alarm Panel
Desktop mounting You can mount the Alarm Panel on a desktop using the mounting bracket. For details on how to mount the Alarm Panel, see Mounting the Alarm Panel with the mounting bracket on page 18.
16
To install the Alarm Panel
Overhead mounting You can mount the Alarm Panel in an overhead position using the mounting bracket. For details on how to mount the Alarm Panel, see Mounting the Alarm Panel with the mounting bracket on page 18.
To install the Alarm Panel
17
Installing the Alarm Panel
1111
Chapter 1: Installing the Alarm Panel
Chapter 1: Installing the Alarm Panel
Mounting the Alarm Panel with the mounting bracket To mount the Alarm Panel using the mounting bracket, do as follows: 1. Find a suitable location to mount the Alarm Panel. Make sure there is minimum 80 mm of free space for cable access behind the Alarm Panel. 2. Use the four holes to fasten the mounting bracket to the mounting surface. Screws are included with the mounting bracket. 3. Place the Alarm Panel in the mounting bracket. 4. Mount the two knobs on the sides of the bracket, but do not tighten them yet. 5. Connect the cables as described in Connecting cables on page 21. 6. Adjust the angle of the Alarm Panel to the wanted position. The bracket can be adjusted ± 20°. 7. Tighten the two knobs on the sides of the bracket when the Alarm Panel is in the correct position.
18
To install the Alarm Panel
Flush mount You can mount the Alarm Panel in a flat surface, e.g. in a console, using the Flush mount bracket and screws included with the Alarm Panel. To mount the Alarm Panel in a console, do as follows: 1. Find a suitable location in the console. Check that there is enough space for the Alarm Panel and an additional 80 mm space for cable entry.
2. Cut a hole of 89 mm x 108 mm for the Alarm Panel. Important
The scale in the below drawing is not 1:1! Do not use it as a template without checking the dimensions.
To install the Alarm Panel
19
Installing the Alarm Panel
1111
Chapter 1: Installing the Alarm Panel
Chapter 1: Installing the Alarm Panel
3. Place the 4 square nuts in the cut-outs on the sides of the Alarm Panel, two on each side. 4. Ensure that the flush mount gasket is placed correctly on the Alarm Panel. 5. Fit the Alarm Panel into the cut-out in the console. 6. Mount the flush mount bracket on the back of the Alarm Panel by mounting the 4 Torx screws through the bracket and into the square nuts placed in the Alarm Panel.
7. Fasten the 4 Torx screws. 8. Connect the cables as described in Connecting cables on page 21.
20
To install the Alarm Panel
2222
Chapter 2
Connecting cables This chapter provides a description of all connectors on the Alarm Panel and gives guidelines to cabling. It has the following sections: •
Connectors
•
Cable requirements
•
Connecting the Alarm Panel
•
Connecting multiple Alarm Panels
21
Connecting cables
2
Chapter 2: Connecting cables
Connectors Overview The drawing below shows the connectors on the Alarm Panel.
Power
Ethernet
22
Connectors
Overview There is one Ethernet (10/100 MB) connector on the rear panel of the Alarm Panel, used for communicating with connected equipment, such as a Message Terminal, VHF and MF/HF equipment. Important
Only connect to units that are part of the system. For safety and compliance reasons, the Ethernet interface is restricted to internal communication in an isolated system.
The interface supports PoE (Power over Ethernet), which means the Alarm Panel can be powered from a PoE device through the Ethernet. If you are using PoE to power the Alarm Panel, the DC power cable is optional.
Pin-out The figure and table below show the connector outline and pin assignments. RJ-45 female
Pin function Pin number
10/100 DC on spares
10/100 mixed DC & data
1
Rx+
Rx+
DC+ (PoE)
2
Rx-
Rx-
DC+ (PoE)
3
Tx+
Tx+
DC- (PoE)
4
DC+ (PoE)
unused
5
DC+ (PoE)
unused
6
Tx-
7
DC- (PoE)
unused
8
DC- (PoE)
unused
Tx-
DC- (PoE)
Connectors
23
Connecting cables
LAN interface
2222
Chapter 2: Connecting cables
Chapter 2: Connecting cables
DC Power input Overview The DC Power input connects to a DC supply with 24 V DC nominal (10.8 to 32 V DC). The interface also has a “remote on/off” function. Important
If you are not going to use the remote on/off function, you must connect pin 3 (ON_IN) to pin 2 (DC-) permanently.
The Power connector is a custom connector; a matching cable with connector is included in the delivery.
Pin-out The figure and table below show the connector outline on the Alarm Panel, pin assignments and wire color in the power cable delivered with the Alarm Panel. Pin number
Wire color in power cable
Pin function
1
DC+ (10.8 - 32 V DC)
Red
2
DC- (0 V DC)
Black
3
ON_IN (see below)
White
4
Not connected
Blue
Front view on Alarm Panel Panel lock, 4 pin male
Remote on/off (ON_IN) With the Remote on/off function you can switch the Alarm Panel on and off from a remote location, using a switch. Note that the Alarm Panel does not have a power button, so it is always on, unless you use the remote on/off function.
24
Connectors
To use the Remote on/off function in the Alarm Panel, do as follows:
2222
Chapter 2: Connecting cables
2. Connect the other side of the switch to the black wire in the power cable (DC- (0 V DC) in the Power connector), so that pin 3 in the Power connector is connected to DC- (with a resistance less than 10 k: when the switch is closed. •
Switch closed: Alarm Panel is on
•
Switch open: Alarm Panel is off
Connectors
25
Connecting cables
1. Connect a switch to the white wire in the power cable (pin 3, ON_IN, in the Power connector.)
Chapter 2: Connecting cables
Cable requirements Before using the Alarm Panel for the first time, check that all cables are correctly wired and fastened.
Grounding All cables attached to the Alarm Panel must be shielded. •
The shield of the Ethernet cable must be connected to ship ground in the Ethernet switch.
•
The shield of the power cable must be connected to ship ground at the power supply.
Cable requirements The power cable supplied with your system is 2.5 m long with AWG 16 wires and a custom connector at one end. If you are going to use another cable or extend the supplied cable, make sure the cables are dimensioned correctly. When the cable is connected to the power supply, there must be minimum 10.8 V at the end of the cable. The Ethernet cable must be Cat. 5E or higher. Max. length is 100 m.
26
Cable requirements
Connecting the Alarm Panel This section covers both versions of the Alarm Panel, SAILOR 6101 and SAILOR 6103. To connect the Alarm Panel, do as follows:
1. Connect the power cable according to the description in DC Power input on page 24. 2. Connect an Ethernet cable to the LAN connector on the Alarm Panel. 3. Attach the cables with cable straps as shown below.
4. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to an Ethernet switch or alternatively a PoE switch. Note
If you are using PoE as your power source for the Alarm Panel, the DC cable is optional.
Connecting the Alarm Panel
27
Connecting cables
2222
Chapter 2: Connecting cables
Chapter 2: Connecting cables
5. Connect the Ethernet interfaces on your Message Terminal, VHF radio and/or your MF/HF radio to the same switch, or a switch in the same network. Important
Only connect units that are part of the system. For safety and compliance reasons, the Ethernet interface is restricted to internal communication in an isolated system.
When connected and powered, all the units are automatically set up to communicate with each other in the Ethernet network.
Connecting multiple Alarm Panels You can connect up to twelve Alarm Panels on the same subnet (e.g. six SAILOR 6101 and six SAILOR 6103). To connect multiple Alarm Panels, do as follows: 1. Connect the Alarm Panels to an Ethernet switch. 2. Connect the Ethernet switch to the system(s) used for transmitting the alarms, e.g. the Message Terminal in a Mini-C system or a VHF radio. The units are automatically set up to communicate with each other in the Ethernet network.
28
Connecting multiple Alarm Panels
Chapter 3
3333
Service and repair This chapter describes what to do with defective units, including how to pack them for shipment if they are to be returned.
Introduction
The Alarm Panel designed to operate without preventive routine maintenance. Although the Alarm Panel is designed and built very service friendly, we strongly recommend that any acting service technician is trained specifically on the product. Repair or repair attempts performed by unqualified personnel may limit the warranty. The warranty on the system is defined and outlined by the distributor that supplied the system. We do not recommend repairing the Alarm Panel on board the ship. Replace the defective unit and have it repaired at a qualified workshop on shore. For further information on warranty and service, you may also use the Thrane & Thrane home page at http://www.thrane.com.
29
Service and repair
3
Chapter 3: Service and repair
Repacking for shipment The shipping carton has been carefully designed to protect the Alarm Panel and its accessories during shipment. This carton and its associated packing material should be used when repacking for shipment. Attach a tag indicating the type of service required, return address, model number and full serial number. Mark the carton FRAGILE to ensure careful handling. If the original shipping carton is not available, the following general instructions should be used for repacking with commercially available material. 1. Wrap the Alarm Panel in heavy paper or plastic. Attach a tag indicating the type of service required, return address, model number and full serial number. 2. Use a strong shipping container, e.g. a double walled carton of 160 kg test material. 3. Protect the front- and rear panel with cardboard and insert a 7 cm to 10 cm layer of shock-absorbing material between all surfaces of the equipment and the sides of the container. 4. Seal the shipping container securely. 5. Mark the shipping container FRAGILE to ensure careful handling.
30
Repacking for shipment
AAAA
Specifications
A
General specifications Item
Specifications
Mounting method
Flush mount or bracket
Power
10.8 to 32 V DC, with “remote on/off” input
Power Consumption
Typical 1 W, Maximum 3 W
Interfaces
Ethernet (10/100 Mbit), RJ45 connector DC input, custom panel lock connector
Compliance
•
IEC 60945
•
Wheelmark approved.
IP protection
IP30
Ambient Temperature
-15°C to 55°C
Storage temperature
-40°C to 80°C
Relative humidity
+40°C 93% 1 cycle
31
Specifications
Appendix A
Appendix A: Specifications Item
Specifications
Vibration
Vibration Sweep: 2 Hz - 13,2 Hz at ± 1 mm 13,2 Hz - 100 Hz at 7m/s2 2 h dwell at each resonance, otherwise 2 h at 30Hz in all three axes
Compass safe distance
1m
Dimensions HxWxD
Without bracket: 107 mm x 121 mm x 55 mm
Weight
Without bracket: 302 g
With bracket: 124 mm x 153 mm x 90 mm
With bracket: 440 g
32
General specifications
BBBB
Glossary Glossary
B
A AWG
American Wire Gauge. A means of specifying wire diameters.
DC
Glossary
D Direct Current
G GMDSS
Global Maritime Distress Safety System. The system is intended to perform the following functions: alerting (including position determination of the unit in distress), search and rescue coordination, locating (homing), maritime safety information broadcasts, general communications, and bridge-to-bridge communications.
H HF
High Frequency. Radio frequencies between 3 and 30 MHz. Used for direct, long-distance (often inter-continental) communications.
I IMSO
International Maritime Satellite Organisation. An intergovernmental body established to ensure that Inmarsat continues to meet its public service obligations.
Inmarsat C
A service provided by Inmarsat, offering two-way, store-andforward packet data communications via a small, low-cost terminal. Handles operational and personal messages, including e-mail, telex and fax, as well as distress and safety communications.
33
Glossary
IP
Ingress Protection. An international classification system for the sealing effectiveness of enclosures of electrical equipment against the intrusion into the equipment of foreign bodies (i.e. tools, dust, fingers) and moisture. This classification system uses the letters "IP" followed by two or three digits. An "x" is used for one of the digits if there is only one class of protection; e.g. IPX4 which addresses moisture resistance only.
M MF
Medium Frequency. Radio frequencies (RF) in the range of 300 kHz to 3 MHz. Navtex, which is part of the current Global Maritime Distress Safety System occupies 518 kHz and 490 kHz for important digital text broadcasts.
P PoE
Power over Ethernet. A standard for combining power supply with transmission of data over the Ethernet. The source unit "injects" power into the Ethernet cable and the power is "picked up" at the connected device.
R Rx
Receive
T Tx
Transmit
V VHF
34
Very High Frequency. The radio frequency range from 30 MHz to 300 MHz. Ideal for short-distance terrestrial communication.
Index C
A
I
Alarm Panel description, 2 Multi, 3 types of, 1
indication faults in connected equipment, 9 incoming messages, 8 initial inspection, 14 Inmarsat C Alarm Panel, 2 installation, 15
L
cable requirements, 26 connectors DC power input, 24 LAN, 23 overview, 22
LAN connector, 23 light adjusting, 11
D
M
DC power input connector, 24 desktop mounting, 16 dim function, 11 dimensions, 32 distress sending alert, 7 distress message indication, 8 document number this manual, i
manual document number, i message received indication, 8 mounting flush mount, 19 on desktop, 16 Multi Alarm Panel description, 3 muting alarm sound, 10
E
Index
C
CCCC
Index
P power input connector, 24
Ethernet connector, 23
F faults indication in display, 9 flush mount, 19
R receiving distress or urgency messages, 8 repacking for shipment, 30 repair, 29
35
Index
returning units, 30
S safety summary, iii SAILOR 6101 description, 2 SAILOR 6103 description, 3 service, 29 specifications, 31 storage, 14
T test of Alarm Panel, 10 types of Alarm Panel, 1
U unpacking, 14 urgency message indication, 8
36
98-130981-A
Thrane & Thrane A/S
•
[email protected]
•
www.thrane.com
Moxa EtherDevice Switch EDS-205A/208A Series Hardware Installation Guide
Fourth Edition, October 2009
¤ 2009 Moxa Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction without permission is prohibited.
P/N: 1802002050023
Overview The EDS-205A/208A series of industrial Ethernet switches are entry-level industrial 5 and 8-port Ethernet switches that support IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u, and IEEE 802.3x with 10/100M, full/half-duplex, and MDI/MDIX auto-sensing. The EDS-205A/208A series provides 12/24/48 VDC (9.6 to 60VDC)/18 to 30 VAC redundant power inputs that can be connected simultaneously to a live AC/DC power source. The switches are available with a standard operating temperature range from -10 to 60°C, or with a wide operating temperature range from -40 to 75°C, and IP30 metal housing makes them rugged enough for any harsh industrial environment. To provide greater versatility for use with applications from different industries, the EDS-205A/208A also allow users to enable or disable broadcast storm protection with DIP switches on the outer panel. The EDS-205A/208A switches can be easily installed with DIN-Rail mounting as well as distribution boxes. The DIN-rail mounting capability and IP30 metal housing with LED indicators make the plug-and-play EDS-205A/208A switches reliable and easy to use. NOTE
Throughout this Hardware Installation Guide, we use EDS as an abbreviation for Moxa EtherDevice Switch: EDS = Moxa EtherDevice Switch
Package Checklist Your EDS is shipped with the following items. If any of these items is missing or damaged, please contact your customer service representative for assistance.
y y y
Moxa EtherDevice™ Switch Hardware Installation Guide Moxa Product Warranty booklet
Features High Performance Network Switching Technology
y
EDS-205A: 10/100BaseT(X) (RJ45), 100 BaseFX (SC/ST connector, multi/single-mode)
y
EDS-208A series: 10/100BaseT(X) (RJ45), 100 BaseFX (SC/ST connector, multi/single-mode)
y y y
10/100M, Full/Half-Duplex, MDI/MDIX auto-sensing IEEE 802.3/802.3u/802.3x Store and Forward switching process type, 1024 address entries
Rugged Design
y
Redundant dual 12/24/48 VDC (9.6 to 60VDC) or 18 to 30 VAC at 47 to 63 Hz power input
y
Operating temperature range from -10 to 60°C ,or extended operating temperature of -40 to 75°C for (-T) models.
y y
IP30 metal housing DIN-rail or panel mounting ability -2-
Panel Layout of EDS-205A/208A (Standard) EDS-205A Front Panel View
EDS-208A Front Panel View
1.
Grounding screw
2 5 6
2.
Terminal block for
7
3.
power input P1/P2 orifices
7
8
8
9 Top Panel View
Heat dissipation
4.
DIP Switches
5.
Power input P1 LED
6.
Power input P2 LED
7.
10/100BaseT(X) Port
8.
TP port’s 10/100 Mbps LED
Top Panel View
9. 3
1
1
2
2
3 4
4
Model Name
10. Screw hole for wall mounting kit 11. DIN-Rail Kit
Rear Panel View 2
Rear Panel View 1
2
1
10
10
11
11
10
10
-3-
Panel Layout of EDS-205A-M-SC/ST EDS-205A-M-SC Front Panel View
EDS-205A-M-ST Front Panel View
NOTE: The appearance of
2 5 6
2 5 6
EDS-205A-S-SC is identical to EDS-205A-M-SC.
10
7
7
8
8
11
9
1.
Grounding screw
2.
Terminal block for power input P1/P2
10
11
3.
9
Heat dissipation orifices
Top Panel View
Top Panel View
4.
DIP Switches
5.
Power input P1 LED
3
3
6.
Power input P2 LED
1
1
7.
10/100BaseT(X) Port
2
2
8.
TP port’s 10/100
4
4
Mbps LED 9.
Model Name
10. 100BaseFX Port 2
11. FX port’s 100 Mbps
Rear Panel View
Rear Panel View 2
1
LED
1 12
12
12. Screw hole for wall mounting kit 13. DIN-Rail Kit
13
13
12
12
-4-
Panel Layout of EDS-208A-M-SC/ST EDS-208A-M-SC Front Panel View
EDS-208A-M-ST Front Panel View 2 5 6
NOTE: 2 5 6
The appearance of EDS-208A-S-SC is
10
7
10
7
identical to
11
8
11
8
EDS-208A-M-SC.
9
9
1.
Grounding screw
2.
Terminal block for power input P1/P2
Top Panel View
3.
Top Panel View
Heat dissipation orifices
4.
DIP Switches
1
1
5.
Power input P1 LED
2
2
3 4
3 4
6.
Power input P2 LED
7.
10/100BaseT(X) Port
8.
TP port’s 10/100
Rear Panel View 2 12
Mbps LED
Rear Panel View 1
2
1
12
9.
Model Name
10. 100BaseFX Port 11. FX port’s 100 Mbps
13
LED
13
12. Screw hole for wall mounting kit 12
13. DIN-Rail Kit
12
-5-
Panel Layout of EDS-208A-MM-SC/ST EDS-208A-MM-SC Front Panel View
EDS-208A-MM-ST Front Panel View
NOTE:
2 5 6
2 5 6
The appearance of EDS-208A-SS-SC is
10
7
10
7
identical to
11
8
11
8
EDS-208A-MM-SC.
9
9
1.
Grounding screw
2.
Terminal block for power input P1/P2
Top Panel View
3.
Top Panel View
Heat dissipation orifices
1
1
2
2
3 4
3 4
Rear Panel View 2 12
4.
DIP Switches
5.
Power input P1 LED
6.
Power input P2 LED
7.
10/100BaseT(X) Port
8.
TP port’s 10/100
Rear Panel View 1
2
Mbps LED 1
12
9.
Model Name
10. 100BaseFX Port 11. FX port’s 100 Mbps 13
LED
13
12. Screw hole for wall mounting kit 12
12
13. DIN-Rail Kit
-6-
Mounting Dimensions (unit = mm)
-7-
DIN-Rail Mounting The aluminum DIN-rail attachment plate should already be fixed to the back panel of the EDS when you take it out of the box. If you need to reattach the DIN-rail attachment plate, make sure the stiff metal spring is situated towards the top, as shown in the figures below. STEP 1: Insert the top of the DIN-Rail into the slot just below the stiff metal spring.
STEP 2: The DIN-Rail attachment unit will snap into place as shown below. Metal Spring
Metal Spring
DIN-Rail
DIN-Rail
To remove the EDS from the DIN-Rail, simply reverse Steps 1 and 2 above.
Wall Mounting (optional) For some applications, you will find it convenient to mount the EDS-205A/208A on the wall, as shown in the following figures. STEP 1: Remove the aluminum DIN-Rail attachment plate from the EDS-205A/208A’s rear panel, and then attach the wall mount plates as shown in the diagram at the right.
top plate
STEP 2: Mounting the EDS-205A/208A on the wall requires 4 screws. Use the switch, with wall mount plates attached, as a guide to mark the correct locations of the 4 screws. The heads of the screws should be less than 6.0 mm in diameter, and the shafts should be less than 3.5 mm in diameter, as shown in the figure at the right.
NOTE
bottom plate
6.0 mm
3.5 mm
Before tightening the screws into the wall, make sure the screw head and shank size are suitable by inserting the screw into one of the keyhole-shaped apertures of the wall mounting plates.
Do not screw the screws in completely—leave about 2 mm to allow room for sliding the wall mount panel between the wall and the screws.
-8-
STEP 3: Once the screws are fixed on the wall, insert the four screw heads through the large parts of the keyhole-shaped apertures, and then slide the EDS-205A/208A downwards, as indicated. Tighten the four screws for added stability.
Wiring Requirements WARNING Safety First! Turn the power off before disconnecting modules or wires. The correct power supply voltage is listed on the product label. Check the voltage of your power source to make sure that you are using the correct voltage. Do NOT use a voltage greater than what is specified on the product label. These devices must be supplied by a SELV source as defined in the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC and 2004/108/EC.
WARNING Safety First! Calculate the maximum possible current in each power wire and common wire. Observe all electrical codes dictating the maximum current allowable for each wire size. If the current goes above the maximum ratings, the wiring could overheat, causing serious damage to your equipment.
You should also pay attention to the following points:
y
Use separate paths to route wiring for power and devices. If power wiring and device wiring paths must cross, make sure the wires are perpendicular at the intersection point. NOTE: Do not run signal or communications wiring and power wiring in the same wire conduit. To avoid interference, wires with different signal characteristics should be routed separately.
y
You can use the type of signal transmitted through a wire to determine which wires should be kept separate. The rule of thumb is that wiring that shares similar electrical characteristics can be bundled together.
y y
Keep input wiring and output wiring separated. It is strongly advised that you label wiring to all devices in the system when necessary.
-9-
Grounding the EtherDevice Switch Grounding and wire routing help limit the effects of noise due to electromagnetic interference (EMI). Run the ground connection from the ground screw to the grounding surface prior to connecting devices. ATTENTION This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded mounting surface such as a metal panel.
Wiring the Redundant Power Inputs The top two contacts and the bottom two contacts of the 4-contact terminal block connector on the EDS’s top panel are used for the EDS’s two AC/DC inputs. Top and front views of one of the terminal block connectors are shown here. STEP 1: Insert the negative/positive AC/DC wires into the V-/V+ terminals.
Top View
STEP 2: To keep the AC/DC wires from pulling loose, use a small flat-blade screwdriver to tighten the wire-clamp screws on the front of the terminal block connector. STEP 3: Insert the plastic terminal block connector prongs into the terminal block receptor, which is located on EDS’s top panel.
Front View
ATTENTION Before connecting the EtherDevice Switch to the AC/DC power inputs, make sure the AC/DC power source voltage is stable.
Communication Connections The EDS-205A models have 4 or 5 10/100BaseT(X) Ethernet ports, and 1 or 0 (zero) 100 BaseFX multi/single-mode (SC/ST-type connector) fiber ports. The EDS-208A models have 6, 7 or 8 10/100BaseT(X) Ethernet ports, and 2, 1 or 0 (zero) 100 BaseFX multi/single-mode (SC/ST-type connector) fiber ports.
10/100BaseT(X) Ethernet Port Connection The 10/100BaseT(X) ports located on the EDS’s front panel are used to connect to Ethernet-enabled devices. Below we show pinouts for both MDI (NIC-type) ports and MDI-X (HUB/Switch-type) ports, and also show cable wiring diagrams for straight-through and cross-over Ethernet cables.
- 10 -
MDI Port Pinouts Pin 1 2 3 6
MDI-X Port Pinouts Pin 1 2 3 6
Signal Tx+ TxRx+ Rx-
Signal Rx+ RxTx+ Tx-
8-pin RJ45
1
8
RJ45 (8-pin) to RJ45 (8-pin) Straight-Through Cable Wiring Straight-Through Cable
Switch Port
RJ45 Plug Pin 1
RJ45 Connector Tx+ TxRx+ Rx-
NIC Port RJ45 Connector
Cable Wiring 3 6 1 2
3 6 1 2
Rx+ RxTx+ Tx-
RJ45 (8-pin) to RJ45 (8-pin) Cross-Over Cable Wiring Cross-Over Cable
Switch Port (NIC Port)
RJ45 Plug Pin 1
RJ45 Connector (Rx+) (Rx-) (Tx+) (Tx-)
Tx+ TxRx+ Rx-
Switch Port (NIC Port) RJ45 Connector
Cable Wiring 3 6 1 2
1 2 3 6
Rx+ RxTx+ Tx-
(Tx+) (Tx-) (Rx+) (Rx-)
100BaseFX Ethernet Port Connection The concept behind the SC/ST port and cable is quite straightforward. Suppose you are connecting devices I and II; contrary to electrical signals, optical signals do not require a circuit in order to transmit data. Consequently, one of the optical lines is used to transmit data from device I to device II, and the other optical line is used transmit data from device II to device I, for full-duplex transmission. Remember to connect the Tx (transmit) port of device I to the Rx (receive) port of device II, and the Rx (receive) port of device I to the Tx (transmit) port of device II. If you make your own cable, we suggest labeling the two sides of the same line with the same letter (A-to-A and B-to-B, as shown below, or A1-to-A2 and B1-to-B2). SC-Port Pinouts
SC-Port to SC-Port Cable Wiring A
A
B
B
Tx
Cable Wiring Rx
A B
A B - 11 -
ST-Port Pinouts
ST-Port to ST-Port Cable Wiring A
A
B
B
Tx
Cable Wiring
Rx
A B
A B
ATTENTION This is a Class 1 Laser/LED product. To avoid causing serious damage to your eyes, do not stare directly into the Laser Beam.
Redundant Power Inputs Both power inputs can be connected simultaneously to live AC/DC power sources. If one power source fails, the other live source acts as a backup, and automatically supplies all of the EDS’s power needs.
DIP Switch Settings EDS-205A/208A DIP Switches
1
ON
2
The default setting for each DIP Switch is OFF. The following table explains the effect of setting the DIP Switches to the ON positions.
DIP Switch
Setting
Description Serves no function (reserved for future use).
-----ON
Enables broadcast storm protection
OFF
Disables broadcast storm protection
BSP
ATTENTION To actively updated DIP switch settings, power off and then power on the EDS.
- 12 -
LED Indicators The front panel of the Moxa EtherDevice Switch contains several LED indicators. The function of each LED is described in the table below. LED
Color
P1
AMBER
P2
AMBER
State On Off On Off On
10M
100M
Yellow
GREEN
Description Power is being supplied to power input P1. Power is not being supplied to power input P1. Power is being supplied to power input P2. Power is not being supplied to power input P2. TP port’s 10 Mbps link is active.
Blinking Data is being transmitted at 10 Mbps. Off
TP Port’s 10 Mbps link is inactive
On
TP port’s 100 Mbps link is active.
Blinking Data is being transmitted at 100 Mbps. Off
100Base TP Port’s link is inactive.
Auto MDI/MDI-X Connection The Auto MDI/MDI-X function allows users to connect the EDS’s 10/100BaseTX ports to any kind of Ethernet device, without needing to pay attention to the type of Ethernet cable being used for the connection. This means that you can use either a straight-through cable or cross-over cable to connect the EDS to Ethernet devices.
Dual Speed Functionality and Switching The Moxa EtherDevice Switch’s 10/100 Mbps switched RJ45 port auto negotiates with the connected device for the fastest data transmission rate supported by both devices. All models of Moxa EtherDevice Switch are plug-and-play devices, so that software configuration is not required at installation, or during maintenance. The half/full duplex mode for the switched RJ45 ports is user dependent and changes (by auto-negotiation) to full or half duplex, depending on which transmission speed is supported by the attached device.
Switching, Filtering, and Forwarding Each time a packet arrives at one of the switched ports, a decision is made to either filter or forward the packet. Packets with source and destination addresses belonging to the same port segment will be filtered, constraining those packets to one port, and relieving the rest of the network from the need to process them. A packet with destination address on another port segment will be forwarded to the appropriate port, and will not be sent to ports where it is not needed. Packets that are used in maintaining the operation of the network (such as the occasional multi-cast packet) are forwarded to all ports. The EDS operates in the store-and-forward switching mode, which eliminates bad packets and enables peak performance to be achieved when there is heavy traffic on the network. - 13 -
Switching and Address Learning The EDS has an address table that can hold up to 1024 addresses, which makes it suitable for use with large networks. The address tables are self-learning, so that as nodes are added or removed, or moved from one segment to another, the EDS automatically keeps up with new node locations. An address-aging algorithm causes the least-used addresses to be deleted in favor of newer, more frequently used addresses. To reset the address buffer, power down the unit and then power it back up.
Auto-Negotiation and Speed Sensing All of the EDS’s RJ45 Ethernet ports independently support auto-negotiation for speeds in the 10BaseT and 100BaseTX modes, with operation according to the IEEE 802.3u standard. This means that some nodes could be operating at 10 Mbps, while at the same time, other nodes are operating at 100 Mbps. Auto-negotiation takes place when an RJ45 cable connection is made, and then each time a LINK is enabled. The EDS advertises its capability for using either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps transmission speeds, with the device at the other end of the cable expected to advertise in a similar manner. Depending on what type of device is connected, this will result in agreement to operate at a speed of either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps. If an EDS RJ45 Ethernet port is connected to a non-negotiating device, it will default to 10 Mbps speed and half-duplex mode, as required by the IEEE 802.3u standard.
Specifications Technology Standards
Processing Type Flow Control Interface RJ45 Ports Fiber Ports LED Indicators DIP Switch Optical Fiber
IEEE 802.3 for 10BaseT, IEEE 802.3u for 100BaseT(X) and 100BaseFX, IEEE 802.3x for Flow Control Store and Forward IEEE 802.3x flow control, back pressure flow control 10/100BaseT(X) auto negotiation speed, F/H duplex mode, and auto MDI/MDI-X connection 100BaseFX ports (SC/ST connector, multi/single-mode) P1, P2 (Power), 10/100M (TP port), and 100M (Fiber port) enable/disable broadcast storm protection
100BaseFX Multi-mode 1300 nm -10 dBm -20 dBm -32 dBm 12 dB 5 kma Typical Distance 4 kmb Saturation -6 dBm a. using [50/125ȝm, 800 MHz*km] cable b. using [62.5/125ȝm, 500 MHz*km] cable c. using [9/125 ȝm, 3.5 PS/(nm*km)] cable Wavelength Max. TX Min. TX RX Sensitivity Link Budget
- 14 -
Single-mode 1310 nm 0 dBm -5 dBm -34 dBm 29 dB 40 kmc -3 dBm
Power Input Voltage Input Current @ 24VDC
12/24/48 VDC (9.6 to 60 VDC), 18 to 30VAC (47 to 63 Hz) 0.1 A (EDS-205A) 0.11 A (EDS-205A-M/S) 0.13 A (EDS-208A) 0.17 A (EDS-208A-M/S) 0.22 A (EDS-208A-MM/SS) Removable 4-contact terminal block 1.1 A
Connection Overload Current Protection Reverse Polarity Protection Present Physical Characteristics Housing IP30 protection, metal case Dimensions EDS-208A Series: 50 x 115 x 70 mm EDS-205A: 30 x 115 x 70 mm Weight EDS-208A Series: 275 g EDS-205A: 175 g Installation DIN-Rail Mounting, Wall Mounting (with optional kit) Environmental Limits Operating Temperature -10 to 60°C (14 to 140°F) -40 to 75°C (-40 to 167°F) for -T models Storage Temperature -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°G) Ambient Relative Humidity 5 to 95% (non-condensing) Regulatory Approvals Safety UL508 (pending) Hazardous Location UL/cUL Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D; ATEX Class I, Zone 2, Ex nC nL IIC T4 (Pending) EMI FCC Part 15, CISPR (EN55022) class A EMS EN61000-4-2 (ESD), Level 3 EN61000-4-3 (RS), Level 3 EN61000-4-4 (EFT), Level 3 EN61000-4-5 (Surge), Level 3 EN61000-4-6 (CS), Level 3 EN61000-4-8 EN61000-4-11 Shock IEC 60068-2-27 Freefall IEC 60068-2-32 Vibration IEC 60068-2-6 5 years WARRANTY
- 15 -
Technical Support Contact Information www.moxa.com/support Moxa Americas: Toll-free: 1-888-669-2872 Tel: +1-714-528-6777 Fax: +1-714-528-6778
Moxa Europe: Tel: +49-89-3 70 03 99-0 Fax: +49-89-3 70 03 99-99
Moxa Asia-Pacific: Tel: +886-2-8919-1230 Fax: +886-2-8919-1231
Moxa China (Beijing office): Tel: +86-10-6872-3959/60/61 Fax: +86-10-6872-3958 - 16 -
83&3
P.O.Box1098 N6403 MOLDE NORWAY TEL.+47 71 20 24 00 FAX.+47 71 25 12 14 www.overland.no
[email protected]
Input: RS-232, RS-422, NMEA0183.
Relay NO/NC by internal strap
5 X RS-232 output
G
+
Tx5
G
+
Tx4
TX INST.
G
+
G
+
Tx2 Tx3 RS-232
G
+
Tx1
ALARM
Signal input
+ Rx B
+ Rx A
Input
"Write transmitting instrument here."
DIN
15-30VDC POWER
- + - + V2
V1
POWER
10mm for DYMO-tape
DIN
POWER
83&3
INPUT A INPUT B
6HULDO/LQH6SOLWWHU 2YHUODQGDV www.nmea.no
Tx2 + -
Tx3 + -
Tx4 + -
RS-422
IEC60945 IEC61162-1 C4 IEC61162-2 High Speed Data
ELEKTRONIKK
Tx1 + -
RS-232
RS-422 Tx5 Tx6 + - + -
Tx7 + -
Tx8 + -
Tx9 + -
Tx10 + -
10 x RS-422 output
UPC 5000P Spesifications: UPC 5000P is a serial line splitter with two separate inputs and fifteen outputs. Dual power input with autoswitch. The two inputs A and B are separated with A as the primary input. If there is data on both A and B inputs, input A is used. Input B is used only if input A is idle. The powersupply and both signal inputs are galvanic isolated from the outputs. A.J.080307
Specifications: Powersuppy main: 15-30Vdc 2W Powersuppy sec: 15-30Vdc 2W Input A: 1-20V, 0,5mA min, max. 2Mbps Input B: 1-20V, 0,5mA min, max. 2Mbps Outputs: 10 off RS-422, 50mA max, 5 off RS-232.
For Current Loop input. 100 ohm parallel All outputs are Short Circuit Protected Module-box with DIN-rail mounting Dimensions in mm: L-128 x H-50 x W-128
Page 1 of 1
http://www.overland.no/sls5000.jpg
08.08.2011
Power Supply Unit, Primary Switched, Narrow Design MINI-PS-12-24DC/24DC/1 MINI POWER provides: • Extra narrow design with widths of 22.5 mm, 45 mm, and 67.5 mm (0.886, 1.772, and 2.657 in.) • Global use due to a wide-range input • A high level of operational safety in complex global networks • Reliable startup of heavy loads due to POWER BOOST The reliability of a power supply unit determines the availability of individual components in a system and whether complex systems can function safely. The globalization of markets increases the demands placed on the power supply unit. A wide-range input and a high level of availability are required. These requirements are met by MINI POWER.
1. Short Description MINI POWER is the extra narrow power supply unit, which is available in widths of 22.5 mm, 45 mm, and 67.5 mm (0.886, 1.772, and 2.657 in.). In addition to a 24 V version with output currents of 1 A, 2 A, and 4 A, special voltages are also available with 5 V/3 A, +/-15 V/1 A, and 10 - 15 V/2 A for connection to single-phase AC networks or to two external conductors in three-phase networks with nominal voltages of 100 - 240 V AC. Two DC/DC converters convert low direct voltages into an adjustable and regulated 24 V output voltage. With the DIN rail bus connector, the MINI-SYS-PS can be connected in parallel to supply other modules in the same system with a regulated 24 V DC voltage. Reliable startup of heavy loads is ensured by a power reserve of up to 100% – the POWER BOOST. The high level of operational safety is also ensured in complex global networks. MINI POWER also operates in applications where static voltage dips, transient power supply failures or phase failure are common. Powerful capacitors ensure mains buffering of more than 20 ms at full load.
2. Area of Application MINI POWER can be used globally due to the consistent provision of a wide-range input. In this way, your entire system can be tested at any production location in the world and can be delivered to any location in the world without faulty switching of the input voltage. This reduces storage costs and logistical effort. An international approval package including UL 60950 for IT equipment and UL 508 for industrial control equipment enables the device to be used globally.
Headquarters: © Phoenix Contact GmbH & Co. KG • Flachsmarktstraße 8 • 32825 Blomberg • Germany Phone +49 - 52 35 - 30 0 • Fax +49 - 52 35 - 34 12 00 • www.phoenixcontact.com Local Contact: www.phoenixcontact.com/salesnetwork
Power Supply Unit, Primary Switched, Narrow Design – MINI-PS-12-24DC/24DC/1
3. Technical Data
114.5 (4.508 in.)
22.5 mm (0.886 in.)
MINI-PS-12-24DC/24DC/1 DC/DC Converter 7 mm (0.28 in.)
Input Output Signal
Solid
Stranded [mm ] AWG 2
0.2 - 2.5 0.2 - 2.5 0.2 - 2.5
9Y
Torque [Nm] [Ib in]
0.2 - 2.5 25 - 14 0.5 - 0.6 4.4 - 5.3 0.2 - 2.5 25 - 14 0.5 - 0.6 4.4 - 5.3 0.2 - 2.5 25 - 14 0.5 - 0.6 4.4 - 5.3
Description
Type
Order No.
Power supply unit, primary switched, narrow design
MINI-PS-12-24DC/24DC/1
28 66 28 4
Technical Data Input Data Nominal input voltage Input voltage range (current consumption) Current consumption (for nominal values) Inrush current limiting Mains buffering for a nominal load (typical) Switch-on time after applying the mains voltage Transient surge protection Input fuse, internal
12 - 24 V DC (wide-range input) 10 - 32 V DC 2.6 A (12 V DC)/1.3 A (24 V DC), approximately < 15 A, typical > 3 ms (12 V DC)/> 20 ms (24 V DC) < 0.5 s Varistor 6.3 A (device protection)
Output Data Nominal output voltage UN/tolerance Setting range for the output voltage Output current during convection cooling and nominal values Nominal output current IN -25°C to +60°C (-13°F to +140°F) Derating Short-circuit current limit Startup of capacitive loads System deviation on:
Static load change 10 - 90% Dynamic load change 10 - 90% Input voltage change ±10% No load/nominal load
Maximum power dissipation Level of efÀciency (typical) Response time UOUT (10% - 90%) Residual ripple/switching peaks (20 MHz) Can be connected in parallel Internal surge protection Resistance to return supply
Signal Output Data DC OK (active) (Uout > 21.5 V DC !high signal) LED (Uout > 21.5 V DC !LED permanently on)
24 V DC/±1% 22.5 - 28.5 V DC 1 A (UOUT = 24 V) From +60°C (+140°F), 2.5% per Kelvin 4 A, approximately Unlimited < 1%, typical < 3%, typical < 0.1%, typical 2.5 W/7.5 W > 78% (at 24 V DC and at nominal values) < 30 ms, typical < 100 mVpp (for nominal values) To increase redundancy and power Yes, limited to 35 V DC, approximately 35 V DC
+24 V signal/20 mA, maximum Green LED
PHOENIX CONTACT page 2 of 8
Pcs. Pkt. 1
Power Supply Unit, Primary Switched, Narrow Design – MINI-PS-12-24DC/24DC/1
General Data Insulation voltage: Input/output Approval package Electrical equipment of machines Safety transformers for switched-mode power supply units Electrical safety (of IT equipment) Industrial control equipment Electronic equipment for use in electrical power installations Safety extra-low voltage Safe isolation Protection against electric shock, basic requirements for safe isolation in electrical equipment Limitation of harmonic line currents
EN 60 204 (Surge Voltage Category III) EN 61 558-2-17 EN 60950/VDE 0805 UL/C-UL Recognized UL 60 950 Y UL/C-UL Listed UL 508 9 LISTED
EN 50 178/VDE 0160 PELV (EN 60 204) SELV (EN 60 950) VDE 0100-410 DIN VDE 0106-101 According to EN 61000-3-2
Mounting position Can be mounted with spacing
- Vertically - Horizontally
Degree of protection Class of protection MTBF Housing version Weight Dimensions (W x H x D) Climatic Data Ambient temperature
Operation Storage
Humidity Vibration Shock Pollution degree Climatic category
1.5 kV AC (type test)/1 kV AC (routine test)
According to IEC 68-2-6 According to IEC 68-2-27
On horizontal NS 35 DIN rail according to EN 60715 With spacing of 5 cm (1.969 in.) 0 cm (0 in.) IP20 , (in closed control cabinets) > 500,000 h according to IEC 1709 (SN 29 500) Polyamide PA, color green 0.2 kg, approximately 22.5 x 99 x 114.5 mm (0.886 x 3.898 x 4.508 in.)
-25°C to +70°C [-13°F to +158°F] (> +60°C [+140°F] derating) -40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F) Up to 95% at +25°C (+77°F), no condensation < 15 Hz, amplitude ±2.5 mm/15 Hz - 150 Hz, 2.3 g 30 g all space directions 2 (according to EN 50 178) 3K3 (according to EN 60 721)
G
Conformance With EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) Noise Immunity According to EN 61000-6-2: Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
EN 61000-4-23)
Electromagnetic HF Àeld
EN 61000-4-32)
Fast transients (burst)
EN 61000-4-43)
Surge current loads (surge)
EN 61000-4-53)
Conducted interference
EN 61000-4-62)
Voltage dips
EN 61000-4-113)
Housing Contact discharge: Air discharge: Housing Frequency: Field strength: Input: Output: Signal:
I/O/S: Frequency: U0: Input:
Requirements EN 61 000-6-2
MINI-PS-12-24DC/24DC/1
4 kV 8 kV
> Level 3 8 kV 8 kV
80 - 1000 MHz 10 V/m
Level 3 80 - 2000 MHz 10 V/m
2 kV 2 kV 1 kV
asymmetrical5) asymmetrical5) asymmetrical5)
2 kV (Level 3) 2 kV (Level 3) 1 kV (Level 2)
2 kV 1 kV
asymmetrical5) symmetrical4)
2 kV (Level 3) 1 kV (Level 3)
asymmetrical5)
Level 3 0.15 - 80 MHz 10 V
0.15 - 80 MHz 10 V 30% reduction of the input voltage for 0.5 periods
See Input Data: Mains buffering > 20 ms
EN 55011
Class A6)
EN 55011 (EN 55022) Class B7)
Radio interference emission EN 55011
Class A6)
EN 55011 (EN 55022) Class B7)
Noise Emission According to EN 50081-2: Radio interference voltage
EN 55011 corresponds to CISPR11/EN 55022 corresponds to CISPR22 EN 61000 corresponds to IEC 1000 2)
Criterion A: Normal operating characteristics within the speciÀed limits. 3) Criterion B: Temporary adverse effects on the operating characteristics, which the device corrects automatically.
4) symmetrical: Cable 5) asymmetrical: Cable 6) Class 7) Class
A: B:
PHOENIX CONTACT page 3 of 8
to cable to ground
Industrial applications Industrial and domestic applications
Power Supply Unit, Primary Switched, Narrow Design – MINI-PS-12-24DC/24DC/1
4. Device View, Connections, and Control Elements
Figure 04
5. Safety Notes and Warning Instructions
AC input: 10 - 32 V DC input voltage (0.2 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 solid) (0.2 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 stranded) (25 - 14 AWG) Internal fuse 6.3 A
To ensure that the device can be operated safely and all functions can be used, please read these instructions carefully.
DC output: 24 V DC output voltage (default), can be set from 22.5 - 28.5 V DC using potentiometer (0.2 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 solid) (0.2 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 stranded) (25 - 14 AWG) The device is idling-proof and short-circuit-proof. DC OK output active Potentiometer 22.5 - 28.5 V DC DC OK LED Universal latching foot for EN DIN rails
Installation and startup must only be carried out by qualiÀed personnel. The relevant country-speciÀc regulations (e.g., VDE, DIN) must also be observed. Before startup it is particularly important to ensure that: • All supply lines have sufÀcient fuse protection and are the correct size. • All output cables are the correct size for the maximum device output current or have separate fuse protection. • SufÀcient convection is ensured.
PHOENIX CONTACT page 4 of 8
Power Supply Unit, Primary Switched, Narrow Design – MINI-PS-12-24DC/24DC/1
6. Installation 6.1. Mounting The power supply unit can be snapped onto all DIN rails according to EN 60715. The device must be mounted horizontally (input terminal blocks facing downwards). Installation Dimensions To ensure suf¿cient convection, a minimum spacing of 5 cm (1.969 in.) to other modules is required above and below the device.
Figure 05
22.5 mm (0.886 in.)
Installation depth: 106 mm [4.173 in.] (+ DIN rail) 114.5 mm (4.508 in.) 106 mm (4.173 in.)
Figure 06
Mounting: Place the module with the DIN rail guideway on the top edge of the DIN rail and then snap it downwards.
Mounting
Removal
Removal: Release the snap-on catch using a screwdriver and then detach the module from the bottom edge of the DIN rail.
Figure 07
PHOENIX CONTACT page 5 of 8
Power Supply Unit, Primary Switched, Narrow Design – MINI-PS-12-24DC/24DC/1
Connecting Cable: The device is equipped with COMBICON connectors. This reliable user-friendly connection method enables quick device connection and visible isolation of the electrical connection, if required. Only operate connectors when the power is switched off.
The following cable cross sections can be connected: Input: Output: Signal:
Solid [mm2] 0.2 - 2.5 0.2 - 2.5 0.2 - 2.5
Stranded [mm2] 0.2 - 2.5 0.2 - 2.5 0.2 - 2.5
AWG
Torque [Nm] [Ib in] 25 - 14 0.5 - 0.6 4.4 - 5.3 25 - 14 0.5 - 0.6 4.4 - 5.3 25 - 14 0.5 - 0.6 4.4 - 5.3
For reliable and safe-to-touch connections: Strip 7 mm (0.28 in.) from the connector ends.
7 mm (0.28 in.)
Figure 09
6.3. Input (, Figure 9) The 12 - 24 V DC connection is made using the "+" and "-" screw connections. Protecting the Primary Side The device must be installed according to the speciÀcations of EN 60 950. Device protection is not required, as an internal fuse is present.
If the internal fuse is blown, this is most probably due to a device fault. In this case, the device should be checked in the factory.
PHOENIX CONTACT page 6 of 8
Power Supply Unit, Primary Switched, Narrow Design – MINI-PS-12-24DC/24DC/1
6.4. Output (, Figure 9) The 24 V DC connection is made using the "+" and "-" screw connections on the screw connection . The output voltage set upon delivery is 24 V DC. The output voltage can be adjusted from 22.5 to 28.5 V DC on the potentiometer . Protecting the Secondary Side: The device is electronically short-circuit-proof and idling-proof. In the event of an error, the output voltage is limited to a maximum of 35 V DC. It should be ensured that all output cables are the correct size for the maximum output current or have separate fuse protection. The cable cross sections in the secondary circuit should be large enough to keep the voltage drops on the cables as low as possible. Active Signal Output (, Figure 10) The 24 V DC signal is between the "DC OK" and "-" connection terminal blocks and can be loaded with 20 mA maximum. This signal output indicates that the output voltage has fallen below 21.5 V DC when "active high" changes to "low". The DC OK signal is isolated from the power output. This ensures that a separate supply does not enter from devices connected in parallel. The 24 V DC signal can be connected directly to a logic input for evaluation. Signaling The active DC OK switching output and the DC OK LED provide function monitoring. Green "DC OK" LED
Status 1 ON
Active DC OK U = +24 V switching output (with reference to "-") Meaning
Normal operation of the power supply unit UOUT > 21.5 V
24 V DC 20 mA
DC OK
Figure 10
UOUT = 24 V UOUT [V] UN
24
Status 2 OFF
1
U= 0V (with reference to "-") UOUT 21.5 V DC • Secondary load short circuit or overload • No mains voltage or device fault
7. Installation 7.1. Output Characteristic Curve The device can supply a nominal output current of 1 A up to an ambient temperature of 60°C (140°F). In the event of heavier loads the working point demonstrates the U/I characteristic curve shown in Figure 11. On an overload or short circuit, the entire output current is provided permanently at a reduced output voltage. Once the overload or short circuit has been removed, the entire set secondary voltage is available again.
IN
IOUT [A]
Figure 11 The U/I characteristic curve ensures that both heavy capacitive loads and devices with DC/DC converters can be supplied by MINI POWER in the input circuit without any problems. Connected fuses are reliably tripped. The selectivity in your system conÀguration is ensured at all times.
PHOENIX CONTACT page 7 of 8
Power Supply Unit, Primary Switched, Narrow Design – MINI-PS-12-24DC/24DC/1
7.2. Temperature Response The device can supply a nominal output current of 1 A up to an ambient temperature of 60°C (140°F). The output power must be decreased by 2.5% per Kelvin temperature increase for ambient temperatures above +60°C (140°F). At ambient temperatures above +70°C (+158°F) or in the event of a thermal overload, the device reduces the output power to protect itself and returns to normal operation once it has cooled down. 7.3. Parallel Operation Devices of the same type can be connected in parallel to increase both redundancy and power. The default setting does not have to be adjusted. If the output voltage is adjusted, an even current distribution can be ensured by precisely setting all power supply units that are operated in parallel to the same output voltage. To ensure symmetrical current distribution we recommend that all cable connections from the power supply unit to the DIN rail are the same length and have the same cross section. Depending on the system, for parallel connection of more than two power supply units a protective circuit should be installed at each individual device output (e.g., decoupling diode or DC fuse). This prevents high return currents in the event of a secondary device fault. 7.4. Redundancy Operation Redundant connections are designed for supplying systems, which place particularly high requirements on operational safety. If a fault occurs in the primary circuit of the Àrst power supply unit, the second device automatically takes over the complete power supply without interruption, and vice versa. For this purpose, the power supply units to be connected in parallel must be large enough that the total current requirements of all loads can be fully met by one power supply unit. External decoupling diodes are required for 100% redundancy.
UOUT = 24 V
1
0 0
20
40
60
Ambient temperature [°C]
Figure 12
MINI 24 V/1 A
MINI 24 V/1 A
=1A
Figure 13
MINI 24 V/1 A
MINI 24 V/1 A
=2A
7.5. Increasing Power The output current can be increased to n x IN where n is the number of devices connected in parallel. Parallel connection for increasing power is used when extending existing systems. A parallel connection is recommended if the power supply unit does not cover the current consumption of the most powerful load. Otherwise, the loads should be divided over independent individual devices. A maximum of Àve devices can be connected in parallel.
PHOENIX CONTACT page 8 of 8
Figure 14
DATASHEET
EB 12-115
The rechargeable batteries are lead-lead dioxide systems. The dilute sulfuric acid electrolyte is absorbed by separators and thus immobilized. Should the battery be accidentally overcharged producing hydrogen and oxygen, special one-way valves allow the gases to escape thus avoiding excessive pressure build-up. Otherwise, the battery is completely sealed and is, therefore, maintenance-free, leak proof and usable in any position.
Battery Construction Component
Positive plate
Negative plate
Container
Cover
Safety valve
Terminal
Separator
Electrolyte
Raw material
Lead dioxide
Lead
ABS
ABS
Rubber
Copper
Fiberglass
Sulfuric acid
General Feature z
z z z
z
Performance Characteristics
Absorbent Glass Mat(AGM) technology for efficient gas recombination of up to 99% and freedom from electrolyte maintenance or water adding. Not restricted for air transport-complies with IATA/ICAO Special Provision A67. UL-recognized component. Can be mounted in any orientation.
z z
Computer designed lead, calcium tin alloy grid for high power density. Long service life, float or cyclic applications. Maintenance-free operation.
z
Low self discharge.
Capacity 77°F(25ć) Internal Resistance
120Ah
10 hour rate (11.5Aǃ10.5V)
115Ah
5 hour rate (20.4Aǃ10.5V)
102Ah
1 hour rate (72Aǃ9.6V)
72Ah
Full charged Battery77°F(25ć)˖5Pȍ
Capacity affected by Temperature (20 hour rate) Self-Discharge
68°F(20ć)
SPECIFICATION
20 hour rate (6Aǃ10.5V)
104eF(40ć
102%
77eF(25ć
100%
32eF(10ć
85%
5eF(-15ć
65%
Capacity after 3 month storage
90%
Capacity after 6 month storage
80%
Capacity after 12month storage
60%
Max. discharge current77°F(25ć):
Nominal voltage ĂĂĂĂĂĂ 12V Number of cell ĂĂĂĂĂĂ 6
f
Float˖13.6̚13.8 V/77eF/(25ć)
Charge (Constant Voltage)
Length(mm/inch) ĂĂĂĂĂĂ 410/16.1 Width(mm/inch ĂĂĂĂĂĂ 176/6.93 Height(mm/inch) ĂĂĂĂĂĂ 227/8.94 Total Height(mm/inch) ĂĂĂĂ 227/8.94 Approx. Weight(kg/lbs) ĂĂĂĂ 33.8/74.5
850A(5S)
Cycle:14.5̚14.9 V/77°F/(25Ԩ) Max.Current˖30A
DischargeConstant Current (Amperes at 77°F(25ć)
(QG3RLQW 9ROWV&HOO 9
f
f
PLQ
PLQ
K
K
K
K
K
PLQ PLQ
9
9
9 9
ć (QG3RLQW 9ROWV&HOO 9
7HUPLQDO 0
PLQ
K
K
K
K
PLQ PLQ
PLQ PLQ
9
9
9
9
8QLW PP
(Note)The above characteristics data are average values obtained Within three charge/discharge cycles not the minimum values.
Page 1 of 2
Anda-Olsen AS
Breivik Industrivei 47, 6018 Aalesund, Norway Breivika Tel. Te +47 70 17 89 70. Fax +47 70 17 89 71 po
[email protected] www.anda-olsen.no
DATASHEET
EB 12-115
U&$
9
%DWWU\YROWDJH 9
OXPH &KDUJHGYR
&KDUJHYROWDJH
'LVFKDUJHFKDUDFWHULVWLF ć
&RQVWDQWYROWDJHFKDUJLQJFKDUDFWHULVWLF &$ć
9ROWDJH
&XUUHQW
&KDUJHG 9ROXPH
FKDUJHFKDUDFWHULVWLFFXUYH
$ $ $
$
&KDUJLQJFXUUHQW
$ $
$
PLQ
K
'LVFKDUJHWLPH
&KDUJLQJWLPH˄KRXUV
7HPSHUDWXUHHIIHFWVRQIORDWOLIH
&\FOHVHUYLFHOLIHLQUHODWLRQWRGHSWKRIGLVFKDUJH
&DSDFLW\
/LIH \HDUV
9FHOO
'2'
'HSWKRIGLVFKDUJH
'2'
7HPSHUDWXUH ć
99
&<& /( 86(
67$1 '%< 86(
ć
ć
ć
&DSDFLW\
7HVWLQJFRQGLWLRQVIORDWLQJYROWDJH WR9FHOO
7HPSHUDWXUHHIIHFWVRQFDSDFLW\
/LIHFKDUDFWHULVWLFVRIVWDQGE\XVH
6WRUDJHWLPH PRQWKV
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH ć
&DSDFLW\
&DSDFLW\
99
6HOIGLVFKDUJHFKDUDFWHULVWLF
9FHOO
99
99
&KDUJLQJ9ROWDJH
5HODWLRQVKLSEHWZHHQFKDUJLQJYROWDJHDQGWHPSHUDWXUH
1XPEHURIF\FOHV F\FOHV
& & &
& &
/LIH \HDU
7HPSHUDWXUH ć Page 2 of 2
Anda-Olsen AS
Breivik Industrivei 47, 6018 Aalesund, Norway Breivika Tel. Te +47 70 17 89 70. Fax +47 70 17 89 71 po
[email protected] www.anda-olsen.no
English Important Please read this manual immediately on receipt of battery before unpacking and installing. Failure to comply with these instructions will render any warranties null and void.
Care for your safety No smoking, no naked flames, no sparks
Shield eyes
Electrical hazard
Danger
Electrolyte is corrosive
Clean all acid splash in eyes or on skin with plenty of clean water. Then seek medical help. Acid on clothing is to be washed with water.
Re-cycle scrap batteries. Contains lead
Risk of explosion or fire. Avoid any short circuit. Metallic parts under voltage on the battery, do not place tools or items on top of the battery.
Handling
Keep flames away
Tools
AGM batteries are supplied in a fully charged state and must be unpacked carefully to avoid very high short-circuit currents between terminals of opposite polarity. Use lifting hooks compatible with the plastic handles on the cell/monobloc.
In case of accidental overcharge a flammable gas can leak off the safety vent.
Use tools with insulated handles.
Discharge any possible static electricity from clothes by touching an earth connected part.
Remove rings, wristwatch and articles of clothing with metal parts that may come into contact with the battery terminals.
RECEIVING THE SHIPMENT Carefully examine the consignment upon arrival for any signs of transit damage and that it agrees with the materials list or consignment note. Be very careful not to discard inadvertently any accessories connected in the packing material. Batteries contain sulphuric acid in glass fibre separators. Use rubber gloves when handing broken or damaged containers in case of acid leakage.
STORAGE Store the battery at a dry, clean and preferably cool location. As the batteries are supplied charged, storage time is limited. In order to easily charge the batteries after prolonged storage, it is advised not to store it more than: 6 months at 20°C, 4 months at 30°C, 2 months at 40°C. A refreshing charge shall be performed after this time at 2.27-2.30 V/cell at 20°C for 96 hours or until the charged current does not vary for a 3 hour period. The necessity of a refreshing charge can also be determined by measuring the open circuit voltage of a stored battery. Refreshing charge is advised if the voltage drops below 2.07 V/cell. Failure to observe these conditions may result in greatly reduced capacity and service life.
INSTALLATION Install in clean, dry area. AGM batteries product releases minimal amounts of gas during normal operation (gas recombination efficiency ≥ 95%) . It can be installed near the main equipment. Batteries must be installed in accordance with EN 50272-2 standard.
2
Read instructions
www.anda-olsen.no
Do not place or drop metal objects on the battery.
Temperature Avoid placing the battery in a hot place or in front of a window. The battery will give the best performance and service life when working at a temperature between 20°C and 25°C. The usual operating temperature is between –10°C and +45°C. Limits are comprised between –30°C and +45°C.
Ventilation Under normal conditions gas release is very low and natural ventilation is sufficient for cooling purposes and inadvertent overcharge, enabling AGM batteries to be used safely in offices and with main equipment. However care must be taken to ensure adequate ventilation when placed in cabinets.
Security All installation and ventilation must comply with the current national regulations and norms (EN 50272-2).
Mounting Battery racks or cabinets/boxes are recommended for proper installation. Assemble the rack according to instructions. Place the battery blocks or cells on the rack and arrange the positive and the negative terminals for connection according to the wiring diagram. Check that all contact surfaces are clean and apply the block or cell connectors and the terminal screws. Tighten the screws securely. Follow the polarity to avoid short circuiting of cell groups. Finally connect the battery terminals. It is important that the battery is mounted firmly.
Torque The maximum torque load of intercell connector bolts is 8 to 10 Nm for M6 screw and 15 to 17 Nm max. for M8 screw. A loose connector can cause problems in charger adjustment, erratic battery performance, possible damage to the battery and/or personal injury. Finally fix the connector covers.
CELLS IN PARALLEL STRINGS
DISCHARGING
Cells of the same ampere hour rating may be connected in parallel to give higher current capability. As string currents become more unbalanced the higher the discharge current, it is recommended that for high current applications (less than 1h) no more than 4 parallel strings are used.
CHARGING Float Voltage The recommended float charge voltage is 2.28 volts per cell at 20°C. Following a commission charge and after 6 months continuous charge at the recommended float voltage, individual cell voltages will stabilise within ±4.5% of the mean applied voltage. However, immediately following commissioning and for the initial 6 months of continuous float charge, individual cell voltage values outside the above tolerance may be observed without adverse effect. There is no relationship between a cell’s float voltage and its discharge capacity. Cells are perfectly capable of giving their discharge capacity even when outside the ±4.5% range.
End of Discharge Voltage The end of discharge voltage must be limited to the values listed below 1.65 Vpc for a 1 hr discharge 1.70 Vpc for a 5 hr discharge 1.75 Vpc for a 8 hr discharge 1.80 Vpc for a discharge between 10 and 20 hours. A low voltage disconnect or timer is recommended to prevent deep discharge.
Discharged Cells PowerSafe batteries must not be left in a discharged condition after supplying the load, but must be immediately returned to float recharge mode. Failure to observe these conditions may result in greatly reduced service life.
Accidental Deep Discharge When the battery is completely discharged the consumption of sulphuric acid is total and the electrolyte consists only of water. The sulphatation of the plates is at its maximum, increasing considerably the cell's internal resistance.
After 6 months service, should any individual cell or monobloc show a continuing reduction or increase in voltage outside the above limits over 3 successive monthly periods, Enersys inc should be contacted for advice.
- Important notice : this type of deep discharge will provoke a premature deterioration of the battery and a noticeable effect on life expectancy.
When the average ambient temperature deviates more than ±5ºC from the reference temperature (20°C), it is necessary to adjust the float voltage as follows:
- on capacity
Temperature
Float voltage range per cell
0°C
2.33-2.36V
10°C
2.30-2.33V
20°C
2.27-2.30V
25°C
2.25-2.28V
30°C
2.24-2.27V
35°C
2.22-2.25V
40°C
2.21-2.24V
If the charger does not permit an adjustment of float voltage in relation to the temperature, it is possible to set a float voltage value according to the temperature ranges as indicated in the last table of this publication.
0°C
5°C
10°C
15°C
20°C
25°C
30°C
35°C
40°C
5 mins 0.81 to 59 mins
0.87
0.91
0.96
1
1.03
1.06
1.08
1.1
0.87
0.91
0.93
0.97
1
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05
Discharge Time
1h to 24 h - on life
Operation of valve regulated batteries at temperatures higher than 20°C will reduce life expectancy.
AGM batteries are maintenance free, sealed, lead acid batteries and need no water addition.
Fast Recharge Occasionally (4 or 5 times a year) the battery may be recharged at 2.40V per cell with a current limited to 10% of the 10 hr capacity. Fast charging should be stopped after approx. 10 or 15 hrs.
Ripple Current Unacceptable levels of ripple current from the charger or the load can cause permanent damage and a reduction in service life. It is recommended to limit the continuous ripple current to 0.05 C10 (in amperes) as recommended value (never exceed 0.1 C10)
State of Charge The battery state of charge can be determined approximately by measuring the open circuit voltage after the battery has been at rest for a minimum of 24 hours at 20°C. Voltage
100%
2.13 to 2.14 V/Cell
80%
2.09 to 2.11 V/Cell
60%
2.06 to 2.08 V/Cell
40%
2.02 to 2.04 V/Cell
20%
1.97 to 2.00 V/Cell
www.anda-olsen.no
Correction factor of the capacity, according to the temperature, the reference temperature being 20°C.
MAINTENANCE/CHECKS
Charging Current The charging current is self limiting.
State of charge
The effect of temperature
The containers and lids shall be kept dry and free from dust. Cleaning must be done only with a damp cotton cloth. Check monthly that total voltage at battery terminals is (N x 2.27-2.30 V) for a temperature of 20°C. (N being the number of cells in the battery). Make annual readings of the voltages of cells making up the battery. Keep a logbook to record values, power outages, discharge tests, etc. An autonomy control can be effected once a year.
TECHNICAL DATA OF CHARGING WITH A CONSTANT VOLTAGE If the charger does not permit an adjustment of the float voltage in relation with the temperature, it is possible to set a float voltage value and a recharging voltage value according to the temperature ranges as indicated in the table hereafter : Temperature (°C) Float Voltage (Vpc) -10°C to 0°C
2.40 V
Recharging Voltage (Vpc) 2.50 V
0°C to 10°C
2.35 V
2.45 V
10°C to 20°C
2.30 V
2.40 V
20°C to 30°C
2.26 V
2.35 V
30°C to 40°C
2.23 V
2.30 V
3
This page left intentionally blank
Index divider: Section 2 N
Document Type:
Document name:
SYSTEM USER MANUAL
BRI – D52001 – 01IU
Project Title:
Date First Issue:
Author:
Revision:
08.09.2011
EKI
A
GMDSS MF/HF Sailor 6000
Enclosed documents from sub-supplier & revision history: Revision: (A,B,C,……..)
Description / Enclosed documents:
Date: (dd.mm.yyyy)
Sign.:
A
Sailor_6300_GMDSS MF-HF_User_manual 98-131070_Rev-A1 Comron_AT82_Antenna_Specification Navcom_A157S_Antenna_Specification Sailor_6006_Message terminal_User manual_98-132519 Rev-A Sailor_H1252A-B_Printer_Installation and user manual_98-124013THR-A
08.09.2011
EKI
Component picture:
Ulstein Power & Control AS
This document and its content is the property of ULSTEIN. Nonpublic information contained herein shall be treated as Confidential Information. No use, copying, citation or publication of this document or its content is permitted without prior written consent from ULSTEIN. Any conflicts arising from unauthorized use shall be governed by the laws of Norway.
File Name:
Page:
BRI-D52001-01IU (A) System User Manual.doc
Page 1 of 1
SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC 150W/250W/500W User manual
Document number: 98-131070-DraftA1 Release date: January 31, 2011
Disclaimer Any responsibility or liability for loss or damage in connection with the use of this product and the accompanying documentation is disclaimed by Thrane & Thrane. The information in this manual is provided for information purposes only, is subject to change without notice and may contain errors or inaccuracies. Manuals issued by Thrane & Thrane are periodically revised and updated. Anyone relying on this information should acquire the most current version e.g. from http://www.thrane.com or from the distributor. Thrane & Thrane is not responsible for the content or accuracy of any translations or reproductions, in whole or in part, of this manual from any other source.
Copyright © 2011 Thrane & Thrane A/S. All rights reserved. Printed in Denmark.
Trademark Acknowledgements •
Thrane & Thrane is a registered trademark of Thrane & Thrane A/S in the European Union and the Unites States of America.
•
SAILOR is a registered trademarks of Thrane & Thrane A/S.
•
Other product and company names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners.
GPL notification The software included in this product contains copyrighted software that is licensed under the GPL/LGPL. The verbatim licenses can be found online at: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0.html http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html You may obtain the complete corresponding source code from us for a period of three years after our last shipment of this product, which will be no earlier than December 31, 2015, by sending a money order or check for DKK 50 to: SW Technology/GPL Compliance, Thrane & Thrane A/S, Lundtoftegaardsvej 93D 2800 Lyngby DENMARK Please write "source for product SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC" in the memo line of your payment.
You may also find a copy of the source at http://www.thrane.com/foss. This offer is valid to anyone in receipt of this information.
Warranties Any attempt to install or execute software not supplied by Thrane & Thrane on this device will result in the warranty being void. Any attempt to modify the software on this device in a way not specified by Thrane & Thrane will result in the warranty being void.
Safety summary The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment. Thrane & Thrane assumes no liability for the customer's failure to comply with these requirements. GROUND THE EQUIPMENT To minimise shock hazard, the equipment chassis and cabinet must be connected to an electrical ground and the cable instructions must be followed. DO NOT OPERATE IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE Do not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases or fumes. Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard. KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS Operating personnel must not remove equipment covers. Component replacement and internal adjustment must be made by qualified maintenance personnel. Do not service the unit with the power cable connected. Always disconnect and discharge circuits before touching them.
RF exposure hazards and instructions Your Thrane & Thrane radio generates electromagnetic RF (radio frequency) energy when transmitting. To ensure that you and those around you are not
iv
1
exposed to excessive amounts of energy and thus to avoid health hazards from excessive exposure to RF energy, all persons must obey the following: Caution!
Never touch the Antenna Tuning Unit or feeder wire when the MF/HF radio is transmitting. High voltage will cause death or erious injury is present at the locations shown in the illustration below.
MF/HF
SAILOR 638x Antenna Tuning Unit
Service General service must be done by skilled service personnel. Caution!
Electrical shock hazard. Do not open the equipment. Only skilled service personnel may service and repair the equipment.
Warranty limitation The radio is not a user maintainable unit, and under no circumstances should the unit be opened except by authorized personnel. Unauthorized opening of the unit will invalidate the warranty.
v
Emergency calls Lif ov er iftt CCov over Press RED Button until beep sounds continuously (more than 3 seconds) Press Use the HAND HANDSSET for voice calling
AYDAY MAYDAY-M AYDAY-M -MA -MA This is
NA ME-NA ME-NA ME NAME-NA ME-NAME-NA ME-NAME CAL ALLLSIGN
OWN ID SHIP‘s NAME: CALLSIGN:
or other IDENTIFICATION
M MSI
MMSI:
(If the initial alert is sent by DSC)
MAYDAY NA ME of the VESSEL in distress NAME CAL AT ION ALLLSIGN or other IDEN IDENTT IFIC IFICA M MS I (If the initial alert is sent by DSC)
POSIT ION ITION it ude and longit ude given as lat atit itude longitude or If latitude and longitude are not known or if time is insufficient, in relation to a known geographical location NA TURE of distress NATURE A E required Kind of SSISTANC ANCE OR MAT ION Any other useful INF INFOR ORM
DI OM MUNIC AT ION DISSTRE TRESSS and CCOM OMM UNICA FREQUENCIE FREQUENCIESS DSC Radi ot elephon NBDP adiot otelephon elephonyy ____________________________________ ----Channel 16 VHF Channel 70 2174.5 kHz 2182.0 kHz 2187.5 kHz MF 4177.5 kHz 4125.0 kHz HF4 4207.5 kHz 6268.0 kHz 6215.0 kHz 6312.0 kHz HF6 8291.0 kHz 8376.5 kHz 8414.5 kHz HF8 12520.0 kHz 12290.0 kHz 12577.0 kHz HF12 16420.0 kHz 16695.0 kHz 16804.5 kHz HF16 ____________________________________ Remember to use the correct HF-procedures Don‘t forget your EPIRB is the secondary means of alerting 99-132140
vi
Preface
2
Radio for occupational use The SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC fulfils the requirements of the EC directive 1999/5/EC, Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment and is intended for use in maritime environment. SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC is designed for occupational use only and must be operated by licensed personnel only. SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC is not intended for use in an uncontrolled environment by general public.
Manual overview This manual has the following chapters: •
Introduction contains a description of the MF/HF radio and its components.
•
Operation explains how to start up the radio, make and receive voice and DSC calls, including how to handle multiple sessions, Scan, Watch and Replay.
•
Service & maintenance contains support information including lists of accessories and a troubleshooting guide.
•
Appendix with Declaration of conformity and ITU channels.
vii
Related documents Title and description
Document number
SAILOR 6301 MF/HF Control Unit, Installation guide
98-132396
SAILOR System 6000 MF/HF DSC, 150/250 W, Installation manual
98-130890
SAILOR System 6000 MF/HF DSC, 500 W, Installation manual
98-1xxxxx
SAILOR 6300 MF/HF Radiotelex, User Manual
98-132519
SAILOR 6101 and 6103 Alarm Panel, Installation and user manual
98-130981
Emergency call sheet
98-132369
viii
Table of contents Chapter 1
Introduction SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC .................................................... 1 Accessories available .........................................................5
Chapter 2
Operation Overview ............................................................................7 General use and navigation ...............................................7 Basic MF/HF radio communication ....................................14 Watch ................................................................................16 DSC calls ...........................................................................17 Handling multiple calls — DSC and voice .......................... 32 Phone book ...................................................................... 34 Radiotelex ........................................................................36 Replay function ................................................................ 37 Setup ...............................................................................38
Chapter 3
Service & maintenance Contact for support ........................................................... 47 Maintenance .................................................................... 47 Warranty ..........................................................................54
App. A
ITU channels
Glossary
......................................................................................... 57
Index
.........................................................................................59
ix
Table of contents
x
1111
Chapter 1
Introduction
Introduction
1
SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC The SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC is a modular and flexible MF/HF radio that can be customized to your specific needs for MF/HF communication on workboats, high seas fishing vessels and merchant vessels of all kinds. It offers simplex and semi-duplex SSB radiotelephony in the maritime mobile frequency bands from 150 kHz to 30 MHz. Services include voice transmissions, watch and scan function, DSC operations (Distress calls, position info, Distress relay and more), 6-channel DSC watch keeping receiver, AM Broadcast and telex (optional). The large display shows Rx and Tx frequencies and status, MMSI number, position information, system and channel properties, including indicators for transmission power and received signal strength. It is easy to read from almost all angles and the display light can be adapted to dark environments. Then red text is shown on a black background providing a good visibility event at night while protecting your night vision. DSC operations are made using the four soft keys next to the display. The MF/HF radio can replay the last 240 s of received voice messages. This is a useful feature to minimize misunderstandings and to record messages when the radio is unattended. The SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC has an Ethernet interface to connect to other equipment for control and monitoring. The SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC is available as a basic MF radio that can be ugraded with an HF option and a telex option. Telexes are sent using the SAILOR 6006 Message Terminal.
1
Chapter 1: Introduction
Features Rugged and reliable design. Full power range on all ITU channels: 1.6 — 30 MHz for 150 W, 250 W and
500 W systems (Reduced power in the frequency range 1.6 — 4.0 MHz fpr 500 W). Powerful transceiver (150, 250 or 500 W). Outdoor automatic antenna tuning unit. Radiotelex using the SAILOR 6006 Message Terminal Optionally 6 DSC Distress frequencies in one unit. Intelligent scanning for Voice, DSC and radio telex (optional). Ethernet with ThraneLINK. Compliant with GMDSS in sea areas A2, A3 and A4 (Wheelmark). Fulfills DSC specification ITU493-13.
System overview The MF/HF radio consists of a Control Unit with a handset, a Transceiver Unit and an automatic Antenna Tuning Unit. The MF/HF radio is available in three power classes: System
Control Unit
Transceiver Unit
SAILOR 6310
SAILOR 6301 Control Unit DSC Class Aa
SAILOR 6361 MF/HF 150 W
SAILOR 6320 SAILOR 6350
SAILOR 6381 ATU
SAILOR 6363 MF/HF 250 W SAILOR 6364 MF/HF 500 W
a. An additional SAILOR 6301 Control Unit can be added.
2
Antenna Tuning Unit
SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC
SAILOR 6383 ATU
1111
Chapter 1: Introduction
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
10
Introduction
Controls on the front 5
11
12
1. Loudspeaker. 2. Four soft keys with function title in the display. 3. Large TFT color display. 4. Alphanumerical keys to enter Rx or Tx frequency or text strings. 5. Rx/Tx Key to enter Tx or RX frequency. 6. Connector for handset or handmicrophone. 7. Button for sending a DSC Distress alert. 8. RF gain control (AGC/IF). 9. Volume wheel knob with key-press function for power on/off. 10. Selector wheel knob with key-press function for radio operation and navigation. 11. Mode key to select the primary work mode: SSB, AM Broadcast, DSC, Telex. 12. Replay button to play back up to 240 s voice message.
SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC
3
Chapter 1: Introduction
Display overview The picture shows the display after start-up. The display holds various fields of information, depending on the currently selected function. 1. Functions you can select with the soft keys. If there are more than 4 functions in the list press the soft key MORE to display further functions.
1
CALL ALERT
2
SQ LO
3
;U
4357.0 4065.0 SSB 401 TAG RX
kHz/TX
RELAY
4
MMSI: 123456789 LAT: N 12°34.5678 (GPS) MORE LON: E 123°45.6789 22:07
5 6
2. System property icons and engagement status. 3. Current receive and transmit frequency. 4. Channel properties with status and indicators for received signal strength (Rx) and transmission power (Tx). 5. Service line containing mode of operation and channel number. 6. DSC window with MMSI number, position information and source. For a detailed description of the information shown for each of the functions available see the chapter Operation on page 7.
4
SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC
1111
Chapter 1: Introduction
Accessory SAILOR 6201 Handset with cradle
SAILOR 6203 Handset with cradle
Description One SAILOR 6201 Handset with cradle is included in the delivery of the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC. If needed, you can connect another 2 SAILOR 6201 Handsets. SAILOR 6203 with cradle, waterproof to IPx6.
SAILOR 6202 Hand Microphone
You can use the SAILOR 6202 Hand Microphone (waterproof to IPx6 and IPx8) instead of the handset.
SAILOR 6208 Connection Box
The SAILOR 6208 Connection Box is used for easy installation of an additional SAILOR 6301 Control Unit.
SAILOR 6209 Connection Box
The SAILOR 6209 Connection Box including Connection Cable 406209-941 is used for installation of external equipment:
SAILOR 6103 Multi Alarm Panel
Introduction
Accessories available
•
Alarm panels and GPS input
•
Additional SAILOR Handsets
With the SAILOR 6103 Multi Alarm Panel you can activate GMDSS Distress Alarms. The Multi Alarm Panel can be connected to the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC via the Ethernet interface (LAN connector, ThraneLINK).
Accessories available
5
Chapter 1: Introduction
Accessory
Description
SAILOR 6081 Power Supply Unit and Charger
The SAILOR 6081 Power Supply Unit and Charger provides DC power and charges automatically a connected battery.
System configuration - example MF/HF DSC Telex Aerial
MF/HF
SAILOR 608x Power Supply
250W MF/HF with 6 ch. Scanning DSC Watch receiver AILOR 6201 Handset
SAILOR 6201 Handset
SAILOR 636x Transceiver Unit (Optional) SAILOR 6270
SAILOR 6209 Accessory Connection Box
SAILOR 638x Antenna Tuning Unit
SAILOR 630x MF/HF Control Unit
Other Alarm Distress Alarm SAILOR 6209 Accessory Connection Box
(Optional) SAILOR 6208 Control Unit Connection Box
Telex option
GPS option 2182 select option
SAILOR 6103 Alarm Panel
SAILOR 6006 Message Terminal
Switch Box
9-131805-C
6
Accessories available
SAILOR 6001 Keyboard
SAILOR H1252B Printer
2222
Chapter 2
Operation
2
Operation
Overview In this chapter you find detailed instructions and guidelines for: •
General use and navigation
•
Basic MF/HF radio communication
•
Watch
•
DSC calls
•
Handling multiple calls — DSC and voice
•
Phone book
•
Replay function
•
Setup
General use and navigation When the MF/HF radio is powered on for the first time, typically during installation, the vessel’s MMSI number is entered. Hereafter the MMSI number is briefly displayed after power up. The MMSI is a unique, 9-digit identifier assigned to your ship. Caution!
Without a programmed MMSI number the Distress button will not work!
The message NO DSC (NO MMSI) is shown in the DSC window if the MMSI has not been programmed during installation.
7
Chapter 2: Operation
Power on, speaker volume and antenna tuning The MF/HF radio has a dual-function on/off wheel knob for power on/off and volume control.
Action
Procedure
Power on
Press the on/off wheel knob.
Power off
Press and hold the on/off wheel knob and follow the instructions in the display.
Speaker volume
Turn the volume wheel knob (clockwise = louder, counterclockwise = softer, until muted). When muted, ;U is shown in the display.
Volume of the To adjust the volume of the handset earpiece see handset earpiece Controller setup on page 44. Tuning the antenna unit
Press the PTT button on the speaker device. Tuning is automatically done •
after selection of a new frequency,
•
before any DSC transmission or
•
if the timer-defined transmission pause is exceeded.
The tuning time is from 0.1 s to 8 s.
SSB, AM BROADCAST, DSC or TELEX mode Press the Mode button to select a primary work and emission mode of the MF/HF radio.
8
General use and navigation
• • •
SSB: In this mode the MF/HF radio listens for voice an a single RX frequency and transmits on the corresponding TX frequency.
CALL ALERT
1794.0 2138.0
kHz/RX TX
294 AM: AM broadcast is a listen-only mode for RELAY SSB MMSI: 123456789 pleasure purposes. LAT: N 12°34.5678 (GPS) MORE LON: E 123°45.6789 22:07 DSC: The MF/HF radio monitors a single DSC channel to be able to receive DSC calls.
TELEX: The MF/HF radio monitors a single TELEX channel for telex communication using a SAILOR 6006A Message Terminal.
Furthermore the radio may be instructed to go into a specific mode under DSC subsequent communication or if a frequency is entered which only relates to a specific mode.
Radio settings and ITU channel selection •
To browse and select or enter settings use the selector wheel knob.
•
To select an ITU channel use the channel button and the selector wheel knob.
Entering Rx and Tx frequencies To enter RX and TX frequencies use RX/TX button and the keypad. •
First press on RX/TX button: Enter Rx frequency.
•
Second press on RX/TX button: Enter Tx frequency.
•
Long press on selector wheel knob: Edit mode to fine-tune frequencies. In SSB mode (Voice clarify), in 10 Hz steps. One more press changes the step size to 100 Hz.
General use and navigation
9
Operation
•
2222
Chapter 2: Operation
Chapter 2: Operation
Adjusting RF gain The RF gain is adjusted by the AGC and/or the manual RF gain control. In SSB telephony mode the AGC can be on (default) or off. In all other modes it is on. The manual RF gain is used alone or in combination with the AGC. For details how to switch AGC off see Radio setup on page 39. RF gain control knob turned fully •
clockwise: maximum RF gain setting
•
anti-clockwise: minimum RF gain setting
Manual RF gain is used alone or in combination with the AGC, the function is enabled in SSB telephony and disabled in all other modes. After entry of a new receive frequency the RF gain is set to maximum.
Position and MMSI Information The position and MMSI information for the CALL SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC radio is shown in the kHz/RX lower part of the radio’s display. The current ALERT TX (latest) position of the connected GPS, the UTC and position type, GPS Status and MMSI are RELAY SSB 294 displayed. MMSI: 123456789 LAT: N 12°34.5678 (GPS) MORE LON: E 123°45.6789 22:07
1794.0 2138.0
Entering the vessel’s position manually If you need to enter the vessel’s position and UTC of the position manually, do as follows: 1. Press the soft key POS. If it is not in the display, press the soft key MORE until POS appears. 2. Turn and press the selector wheel knob to select the value you want to change. Then use the keypad or press and turn the selector wheel knob to enter the current position or UTC time. The display shows (Man).
10
General use and navigation
2222
Chapter 2: Operation
3. Press the soft key SAVE to save the new value.
4. After you have entered a value manually or overruled the GPS input, a soft key UseGPS appears in the display if the GPS is available. Press this soft key if you decide to use the data from the connected GPS.
If the GPS was present and then disappears a warning appears in the display after 10 minutes. Follow the instructions on the screen.
Soft-key functions A number of functions of the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC are accessed using the four soft keys to the left of the display. The current function of a soft key is shown in the display next to the soft key. Use the soft key MORE to display further soft key functions.
CALL ALERT
1794.0 2138.0
kHz/ RX kHz/TX
RELAY SSB 294 MMSI: 123456789 LAT: N 12°34.5678 (GPS) MORE LON: E 123°45.6789 22:07
The following soft-key functions are available from top-level standby: Soft key Function CALL
Make DSC non-Distress calls
ALERT
Make a Distress call, categories can be assigned
DROBOS Distress relay call on behalf of someone else POS
Current GPS position, including UTC time and MMSI number
HI/LO
Switch between high and low power
PHBOOK Phone book WATCH
Dual watch, current frequencies plus 1 DSC frequency (2177 kHz)
SQLCH
Squelch enable or disable - depending on watch setup?
SETUP
Setup pages. For more details see Setup on page 38.
General use and navigation
11
Operation
5. Press the soft key EXIT to return to normal use.
Chapter 2: Operation
Channel information always available in the display For some functions and for the setup pages, EXIT the channel and radiotelephony information has moved to the bottom section of the display. You can change frequencies whenever the frequencies are displayed.
RADIO SETUP Scan Hang Time: OFF Scan Resume: 6 Priority Scan: ON Channel Mode: INT
;U
The frequencies displayed always reflect the 1794.0 DUP frequencies on which the radio is tuned into SSB 294 2138.0 for communication. If PTT is pressed the radio (Example: Radio setup) transmits on the displayed frequency. If a signal is received, it is received on the displayed frequency.
Engagement status The radio is engaged when an active DSC-initiated communication is ongoing, or communication is active on non-DSC initiated MF/HF operation: •
A new channel is selected
•
PTT is pressed or,
•
Voice signal is received (if squelch is enabled)
The engagement state is used to prohibit incoming DSC calls from taking over control of the transmitter channel, disrupting ongoing communication. When the radio is engaged in communication not initiated by DSC, this is indicated with the tab in the display. Engagement will automatically time-out on inactivity (in the absence of any of the listed events above), and after an inactivity time specified in DSC setup, Comm Inactivity on page 39. To terminate the engagement immediately press the soft key HOLD. Before the automatic disengagement, the tab will be inverted (white handset on black background). To prolong the engagement press the soft key ACTIVE.
12
General use and navigation
Speaker devices The MF/HF radio can be equipped with the following speaker devices: •
Additional SAILOR 6301 Control Unit
•
SAILOR 6201 Handset with cradle, microphone, ear piece and PTT (Push To Talk) button.
•
SAILOR 6202 Handmicrophone with PTT button.
See Controller setup on page 44 for managing the connected speaker devices.
Changing the display colors and dim function Red text on black background is available for optimal night vision. To dim the display backlight, e.g. to give comfortable night vision, press, hold and turn the selector wheel knob anti-clockwise. The display shows a brightness bar. At the brightness value 45 the display changes to night view with red text on black background. To return to day vision press, hold and turn the ALERT selector wheel knob clockwise until the display changes and it reaches the desired brightness. RELAY The radio has two colour themes: Black text on a white background (default) or white text on CALL black background. To change the color theme MORE see System setup on page 43.
SQ LO
4357.0 4065.0
;U RX TX
SSB CH 401 TAG MMSI: 123456789 LAT: N 12°34.5678 (GPS) LON: E 123°45.6789 22:07
Squelch on/off (soft key) Press the soft key SQLCH to toggle between squelch on and off. If it is not in the display, press the soft key MORE until SQL appears. SQL is displayed as a system property icon. The Squelch control is based on voice detection. When squelch is enabled, the receiver is muted in speech pauses. Squelch is automatically activated for scanning sequences.
General use and navigation
13
Operation
2222
Chapter 2: Operation
Chapter 2: Operation
Basic MF/HF radio communication You can make radio calls using the Handset or another speaker device. •
Ship-to-ship communication: Use simplex channels.
•
Ship-to-shore communication: Use duplex channels.
Only valid frequencies and channel numbers are accepted. For information on channels and frequencies available see ITU channels on page 55.
Quick guide to radio telephone calls 1. Check that the MF/HF radio is in SSB mode. If necessary, press the button MODE to switch to SSB. 2. Enter an RX and TX frequency, for example 2182 kHz, the international calling and Distress frequency for maritime radiotelephone communications on the marine MF bands.
14
•
First press on RX/TX button: Enter Rx frequency.
•
Second press on RX/TX button: Enter Tx frequency.
•
Long press on selector wheel knob: Edit mode to fine-tune frequencies. In SSB mode (Voice clarify), in 10 Hz steps. One more press changes the step size to 100 Hz.
Basic MF/HF radio communication
2222
Chapter 2: Operation
Operation
3. Take the handset off the hook and press the PTT button on the speaker device. Now the antenna is tuned and a tuning symbol is displayed.
Note
The radio tunes every time you press the PTT button. As long as the tuning symbol is in the display, the radio is not trasmitting. Wait until the tuning symbol has dissappeared, then press PTT to start talking. Tuning may take from 0.1 s to 8 s.
4. When the TX indicator lights up and the transmission power bar shows activity, the transmission is active. Always say “Over.” before releasing the PTT button. 5. To receive a radio signal, release the PTT button. When receiving a signal, the bar for received signal strength shows activity.
Receiving a radio telephone call When you hear your call name in the CALL loudspeaker, the symbol RX shows that the RX radio is receiving on the frequencies displayed ALERT kHz/TX and the bar for received signal strength shows activity. Proceed as follows: 294 RELAY SSB MMSI: 123456789 LAT: N 12°34.5678 (GPS) 1. Lift the Handset or take another speaker MORE LON: E 123°45.6789 22:07 device.
1794.0 2138.0
2. Press the PTT button and wait until the tune icon has disappeared. The symbol TX shows that the radio is transmitting on the frequencies displayed and the transmission power bar shows activity.
Basic MF/HF radio communication
15
Chapter 2: Operation
3. Repeat the name of the station calling you and say: “This is [your ship’s name]”. 4. Suggest a frequency pair by saying: “Frequencies [suggested frequencies]” and “Over.” and release the PTT button to allow the caller to confirm the suggested new frequencies. 5. Switch to the new frequencies using the RX/TX button and the keypad and begin your conversation. Press PTT only when you are talking.
Making a radio telephone call 1. Enter RX and TX frequencies or select an ITU channel.
CALL
2. Lift the Handset or take another speaker device.
ALERT
1794.0 2138.0
kHz/RX TX
294 RELAY SSB 3. Press the PTT button and wait until the MMSI: 123456789 LAT: N 12°34.5678 (GPS) tune icon has disappeared. The symbol MORE LON: E 123°45.6789 22:07 TX shows that the radio is transmitting on the frequencies displayed. The transmission power bar shows activity,
4. Say the name of the station you are calling three times. 5. Say: “This is [your ship’s name]” and “Over.” and release the PTT button to listen. The symbol RX shows that the radio is receiving on the working channel displayed. 6. When answered, agree upon a pair of frequencies. 7. Enter the new frequencies or ITU channel and start talking.
Watch The MF/HF radio radio has a dual watch function. The currently selected RX and TX frequencies and one DSC frequency (i.e. 2177 kHz) are watched.
16
•
To start the watch function press the soft key WATCH.
•
To stop the watch function press the soft key WATCH again or PTT on the speaking device.
Watch
DSC calls In this section of the manual you find information on: Sending, acknowledging and cancelling own Distress
•
DROBOS — Distress relay on behalf of someone else
•
Receiving Distress calls
•
DSC calls for communication
Operation
•
2222
Chapter 2: Operation
Sending, acknowledging and cancelling own Distress Distress management in MF/HF bands Distress messages can be sent in up to 6 bands for HF: 2 (2.2 MHz), 4 (4 MHz), 6 (6 MHz), 8 (8 MHz), 12 (12 MHz) and 16 (16 MHz) and 1 band for MF: 2 (2.2 MHz). To manage Distress messages and status use the status indicators for each frequency in the display. •
Empty rectangle: not yet transmitted.
•
Flashing rectangle: current action is ongoing.
•
Inverted rectangle with letter for action: Action is done.
!!! OWN DISTRESS !!! WAIT FOR REPLY 0:05 2 T 4 6 8 T 12 T 16 REPEAT IN: 2.15
The following actions can be displayed for each band during the distress procedure:
Example: 2, 8 and 12 are transmitted, 4, 6 and 16 are not yet transmitted.
Action
Description
Action
Description
T
Transmitting
V
Voice cancelling
A
Acknowledged
R
Received distress
C
Cancelled (DSC)
DSC calls
17
Chapter 2: Operation
To send an undesignated Distress alert 1. Lift the cover of the red Distress button and press and hold the Distress button for longer than 3 seconds. For short step-by-step instructions how to proceed when sending a Distress message see Emergency calls on page vi. When the Distress signal is sent, SSB, ;U QUIT and Tx appear in the display. A twoDISTR MMSI:223344556 LAT: N 12°34.5678 seconds beep tone is heard and the HOLD LON:E 123°45.6789 POS-TIME: 12:28 rectangle for the current band displays a UNDESIGNATED flashing, inverted T while sending. INFO 2 T 4 6 8 12 16 MODE: SSB TELEPHONY If you inadvertently transmit a DSC SSB Rx 2182.0 Distress alert press the soft key ANNUL. MORE Tx 2182.0 For detailed instructions how to cancel all Distress alerts see To cancel own Distress on page 20. 2. When a Distress acknowledgement is received in a band, the rectangle for this band shows an inverted A. Press the soft-key INFO and start radio communication on the frequency 2182 kHz (automatically set) to inform about your Distress situation. If no Distress acknowledgement is received within a period of 3,5 to Note 4,5 minutes, the Distress message will automatically be retransmitted. Transmitting order: 2 MHz, 8 MHz, 4 MHz, 6 MHz, 12 MHz, 16 MHz. Note
For an undesignated Distress message the subsequent communication is always voice communication.
To send a Distress alert with specified nature To include the Distress nature in the Distress alert do as follows: 1. From top-level standby press the soft key ALERT. If it is not in the display, press the soft key MORE until ALERT appears.
18
DSC calls
EXIT POS
DISTRESS CALL NAT: UNDESIGNATED LAT: 23°23.3234 N LON: 123°23.3234 W POS UTC: 12:34 PUSH DISTRESS
16
2222
Chapter 2: Operation
2. Enter the necessary information using the selector wheel knob or the keypad: Item
Description
Mode
Operation
Distress nature FIRE, EXPLOSION FLOODING COLLISION GROUNDING LISTING (in danger of capsizing) SINKING DISABLED (and adrift) UNDESIGNATED ABANDONING (ship) PIRACY (/armed robbery attack) MAN OVERBOARD Radio subcommunication mode: SSB or Telex FEC.
3. Then lift the cover of the red Distress button and push the Distress button for 3 seconds.
To receive acknowledgement of own Distress When the MF/HF radio receives an acknowledgement of Distress from another vessel or station, a 2-tone alarm sounds. The display shows a pop-up window with the MMSI number of the station who sent the Distress acknowledgement call. •
Press SILENCE or any other key to switch off the 2-tone alarm.
DSC calls
SILENCE
INT ; U DSC Call Received DISTRESS ACK FROM: 219005678 TAG RX DISTRESS/CALL CAT: DISTRESS D C !!! OWN DISTRESS !!! ACKNOWLEDGED 0:03 FROM: 219005678
19
Chapter 2: Operation
• •
Press the soft key INFO to display further data for this call.
QUIT
Press INFO again to return to the working display.
HOLD
If the same Distress call comes in more than once, the 2-tone alarm sounds briefly and terminates automatically.
VIEW MORE QUIT
DISTRESS ACKN. CAT: DISTRESS FROM: 219005678 MMSI:223344556 LAT: N 12°34.5678 LON:E 123°45.6789 POS-TIME: 12:28 INT
16 LO INT ; U
16
HOLD To be completed TAG DISTRESS/CALL RX INFO D V !!! OWN DISTRESS !!! ACKNOWLEDGED 0:03 MORE FROM: 219005678
To cancel own Distress If you inadvertently transmit a DSC Distress alert do as follows: 1. The display shows that a Distress message has been sent with the current state information of the MF/HF bands. Press the soft key ANNUL. A pop-up window is displayed. 2. Press the soft key YES to go ahead with the cancelling process. At this stage you have the option to press the soft key NO to return to Distress sending procedure.
;U QUIT ANNUL? DISTR MMSI:223344556 LAT: N 12°34.5678 HOLD LON:E 123°45.6789 POS-TIME: 12:28 UNDESIGNATED INFO 2 T 4 6 8 12 16 MODE: SSB TELEPHONY SSB Rx 2182.0 MORE Tx 2182.0
YES NO
WARNING 4360.0 DISTRESS DO YOU WANT TO 4068.0 SSB CANCEL CH 402YOUR V DISTRESS? D OWN
20
DSC calls
2222
Chapter 2: Operation
Use the selector wheel know to scroll through all information for the voice cancel.
OK
Operation
3. You must send a cancellation message on all DSC watch channels MF/HF radio. The display automatically shows the message that you should say when cancelling the Distress with a radio message.
VOICE CANCEL ”All stations, all stations, all stations. This is [vessel name 3 times]. Our MMSI number is 123456789.”
4. Press the soft key OK to go to the next DSC emergency frequency and repeat step 3. 5. At a certain state Own Distress is cancelled.
TX
Power failure while in Distress In case of a power failure or switch-off during the transmission of a Distress the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC gives an audible warning after power-up and automatically resumes sending Distress 10 seconds after power up.
QUIT
MY DISTRESS
CONFIRM
WARNING RESUME SENDING DISTRESS IN 10 SECONDS
Within the 10 seconds you have the following options: •
Press QUIT to terminate the active Distress procedure (acknowledged or unacknowledged).
•
Press CONFIRM (or do nothing) to resume the sending Distress procedure.
DSC calls
21
Chapter 2: Operation
Sending a Distress from the SAILOR 6103 Alarm Panel The optional SAILOR 6103 Multi Alarm Panel will, when connected to the MF/HF radio, indicate in the SAILOR 6103 display that a Distress can be sent over MF/HF. Note
Only undesignated Distress messages can be initiated from the Alarm Panel.
To send a Distress alert from the SAILOR 6103 Multi Alarm Panel, do as follows: 1. Lift the cover of the Distress button marked MF/HF. 2. Press and hold the button until the light is steady and the buzzer stops (more than 3 seconds). The MF/HF radio is now in Distress mode. Continue the Distress traffic and procedures from the MF/HF radio front panel. 3. Press the MUTE button on the Alarm panel to mute the audible alarm on incoming Distress or urgency messages. All audible alarms are muted. For further information see the Alarm Panel Installation and user manual.
DROBOS — Distress relay on behalf of someone else To send a Distress message on behalf of someone else, do as follows: 1. From top-level standby press the soft key EXIT RELAY DROBOS. If it is not in the display, press TYPE: RELAY INDIV: the soft key MORE until DROBOS appears. PHBOOK DISTRESS MMSI: 234567891 TO: 2. Select one line at a time by pressing and Freq: 8414.5/8414.5 turning the selector wheel knob. Mode: SSB DUP 6501.0 SSB 601 6200.0
22
DSC calls
3. Enter the necessary information using the selector wheel knob or the keypad: Relay items TYPE:
Description Select RELAY ALL, RELAY INDIV or RELAY AREA.
2222
Chapter 2: Operation
TO:
Enter the MMSI number of the vessel or coast station you send the relay to.
Freq:
Turn the selector wheel knob to enter the DSC frequency pair.
Mode:
Select the radio subcommunication mode: SSB or Telex FEC.
NATURE:
Select the nature of Distress, see To send a Distress alert with specified nature on page 18.
Operation
Distress MMSI: Enter the MMSI number of the vessel in Distress, if known, or else “unknown”
Enter also the position data, LAT, LON and POS UTC. 4. Lift the cover of the red Distress button and push the Distress button for 3 seconds.
Receiving Distress calls When the radio receives a Distress call, the 2- SILENCE ;U tone alarm sounds and the rectangle of the DSC Call Received band in which the Distress call is received DISTRESS HOLD FROM: 776655443 shows an inverted R. SSBFIRE, CH 402 EXPLOSION TAG INFO V CHANGE 10s DCOMMS DISTRESS RX WAIT FOR ACKN. 0:05 2 4 R 6 8 12 16
4360.0 4068.0
DSC calls
23
Chapter 2: Operation
Types of Distress calls are Distress, Distress ACK, Distress RELAY and DISTR. RELAY ACK. 1. Switch off the 2-tone alarm by pressing the soft key SILENCE or any other key. 2. Press INFO to display further information. 3. Press HOLD if you decide to put the call on hold and stay in the communication loop to receive follow up information, updates etc. 4. Monitor radio communication on the frequency 2182 kHz (automatically set) as a coast station may require your assistance. 5. The radio receives the first Distress acknowledgement call and the 2-tone alarm sounds again. To switch off the 2tone alarm press the soft key SILENT. A press on any other key also switches off the 2-tone alarm.any key. 6. If you decide to acknowledge the Distress press MORE until DISACK is shown in the display. MERE HER? USIKKER.
QUIT HOLD
16
To be completed VIEW MORE
D DISTRESS RX ACKNOWLEDGED FROM: 987654321
0:25
Distress call with errors If a Distress call contains errors, it is still received. Press INFO to view the message; errors are shown as underscores (_).
24
DSC calls
DSC Call Received GROUP (ERR) FROM: 123456789 CAT: ROUTINE
Distress call log As long as you are part of a Distress session, i.e. you have not pressed QUIT, you receive Distress messages and can track all Distress messages for the current Distress event.
2222
Chapter 2: Operation
Operation
1. Press the soft key LOG. If it is not in the display, press the soft key MORE until LOG appears. 2. Press the soft key NEXT and PREV to browse the received Distress messages. 3. Press the soft key EXIT to leave the log.
DSC calls for communication With a DSC call you can establish a radio communication with one or several specific radios on a suggested pair of frequencies or channel. 1. DSC call message from Radio A to Radio B.
MF/HF Radio A
2. DSC acknowledge from Radio B to Radio A. 3. Radio A + B go on the agreed MF/HF channel.
MF/HF Radio B
4. Press PPT and start talking.
To make a DSC call for communication, do as follows:
EXIT
DSC CALL Type: INDIVIDUAL Cat: ROUTINE PHBOOK To: ToCh:be 9 completed
1. Press the soft key CALL. The default call is an individual routine call.
10
2. Turn and press the selector wheel knob to select a call type. DSC call type
To:
Freq: Mode
Cat
Ch
DEST CENTRE + RADIUS
INDIVID.
X
X
X
X
X
—
INDIV. W.POS
X
X
X
X
—
—
DSC calls
25
Chapter 2: Operation
DSC call type
To:
Freq: Mode
Cat
Ch
DEST CENTRE + RADIUS
SATETY TEST
X
X
—
—
—
—
Position
X
X
—
—
—
—
Group
X
X
X
—
X
—
Area
—
X
X
X
—
X
3. Make the entries for the desired call type: Item
Description
TO:
Enter the 9-digit MMSI number of the vessel you want to contact or use the phone book (PHBOOK) to select a contact.
Freq:
Enter a frequency for the DSC call.
Mode:
Select SIMPLEX TP or DATA-COM.
Cat:
Select a DSC call category, depending on the call type (routine R, safety S or urgency U)
JH name
Select Medical transport or Neutral crafts (if enabled in DSC setup on page 41). Only for urgency calls.
Ch:
Enter the suggested frequencies for voice communication.
DEST CENTRE + For Area calls enter the destination centre with latitude RADIUS and longitude data, plus the destination radius in nm. For more information about how areas see 4. Press the soft key SEND to make the call.
26
DSC calls
Session line
Explanation
OWN Distress
The ship is in own Distress. See also To send an undesignated Distress alert on page 18.
Distress RX
You watch or participate in a Distress communication for another station in Distress
RELAY calls (numerous)
You watch or participate in a Distress communication for another station in Distress
ALL SHIPS TX/RX
You have sent / received an all ships call
GROUP TX/RX
You have sent / received a group call
INDIVIDUAL TX/RX
You have either sent a call request to a station to establish contact, or another station has made a call to you to establish contact. The call needs a reply.
TEST TX/RX
You either have sent a SAFETY TEST call or have received a SAFETY TEST call from another station that needs to be replied.
POSITION TX/RX
A position request was either sent or received.
Operation
Session line
2222
Chapter 2: Operation
Session status Session status
Explanation
WAIT FOR ACKNOWLEDGE
You made an individual call to a station and are awaiting a reply to establish connection.
OCCUPIED
The DSC transmission mechanism waits until the selected DSC channel is free.
DSC calls
27
Chapter 2: Operation
Session status
Explanation
TRANSMITTING
Transmission of a DSC message is ongoing.
IN COMMUNICATION WITH
The communication has been established
Soft keys for DSC sessions Call/session types vary in control options, and options may also change if a session changes its state. The following table gives an overview of the DSC soft key commands available: Soft key — DSC session Radio function QUIT
Terminates the DSC session
HOLD
Puts the DSC session hold if it is active (return to other non-DSC functions)
PIN ACTIVE
Activates the DSC session
INFO
Shows details about the DSC call
RESEND
Transmits an identical call if available
NEWCH
UNABLE
28
Replies with a new channel if an individual call is received with a communication channel specified which is not available in the radio, or the operator decides to change the channel. Constructs a reply to the caller if an individual call is received which is not compatible with the radio modes.
SILENT
Silences alarms. Any key silences the alarm but this soft key function will do only this.
ACK
Acknowledges a received call request with the suggested parameters.
DSC calls
POS (Own Distress)
A shortcut to own position data information.
PAUSE (Own Distress)
Pauses the automatic repetition of Distress transmissions
RESUME (Own Distress)
Resumes automatic repetition of Distress transmissions (if paused)
DIST ACK
Distress acknowledgement.
RELAY
Relay a Distress call on behalf of someone else.
ANNUL (Cancel Own Distress)
Cancels an inadvertently transmitted Distress
Operation
Soft key — DSC session Radio function
2222
Chapter 2: Operation
CONFIRM (Cancel Own Confirms action and proceed sequence, used in Distress) cancel Distress procedure INFO (in Cancel Own Distress)
Turns page of text message.
HIST (Received Distress)
A filtered version of the log displaying received calls relevant to the current Distress event.
You find detailed information how to handle multiple calls in Handling multiple calls — DSC and voice on page 32.
Information for DSC sessions (soft key: INFO) A DSC session is updated based on DSC calls received or transmitted. Press the soft key INFO to show the details for the current session. For Distress events a sequence of calls may contribute to the complete view and status of the session. Detailed fields for Distress are: Details — Distress
Explanation
DISTR-MMSI
The vessel in Distress
NAT
Nature of Distress
DSC calls
29
Chapter 2: Operation
Details — Distress
Explanation
LAT
Latitude position of station in Distress
LON
Longitude position of station in Distress
POS UTC
Time of position
MODE
Communication mode (SSB, Telex)
2 4 R 6 8 12 16
Bands with status for Distress alerts
For other session types the soft key function INFO typically shows the details from a single call. Detail fields for other calls than Distress are:
30
Details —other calls
Explanation
CALL Type
(on received call) – The call type may be shown on call reception
CAT
Category of the call: Urgency, Safety or Routine
FROM
The initiator of the call
TO
The intended receiver of the call (unless All Ships)
MODE
Communication mode (Simplex/Semi-duplex Telephony supported)
CHANNEL
Subsequent communication channel
LAT
Latitude position returned upon a position request
LON
Longitude position of station in Distress
POS UTC
Time of position
DSC calls
If the radio is in stand-by mode, i.e. not engaged in another session, and a DSC call is received the call details are shown on the display. You can acknowledge the call, put it on hold or display more information. If you put the call on hold, the session icon for this call will flash until you have acknowledged the call.
QUIT
19
HOLD To be completed INT PORT-PUBLIC VIEW R S GROUP RX COMM WITH 123456789 MORE 0:12
Geographical area calls When making a DSC area call, you must 'b a2,b2 enter the position of the ship (x,y) and the a2 radius of interest r. This information is transformed to a square with a corner r point (a,b) and the length of its sides and 'a 'a and 'b. Then the DSC message is (x,y) transmitted. The illustration on this page shows the relation between the user input — the white circle — and the b b2 a1 1 information transmitted —the grey square. The center point is the position of the ship measured in degrees and minutes, whereas the radius of interest is in nautical miles. The corner point of the square (a2,b2) and the length of its sides is given in degrees. Note that these values are rounded to degrees, and due to the requirement that the square shall include the entire circle; this will result in a slightly larger area than defined by the user input. Attention when close to the poles: If the latitude of the corner point ‘a’ is transformed to a value greater that 90° then is set to 90° and the length 'b is reduced correspondingly. If the length 'a is greater than 90° then 'a is set to 90°.
DSC calls
31
Operation
Receiving DSC calls
2222
Chapter 2: Operation
Chapter 2: Operation
Handling multiple calls — DSC and voice What is a Session? A DSC session is defined as a collection of DSC calls (transmitted and/or received) that are related to the same event (e.g. a Distress event) or established call (e.g. an individual call request followed by an acknowledgement). A session can be either active or on hold. The active session has control over the radio transmitter. A session can have a purpose. For example if the purpose is to establish a communication on a working channel. The non-DSC communication is considered as a session that can be active (engaged) or on hold (dis-engaged). See also Engagement status on page 12.
Display for a session In the DSC window the type of session, the current state, MMSI number of the other party and lapsed time since the reception of a call request or an acknowledgment is shown.
Session state Session line
QUIT HOLD
Session status INFO MORE
4360.0 4068.0 SSB CH 402
;U
RX TX
TAG
R V GROUP RX COMM WITH 123456789 0:12
The session state icons, in the example V and R, show the state of the session: •
ACTIVE — inverted, transmitter tuned into the communication channel (in the example R , a DSC Routine call).
•
HOLD — normal view, parked session (in the example V , MF/HF communication.
For more information on the session state icons see Session state icons D, U, S, R and V on page 33.
32
Handling multiple calls — DSC and voice
Multiple sessions The SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC can control multiple DSC sessions ( ) simultaneously with voice communication sessions. All sessions can keep track of their session state and the communication channel used. They are handled in their respective sessions, in the order as they are started up. Note that there is one active call or session at a time
Use the soft key to view the ongoing calls/sessions, that means that a call — or session — can be on hold or active. If there are several calls ongoing, they are shown in the display with their respective state (active, on hold, requiring attention). The DSC sessions on hold can receive calls that are pertinent to the session, even when the session is not displayed.
Session QUIT icons
10
Operation
Note
2222
Chapter 2: Operation
To be completed
ACTIVE
PORT-PUBLIC
MORE
INT
R VOICE COMM CHANNEL: 10
LO INT ; U Multiple QUIT sessions LOC HOLD To be completed DUP TAG INTERSHIP/PORT RX R V VOICE COMM CHANNEL: 10 MORE
10
The example on this page shows that two sessions are ongoing, R is a routine DSC call (active), V is voice communication (on hold). Press the soft key ACTIVE to make the voice session V active and put the R session on hold.
In case there are simultaneous alarms, they are sorted according to their priorities, the most important ones are shown first. In some cases alarm or pop-up messages terminate automatically, then the display messages and audible alarms also disappear automatically.
Session state icons D, U, S, R and V Session icons in the session view inform you of the severity or category of the DSC call or Voice communication: •
D — Distress category
Handling multiple calls — DSC and voice
33
Chapter 2: Operation
•
U — Urgency
•
S — Safety
•
R — Routine
•
V — Voice (voice call, non-DSC)
•
T — Telex
Current call (DSC or voice) status
State of session icon
Active call/session
Inverted
R
Call on hold
Normal
R
Call has updates that need handling or viewing Flashing R
R
Phone book Use the phone book when making a DSC call. You can enter up to 50 contacts. The phone book is always sorted alphabetically by contact names. To sort phone book contacts use the soft key FILTER. The contacts can be sorted in ALL, COAST, SHIP or GROUP.
Using the phone book to make a DSC call To call a contact using the phone book do as follows: 1. Press the soft key CALL. If it is not in the display, press the soft key MORE until CALL appears. The DSC call composer is shown in the display. 2. Press the soft key PHBOOK. 3. Turn the selector wheel knob to scroll to the phone book entry that you want to call and press the selector wheel knob to select the contact. 4. Press the soft key SEND to make the call.
34
Phone book
To add a contact to the phone book do as follows: 1. Press the soft key PHBOOK. If it is not in the display, press the soft key MORE until PHBOOK appears in the display. 2. Press the soft key ADD and fill in the details for the new contact. Contact
Description
NAME
Enter the name by turning the selector wheel knob to the desired letter, press the selector wheel knob to accept the letter and advance to the next letter. To finish press the soft key OK.
TYPE
Press and turn the selector wheel know to select SHIP, GROUP or COAST STATION.
MMSI
Turn and press the selector wheel knob to enter the contact’s MMSI number (9 digits), press the soft key OK to accept. For coast station contacts you can also enter a DSC channel.
Ch (optional)
Press and turn the selector wheel knob to select the preferred channel for this contact, press the soft key OK.
Position Auto Ack For SHIP or COAST STATION: Press and turn the selector wheel knob to select YES or NO for this contact, press the soft key OK. This will allow auto-ack of position requests for this contact. Listen to Group
For GROUP: Press and turn the selector wheel knob to select YES or NO for this contact, press the soft key OK. The radio will respond to calls to the specified group.
3. Press the soft key SAVE to save the contact information. 4. Press the soft key EXIT to leave the phone book.
Phone book
35
Operation
Adding a contact to the phone book
2222
Chapter 2: Operation
Chapter 2: Operation
Editing a contact 1. Press the soft key PHBOOK. If it is not in the display, press the soft key MORE until PHBOOK appears. 2. Press the soft key EDIT. 3. Press and turn the selector wheel knob to browse through the details of the contact. 4. Continue as described in Adding a contact to the phone book from step 2 onwards.
Deleting a contact 1. Press the soft key PHBOOK. If it is not in the display, press the soft key MORE until PHBOOK appears. 2. Turn the selector wheel knob to browse to the contact you want to delete. 3. Press the soft key MORE until DELETE appears. 4. Press the soft key DELETE. 5. Press EXIT to leave the phone book and return to radio operation.
Radiotelex With the Radiotelex system you can send and receive telex messages over MF/HF radio. The Radiotelex program runs on a SAILOR 6006 Message Terminal with a keyboard. The SAILOR 6006 is connected to a System 6000 MF/HF radio system, which transmits and receives the radio telex messages. In order to send and receive telex messages press the mode button of the MF/HF radio until Telex is shown in the display. For detailed instructions how to send a radio telex message see the SAILOR System 6000 MF/HF Radiotelex User Manual.
36
Radiotelex
Replay function
2222
Chapter 2: Operation
The recorded channel is displayed. The message length is shown in seconds. The display shows how old the message is. If the 240 s storage limit is reached, the oldest data is overwritten. Note
The replay function can be started even in a Distress situation. If a DSC call is received the replay function continues the playback. Immediate acknowledgement of the DSC call initiates and activates the DSC session. You can start replay from any session afterwards.
Replaying recorded messages To replay a message do as follows: 1. Press the Replay button (short press). The latest message (message) is repeated. Information about this message is shown in the display. 2. To stop replaying the message press the soft key STOP. 3. To rewind through the recorded messages make a long press on the Replay button. 4. To stop replaying a message press STOP or the PTT button on the speaking device. If a signal is received while in replay mode the display shows display.
Replay function
in the
37
Operation
Replay allows the operator to playback received voice messages in the loudspeaker. Recording is activated automatically when a signal is received. Recording is not possible during playback. Up to 60 tracks or 240 seconds can be handled.
Chapter 2: Operation
Setup The following setup pages are described in this section of the manual: •
Radio setup
•
Channel setup
•
Power Supply
•
DSC setup
•
DSC call logs
•
System setup
•
Controller setup
Accessing a setup page To change a setting in one of the SETUP pages, do as follows 1. Press the soft key SETUP. If it is not in the display, press the soft key MORE until SETUP appears. 2. Press the arrow soft key edit.
or
to advance to SETUP page you want to
3. Turn the selector wheel knob to go to a setting, then press the selector wheel knob to change the setting. 4. Press EXIT to return to normal radio operation.
38
Setup
Item Scan Hang Time
Description Scan hang time, in seconds on an active receiving working channel. The time is measured from the signal is detected. The radio remains on the channel for the set time interval, if a signal was detected. OFF: Resumes scanning when signal disappears (default) 4, 6, 8, 10: Hang time in seconds.
Scan Resume
Scan resume time, in seconds. When the programmed time of inactivity has elapsed, and when watch/scan has been aborted using a press on PTT, or after power-up, scan or watch is resumed. OFF: Automatic resume is deactivated (default) 3, 6, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30: Resume time in seconds.
Audio AGC
AGC is applied to all modes of operation as default. It can be turned on and off when the radio is in SSB telephony mode. •
ON (default) – AGC is turned on.
•
OFF – AGC is turned off, and the user operates the RF Gain manually.
Having entered a new receive frequency the AGC is switched on again. Fine tuning of the receive frequency or releasing the PTT button after transmission does not switch the AGC on again.
Setup
39
Operation
Radio setup
2222
Chapter 2: Operation
Chapter 2: Operation
Channel setup Item
Description
Watch Receiver
Press the selector wheel knob to display the watch frequencies. Contact your local distributor for modifications.
Private Channels
Read only. Contact your local distributor for adding private channels. Ch: 78<_1.5/009< Rx: 4357.0 kHz Tx: 4065.0 kHz Channel mode: SSB Name:
Power Supply Parameter Monitor
Description Set this to ENABLED if the radio is connected to a SAILOR 6081 Power Supply Unit and Charger. Set this to DISABLED for any other power supply.
40
Status
Visible if ENABLED. Current status of the connected power supply.
Voltage
Visible if ENABLED. Current voltage.
Current
Visible if ENABLED. Current current.
Setup
DSC setup Item Position Info
Description
2222
Chapter 2: Operation
Available position information.
DSC groups
input
Auto-Ack Test
Auto-acknowledgement of test DSC messages
Operation
Here you can enter position data, see also Position and MMSI Information on page 10.
OFF - Disabled ON – Enabled (default) Auto-Ack Polling
ON OFF
Auto-Ack Position
ON OFF
Auto-Ack Individual
Auto acknowledgement of individually addressed, non Distress DSC messages OFF - Disabled (default) ON – Enabled
Non-Distr. Inactivity
Inactivity time-out to exit non-Distress functions (e.g. in setup) without automatic time-out (OFF): Range: OFF, 1 to 30 minutes, in 1 min. steps Default: 15 min.
Distress Inactivity
Inactivity time-out for received Distress DSC automated procedures without automatic time-out: Range: OFF, 1 to 30 minutes, in 1 min. steps Default: OFF
Setup
41
Chapter 2: Operation
Item Comm Inactivity
Description Inactivity time-out of non DSC communication. Range: 10 to 600 seconds, in 10 s steps Default: 30 s
Non-Distr.Alarms
Non-Distress DSC alarms OFF: Disabled ON: Enabled (default)
Self-Term. Distr. Alarms
Enabled Disbabled
Medical transport
ON: This option is available in DSC calls of the type Urgency. OFF
Neutral crafts
ON: This option is available in DSC calls of the type Urgency. OFF
Print DSC
ON OFF
DSC Self Test
OFF: Disabled (default), no DSC self test. RUN: Run a DSC self test. For further details about this test see DSC routine testing on page 51.
DSC call logs DSC call log
42
Description
Received Distress
Shows a log of up to 20 received Distress calls.
Transmitted Calls
Shows a log of up to 20 transmitted calls.
Received Calls
Shows a log of all received non Distress calls.
Setup
Item
Description
System time & Date
View and set system time and date.
Inactivity timeout
Inactivity time-out to exit functions (e.g. in setup) and return to the application. •
Operation
System setup
2222
Chapter 2: Operation
Range: 1 to 30 minutes, in 1 minute steps Default: 10 min.
Language
English
Color theme
Changes the display colour. 0: Black text on white background 1: White text on black background
NMEA in (baud)
4800 (read only)
Radio info
SW Version: Software version of the radio S/N: Serial number of the radio TU IP: IP address of the radio
Factory Defaults
Resets the radio to factory defaults after power cycle.
Password
If you need to change the identity of the radio (MMSI number), contact your local dealer.
Setup
43
Chapter 2: Operation
Controller setup Item Handset 1 vol:
Description Adjust earpiece volume for handset 1: ON, can be adjusted OFF and from 5 to 100, in steps of 5. Note: Default setting is ON. The handset connected to the front connector has top priority and is configured to ON. The volume can be adjusted from 0 to 100, in steps of 5.
Handset 2 vol:
Adjust earpiece volume for handset 2: OFF, can be adjusted from 5 to 100, in steps of 5. Note: Default setting is OFF. If a handset is connected to the rear connector this value must be configured to a value (0 to 100, in steps of 5).
High priority
Yes — This is the primary MF/HF radio in the system. No — This is the secondary MF/HF radio in the system.
Controller Info
Sw Version S/N:
The available settings may vary from controllers applied. 5. Press EXIT to return to normal radio operation.
44
Setup
TOP LEVEL SOFT KEYS
SETUP PAGES
CALL
EXIT NEXT PHBOOK SETUP
RADIO SETUP
Scan Hang Time Scan Resume AGC
ALERT
EXIT POS
CHANNEL SETUP
Watch Receiver Private Channels Tx Band
RELAY
EXIT NEXT PHBOOK SETUP
DSC SETUP
POS
EXIT
PHBOOK
EXIT ADD FILTER
HI/LO
?
WATCH
?
SQLCH
EXIT
Positon Info DSC groups Auto-Ack Test Auto-Ack Individual Non-Distr. Inactivity Distress Inactivity Comm Inactivity Non-Distr. Alarms Auto-switch Channel Medical transport Neutral crafts Auto-Ack Polling Auto-Ack Position Print DSC DSC Self Test
DSC CALL LOGS SETUP
EXIT
Received Distress Transmitted Calls Received Calls
SYSTEM SETUP
System time & date Inactivity timeout Language Colour theme NMEA in (baud) Radio info Factory Defaults S/N Password
skal opdateres
Operation
Top-level soft keys and setup pages — overview
2222
Chapter 2: Operation
CONTROLLER SETUP Handset 1 vol: Handset 2 vol: HIgh priority :
Setup
45
Chapter 2: Operation
46
Setup
Chapter 3
3333
Service & maintenance Contact for support
Contact your authorized dealer for technical service and support of the MF/HF radio. Before contacting your authorized dealer you can go through the troubleshooting guide to solve some of the most common operational problems.
Maintenance Preventive maintenance Maintenance of the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC can be reduced to a weekly check and a maintenance check at each visit of the service staff. Inspect the radio for mechanical damages, salt deposits, corrosion and any foreign material. Due to its robust construction and ruggedness the radio has a long lifetime. Anyway it must carefully be checked at intervals not longer than 12 months - dependent on the current working conditions.
Salt deposits In case the equipment has been exposed to sea water there is a risk of salt crystallization on the keys and wheel knobs and they may become inoperable. Clean the MF/HF radio and speaker microphones with fresh water.
47
Service & maintenance
3
Chapter 3: Service & maintenance
Weekly installation check Go through the following weekly check procedure: 1. Check the hardware configuration of the transceiver by selecting FUNC and the INFO & TEST, INFORMATION, HW Version menu items. 2. Check also that the Antenna Tuning Unit is recognized, if installed. 3. Perform a self test of the transceiver by selecting FUNC and the INFO&TEST, CHECK, SELF TEST menu items. The self test is performed automatically and is used for verification of all functions. Check the transmitter in all marine bands. 4. The Antenna Tuning Unit will tune automatically to the antenna first time the equipment is keyed on a new frequency or when the TUNE button is pressed (PTT button?). During the tune sequence and normal transmission all transmitter circuits are monitored to ensure safe operating conditions. If transmission conditions are bad (bad antenna installation, high temperatures, etc.) the transmitted power will be reduced to a safe limit. If the transmission condition is improved automatic recovery to full power takes place. 5. The protection can be investigated by selecting FUNC and the INFO&TEST, CHECK, TX PROTECTION menu items. The displayed protection code(s) is/are described int he service chapter of the installation manual. 6. If a GPS is connected, check the position and time in the MF/HF radio’s display. If time is not contained in the NMEA sentences the time of position is indicated as —:—. In this case check if the GPS output setting can be changed to allow time information. Otherwise UTC time must be entered manually each time the transceiver is switched on. 7. Send a DSC call to the appropriate coast station. The acknowledgement from the coast station is received by the 2187.5 kHz watch receiver if the call was sent on that frequency. If the call is sent on HF only the audio signal output from the 2187.5 kHz watch receiver should be checked by selecting FUNC and the INFO&TEST, MONITOR, WR AUDIO menu items.
48
Maintenance
Errors and warning messages are shown in the display and are read-only.
DSC self test To run a control routine DSC self test, do as follows: 1. Press the soft key SETUP. If it is not in the display, press the soft key MORE until SETUP appears. 2. Press the arrow soft key
or
to advance to DSC SETUP.
3. Turn the selector wheel knob to select DSC Self Test. Press and turn the selector wheel knob to select RUN. The test will check the ability to encode/decode DSC signalling on RF level. The radio will automatically transmit a DSC safety test call to its own MMSI number without enabling the transmitter power amplifier. In parallel the radio decodes and compares the received call to be the same as the transmitted. The display shows the result of the test. TEST RESULT
4. Press the soft key OK to acknowledge the test result and resume normal operation.
Important
DSC loopback test passed
TEST RESULT DSC loopback test FAILED
If the DSC loopback test fails, this indicates the DSC functionality does not work correctly — including the ability to send a Distress message. Contact your dealer immediately for further advice.
Maintenance
49
Service & maintenance
Error messages and warnings
3333
Chapter 3: Service & maintenance
Chapter 3: Service & maintenance
Troubleshooting guide Action
Symptom
Remedy
The radio will not turn on
The display is empty.
Check if power is present. Check fuse which is placed in the? Check performance of power supply if connected to one.
No communication
The loudspeaker is mute.
Check the antenna installation. Check antenna cable. Check handset/Handmicrophone and cable.
GPS
Position requested.
If the MF/HF radio, despite being connected to a GPS/position source, prompts for entering the position and time information, the automated update has most likely been lost either due to missing data on the line, broken cabling or the GPS/position source has failed. Refer to the installation section in the back of this manual for installation and connection details. Until the automatic position update from GPS/position source is restored position and time must be entered manually when prompted by a (four hour) timer in the MF/HF radio. In the DSC SETUP, Position Info, you can verity the position data. If data is present Lat/Lon/UTC will be displayed.
50
Maintenance
Symptom
DSC routine testing
Remedy Check the DSC function regularly. Verify the complete DSC installation, with antennas, by transmitting a Safety Test call to another station (coast or ship). The test call is generated using the DSC call flow via menu CALL. The call should normally be replied by the receiving station without questioning. The default configuration of a DSC MF/HF radio is auto-acknowledgement of any received Safety test call requests. If a ship is equipped with multiple radios a second radio can be the station to check up against. The transmitting radio will not receive its own transmitted calls. If there is only a single radio on a vessel, a facility is built into the unit where the DSC engine can be verified using a test call that is internally looped without activating the radio transmitter PA. The test is executed via menu SETUP, DSC SETUP. The call sequence that is verified, is an Individual Safety Test Call directed to own MMSI. The test status is read in the display.
Missing MMSI
DSC operation is not working
When powering up the MF/HF radio for the first time after leaving factory there is no MMSI number in the radio. For the DSC operation to function the MMSI number must be entered in the radio. For further details see the installation manual.
Maintenance
51
Service & maintenance
Action
3333
Chapter 3: Service & maintenance
Chapter 3: Service & maintenance
Action
Symptom
Remedy
Radio time
DSC logs are sorted with wrong time stamp or radio time is incorrect
A wrong radio time indication should occur only if GPS position source is not connected or providing correct time data. A valid GPS time signal will update the UTC time used for time stamping the DSC logs. If a GPS/position source is not connected to the MF/HF radio and hence position and time is entered manually, you must enter the "radio time" also manually, at least after power up. This will ensure correct time stamping of the DSC logs. The UTC time is the suggested time to be entered when prompted for entering position and time manually (every four hours).
DSC Channel not free
DSC transmission delayed
The transmission of a DSC call which is not of category Distress will be postponed if the MF/HF radio is in the process of decoding an incoming DSC call. As soon as this decoding process has finalized the transmission will take place.
Handset configuration
No sound in earpiece
The earpiece volume may be configured to OFF. See section Controller setup on page 44 on how to adjust the earpiece volume of the handset.
52
Maintenance
Device failure
Symptom
Remedy If any of the checks and tests described in this section do not assist in resolving the difficulties experienced in the operation and/or performance of the installation, a fault may have developed in the MF/HF radio itself. When contacting an authorized Thrane & Thrane representative be sure to provide as much information as possible describing the observed behavior - also including the type of the radio, its serial number, and software release version (both found in the setup menu Controller Setup).
Maintenance
53
Service & maintenance
Action
3333
Chapter 3: Service & maintenance
Chapter 3: Service & maintenance
Replacing the fuse?
Warranty For repair or replacement of the MF/HF radio within terms of warranty, contact your local dealer.
54
Warranty
AAAA
ITU channels
A
To be added.
55
ITU channels
Appendix A
Appendix A: ITU channels
56
Glossary
BBBB
Glossary
A AGC
Automatic Gain Control
AM
Amplitude Modulation
ATU
Antenna Tuning Unit
Glossary
B
D DROBOS
Distress Relay On Behalf Of Someone else
G GMDSS
Global Maritime Distress and Safety System
GPL
General Public License
GPS
Global Positioning System
H HF
High Frequency
I IF
?
L LGPL
Lesser General Public License
M MF
Medium Frequency
57
Glossary
MMSI
Maritime Mobile Ship Identification
P PTT
Push To Talk
R RX
Receive
S SSB
Single Side Band ,
T TFT
Thin Film Transistor. type of liquid crystal display.
TU
Transceiver Unit
TX
Transmit
U UTC
58
Coordinated Universal Time. The International Atomic Time (TAI) with leap seconds added at irregular intervals to compensate for the Earth’s slowing rotation. Leap seconds are used to allow UTC to closely track UT1, which is mean solar time at the Royal Observatory, Greenwich.
Index
C
acknowledgement, Distress, 19 action line, display, 4 activate scan resume, 39 watch, 16 ACTIVE session, 32 ADD, 35 add a contact, 35 adjust RF gain, 10 speaker volume, 8 AGC, 39 AGC control, 10 alarm panel Distress, 22 AM BROADCAST, 9 antenna unit tuning, 8 ATIS code change, 43 Auto-Ack Individual, 41 Test, 41 automatic gain control, 39
CALL, 34 call Distress procedure, vi DSC, 17 end, 12 routine, 34 safety, 34 update, 34 urgency, 34 voice, non-DSC, 34 call log, DSC, 42 cancelling Distress, 20 channel select, 9, 13 working, 9, 13 check installation, 48 Colour theme, 43 Comm Inactivity, 42 contact, 47 adding, 35 deleting, 36 editing, 36 sorting, 34 controls, front plate, 3 cradle for 6201, installation, 5
background sessions DSC, 32 backlight dim, 9 browse channels, 9
Index
C
A
B
CCCC
Index
D deactivate watch, 16 default reset, 43 DELETE, 36 delete contact, 36 dim, 9
59
Index
display, 4 display colour change, 43 Distress acknowledgement, 19 cancelling, 20 power failure, 21 received calls, 23 send from alarm panel, 22 Distress button, 18 Distress procedure, vi Distress timeout, 41 document number, this manual, i DSC, 9 background sessions, 32 call log, 25, 42 calls, 17 loopback test, 49 multiple calls, 32 session definition, 32 setup, 41 DSC alarms non distress, 42 DSC session, 32 typical display, 32 DSC setup, 41 DSC soft keys, 28 DSC window, 32
E editing a contact, 36 emergency calls, vi end call, 12 engagement status, 12 enter position manually, 10 error messages, 49
60
F factory defaults, 43 filter phonebook, 34 front plate, controls, 3 fuses, how to replace, 54
G GPS data, 11 GPS position display, 10
H Handmicrophone, 13 handset cradle installation, 5 hang time, 39 HOLD session, 32
I icons session state, 32 input NMEA, 43 installation cradle for 6201, 5 handset cradle, 5 installation check, 48 IP address, 43
K keys on front plate, 3
license software, ii louder, volume, 8
M manual, document number, i MAYDAY, vi medical transport, 42 message replay, 37 MMSI change, 43 mode AM BROADCAST, 9 DSC, 9 SSB, 9 TELEX, 9 monitor power supply, 40 MORE, 11 multiple calls, DSC, 32 mute speaker, 10
N neutral crafts, 42 night vision, how to dim, 9 NMEA input, 43 Non-dist Inactivity, 41 Non-distr.alarms, 42
phone book, 34 add contact, 35 delete a contact, 36 edit a contact, 36 position enter manually, 10 position data enter manually, 41 position Info, 41 power fuse, 54 off, 8 on, 8 power failure Distress, 21 power supply monitor, 40 PTT button, 15
Index
L
CCCC
Index
R radio call making, 16 receiving, 15 received Distress calls, 23 replay, 37 button, 3 reset to default, 43 resume time, 39 RF exposure hazards, iv RF gain, 10 routine call, 34
S P password, 43 PHBOOK, 34
safety call, 34 safety summary, iv salt deposits, 47
61
Index
scan hang time, 39 resume time, 39 resume, activate, 39 selector wheel knob, 3, 9 self test, 49 serial number, 43 service line, display, 4 service procedure weekly, 48 session ACTIVE, 32 HOLF, 32 INFO key, 29 line, 27 soft keys, 28 state icons, 32 status, 27 what is, 32 setup controller, 44 DSC, 41 Radio, 39 system, 43 watch, 39 soft key, 11 ADD, 35 CALL, 34 DELETE, 36 DISACK, 24 DSC, 28 MORE, 11 PHBOOK, 34 RELAY, 22 STOP, 37 WATCH, 16 soft keys, 11 softer, volume, 8 software license, ii
62
Software version, 43 sorting contacts, 34 speaker volume, 8 speaking devices, 13 squelch, 13 squelch control, 3, 10 SSB, 9 SSB VOICE AGC, 39 STOP, 37 stop replaying a message, 37 watch or scan, 16 subcommunication mode, 19 telex, 19 voice, 19 support, 47 SW version, 43 system setup, 43
T TELEX, 9 telex subcommunication, 19 terminate call, 12 engagement, 12 theme colour, change, 43 timeout, 43 Distress, 41 non distress, 41 VHF and other non distress, 42 tuning antenna unit, 8
urgency call, 34 Use GPS, 11 UTC time, 4 enter manually, 10
V voice call, 34 subcommunication, 19 volume louder, 8 softer, 8 speaker, 8 Volume wheel knob, 3
Index
U
CCCC
Index
W warnings, 49 warranty, 54 limitation, v WATCH, 16 watch setup, 39 start, 16 stop, 16 weekly check, 48 wheel knob selector, 3 volume, 3 working channel, 9, 13
63
Index
64
Nr: 06-6-048/0
Previous
COMROD AT82 27' - 8 m HF Marine Transmitting Antenna
Application: AT82 is a high performance glassfibre transmitting antenna for marine coastal and HF telephony bands (simplex and duplex SSB). It matches well modern SSB marine telephony transmitters. The antennas can be part of any MF/HF communication system but is specially designed to satisfy the demands of the GMDSS.
Electrical specifications: Frequency range Power rating Impedance Polarization Pattern Electrical lenght
1.6-30 MHz 1.5 kW PEP See seperate section Vertical Omnidirectional 7.5 m (25 ft)
Mechanical specifications: Design
Selfsupporting fiberglass rod with hot dip galvanized mounting hardware.
Height Weight Sections
8 m (27 ft) 8.2 kg Base: Top:
Wind rating Moment of flexure Deflection due to wind
55 m/s = 125 mph 90 kpm at 55 m/s 4.6 m (15 ft) at tip ball at 55 m/s wind load
Finish Temperature range Ice build-up
Polyurethane lacquer, white -55 0C, +55 0C, -67 0F, +131 0F Not affected
Comrod A/S, N-4120 Tau - Norway. Telephone (+47) 51740500. Telefax (+47) 51740501. E-mail:
[email protected]
AXB42 APB41
Bracket, side feed
Mounting: Mounting by means of mast bracket (included).
Impedance Measurements: Antenna mounted on a 2 m steelpipe over flat steel roof. Feed line 2 m.
Frequency (MHz)
Transmitting Antenna 8m
1.6
4-j1.060
2.0
5-j800
3.0
9-j470
4.0
11-j290
5.0
20-j145
6.0
28-j38
7.0
55+j55
8.0
60+j155
10.0
200+j400
12.0
1000+j300
16.0
500-j500
18.0
250-j450
22.0
70-j80
25.0
240-j200
30.0
400-j300
Active DSC/TLX Receiver Antenna Type Navcom A157S Active Antenna NA2187,5 and Power Supply PS160. Active DSC/TLX Watch ReceiverAntenna type Navcom A157 S: Type : Protection : Frequency : Output impedance : Supply voltage :
Supply current : Temperature: Connector : Total high : Weight : Colour : Mounting : Materials :
Vertical whip Active tuned Diode clamp 100 kHz -27 MHz Nom. 50 ohm 7 - 15 VDC through antenna cable, Coax inner conductor positive (Absolut max 15.5 VDC) App 19.5 mA - 40o to + 70o C UHF - Socket (Coax - cable to be mounted with UHF - PL259) 0.34 m 0.25 kgs White 1“ Brass Nut - Chromium - Plated PU - painted glass - fibre tube and cromium - plated brass
1“ Brass Nut
OPTION : Power Supply type Navcom PS160 : Input voltage : 24V/DC nominal (20-35V/DC). Galvanic seperated from both the antenna and the reveiver circuits. Build-in resetable fuse and polarity/overvoltage protection. Gasket Output voltage : +12V/DC on the conductor, Coax inner conductor positive. Output current : Max. 50mA. Receiver connection : UHF-Socket. Antenna connection : UHF-Socket. Power connection : 9-Pin D-Sub Male. Frame UHF-Socket Dimensions : L=130 x D= 60 x H=28mm. OPTION : Tube with 1“ tread UHF-Socket 9-PIN D-Sub Mounting flanges included. Whitworth 55º (DIN 259)
29mm. 26mm.
UHF-Sokcket
25mm.
NAVCOM
PS160 ACTIVE ANTENNA POWER SUPPLY. GALVANIC SEPARATED 24VDC (20-35)
DANMARK
+12VDC ANT.
+1 5FRAME
RX
Universal Mounting Bracket DM-1“ Mounting on vertical or horizontal mast tubes 30-60mm
Mast tube 30-60 mm. (not supplied)
Navcom Marine Electronics Denmark phone: +45 4363 3777 e-mail:
[email protected] All specifications are subject to changes without notice.
190mm.
USER MANUAL
SAILOR 6300 MF/HF Radiotelex
SAILOR 6300 MF/HF Radiotelex User manual
Document number: 98-132519-A Release date: January 18, 2011
Disclaimer Any responsibility or liability for loss or damage in connection with the use of this product and the accompanying documentation is disclaimed by Thrane & Thrane. The information in this manual is provided for information purposes only, is subject to change without notice and may contain errors or inaccuracies. Manuals issued by Thrane & Thrane are periodically revised and updated. Anyone relying on this information should acquire the most current version e.g. from http://www.thrane.com or from the distributor. Thrane & Thrane is not responsible for the content or accuracy of any translations or reproductions, in whole or in part, of this manual from any other source.
Copyright © 2011 Thrane & Thrane A/S. All rights reserved.
GPL notification The software included in this product contains copyrighted software that is licensed under the GPL/LGPL. The verbatim licenses can be found online at: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0.html http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html You may obtain the complete corresponding source code from us for a period of three years after our last shipment of this product, which will be no earlier than December 31, 2015, by sending a money order or check for DKK 50 to: SW Technology/GPL Compliance, Thrane & Thrane A/S, Lundtoftegaardsvej 93D 2800 Lyngby DENMARK Please write "source for product SAILOR 6300 MF/HF Radiotelex" in the memo line of your payment. You may also find a copy of the source at http://www.thrane.com/foss. This offer is valid to anyone in receipt of this information.
Warranties Any attempt to install or execute software not supplied by Thrane & Thrane on this device will result in the warranty being void. Any attempt to modify the software on this device in a way not specified by Thrane & Thrane will result in the warranty being void.
Trademark Acknowledgements •
Thrane & Thrane is a registered trademark of Thrane & Thrane A/S in the European Union and the United States.
•
SAILOR is a registered trademark of Thrane & Thrane A/S in the European Union, the United States and other countries.
•
Other product and company names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners.
Safety summary The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment. Thrane & Thrane assumes no liability for the customer's failure to comply with these requirements. GROUND THE EQUIPMENT To minimise shock hazard, the equipment chassis and cabinet must be connected to an electrical ground and the cable instructions must be followed. DO NOT OPERATE IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE Do not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases or fumes. Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard. KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS Operating personnel must not remove equipment covers. Component replacement and internal adjustment must be made by qualified maintenance personnel. DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY EQUIPMENT Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the equipment. COMPASS SAFE DISTANCE Minimum compass safe distance: 1.3 m from the Message Terminal. Failure to comply with the rules above will void the warranty!
iv
1
About the manual
2
Manual overview This manual describes how to use the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF Radiotelex. Note that this manual does not cover installation of the system. For information on installation refer to the installation manuals [2] and [3] listed below. This manual has the following chapters: •
Introduction contains an overview of the Radiotelex system.
•
Using the system explains how to send Distress alerts and how to use the Radiotelex application for sending and receiving telex messages.
•
Troubleshooting contains a short troubleshooting guide and explains how to check the status of the system.
Related documents The below list shows the documents related to this manual and to the Radiotelex system. Document number
Ref
Title and description
[1]
SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC, User manual
98-131070
[2]
SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC, Installation manual
98-130890
[3]
SAILOR 6006 and SAILOR 6007 Message Terminal, Installation manual
98-130088
[4]
SAILOR 6081 PSU and Charger, Installation and user manual
98-130980
v
Typography In this manual, typography is used as indicated below: Bold is used for the following purposes: •
To emphasize words or sentences. Example: “Do not push the Distress button if you are not in distress”.
•
To indicate what the user should select in the user interface. Example: “Select Message > Inbox”.
Italic is used to emphasize the paragraph title in cross-references. Example: “For further information, see System overview on page 2”.
vi
Contents Chapter 1
Introduction System overview .................................................................2 The Radiotelex application .................................................3
Chapter 2
Using the system Before you start ..................................................................6 Sending a DSC Distress alert ..............................................7 Sending a Distress telex .....................................................8 Cancelling a Distress alert ..................................................9 Overview of the Radiotelex user interface ......................... 10 Setting up a telex call ........................................................13 Making a telex call ............................................................16 Messages ......................................................................... 23 Receiving telex messages .................................................26 Scanning frequencies ....................................................... 27 System settings ................................................................ 33 Power status .................................................................... 34
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting Getting support ................................................................ 37 Generating a diagnostic report .........................................38 Troubleshooting guide .....................................................39 Status signaling ................................................................41
vii
Chapter :
Glossary
.........................................................................................43
Index
.........................................................................................47
viii
1111
Chapter 1
Introduction With the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF Radiotelex system you can send and receive telex messages and send DSC Distress alerts over MF/HF radio. The Radiotelex program runs on a SAILOR 6006 Message Terminal with a keyboard.
The Message Terminal is connected to a SAILOR 6300 MF/HF radio, which transmits and receives the telex messages and transmits DSC Distress alerts. The units are further described in the installation manuals for the MF/HF radio [2] and the Message Terminal [3]. This chapter has the following sections: •
System overview
•
The Radiotelex application
1
Introduction
1
Chapter 1: Introduction
System overview The SAILOR 6300 MF/HF Radiotelex communicates on MF or HF radio frequencies. It is approved for shipboard installations to operate within the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS). Radiotelex supports worldwide ship-to-ship, ship-to-shore, and shore-to-ship communication. A coast station can act as a relay between the Radiotelex system and an end receiver without any telex capabilities. The Radiotelex system supports both 4- and 5-digit selective calls and 9-digit MMSI (Maritime Mobile Service Identity) numbers.
Coast station
Radiotelex
Radiotelex
Ship station
Ship station
Fax subscriber
Radiotelex is well suited for transmission over very long distances. It has global coverage, even including the North pole and the South pole.
2
System overview
1111
Chapter 1: Introduction
The Radiotelex application runs on the SAILOR 6006 Message Terminal. On the Message Terminal you can read and write telex messages and set up telex calls. The Message Terminal has a touch-screen and a keyboard for operating the Radiotelex system.
f
The Radiotelex application starts up automatically when the Message Terminal is powered. Note that the Message Terminal must always be powered in a GMDSS system. For details on how to operate the system, see Using the system on page 5.
The Radiotelex application
3
Introduction
The Radiotelex application
Chapter 1: Introduction
4
The Radiotelex application
Using the system
2222
Chapter 2 2
•
Before you start
•
Sending a DSC Distress alert
•
Sending a Distress telex
•
Cancelling a Distress alert
•
Overview of the Radiotelex user interface
•
Setting up a telex call
•
Making a telex call
•
Messages
•
Receiving telex messages
•
Scanning frequencies
•
System settings
•
Power status
Using the system
This chapter describes how to operate the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF Radiotelex. It has the following sections:
5
Chapter 2: Using the system
Before you start The SAILOR 6300 MF/HF Radiotelex system must be set up for telex. This involves the following steps:
At the time of installation 1. SAILOR 6006 is configurable to be either a mini-C GMDSS terminal or a Radiotelex terminal. At the first power-up you must set up the Message Terminal to be a Radiotelex terminal. 2. At first power up you must also configure the answer back string and the ID for your system. For further information, see the installation manual for the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC [2]. 3. The MF/HF radio must be enabled to use telex. This is done by entering a PIN code in the MF/HF transceiver. For further information, see the installation manual for the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC [2].
Before use 1. The Message Terminal must be on. 2. The MF/HF radio must be in telex mode: On the MF/HF radio, push the Mode button repeatedly until the display shows TLX. For details, see the user manual for the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC [1].
6
Before you start
Important
Only send a Distress alert if you are in immediate danger! The Distress alert can be compared to a MAYDAY call.
The Distress button procedure below is the same on the Message Terminal as on the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC. Note
If the subsequent communication is to be telex, use the ALERT function in the MF/HF radio to set up telex subsequent communication before pushing the button. Refer to the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC User manual for details on how to set up the MF/HF radio. When the DSC Distress alert is sent, a popup appears on the Message Terminal guiding you to the Call page, which is automatically set up to Broadcast FEC using the telex frequency matching the Distress alert.
To send a Distress alert, do as follows: 1. Open the cover for the Distress button. 2. Push and hold the button for more than 3 seconds to transmit an undesignated DSC Distress alert. While the button is pushed, the Message Terminal shows a popup with a countdown and the attached control unit(s) beep. To cancel a Distress alert, see Cancelling a Distress alert on page 9.
Sending a DSC Distress alert
7
Using the system
Sending a DSC Distress alert
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
Chapter 2: Using the system
Sending a Distress telex If telex subsequent communication is selected for the DSC Distress alert, a popup appears and guides you to the Call page, which is automatically set up to Broadcast FEC on the Distress frequency assigned by the MF/HF radio. You can now send a Distress telex as follows: 1. In the Call setup page, select Call at the bottom of the page. 2. Type in further information about the distress. Press Enter or select Send after each line. Include: •
Distress alert sent at xx:xx (time of the Distress alert)
•
Own MMSI and name of the ship
•
Own position
•
Information about your distress
3. When the message is complete, select Break to end the message. For further information on how to send a telex, see Setting up a telex call on page 13 and Making a telex call on page 16.
8
Sending a Distress telex
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
Cancelling a Distress alert 1. On the MF/HF radio, cancel the Distress alert by selecting the softkey ANNUL. For details, see the user manual for the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC. 2. The radio sends a Distress cancel (on 1-6 channels).
3. The radio enters telex subsequent communication on the first telex distress frequency. 4. The Message Terminal shows that the system is engaged in DSC subsequent communication. 5. Select Call from the main menu. 6. In the Call page of the Message Terminal, select Call to send a Broadcast FEC message cancelling the Distress alert. In the message, include as a minimum: •
This is a Distress cancel for Distress alert sent at xx:xx (time of the Distress alert)
•
Own MMSI and name of the ship
•
Own position
•
The reason for cancelling the Distress alert
7. When the message is complete, select Break to end the message 8. On the MF/HF radio, press OK if more frequencies are involved, or QUIT to end the distress session if the whole procedure is completed. 9. If more frequencies are involved, the radio automatically switches to the next frequency. Repeat step 4 to step 8 for every frequency. For further information on how to send a telex, see Setting up a telex call on page 13 and Making a telex call on page 16.
Cancelling a Distress alert
9
Using the system
To cancel a Distress alert with telex subsequent communication, do as follows:
Chapter 2: Using the system
Overview of the Radiotelex user interface When the system is powered, the Message Terminal display shows the main menu and a status field. Below is an overview of the main screen in the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF Radiotelex. Name of current page
Power status
Status field
Main menu items
•
Name of current page: When you have entered a subpage, this field shows the name of the page.
•
Status field: This field shows a short status message next to the Status/warning icon.
•
Status/Warning icon: This icon can show: System is idle.
10
Status/warning icon
Overview of the Radiotelex user interface
System is scanning the frequencies selected in the scan list. ARQ connection.
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
Using the system
Outgoing selective FEC. Incoming FEC (selective or broadcast). Outgoing Broadcast FEC. Red arrows instead of green arrows in the above icons mean that the signal quality is poor. Together with each of these symbols one of the following icons may also appear: Error. Warning. For details of warnings/errors, see Information of events on page 41. •
Power status: Shows the status of the backup battery.
•
Main menu items: Select these items to access the subpages.
Overview of the Radiotelex user interface
11
Chapter 2: Using the system
Navigating the Radiotelex To navigate and select items, you can do one of the following: Touch screen: Select items by touching them with your finger on the screen. Keyboard: •
When an item has an underlined letter, you may type Alt +
to select the item, e.g. type Alt+S to select the Scan menu.
•
Press Esc to go back one level in the menu system or to close the current window.
•
Use the tab and arrow keys to navigate through items.
•
Press Space to select items.
•
Press F1 to see the list of active errors and warnings.
Trackball (if fitted):
12
•
Use the trackball in the corner of the keyboard to move the cursor around on the screen.
•
Use the two buttons in the left corner the same way you use the left and right buttons on a mouse.
Overview of the Radiotelex user interface
Setting up a telex call The system must be configured and enabled before use. See Before you start on page 6.
Using the system
Note
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
Setting up the transmission mode The Radiotelex system has three transmission modes: •
ARQ (Automatic Repetition reQuest): A mode where two stations can communicate without breaking the connection. The direction is changed with an “over” command.
•
Selective FEC (Forward Error Correction): A one-way mode to one station.
•
Broadcast FEC: A one-way mode broadcast to all stations. E.g. used in distress situations or for news or coast station traffic lists.
Setting up a telex call
13
Chapter 2: Using the system
To set up the transmission mode, do as follows: 1. From the main menu, select Call. Note
If Telex is not selected in the MF/HF radio you get a warning that the radio is occupied. Use the Mode button on the radio to switch to Telex.
2. Select ARQ, Selective FEC or Broadcast FEC.
Selecting the frequency for the call You can select the frequency for your call in one of the following ways: •
14
Manual frequency: Allows you to type in the frequency in the Tx freq and Rx freq fields (Rx is only relevant for ARQ calls). When you select a coast station from the Coast stations list, the primary frequencies are listed, and you can select the frequency to use.
Setting up a telex call
•
ITU intership channel: Allows you to type in a channel number to use for ship-to-ship communication.
•
ITU coast station channel: Allows you to type in a channel number to use for communication with a coast station.
•
ITU distress/safety channel: Allows you to type in a channel number to use for distress or safety communication. If the entered channel is not a distress or safety channel, the display shows a warning. There are 6 dedicated distress frequencies for simplex FEC telex distress: 2174.5 kHz (Channel 1), 4177.5 kHz (Channel 411), 6268 kHz (Channel 611), 8376.5 kHz (Channel 801), 12520 kHz (Channel 1287) and 16695 kHz (Channel 1624).
When selecting a channel number the corresponding frequency is automatically displayed.
Selecting the recipient for the call Broadcast FECs are broadcast to all stations listening on the selected frequency, so you cannot specify recipients for broadcast calls. For ARQ or Selective FEC you must specify the recipient for your telex. •
If the recipient is in the Subscribers list or the Coast stations list, simply select the recipient from the list.
•
If the recipient is not in any of the lists, type in the recipient’s number in the Call code field. You can use either a 9-digit MMSI number or a 4-digit or 5-digit selective calling number.
Coast stations have either a 9-digit MMSI number starting with 00 or a 4-digit selective call (SelCall) number. Ship subscribers have either a 9-digit MMSI number or a 5-digit SelCall number.
Setting up a telex call
15
Using the system
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
Chapter 2: Using the system
Making a telex call When you have set up telex mode, frequency/channel and recipient as described in the previous section, you are ready to make a call. Do as follows: 1. Select at the bottom of the Call setup page to start your telex session. The display shows that the radio is trying to connect.
2. When the connection is established, the telex page opens.
If you have selected Automatic identification (DE/WRU), your answer back string is automatically sent. For ARQ calls, the answer back string is followed by a WRU command requesting the recipient’s answer back string. When the recipient has answered and has sent an Over command, you can start your message.
16
Making a telex call
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
3. You can send text in the following two ways: •
Type in your message directly in the text line at the bottom, using your connected keyboard or the on-screen keyboard, which is activated by pressing the text line on the screen and then the keyboard icon that appears in the right side of the text line.
Making a telex call
17
Using the system
For a description of all the items at the bottom of the page, see Options in the telex page on page 20.
Chapter 2: Using the system
•
Select Options > Transmit file and select the file you want to transmit. Note
The system begins to transmit immediately when the file is selected. Pressing OVER while a file is being transferred does not result in a change of direction until the entire file is transmitted. To stop the transmission, select Cancel file transfer. Then you can use the OVER command to change the direction.
You can combine the two methods by adding text before or after the file contents, and type text at the bottom while the file is being transmitted. If you transmitted a file and you do not want to add further text, skip the next step and go directly to step 5. For information on how to create a file for later transmission, see Writing message files for telex on page 23. 4. When you have finished your message, press Enter or select Send at the bottom of the page. The text is now transmitted. You can follow the progress in the inverted part of the message.
18
Making a telex call
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
Using the system
5. For ARQ only: when you want the recipient to write back, select Over at the bottom of the page, or type [OVER] or +?.
The recipient can now type in a message for you. The message will appear in the field just below your message. Note
If the remote station forces an OVER on your part while you are transmitting data, 1-2 characters may incorrectly be marked has having been sent while the remote station may not have received these characters. We do not recommend forcing a change of direction while the other station is sending data.
6. When the recipient has placed the [OVER] command too, you can type more text to continue the conversation. 7. To end the telex session, select Break. If you do not want to wait for exchange of DE/WRU, you can select Break now! in the popup that appears after Break is selected. The call is then disconnected. You can see all telex sessions initiated by you under Sent Items in the Message page. See Viewing Sent items on page 25.
Making a telex call
19
Chapter 2: Using the system
Options in the telex page Buttons The table below shows the functions of the buttons that can appear at the bottom of the page: Button
Function Transmits the text you have typed in the text line at the bottom. (ARQ only) Changes direction, so the recipient can write back. You cannot send any text after an Over command, until the direction is changed back to your side. However, if you send more text while the OVER command is waiting to be sent, the OVER is removed and replaced by your new text. Transmits your answer back string. The answer back string is stored in the MF/HF radio during installation, using the Identification page in the Message Terminal (System > Settings > Identification). In Call settings you can set up the system to automatically send DE/WRU (System > Settings > Call settings).
20
Making a telex call
Function (ARQ only) Inserts a WRU command (Who are you? request for identification) in your text. This command is automatically followed by [OVER], so that the recipient can answer back.
Using the system
Button
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
When the WRU command is sent, you cannot send any more text until the direction is changed back to your side. However, if you send more text while the WRU command is waiting to be sent, the WRU is removed and replaced by your new text. In the Call settings page you can set up the system to automatically send DE/WRU. Inserts a BELL command (can make e.g. a buzzer sound at the recipient). Opens the Options menu, described in the next section.
Stops the communication link.
Making a telex call
21
Chapter 2: Using the system
Options menu To open the Options menu in the telex page, select Options at the bottom of the page.
You now have the following options: •
22
Insert •
Date & Time: Inserts the current date and time (UTC format) in your message. The syntax of the Date and time is the format selected under Settings > Date and Time format.
•
[OVER]: Inserts an OVER command in your text, so that when you select Send or press Enter, your text is sent and the direction is changed to the recipient immediately after.
•
[BREAK]: Inserts a BREAK command in your text, so that when you select Send or press Enter, your text is sent and the communication is stopped immediately after.
•
Transmit file Allows you to select a text file to transmit. For information on how to write and save the text file, see Writing message files for telex on page 23.
•
Print Sends the text in the telex page to the printer.
Making a telex call
Writing message files for telex If you want to write longer messages, you can use the Message function. Note
You cannot send the message directly from the Message editor. To send the message you have to save it to a file and then make a telex call and load the file as described in Making a telex call on page 16.
To write a message, do as follows: 1. From the main menu, select Message. 2. Select New (if not already selected).
To make sure the text is properly formatted at the receiving end, we recommend starting the file with a few empty lines (press Enter).
Messages
23
Using the system
Messages
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
Chapter 2: Using the system
3. You now have two options: •
Type in the text using your keyboard or the on-screen keyboard in the top right corner. Note that you can only use telex characters.
•
Select Options > Load and select a file to load into the editor. You can then edit the text before you save it. Note that you cannot load a file if it contains characters that are not telex characters.
Supported characters are: a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 23456789 -?:().,'=/+ 4. When the message is complete, select Options.
5. Select Save to save the message to a file. You can save it to the Message Terminal or to a USB memory stick. 6. Select Print if you want to print the message on your connected printer. 7. If you want to clear the editor and start a new message, select New.
24
Messages
To see the Inbox, select Inbox at the bottom of the Message page.
The Inbox page shows all telex messages sent to you and initiated by another station. It shows both single messages and ARQ conversations initiated by the other part. Note
The Inbox can hold 1000 messages. The oldest messages are deleted when this limit is exceeded.
Viewing Sent items To see the Sent items, select Sent items at the bottom of the Message page. The Sent items page shows all telex communication initiated by you. Note
Sent items can hold 1000 messages. The oldest messages are deleted when this limit is exceeded.
Printing, saving or deleting messages Use the tools symbol to print, delete or save messages. You can use the tools symbol from within a message or from the list of messages (Inbox or Sent items).
From within a message To delete, print or save a message from within the message, do as follows: 1. Select the message you want to delete, save or print. 2. Select
in the top right corner of the display.
3. Select Delete, Print or save.
Messages
25
Using the system
Viewing the Inbox
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
Chapter 2: Using the system
From the Inbox or Sent items You can only print a message from within the message, as shown in the previous section. To delete or save messages from the Inbox or Sent items, do as follows: 1. Click
in the lower left corner of the display.
2. Select the messages you want to delete or save. You may use Select all to select all messages in the Inbox or Sent items, or Clear all to clear all selections. 3. Select Delete to delete the selected messages or Save to save the selected messages.
Receiving telex messages The system can receive telex messages on all MF and HF telex frequencies, including NAVTEX messages at 490 kHz, 518 kHz and 4209.5 kHz. Note
You can only receive telexes on frequencies that you are scanning. This means that the frequencies must be in the scan list, and a scanning must be started. See the next section for details. Exception for DSC subsequent communication: The radio will automatically enable scanning on the correct frequency and only on that frequency. When the DSC session is ended, the scan list of the Message Terminal is used again.
When a telex is received on your Message Terminal, the procedure is: 1. A popup appears and the telex page opens, showing the incoming message. 2. If the call is an ARQ call, you can continue the communication as described in Making a telex call on page 16. All received telex messages, whether they are ARQ telexes initiated by the other part or FEC telexes, are shown in the Inbox.
26
Receiving telex messages
When a scan is started, the system is ready to receive telex messages on the selected scan frequencies. The MF/HF radio scans every listed channel for 3 seconds. If no traffic is detected, it continues to the next channel. The scan list in the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF Radiotelex always shows the current telex frequency of the connected MF/HF radio (indicated with “MF/HF radio frequency”). In addition, you can add other telex frequencies that you want the system to scan. See Editing the scan list on page 28. Note
If the system is in DSC subsequent communication mode, only the frequency assigned by the MF/HF radio is scanned.
To start a frequency scan, do as follows: 1. From the main menu, select Scan.
2. To scan the frequencies shown, select Start scan. The Message Terminal informs the MF/HF radio to scan for the selected frequencies. The status field in the top right corner shows Scanning. 3. To stop scanning, select Stop scan.
Scanning frequencies
27
Using the system
Scanning frequencies
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
Chapter 2: Using the system
Editing the scan list The MF/HF scanning frequency is automatically listed and can only be changed from the MF/HF radio. You can add, change or delete additional scanning frequencies in the list. Note
Scanning on multiple frequencies is primarily intended for receiving ARQ calls. If many scan channels are specified you may not be able to receive all incoming FEC calls, because FEC uses a much shorter phasing sequence compared to ARQ.
To edit the scan list, do as follows: 1. At the bottom of the SCAN LIST page, select the Edit list button.
28
Scanning frequencies
Using the system
The list opens.
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
The green check marks show which frequencies are to be scanned. 2. To enable scanning of a frequency in the list, select the box next to the frequency. 3. Select OK.
To change or delete a frequency in the list 1. Open the scan list as shown above. 2. Select the frequency (not the box). The selected frequency is shown in the right side of the page. 3. To delete the frequency from the list, select Delete. Then select Yes.
Scanning frequencies
29
Chapter 2: Using the system 4. To change the frequency, select Edit.
5. Type in the Receive and Transmit frequencies or select from the list of Coast stations. Note
You must always type in both frequencies, even if you are only going to use the receive frequency. The transmit frequency is used to respond to incoming ARQ calls.
6. Select OK. 7. To stop editing the scan list, select OK again.
30
Scanning frequencies
To add a frequency to the list
Using the system
1. In the SCAN LIST page, select Edit list.
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
2. Select Add new in the top right corner.
Scanning frequencies
31
Chapter 2: Using the system 3. Type in the Receive and Transmit frequencies or select from the list of Coast stations. Note
You must always enter a transmit frequency, even if it is not used (e.g. for NAVTEX, which is receive only). The transmit frequency must be within a valid maritime frequency band specified by ITU. The receive frequency must be between 490 and 27500 kHz.
4. Select OK. 5. To stop editing the scan list, select OK again.
32
Scanning frequencies
System settings
Using the system
To access the system settings, select System > Settings.
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
In the System settings page you can set up: •
Date and time format. Set up how date and time is displayed.
•
Screen settings. Set the ambient light level for switching to night mode.
•
Call settings. Automatic DE/WRU and slave delay (the slave delay of 10 ms is adequate for almost all scenarios).
•
Identification. Configure call code and answer back string (DE). These settings require password and are normally set up during installation.
System settings
33
Chapter 2: Using the system
Power status Note
The Power status only shows information for the SAILOR 6081 PSU and charger. If you have a different power supply in your system, there is no information available.
1. To see the status of the power source, select System > Power.
34
Power status
Important
Using the system
2. To see the power settings, select Settings... in the lower right corner.
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
The default settings are suitable for most installations. Do not change these settings unless you have a special battery type or installation that requires different settings. Only skilled personnel should change the power settings. For information on how to change the settings, refer to the installation manual for the MF/HF radio [2].
Power status
35
Chapter 2: Using the system
36
Power status
Chapter 3
3333
Troubleshooting
3
•
Getting support
•
Generating a diagnostic report
•
Troubleshooting guide
•
Status signaling
Troubleshooting
This chapter gives guidelines for troubleshooting and provides an overview of the different means of status signaling. It has the following sections:
Getting support If this manual does not provide the remedies to solve your problem, you may want to contact your local distributor. A list of certified partners and distributors is available on Thrane & Thrane’s web site: www.thrane.com. Select Maritime and select Where to buy from the top menu bar.
37
Chapter 3: Troubleshooting
Generating a diagnostic report To generate a diagnostic report, do as follows: 1. Select System. 2. Select Advanced at the bottom of the page.
3. Connect a USB memory stick to your Message Terminal. Note
Do not save the file on the Message Terminal itself; the file format is not supported. Use a USB memory stick instead.
4. Select Generate diagnostic report. 5. Select USB and browse to the location where you want your diagnostics file. 6. Select Save. 7. Select OK.
38
Generating a diagnostic report
The below table provides information on some of the problems that might occur, including possible causes and remedies to solve the problems. Problem The system cannot be switched on
No battery information in the Message Terminal
Possible cause
Remedy
The Message Terminal has a remote on/off switch, so the power button is disabled.
If the Message Terminal is using a remote on/off switch, use that instead of the power button.
There is no power on the input to the Message Terminal.
Check that all power cables between the ship power source and the Message Terminal are connected correctly, and that the power source is on.
The Ethernet connection from the power supply is not working.
Check the Link activity indicator at the connection points in the Ethernet switch. Check that the Ethernet cables are connected correctly and are not damaged.
The power supply is not a SAILOR 6081
Troubleshooting guide
None. Battery and power information is only shown if the power supply is a SAILOR 6081.
39
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting guide
3333
Chapter 3: Troubleshooting
Chapter 3: Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Remedy
No connection between Message Terminal and printer
The USB cable is damaged or is not connected properly.
Check that the USB cable is connected correctly and is not damaged.
No connection between Message Terminal and MF/HF radio
The CAN connection does not work.
Check that the CAN cables are connected correctly to the Message Terminal and the MF/HF radio, and that they are not damaged.
The MF/HF radio is not switched on
Check that the MF/HF radio is switched on and ready.
Other
Switch off the MF/HF radio and the Message Terminal and switch them back on.
The paper is not placed correctly in the printer.
Adjust the paper to the left side of the printer.
The Message Terminal shows “out of paper” although there is paper in the printer.
40
Troubleshooting guide
Status signaling The Message Terminal can show basic status and error messages. The upper right corner of the display shows the most important status information.
Information of events Popup windows When an event requires your attention, a popup window appears. When you have read the text, select OK or press Esc to close the window.
If the window indicates an error that requires your action, the warning or error icon will stay in the top right corner of the display as long as the problem persists. If the system uses a SAILOR 6081 PSU and Charger, the Message Terminal also shows errors or warnings related to the power supply. For information on the SAILOR 6081, see the manual for the SAILOR 6081 [4].
List of active warnings and errors The top right corner of the display shows a short text about the current status. The icon in the corner can change depending on the situation. The following icons may show: Antenna icon: The antenna icon can look different depending on the status. For details, see page 10 in Overview of the Radiotelex user interface. Error. Warning. Select the icon or press F1 to see the list of active warnings and errors. From the list of active warnings and errors you can access the event log.
Status signaling
41
Troubleshooting
3333
Chapter 3: Troubleshooting
Chapter 3: Troubleshooting
Event log From the list of active errors or warnings, you can select Event log to see a list of previous events. The list holds up to 100 events, including
42
•
Errors
•
Warnings
•
Cleared warnings and errors.
Status signaling
AAAA
Glossary Glossary A ARQ
Automatic Repetition reQuest. An error-control method for data transmission that uses acknowledgements and timeouts to achieve reliable data transmission over an unreliable service. If the sender does not receive an acknowledgment before the timeout, it usually re-transmits the frame/packet until the sender receives an acknowledgment or exceeds a predefined number of re-transmissions.
C CAN
Controller-Area Network. A message based protocol designed to allow microcontrollers and devices to communicate with each other within a vehicle without a host computer.
D DE
A command used in a telex message to insert an answer-back string identifying the sender of the message. The string should normally contain the call sign.
DSC
Digital Selective Calling. Primarily intended to initiate ship-toship, ship-to-shore and shore-to-ship radiotelephone and MF/HF radiotelex calls. Each DSC-equipped ship, shore station and group is assigned a unique 9-digit Maritime Mobile Service Identity. DSC distress alerts, which consist of a preformatted distress message, are used to initiate emergency communication with ships and rescue coordination centers.
F FEC
Forward Error Correction. A system of error control for data transmission, whereby the sender adds redundant data to its messages, also known as an error-correcting code. This allows
43
Glossary
A
Glossary
the receiver to detect and correct errors without the need to ask the sender for additional data. The advantage of forward error correction is that a back-channel is not required.
G GMDSS
Global Maritime Distress Safety System. The system is intended to perform the following functions: alerting (including position determination of the unit in distress), search and rescue coordination, locating (homing), maritime safety information broadcasts, general communication, and bridge-to-bridge communication.
GPL
General Public License
H HF
High Frequency. The frequency band between 3 and 30 MHz. Used for medium and long range terrestrial radio communication.
I ITU
International Telecommunication Union
L LGPL
Lesser General Public License
M MF
44
Medium Frequency. Radio frequencies (RF) in the range of 300 kHz to 3 MHz. Navtex, which is part of the current Global Maritime Distress Safety System occupies 518 kHz and 490 kHz for important digital text broadcasts.
Maritime Mobile Service Identity. A series of nine digits which are sent in digital form over a radio frequency channel in order to uniquely identify ship stations, ship earth stations, coast stations, coast earth stations, and group calls. These identities are formed in such a way that the identity or part thereof can be used by telephone and telex subscribers connected to the general telecommunications network to call ships automatically.
N NAVTEX
NAVigational TEleX. An international automated mediumfrequency direct-printing service for delivery of navigational and meteorological warnings and forecasts, as well as urgent marine safety information to ships.
P PIN
Personal Identification Number
T TLX
TeLeprinter eXchange - also called telex.
U USB
Universal Serial Bus. A specification to establish communication between devices and a host controller (usually personal computers). USB is intended to replace many varieties of serial and parallel ports. USB can connect computer peripherals such as mice, keyboards, digital cameras, printers, personal media players, flash drives, and external hard drives.
UTC
Universal Time, Coordinated. The International Atomic Time (TAI) with leap seconds added at irregular intervals to compensate for the Earth’s slowing rotation. Leap seconds are used to allow UTC to closely track UT1, which is mean solar time at the Royal Observatory, Greenwich.
45
Glossary
MMSI
AAAA
Glossary
Glossary
W WRU
46
Who are you? A command used in a telex message to request an answer-back string (DE) from the recipient of the telex message.
Index alarm voltage level, 34 answer back string define, 33 insert, 20
B battery charge max. voltage and current, 34 battery status, 34 Bell button, 21 Break button, 21 buttons on screen during call, 20
C call make a telex call, 16 select frequency, 14 select recipient, 15 set up, 13 call code for own system, 33 charge battery max. voltage and current, 34 coast station MMSI, 15
D date and time format, setting, 33 DE and WRU automatically insert, 33 DE button, 20
B
delete a message, 25 diagnostic report, 38 Distress cancel, 9 send alert, 7 telex subsequent communication, 8 document number, this manual, i documents, related, v
Index
A
BBBB
Index
E error messages, 41
F file, transmit, 22 float voltage, 34 frequency scan, 27 select, 14
I icons, 10 Identification, 33 identification request (WRU), 21 Inbox, 25 initial setup, 6 insert date and time, 22
M manual document number, i
47
Index
message delete, 25 print, 25 receive, 26 save, 25 MMSI coast station, 15 subscriber, 15
N night mode, 33
O options menu during call, 22 Over button, 20 overview system, 1 user interface, 10
recipient of call, 15 related manuals, v
S safety summary, iv save a message, 25 scan frequencies, 27 Send button, 20 Sent items, 25 slave delay, 33 status, 10 subscriber MMSI, 15 system overview, 1 system settings, 33
T
power alarm level, 34 status, 34 power source, 34 prepare the system for telex, 6 print current page, 22 message, 25
telex enable in radio, 6 make a call, 16 receive, 26 select frequency, 14 select recipient, 15 set up a call, 13 subsequent communication Distress, 8 time and date format, setting, 33 transmit a file, 22 troubleshooting, 39 typography used in this manual, vi
R
U
radiotelex overview, 2 receive telex, 26
user interface, 3 navigate, 12 overview, 10
P
48
for
V voltage alarm level, 34
W
BBBB
Index
Index
warnings and error messages, 41 WRU button, 21
49
98-132519-A
Thrane & Thrane A/S
•
[email protected]
•
www.thrane.com
TECHNICAL MANUAL
SAILOR H1252A/TT-3608A-220 Printer SAILOR H1252B/TT-3608A Printer
Please note Any responsibility or liability for loss or damage in connection with the use of this product and the accompanying documentation is disclaimed. The information in this manual is provided for information purposes only, is subject to change without notice, may contain errors or inaccuracies, and represents no commitment whatsoever. This agreement is governed by the laws of Denmark.
PART I
ontents P
1 General information ............................................................................ 2 2 Installation ........................................................................................... 3 2.1 Mounting possibilities .................................................................. 3
PART II
H1252B / TT-3608A
1 General information ............................................................................ 6 1.1 Introduction ................................................................................. 6 1.2 Principle of operation .................................................................. 6 1.3 Technical data ............................................................................ 6 2 Maintenance/modification .................................................................. 7 2.1 Disassembling to remove the mains transformer ....................... 7 2.2 Disassembling and mounting of the ON-OFF switch .................. 8 2.3 Mounting the DC power supply and reassembling ..................... 8 2.3.1 Mounting of the DC power supply ............................................... 9 2.3.2 Modification of the printer main control board ............................ 9 2.3.3 Reassembling of the printer ...................................................... 10 2.4 Electrical connections ............................................................... 11 3 Service ............................................................................................... 12 3.1 Printer selftest ........................................................................... 12 3.2 Module check of the DC power supply ..................................... 12 3.3 Check after repair ..................................................................... 12 4 Mechanical disassembling of printer .............................................. 13 5 Circuit description ............................................................................ 14 5.1 DC power supply .......................................................................... 14
0627
PART 1
1
General information
H1252A/TT-3608A-220 Hardcopy printer is an OKI MICROLINE 182/280 printer for 220/240V AC operation. H1252B/TT-3608A Hardcopy printer is an OKI MICROLINE 182/280 printer with built-in DC power supply for 10.5-32V DC operation. The printer is as standard delivered with a Roll Paper Stand, other paper types can also be used, please refer to the OKI manual for detailed information. The printer is as standard delivered with the mounting kit H1250, it can also be mounted on the H2192 GMDSS Console using the mounting plate which is delivered together with the H2192 GMDSS Console. Paper roll, Power cable and Centronics cable are supplied with the Printer.
501274
501279
501278
2
0627
PART I
2 2.1
Installation Mounting possibilities
240 mm
Mounting it H1250
280 mm
371 mm
28709
rilling plan
371 mm
290 mm
4 pcs ø6 mm
300 mm 341 mm 28711
0627
3
PART 1
240 mm
Mounting it H21 2
325 mm
442 mm
28699
256 mm
rilling plan
118.5 mm
2 pcs 4 mm
428 mm 442 mm 28710
4
0627
PART II
Printer
ith mounting it H1250
37
1m
m
29
0m
m
Self-cutting screws, 4 pieces 4.2 x 25 Washers, 4 pieces M4
m 0m m 1m 34
30
Screws, 3 pieces M4 x 20
28641A
Printer
ith mounting it H21 2
25
6m
m
11
8.5
mm
m
8m
42
m
2m
44
Self-cutting screws, 2 pieces 4.2 x 25 Washers, 2 pieces M4
Screws, 3 pieces M4 x 20 28697
0627
5
PART II
1
General information
1.1
Introduction
This section gives you all the necessary informations to maintaine the DC power supply module. It also specify how to modify the printer to operate on DC supply instead of AC supply.
1.2
Principle of operation
The power supply module is constructed to operate from a battery voltage of 10.5V DC to 32V DC to deliver the necessary voltages for the printer. The voltage conversion takes place in a “flyback” switch converter, which is controlled by a current mode controller. The regulation of the output voltage is controlled via a separate winding of the transformer, which also deliveres the power for the control circuit. At the input and at the output are placed filters to suppress the switch noise. Bloc diagram INPUT FILTER
SWITCH CONVERTER
OUTPUT FILTER
+
+30V
10.5V....32V
-
+10V 28480
PWM
1.3
Technical data
Input voltage range Current consumption Output voltages Noise from input terminals On/off Operating temperature
6
CONTROL CIRCUIT
: 10.5V DC to 32V DC : max. 4.5A (fuse = 6.3AT) : 10V DC / 0.3A : 30V DC / 0.8A : better than CEPT Rec. T/R 34-01 : by switch : -15o C to +55o C
0627
PART II
2
Maintenance/modification
This section is intended for use when modifying the printer to operate from DC supply instead of 220V AC supply.
2.1
isassembling to remove the mains transformer
Remove the access cover by lifting up rear edge. Pull out the platen knob. Remove the two screws. Remove the top cover by lifting up the front and pushing it backward. Remove the transformer output cable from the printer Main Control Board. Remove the ground strap screw, but keep it for later use. Remove the two screws, that fix the transformer, but keep them for later use. Remove the transformer assembly with power PCB and AC cord receptable by lifting upwards. Remove the 220V~ label located at the panel cut out for the AC cord receptable.
1 2 3
5
4
3
28560
0627
7
PART II
2.2
isassembling and mounting of the
-
s itch
It is necessary to remove the ON-OFF switch from the transformer assembly to use it again on the DC power supply module. Remove the filter and switch board from the transformer by pulling it off. Unsolder the ON-OFF Switch. Solder the switch to the two loose wires on the DC power supply module. Then twist the wires to the switch to suppress noise.
2.3
Mounting the C po er suppl and reassembling
Remove the cover on the glue pad and when the power supply module is placed properly, the switch is placed in the slots in the cabinet and is pressed down to the glue pad. Ground connection is mounted under the mounting frame
The mounting frame is fixed with the two screws from the mains transformer
28556
8
0627
PART II
DC power supply circuit board is fixed to the mounting frame with four screws
The ON-OFF Switch is placed in the printer panel cutout and fixed to the PCB with a glue pad
28557
Note: Remove the " 220V ~ " label
2.3.1 Mounting of the C po er suppl Place the ground connection over the rear transformer hole, and fix it with the ground screw. Place the mounting frame where the transformer was mounted, and fix it with the two screws from the transformer. Then place the DC power supply module on the mounting frame, and fix it with four screws. Be sure the power ON-OFF switch is correctly placed in the panel cut out slot. Press the plate with the DC input connector in to the panel cut out the formen AC cord receptable. Connect the output cable to the printer Main Control Board.
2.3.2 Modification of the printer main control board If the printer is equipt with a DC power supply module of other type than from ECI, it is necessary to modify the printer main board. As seen below, the diode D28 (D10) on the printer main board is short circuited. If the printer is equipt with a DC power supply module from ECI, module no. 628471 it is not recommended to short circuit the diode D28 (D10) on the printer main board. 0627
PART II
Run the printer selftest programme. Switch on the ON-OFF switch and simultaneously press down the “line feed” button. After a few seconds (at low input voltage) the printer starts the selftest printing routine, which means that the DC power supply is OK. Switch off the printer. D28 (D10)
Main Control Board
28479
2.3.3 Reassembling of the printer Place the top cover by lifting the front end and place holes in the rear end into the two small hooks in the bottom cabinet. To reassemble the printer, do the reverse procedure of the disassembling. Then run the selftest programme of the printer. (See above)
10
0627
PART II
2.4
lectrical connections
ON-OFF SWITCH FROM MAINS TRANSFORMER
OUTPUT CABLE RED GREEN
RED
BLACK
BLACK YELLOW/GREEN
DC INPUT CABLE 28558
0627
11
PART II
3 3.1
Service Printer selftest
To do a performance test of the DC power supply, a selftest programme in the printer can be used. Connect a DC power source of 10.5V to 32V to the DC input connector. Switch on the ON-OFF switch and simultaneously press down the “line feed” button. After a few seconds (at low input voltage) the printer starts the selftest a printing routine, which means that the power supply is OK. Switch off the printer.
3.2
Module chec of the C po er suppl
Connect a dummy load of 33Ω/30W to 30V output. Connect a dummy load of 33Ω/5W to 10V output. Connect a DC power source of 10.5V to the DC input connector. Switch on the power supply module. The module has to start up within 4 seconds. Connect a voltmeter to the 30V output and read 28 ±2V. Connect a voltmeter to the 10V output and read 9V ±1V. Connect a DC power source of 32V to the DC input connector. Switch on the power supply module. The module has to start up within 1 second. Connect a voltmeter to the 30V output and read 33V ±2V. Connect a voltmeter to the 10V output and read 10V ±1V. Disconnect the dummy load from the 30V output and read the voltage to 39V ±2V.
3.3
Chec after repair
If any repair has occurred to the power supply module, then perform chapter 3.2 MODULE CHECK OF THE DC POWER SUPPLY.
12
0627
PART II
4
Mechanical disassembling of printer
1 2 3
5
4
3
28560
0627
13
PART II
5 5.1
Circuit description C po er suppl
To suppress noise on the supply wires a filter is build around the current compensated choke L1. Furthermore the RC snubbers across the transformer prevent unwanted oscillations during transition time. The diode D7 in conjunction with R16 and C19 clamps the transient voltage spikes across the switch transistor Q1. When the supply is switched on, the capacitor C6 is charged by means of R1 and when the voltage exceeds approx. 8.7V the controller U1 turns on. After a few cycles power is delivered from the bootstrap winding of the transformer to maintain the supply to the controller U1. When switching of the supply voltage, the power from the transformer disappears. This means the supply voltage to U1 decreases to approx. 7.6V and the controller U1 switches off. The rectified voltage from the bootstrap winding is also used to regulate the output voltages, which mainly is determined by R8 and R11. The feedback voltage is led to U1 pin 2. The resistors R10 and R9 and the capacitor C17 form the compensating circuit for the voltage regulation. The controller is working at a fixed frequency of approx. 100 kHz, determined by R7 and C16. The switch current is sensed by R15 and led to U1 pin 3 after being filtered by R14 and C18. The current sense voltage is a ramp voltage, which is compared to a DC level determined by the voltage regulation circuit. When the ramp exceeds the DC level, the controller U1 switch off the FET Q1. This current sense circuit forms a current regulation loop, which is stabilizing the over all regulation and prevents high current to damage the switch transistor Q1. When Q1 is on, the output diodes D3 and D4 is reversed biased and current to the load is delivered from the capacitors C12 and C13. During the off time of Q1, the transformer outputs deliver the currents to the capacitors C12 and C13 and to the load. The chokes L2 and L3 are parts of lowpass filters to suppress voltage spikes. Because of the converter principle , which is a ringing choke flyback type, without direct feedback from the output the voltages, the output voltages are load dependent. At input voltage under approx. 15V and at full load, the converter "changes frequency" and gets an irregular duty-cycle. That is normal behaviour. At low input voltage the start up time can be as long as 4 seconds, depending on the load.
14
0627
PART II
Component location
C po er suppl
View from component side with upper side tracks.
View from component side with lower side tracks. PCB rev. 28471C 0627
15
PART II
Schematic diagram
C po er suppl
This diagram is valid for PCB rev.28471C
16
TT-98-124013-THR-A
Thrane & Thrane A/S
•
[email protected]
•
www.thrane.com
Index divider: Section 3 N
Document Type:
Document name:
SYSTEM USER MANUAL
BRI – D53001 – 01IU
Project Title:
Date First Issue:
Author:
Revision:
12.09.2011
EKI
A
Sailor 6110 Mini-C GMDSS
Enclosed documents from sub-supplier & revision history: Revision: (A,B,C,……..)
Description / Enclosed documents:
Date: (dd.mm.yyyy)
Sign.:
A
Sailor_6110_Mini-C_Operator manual 98-130753 Rev-A Sailor_6006_Message terminal_User manual_98-132519 Rev-A Sailor_H1252A-B_Printer_Installation and user manual_98-124013THR-A Sailor_6194_Terminal control unit_Installation and user manual Rev-B
12.09.2011
EKI
Component picture:
Ulstein Power & Control AS
This document and its content is the property of ULSTEIN. Nonpublic information contained herein shall be treated as Confidential Information. No use, copying, citation or publication of this document or its content is permitted without prior written consent from ULSTEIN. Any conflicts arising from unauthorized use shall be governed by the laws of Norway.
File Name:
Page:
BRI-D53001-01IU (A) System User Manual.doc
Page 1 of 1
USER MANUAL
SAILOR 6110 GMDSS System
SAILOR 6110 GMDSS System User manual
Document number: 98-130753-A Release date: December 23, 2010
Disclaimer Any responsibility or liability for loss or damage in connection with the use of this product and the accompanying documentation is disclaimed by Thrane & Thrane. The information in this manual is provided for information purposes only, is subject to change without notice and may contain errors or inaccuracies. Manuals issued by Thrane & Thrane are periodically revised and updated. Anyone relying on this information should acquire the most current version e.g. from http://www.thrane.com or from the distributor. Thrane & Thrane is not responsible for the content or accuracy of any translations or reproductions, in whole or in part, of this manual from any other source.
Copyright © 2010 Thrane & Thrane A/S. All rights reserved.
GPL notification The software included in this product contains copyrighted software that is licensed under the GPL/LGPL. A copy of those licenses is included in this document in the last appendix. You may obtain the complete corresponding source code from us for a period of three years after our last shipment of this product, which will be no earlier than , by sending a money order or check for DKK 50 to: SW Technology/GPL Compliance, Thrane & Thrane A/S, Lundtoftegaardsvej 93D 2800 Lyngby DENMARK Please write "source for product SAILOR 3027 GMDSS Terminal" or "source for product SAILOR 6006 Message Terminal" in the memo line of your payment. You may also find a copy of the source at http://www.thrane.com/foss. This offer is valid to anyone in receipt of this information.
Warranties Any attempt to install or execute software not supplied by Thrane & Thrane on the devices in this system will result in the warranty being void. Any attempt to modify the software on these devices in a way not specified by Thrane & Thrane will result in the warranty being void.
Trademark Acknowledgements •
Thrane & Thrane is a registered trademark of Thrane & Thrane A/S in the European Union and the United States.
•
Inmarsat is a registered trademark of the International Maritime Satellite Organisation (IMSO) and is licensed by IMSO to Inmarsat Limited and Inmarsat Ventures plc.
•
SAILOR is a registered trademark of Thrane & Thrane A/S in the European Union, the United States and other countries.
•
Other product and company names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners.
Safety summary The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment. Thrane & Thrane assumes no liability for the customer's failure to comply with these requirements. Observe marked areas Under extreme heat conditions do not touch areas of the units that are marked with this symbol, as it may result in injury. Microwave radiation hazards During transmission the antenna in this system radiates Microwave Power.This radiation may be hazardous to humans close to the antenna. When the system is powered, make sure that nobody gets closer than the recommended minimum safety distance of 0.3 meters. Keep away from live circuits Operating personnel must not remove equipment covers. Only qualified maintenance personal must make component replacement and internal adjustment. Under certain conditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with the cable removed. To avoid injuries, always disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them.
iv
1
About the manual
2
Intended readers This manual is a user manual for the SAILOR 6110 GMDSS System. The manual is intended for anyone who is using or intends to use this system. No specific skills are required to operate the SAILOR 6110. However, it is important that you observe all safety requirements listed in the beginning of this manual, and operate the system according to the guidelines in this manual.
Manual overview Note that this manual does not cover installation of the system. For information on installation refer to the SAILOR 6110 installation manual [1]. Part numbers for related manuals are listed in the next section. This manual has the following chapters: •
Introduction contains an overview of the SAILOR 6110 and a brief description of each unit in the system.
•
Getting started explains how start up the system. It also contains a short guide to the most important functions.
•
Using the system explains how to use the system.
•
Troubleshooting contains a short troubleshooting guide and explains how to check the status of the system.
•
Conformity contains declarations of Conformity with CE directives and other information on conformity.
v
Related documents The below list shows the documents related to this manual and to the SAILOR 6110.
vi
Document number
Ref
Title and description
[1]
SAILOR 6110 GMDSS System, Installation manual
98-130752
[2]
SAILOR 6006 and SAILOR 6007 Message Terminal, Installation manual
98-130088
[3]
SAILOR 6101 and SAILOR 6103 Alarm Panel, Installation and user manual
98-130981
[4]
SAILOR 6081 PSU and Charger, Installation and user manual
98-130980
[5]
System 6000 GMDSS Console, Installation manual
98-131571
[6]
THRANE 6194 Terminal Control Unit, Installation and user manual
98-131593
[7]
Moxa EtherDevice Switch, EDS-205A/208A Series, Hardware Installation Guide
1802002050023
Typography In this manual, typography is used as indicated below: Bold is used for the following purposes: •
To emphasize words. Example: “Do not touch the antenna”.
•
To indicate what the user should select in the user interface. Example: “Select SETTINGS > LAN”.
Italic is used to emphasize the paragraph title in cross-references. Example: “For further information, see Connecting Cables on page...”.
vii
viii
Contents Chapter 1
Introduction Welcome ............................................................................ 1 System overview .................................................................2 System units .......................................................................4 User interface .....................................................................6 The Inmarsat C services ......................................................7
Chapter 2
Getting started Registration ...................................................................... 11 Starting up the system .......................................................12
Chapter 3
Using the system Sending a Distress Alert ....................................................16 Overview of SAILOR 6006 Message Terminal .....................19 Menu overview ................................................................. 22 Working with messages ................................................... 23 Receiving EGCs (Enhanced Group Call) .............................38 Printing, saving or deleting EGCs or messages ..................41 Network status ................................................................. 42 Power status .................................................................... 44 Viewing system details .....................................................46 Changing the screen settings ...........................................46 Position ............................................................................ 47 Changing the Distress Alert settings .................................50
ix
Contents
Changing the EGC settings ................................................54 Changing the Message settings ........................................57 Changing the Network settings ........................................ 58 Testing Distress buttons in the system .............................. 61 Using the SAILOR 1252 Printer ..........................................64
Chapter 4
Troubleshooting Getting support ................................................................67 Generating a diagnostic report ........................................ 68 Troubleshooting guide .................................................... 69 Status signaling ................................................................ 71
App. A
GNU License texts GNU General Public License .............................................75 GNU Lesser General Public License ...................................79
Glossary
........................................................................................ 85
Index
........................................................................................ 89
x
1111
Chapter 1
Introduction
Introduction
1
Welcome Congratulations on the purchase of your SAILOR 6110! With the SAILOR 6110 you can send/receive data, including Distress Alerts, via satellite through the Inmarsat C network. The drawing below shows an example of a SAILOR 6110 system. SAILOR 6110 GMDSS system SAILOR 3027
CAN
CAN 15 V DC SAILOR 6197 SAILOR 6006 LAN USB
LAN SAILOR 6081
LAN
SAILOR 6101/6103
SAILOR 1252
29 V DC
1
Chapter 1: Introduction
This chapter has the following sections: •
System overview
•
System units
•
User interface
•
The Inmarsat C services
System overview GMDSS Global Maritime Distress and Safety System or GMDSS is a communication system to enhance safety at sea. This global system comprises both radio and satellite based technology carriers, and is currently mandatory for all vessels of over 300 GT and vessels otherwise included in SOLAS (the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea). Overall satcom GMDSS service is operated by Inmarsat and overseen by IMSO, the International Mobile Satellite Organization and adheres to the IMO, the International Maritime Organization. The SAILOR 6110 is a GMDSS approved communication system designed for use with the Inmarsat C satellite network.
2
System overview
1111
Chapter 1: Introduction
The Inmarsat C satellite network is the link between the SAILOR 6110 and the destination office. It uses four geostationary satellites to cover the world. For each satellite there is an NCS, Network Coordination Station, handling registration of the mobile unit (in this case the SAILOR 3027) in the Inmarsat C system. Each NCS is associated with a number of LESs, Land Earth Stations, which handle the transmission between the mobile units and the destination office. Satellite
SAILOR 3027
NCS Network Coordination Station
LES
LES
Land Earth Station
Land Earth Station
SAILOR 6006 Internet
Telex Network
PSDN Network
PSTN Network
Destination office
The SAILOR 3027 is connected to a SAILOR 6006 Message Terminal, where you can read and write messages and send Distress Alerts. This communication is transmitted via the SAILOR 3027 to/from the Inmarsat C satellite network.
System overview
3
Introduction
The SAILOR 6110 GMDSS System
Chapter 1: Introduction
System units The basic SAILOR 6110 consists of the following units: •
SAILOR 3027 GMDSS Terminal. Contains both transceiver, GPS receiver and omnidirectional antenna for the Inmarsat C system. Connects to other equipment, primarily the SAILOR 6006, through a CAN interface carrying both power and bi-directional communication.
•
SAILOR 6006 Message Terminal. Enables you to send and receive messages, monitor system status and test the system. The SAILOR 6006 has a touch-screen interface and comes with a SAILOR 6001 keyboard.
•
SAILOR 1252 Printer. Prints messages and reports from the SAILOR 6006.
•
SAILOR 6101/6103 Alarm Panel. Enables you to send Distress alerts. SAILOR 6101 connects to Inmarsat C. SAILOR 6103 connects to Inmarsat C, MF/HF or VHF.
For a more detailed description of the units, refer to the installation manual for the SAILOR 6110 GMDSS System.
4
System units
1111
Chapter 1: Introduction
The Ship Security Alert System provides ships with alarm buttons, which can be activated in case of a piracy or terrorist attack. The alarm is a covert signal that has no sound and no flashing lights, so it is not seen nor heard by any intruders on board the ship. The SSA option consists of the THRANE 6194 Terminal Control Unit and three to six SSA alarm buttons and one test button. It connects to the SAILOR 6110 system through the CAN interface. The CAN interface also provides the power for the SSA option. SAILOR 6110 GMDSS system with SSA SAILOR 3027
THRANE 6194 CAN LAN
CAN
CAN SAILOR 6100-913 SSA Kit/ SAILOR 6100-916 SSA US Kit
15 V DC SAILOR 6197 LAN
LAN SAILOR 6081
SAILOR 6006
USB LAN
SAILOR 6101/6103
SAILOR 1252
29 V DC
For further information on the SSA option, refer to the manual for the THRANE 6194 Terminal Control Unit , [6].
System units
5
Introduction
SSA option
Chapter 1: Introduction
User interface The main user interface for the SAILOR 6110 is in the SAILOR 6006 Message Terminal. With the Message Terminal you can send and receive messages, send Distress Alerts, view system status and configure the system.
The Message Terminal has a touch-screen for operating the system. You can also use the keyboard, which is mandatory in GMDSS systems.
f
You must also have an alarm panel in your system. For information how to use it, see the manual for your alarm panel. To get started, see Getting started on page 11. For details on how to operate the system, see Using the system on page 15.
6
User interface
1111
Chapter 1: Introduction
Introduction
The Inmarsat C services The SAILOR 6110 supports the following services through the Inmarsat C system. For a description of these services, see the next sections. Distress Alerting Enhanced Group Call (EGC) Message transmission Position reporting Polling
Distress Alerting and Distress priority messaging If a ship or a crew is in grave and imminent danger, maritime Inmarsat C and some mini-C models are used to send a Distress Alert by pressing a dedicated Distress button. The alert contains information on the ship's identity (Inmarsat C mobile number), ship's position (latitude and longitude), ship's course and speed, nature of Distress, date / time when the alert was sent and time when the ship's position was last updated. All Distress Alerts are automatically routed through the addressed LES to an associated Maritime Rescue Coordination Centre (MRCC), which will establish communication with the ship and launch the search and rescue (SAR) operation the ship may need. After sending the initial Distress Alert, if time permits, it is possible to send a more detailed Distress priority message to give more details about the Distress event and ask for the required assistance. The Distress priority message should be sent via the same LES as the Distress Alert, to ensure that it is delivered automatically to the same MRCC.
Enhanced Group Calling (EGC) The Inmarsat C system has a special capability known as Enhanced Group Call (EGC), which enables authorised information providers to broadcast messages
The Inmarsat C services
7
Chapter 1: Introduction
to selected groups of ships. Reception by ships that are fitted with Inmarsat C or mini-C terminals is automatic. A special header is added by the system to the EGC message to indicate the group of mobiles or the geographical area to which the message is to be sent. Two EGC services are available:
8
•
EGC SafetyNET - the international safety service, which allows authorised maritime safety information (MSI) providers, such as meteorological offices, hydrographic officers and MRCCs to broadcast messages to all ships in certain geographical areas. MSI includes navigational and meteorological warnings, meteorological forecasts and other urgent safety-related information, which is addressed to all ships in NAVAREA / METAREA, user-defined circular or rectangular area or coastal area. Reception of SafetyNET messages is a mandatory function of the GMDSS equipment that is required to be carried in certain ships under the provision of the International Maritime Organisation's Safety Of Life At Sea (SOLAS) convention.
•
EGC FleetNET - the international commercial service, which allows authorised information providers, such as commercial subscription services, shipping companies or governments to broadcast messages to selected groups of vessels, each of which has registered with the information provider and been added to a FleetNET closed group / network. For further information on EGC via Inmarsat C read the Inmarsat Maritime Communications Handbook, Chapter 6, or visit the Inmarsat Maritime Safety Services section of the Inmarsat website www.inmarsat.com.
The Inmarsat C services
1111
Chapter 1: Introduction
Ship to shore: Text and data from Inmarsat C and mini-C terminals can be sent to: •
An e-mail address
•
Any telex or fax (text, one way only) number
•
Any computer connected to the public telephone and data networks (PSTN and PSDN), using a telephone modem number
•
Another Inmarsat C / mini-C terminal
•
A Short (or Special) Access Code (SAC).
The maximum message size is up to 32 Kb for Inmarsat C terminals. Shore to ship: Text and data can be sent via telex, e-mail and the data and telephone (PSDN / PSTN) networks. To be able to send messages to ships, a shore-based message originator needs to be registered (to have a commercial service agreement) with an Inmarsat C service provider of their choice. Ship to ship: Messages can also be sent in a ship-to-ship direction from one Inmarsat C / mini-C terminal to another.
Position reporting Most of Inmarsat C and mini-C models are integrated with Global Navigational Satellite System (GNSS) receivers, such as GPS, to provide highly reliable, round-the-clock position information of a ship, which can be used for position reporting. The position reporting service is based on using the data reporting and polling protocol and allows a shore-based subscriber (base station or shipping company) to request position information from a vessel, as a single report or automatic reception at fixed intervals, e.g. every six hours. A ship's terminal can also be programmed to send regular position reports to any desired destination. The position report includes ship's identity, latitude, longitude, course, speed, date / time of the position report and time of the last position update.
The Inmarsat C services
9
Introduction
Message transmission
Chapter 1: Introduction
Data reporting and polling Inmarsat C users may need to acquire information (short data reports) from vessels, or to collect data automatically at fixed or variable intervals. The data reporting service allows for the transmission of information, in packets of up to 32 bytes on request or at prearranged intervals from Inmarsat C or mini-C terminals, to shore-based customers. Polling allows shore-based customers to interrogate an Inmarsat C or mini-C terminal or group of terminals by sending a special polling command. The polling command instructs a terminal or group of terminals to send a data report immediately, start sending regular reports, change transmission schedule of reports or perform another task of the polled terminal(s).
10
The Inmarsat C services
2222
Chapter 2
Getting started
This chapter explains how to register, start up and log on your SAILOR 6110. It has the following sections: •
Registration
•
Starting up the system
Registration Before using the SAILOR 3027 GMDSS Terminal on the Inmarsat-C system you must register the terminal to the system. In most cases the distributor has already filled in the SARF (Service Activation Registration Form) for your SAILOR 3027 when you receive your SAILOR 6110 GMDSS System. For details on registration, see the Installation manual for the SAILOR 6110 GMDSS System. After registration you must use the SAILOR 6006 to set up the mobile number in the SAILOR 3027. See Setting the mobile number in the SAILOR 3027 on page 58.
11
Getting started
2
Chapter 2: Getting started
Starting up the system Powering the system When all units are connected correctly and you have registered the SAILOR 3027, do as follows to power the system: 1. Make sure the power source is on. 2. Switch on the SAILOR 6006. •
Use the power switch in the right side of the SAILOR 6006, or
•
if you have installed a remote on/off switch, use that instead.
The SAILOR 6006 starts up and sends a signal to switch on the SAILOR 3027. The SAILOR 6006 shows the current status in the upper right corner of the display. For an overview of the user interface, see Overview of the screen on page 20.
12
Starting up the system
Logging into the satellite network
Getting started
If the system was not already logged into the Inmarsat C network, it logs in automatically at startup. The upper right corner of the display shows if the system is logged on.
2222
Chapter 2: Getting started
If, however, the selected satellite is no longer available, you must manually select another satellite to log into. To log into the satellite network manually, do as follows: 1. When the main menu of the SAILOR 6006 appears, select Network.
Starting up the system
13
Chapter 2: Getting started 2. On the Network Status page select Login.
3. Select the Ocean Region to which you want to log in. If the selected satellite is available, the system will now log on. When the display shows the Ocean Region and the position, and there is a green check mark at the satellite symbol, the system is ready for use.
Note
14
The Ocean Region is only displayed if the system is idle and there are no errors - otherwise the text will show the current status.
Starting up the system
Chapter 3
•
Sending a Distress Alert
•
Overview of SAILOR 6006 Message Terminal
•
Menu overview
•
Working with messages
•
Receiving EGCs (Enhanced Group Call)
•
Printing, saving or deleting EGCs or messages
•
Network status
•
Power status
•
Viewing system details
•
Position
•
Changing the Distress Alert settings
•
Changing the EGC settings
•
Changing the Message settings
•
Changing the Network settings
•
Testing Distress buttons in the system
•
Using the SAILOR 1252 Printer
3
Using the system
This chapter describes how to operate the SAILOR 6110, primarily using the SAILOR 6006. It has the following sections:
3333
Using the system
For details on the Inmarsat C services, see The Inmarsat C services on page 7.
15
Chapter 3: Using the system
Sending a Distress Alert Important
Only send a Distress Alert if you are in immediate danger! The Distress Alert can be compared to a MAYDAY call.
The procedure below is the same on the SAILOR 6006 Message Terminal as on the SAILOR 6101/6103 Alarm Panel. To send a Distress Alert, do as follows: 1. Open the cover for the Distress button. 2. Press and hold the button until the light is steady and the buzzer stops (more than 3 seconds). During this time the button light flashes and the buzzer sounds. After 3 seconds the red light goes steady on and the buzzer is silent. The display shows that the message is being sent.
The display also shows when the Distress Alert is acknowledged from the LES. Write down the LES number - you must use the same number when you send a Distress message with more information for the MRCC.
16
Sending a Distress Alert
Behavior
Meaning
Button light flashes, buzzer sounds
The Distress button is pressed. Hold until light and sound changes (more than 3 seconds).
Button light constant, buzzer is silent
The Distress Alert is being sent (normally within 10 to 30 seconds)
Button light shortly off every 15 seconds
The Distress Alert is confirmed
Important
Using the system
The below table shows the behavior of the Distress button on the SAILOR 6006.
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
The MRCC normally sends a message to the alerting unit to gather more information about the situation. If at all possible, respond to such messages with a Distress message sent to the same LES that was used for the Distress Alert.
The LES used for the Distress Alert is shown in the Distress popup windows. An example is shown in the previous page. For information on how to send a Distress message, see Writing a Distress priority message on page 23. The MRCC may also send Distress EGCs to other ships in the area to request assistance (typically as Distress Relay or SAR Coordination request). See also Changing the Distress Alert settings on page 50.
Sending a Distress Alert
17
Chapter 3: Using the system
Clearing distress indications If you want to turn off all distress indications while a Distress Alert is still active, do as follows: Note
This function will only turn off the visual and audible indications on board. It will not cancel the transmission of the Distress Alert.
1. On the SAILOR 6006, select Distress. 2. Select Status. 3. Select Clear distress indications.
18
Sending a Distress Alert
Overview of SAILOR 6006 Message Terminal Buttons in the front panel The buttons in the front panel have the following functions: Control
Function The Distress button is used to send a Distress Alert through the connected SAILOR 3027 terminal. See Sending a Distress Alert on page 16.
The Test button is used to test the lights and sound in the buttons on the SAILOR 6006. The Dim button is used to dim the light in the SAILOR 6006. Push and hold to dim more/less. Each new push changes direction between more and less. The mute button is used to mute the SAILOR 6006 and connected equipment, such as alarm panels. Without remote on/off: To switch on: Push the button To switch off: Push and hold for 2 seconds With remote on/off: To switch on and off: The Power button cannot be used normally; use the remote on/off switch to switch the SAILOR 6006 on and off. To restart the terminal: Push and hold for 2 seconds
Overview of SAILOR 6006 Message Terminal
19
Using the system
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
Chapter 3: Using the system
Overview of the screen Below is an overview of the main screen in the SAILOR 6006. Name of current page
Status field
Status/warning icon
Main menu items Power status
20
•
Name of current page: In each submenu this field shows the name of the page.
•
Status field: This field shows a short status message next to the Status/warning icon.
•
Status/warning icon: This icon can show: Status OK
Overview of SAILOR 6006 Message Terminal
Critical error pending
For details of warnings and errors, see Information of events on page 71. •
Main menu items: Select these items to access the submenus. For an overview of the menu system, see Menu overview in the next page.
•
Power status: Shows a short status of the backup battery. Using the system
Warnings pending
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
Navigating the user interface of the SAILOR 6006 To navigate and select items in the user interface you can do one of the following: Touch screen: Select items by touching them with your finger on the screen of the SAILOR 6006. Items in a grey frame such as in the example below can be selected by touching anywhere within the frame.
Keyboard: Use the tab and arrow keys to navigate through items and press Space to select them. When an item has en underlined letter, you may type Alt + to select the item, e.g. type Alt+S to select the System menu.
Overview of SAILOR 6006 Message Terminal
21
Chapter 3: Using the system
Menu overview The below drawing shows an overview the menu system of the SAILOR 6110 system.
Message
New Inbox Outbox Sent items Contacts Settings
Options Transmit Add new Edit Delete Autoprint
EGC
Inbox Reception Settings
Additional NAVAREAs/METAREAs Coastal Warning Areas EGC services Autoprint Test Distress buttons Clear distress indications
Distress
Network
Status Settings
Status Settings
Distress Alert Nature Distress Alert Land Earth Stations Distress Alert position, course and speed Login Logout Scan Link test Clear Network ID Network Coordination Stations
Position System
Status Settings About Power Settings Advanced
Manual position Settings
*
Screen settings Diagnostic report Mini-C terminal mode
*
The items in the menu overview are described in the following sections. Items marked * are described in the installation manual for the SAILOR 6110 system.
22
Menu overview
Writing a Distress priority message Note
Distress priority messages are sent to the MRCC only. Distress priority messages must be written in English.
To write a Distress priority message, do as follows:
Using the system
Working with messages
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
1. From the main menu, select Message.
2. At the bottom of the page, select New (may already be selected).
Working with messages
23
Chapter 3: Using the system
3. Use a keyboard to type your message text, or select the soft keyboard in the top right corner of the display, and use the touch-screen to type the message text.
Note
If you want to save your message without sending it, you can save it as a file. See the section Options for writing and sending messages on page 29.
4. When the message is ready to be sent, select Transmit.
24
Working with messages
Using the system
5. Select Text in editor.
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
6. Select the LES to be used for sending the message, or use the already selected LES. Important
The LES for the Distress priority message must be the same as the LES used from the start of the ongoing communication session.
7. Under Priority, select Distress. You get the following popup window. Make sure your message is written in English and click Yes to continue.
8. If you want to print your message, select Print. 9. Select OK.
Working with messages
25
Chapter 3: Using the system
You get a message saying “Message scheduled for transmission”. Select OK again. The message is sent as soon as the network allows it. Note
Distress priority messages are sent to the MRCC only. You automatically get a confirmation when the message is received.
Writing a routine priority message To write a routine priority message, do as follows: 1. From the main menu, select Message.
2. At the bottom of the page, select New (may already be selected).
3. If you want to send a data file in stead of typing text in the text editor, skip the next steps and go directly to step 6.
26
Working with messages
Using the system
4. The bottom left corner shows the text format for the message. To change the text format, select Options > New and select Telex (5-bit) or ASCII (7bit). For details see the next section Options for writing and sending messages on page 29.
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
5. Use a keyboard to type your message text, or select the soft keyboard in the top right corner of the display, and use the touch-screen to type the message text.
Note
If you want to save your message without sending it, you can save it as a file. See the next section Options for writing and sending messages on page 29
Working with messages
27
Chapter 3: Using the system 6. When the message is ready to be sent, select Transmit.
•
If you want to send a data file, select Data file, browse to the file you want to send and select it. Note that data files are always transmitted in 8-bit format.
•
If you want to send the text in the editor, select Text in editor.
7. Select the LES to be used for sending the message, or use the already selected LES. For a list of the LESs currently supported, see List of currently supported LESs on page 31. 8. Under Priority, select Routine.
28
Working with messages
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
9. Select To... in the top left corner and select the recipient(s) of the message. Then select OK.
If you select more than one recipient, the address type must be the same for all recipients. The system does not support different address types for one message.
10. If you want confirmation when your message is received, select Confirmation. 11. If you want to print your message, select Print. 12. Select OK. You get a message saying “Message scheduled for transmission”. Select OK again. The message is sent as soon as the network allows it.
Options for writing and sending messages
The Options menu in the left side of the New message page offers the following options when writing a message: •
•
New •
Telex 5-bit. Select this option if you want the message to be as small (and fast) as possible. Note that no special characters can be used, and all letters are converted to capital letters.
•
ASCII 7-bit. Select this option if size and speed are not very important and/or you want to be able to use more characters and small letters.
Load Allows you to browse for a text file to load into the message editor.
Working with messages
29
Using the system
Note
Chapter 3: Using the system
30
•
Save Allows you to browse to or type in a location where you can save your message to a file. If, for example, you have written a draft message that you want to send later, you can save the message and then load it back into the editor when you want to send it.
•
Print Prints the text in the message editor on the connected printer.
Working with messages
List of currently supported LESs
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
Service Provider
LES no. AOR-W
LES no. AOR-E
LES no. POR
LES no. IOR
Bezeq Israel
-
127
-
327
CTTC Beijing Marine
-
-
211
311
KDDI SatMail-C Japan
003
103
203
303
Morsviazsputnik Russia
-
117
-
317
OTE Greece
-
120
-
305
SingTel Mail65 (SAC65)
002
102
210
328
SingTel Mail65 (SAC6500)
002
102
210
328
SingTel Mail65 (SAC6599)
002
102
210
328
Stratos Global C-email 02
002
102
202
302
Stratos Global C-email 12
012
112
212
312
Telekomunikacja Polska
-
116
-
316
Telemar X.25
004
104
204
304
Vizada SkyFile C France
021
121
221
321
Vizada SkyFile C Norway
004
104
204
304
Vizada SkyFile C USA
001
101
201
301
Working with messages
Using the system
The table below shows the LESs supported by the service providers at the time of writing. Note that the list is dynamic, so it may not be completely up to date.
31
Chapter 3: Using the system
Viewing messages in the Inbox The Message icon in the main menu shows how many unread messages are in the Inbox. Note
The Inbox can hold 1000 messages. The oldest messages are automatically deleted when this limit is exceeded.
To view the messages in the Inbox, do as follows: 1. At the bottom of the MESSAGE page, select Inbox.
Apart from the time and date of the message, the list of incoming messages can show the following icons: The message is unread
The message has been read
32
Working with messages
Distress priority message (unread) Distress priority message (read)
2. Select the message you want to read.
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
Viewing messages in the Outbox To view messages in the Outbox, click Outbox at the bottom of the MESSAGE page.
The Outbox holds messages that are scheduled for transmission, but have not yet been sent.
Working with messages
33
Using the system
For information on how to delete, print or save messages, see Printing, saving or deleting EGCs or messages on page 41.
Chapter 3: Using the system
Viewing Sent items Note
Sent items can hold 1000 messages. The oldest messages are automatically deleted when this limit is exceeded.
To view your sent messages, click Sent items at the bottom of the MESSAGE page.
The Sent items page shows messages that have been transmitted from the SAILOR 3027.
34
Working with messages
Managing the list of Contacts
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
Using the system
To manage your list of contacts, select Contacts at the bottom of the MESSAGE page.
To see details for a contact, select it in the left side and see the details in the window to the right.
To add a new contact Do as follows: 1. In the MESSAGE CONTACTS window, select Add new in the top right corner. 2. Type in the name of your contact. 3. Select the Address type from the drop-down list. 4. Type in the details for your contact. The format of the address/number depends on the selected address type. See the table on the next page. 5. Select OK.
Working with messages
35
Chapter 3: Using the system
Message formats and presentation: Type
Format of number
Example
Presentation
E-mail
Standard e-mail address
[email protected]
5, 7 or 8 bit
Telex
Country code + subscriber no.
0045 99999999
5 or 7 bit
Fax
Country code + subscriber no.
0045 99999999
5, 7 or 8 bit
Inmarsat-C mobile
Mobile number
492388999
5, 7 or 8 bit
PSTN modem
Country code + subscriber no.
0045 99999999
5, 7 or 8 bit
Special access code
Pre-defined codes:
32
5, 7 or 8 bit
2380 99999999
5, 7 or 8 bit
X.25
36
•
32 - Medical Advice
•
33 - Technical Assistance
•
38 - Medical Assistance
•
39 - Maritime Assistance
•
41 - Meteorological Reports
•
42 - Navigational Hazards and Warnings
•
43 - Ship Position and Sail Plan Reports
DNIC (country code) + subscriber no.
Working with messages
To edit a contact Do as follows: 1. In the Contacts window, select the contact. 2. Select Edit. 3. Edit the details. See the previous section for information on the contact details.
Using the system
4. Select OK.
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
To delete a contact Do as follows: 1. In the Contacts window, select the contact. 2. Select Delete. 3. Select Yes to confirm. If you want to delete more contacts, you can use the button in the left side of the display. Then you can select the contacts you want to delete.
Working with messages
37
Chapter 3: Using the system
Receiving EGCs (Enhanced Group Call) Viewing incoming EGCs Note
You can receive various types of EGCs in the SAILOR 6006. For details about how to set up which EGCs to receive and which EGCs to print, seeChanging the EGC settings on page 54.
The SAILOR 6006 shows incoming EGCs. Note
The EGC Inbox can hold 1000 EGCs. The oldest EGCs are automatically deleted when this limit is exceeded.
To view EGCs, do as follows: 1.
38
Select EGC from the main menu.
Receiving EGCs (Enhanced Group Call)
Using the system
2. Select Inbox (may already be selected).
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
Apart from the time and date of the EGC, the list of incoming EGCs can show the following icons: SafetyNET EGC. Meteorological warning, navigational warning, coastal warning and meteorological forecast. SafetyNET EGC. Shore to ship Distress alert and search and rescue coordination FleetNET EGC
System EGC
Default EGC. Only used if the EGC type is unknown.
Receiving EGCs (Enhanced Group Call)
39
Chapter 3: Using the system
The status of each EGC is shown with one of the below icons: The EGC is unread
The EGC has been read
Distress or Urgent priority EGC (unread)
Distress or Urgent priority EGC (read)
3. Select an EGC to see the contents. For information on how to delete, print or save EGCs, see Printing, saving or deleting EGCs or messages on page 41.
40
Receiving EGCs (Enhanced Group Call)
Printing, saving or deleting EGCs or messages Use the tools symbol to print, delete or save EGCs or messages. You can use the tools symbol from within an EGC or message or from the list of EGCs or messages (Inbox, Outbox or Sent items).
From within a message or an EGC To delete, print or save a message or EGC, do as follows:
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
2. Select
Using the system
1. Select the message or EGC you want to delete, save or print. in the top right corner of the display.
3. Select Delete, Print or save.
From the Inbox, Outbox or Sent items To delete or save messages or EGCs from the Inbox, Outbox or Sent items, do as follows: 1. Click
in the lower left corner of the display.
2. Select the messages or EGCs you want to delete or save. You may use Select all to select all messages or EGCs in the Inbox or Sent items, or Clear all to clear all selections. 3. Select Delete to delete the selected messages or EGCs or save to save the selected messages.
Printing, saving or deleting EGCs or messages
41
Chapter 3: Using the system
Network status The top right corner of the display shows a short text about the current status.
To view a more detailed network status, do as follows: 1. Select Network from the main menu. 2. Select Status at the bottom of the page.
42
Network status
Logging into and out of the network
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
To log out of the network, select Logout from the lower left side of the NETWORK STATUS page and select OK.
Scanning the network If you want the system to select the ocean region with the best signal, select Scan in the NETWORK STATUS page. The system will then scan for the best signal and log onto that ocean region.
Clearing the current protocol If you want the system to immediately stop transmitting, select Clear in the NETWORK STATUS window. The current protocol is then cleared, and any ongoing transmission is stopped.
Link test Note
To test basic system connectivity, we recommend that you send a short message to yourself instead of using the link test. For details on how to send a message, see Writing a routine priority message on page 26.
It takes a long time for the system to complete the link test, and during this time the Message Terminal has limited functionality.
Network status
43
Using the system
To log into the Inmarsat C network, select Login from the lower left side of the NETWORK STATUS page and select the region you want to log into. If you just want to use the region with the best signal, use Scan instead (see the next section).
Chapter 3: Using the system
Power status The bottom left corner of the display shows a short status of the backup battery.
•
Negative current means the battery is supplying power.
•
Red numbers mean that the values are outside normal operating range.
For a more detailed power status, do as follows: 1. Select System from the main menu. 2. Select Power at the bottom of the page.
44
Power status
Using the system
3. To view the battery settings, select Settings.
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
Important
The default battery settings are suitable for most installations. Do not change these settings unless you have a special battery type or installation that requires different settings. Only skilled personnel should change the power settings, which are password protected. Refer to the installation manual for the SAILOR 6110 system for details.
Power status
45
Chapter 3: Using the system
Viewing system details To see the type and software version of the units in the system, do as follows: 1. Select System from the main menu. 2. Select About at the bottom of the page. This page shows name, serial number and software version of each system unit. It also shows whether the system is a primary or duplicated system.
Changing the screen settings To change the light level at which the screen should enter night mode, do as follows: 1. Select System from the main menu. 2. Select Settings.
3. Select Screen settings.
4. Use the arrows or select and drag the pointer until the right light intensity for switching to night mode is achieved. 5. Select OK.
46
Viewing system details
Position
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
Using the system
To view your current position, course and speed, select Position from the main menu, and then Status at the bottom of the page.
Position
47
Chapter 3: Using the system
Entering a manual position If there is no synchronization with the positioning system, you can enter a manual position. To enter a manual position, do as follows: 1. Under Position select Settings at the bottom of the page.
2. Select Manual position.
48
Position
3. Enter the current position data, course, speed and UTC time. 4. Select OK.
Using the system
The manually entered position data will be used by the system until the automatic position data is available again.
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
Position
49
Chapter 3: Using the system
Changing the Distress Alert settings You can temporarily change the settings for your Distress function. Note
The Distress Alert Nature and the Distress Alert Position, Course and Speed settings are only valid for the current Distress Alert or maximum one hour. Then these settings are returned to the default settings. The entered Distress LESs remain in the system.
Default settings: •
Distress Alert Nature: Unspecified
•
Distress Alert Land Earth Stations: 0, 0, 0, 0 (“0” means the LES is automatically selected by the SAILOR 3027).
•
Distress Alert Position, Course and Speed: Using latest GPS data
Distress Alert nature To change the announced nature of the Distress Alert, do as follows: 1. From the main menu of the SAILOR 6006, select Distress.
50
Changing the Distress Alert settings
Using the system
2. Select Settings.
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
3. Select Distress Alert nature. 4. Select the nature of the Distress Alert and select OK.
Changing the Distress Alert settings
51
Chapter 3: Using the system
Distress Alert Land Earth Stations Default setting: 0, 0, 0, 0 To change the LESs to be used for the Distress Alert, do as follows: 1. From the Distress Settings menu, select Distress Alert Land Earth Stations. 2. Type the LES number for each Ocean Region.
3. Select OK.
52
Changing the Distress Alert settings
Distress Alert position, course and speed Default setting: Use GPS position. Note
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
Do not change this setting unless you have good reasons to do so. It is normally best to show your current GPS position when sending a Distress Alert.
To change the position, course and/or speed to manually entered values, do as follows: 1. From the Distress Settings menu, select Distress Alert position, course and speed. 2. Select Use manual position.
3. Type or select the new values and select OK.
Changing the Distress Alert settings
53
Using the system
You may need to change the position, e.g. if the person(s) that need help are no longer onboard the ship (man overboard).
Chapter 3: Using the system
Changing the EGC settings Reception of EGCs To change the settings for reception of EGCs, do as follows: 1. From the main menu, select EGC. 2. Select Reception.
3. To change the additional areas from which you want to receive meteorological or navigational EGCs, select Additional NAVAREAs /METAREAs.
54
Changing the EGC settings
Then select or type in the numbers of the areas from which you want to receive EGCs, and select OK. Note
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
You always receive EGCs from the area in which you are located. The areas selected here are additional areas.
4. To change the Coastal Warning Areas, select Coastal Warning Areas and type in the new area. Then select OK.
5. To change the types of EGC service you want to receive, select EGC services. Then select the EGC services you want to receive and select OK. Some SafetyNET EGCs cannot be disabled due to IMO SOLAS regulations.
Using the system
Note
Automatic print of EGCs You can set up the SAILOR 6006 to automatically print certain types of EGC. Do as follows: 1. From the bottom of the EGC page, select Settings.
2. Select Auto print received EGCs.
Changing the EGC settings
55
Chapter 3: Using the system 3. Select the types of EGC you want to print automatically and select OK.
Note
56
SafetyNET urgency + distress EGCs cannot be disabled - they are automatically sent to the printer.
Changing the EGC settings
Changing the Message settings Automatic print of messages You can set up the SAILOR 6006 to automatically print certain types of messages. Do as follows: 1. From the main menu select Message.
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
Using the system
2. Select Settings.
3. Under Auto print received messages, select Routine if you want to print Routine messages automatically when they arrive. Note
Automatic print cannot be disabled for Distress messages.
4. Select OK.
Changing the Message settings
57
Chapter 3: Using the system
Changing the Network settings Setting the mobile number in the SAILOR 3027 After registration, the Inmarsat mobile number must be set up in the SAILOR 3027. Do as follows: 1. From the main menu of the SAILOR 6006 select Network. 2. Select Settings.
3. Check if the listed mobile number matches the mobile number in the documentation from your airtime provider. 4. If the mobile number is not correct, select Network ID and change the number.
5. When the number is correct select OK.
58
Changing the Network settings
Adding Network Coordination Stations If you need to add a Network Coordination Station (NCS), do as follows:
Using the system
1. In the NETWORK SETTINGS page, select Network Coordination Stations.
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
2. In the top right corner, select Add new.
3. Type in the ID and channel number of the new NCS. 4. Select OK.
Changing the Network settings
59
Chapter 3: Using the system
Editing Network Coordination Stations If you need to edit the information for a Network Coordination Station (NCS), do as follows: 1. In the NETWORK SETTINGS page, select Network Coordination Stations.
2. In the left column, select the NCS you want to edit. Note
044, 144, 244 and 344 cannot be edited nor deleted.
3. Select Edit in the right side of the page.
4. Change the ID and channel number as needed. 5. Select OK.
60
Changing the Network settings
Testing Distress buttons in the system With the SAILOR 6006 you can test all Inmarsat C Distress buttons connected in your SAILOR 6110. To test the Inmarsat C Distress buttons in the system, do as follows:
Using the system
1. In the Message Terminal display, select Distress.
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
2. Select Status at the bottom of the page.
3. Select Test Distress buttons.
Testing Distress buttons in the system
61
Chapter 3: Using the system
The test is initiated.
Wait until the following window appears. Important
Before pressing any Distress buttons, make sure the display of the SAILOR 6006 shows Test in progress. Otherwise you may accidently send a real Distress alert!
As long as the Test in progress window is showing, you can use Distress buttons connected to the system under test, without sending a real Distress Alert. Note
62
Before pressing any Distress buttons, check the units as follows: •
On the alarm panel, make sure the display shows “Test” next to the Inm C unit that is active (marked with a bullet), before pressing the Inm-C Distress button.
•
On the Message Terminal, make sure the display shows “Test in progress” before pressing the Distress button on the Message Terminal.
Testing Distress buttons in the system
4. Test the Inmarsat C Distress buttons on the connected units and on the Message Terminal by pressing them as you would in a real Distress situation. Important
Only Inmarsat C Distress buttons are included in this test. Do not press any other Distress buttons, unless it is a distress situation!
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
5. When you have finished testing, or you need to send a real Distress alert, press Cancel in the Test in progress window.
Testing Distress buttons in the system
63
Using the system
The light and buzzer in the Distress buttons should work the same way as in a real Distress situation. For details on the Distress buttons, see the user manual for the SAILOR 6110 GMDSS System [1].
Chapter 3: Using the system
Using the SAILOR 1252 Printer In the SAILOR 6110, the printer is primarily used to print EGCs and Safety messages from the SAILOR 6006. For information on how to print EGCs and messages, see Printing, saving or deleting EGCs or messages on page 41 and Automatic print of EGCs on page 55.
Printer indications in SAILOR 6006 The SAILOR 6006 Message Terminal shows a warning if: •
the printer is not connected,
•
the printer is out of paper,
•
there is an error in the printer, or
•
the printer is off-line
Front panel The below drawing shows the front panel of the SAILOR 1252 Printer.
The next pages describe the functions of indicators and buttons on the printer front panel.
64
Using the SAILOR 1252 Printer
Indicators The below table shows the function of each indicator. Behavior
Function
SELECT
Constant light
Printer is on-line
Off
Printer is off-line
Flashing, and ALARM is off
Printer is in sleep mode
Flashing, and ALARM is on
Fault
Constant light, and SELECT is off
Out of paper or paper jam (Cut sheet feeder only)
Constant light, and SELECT is flashing
Fault
Flashing, and SELECT is on
Printhead temperature protection circuit, firmware protection of line feed or space motor is operating. Normal print operation will resume after a cooling period.
Constant light
The printer is connected to the supply and is switched on.
ALARM
POWER
Using the system
Indicator
PITCH
Shows the current character pitch selected.
MODE
Shows the current print mode selected - NLQ, Utility, HSD (HSD is SSD if 12cpi is selected).
Using the SAILOR 1252 Printer
3333
Chapter 3: Using the system
65
Chapter 3: Using the system
Buttons Normal functions Indicator
Normal function
LINE FEED
Advances the paper one line for each press.
FORM FEED
Advances the paper to the next top of form (TOF) or ejects any single sheet paper from the printer.
TOF SET
Sets new top of form position.
SELECT
Sets printer on-line or off-line
PITCH
Changes the character pitch setting (cpi)
MODE
Changes the print style setting.
Additional functions if pressed at power on
66
Indicator
Function if pressed at power on
SELECT
Enters the printer’s Menu Mode.
TOF SET
Selects the print pitch as 17cpi.
LINE FEED
Initiates the printer self test.
SELECT and LINE FEED
Initiates the printer’s continuous rolling ASCII test.
SELECT and FORM FEED
Prints all data and control commands received as HEX codes for fault finding.
Using the SAILOR 1252 Printer
Chapter 4
4444
Troubleshooting
4
•
Getting support
•
Troubleshooting guide
•
Status signaling
Getting support If this manual does not provide the remedies to solve your problem, you may want to contact your Airtime Provider or your local distributor.
To help with the troubleshooting, please generate a diagnostic report as described in the next page, and enclose the diagnostic report file when asking for support.
Airtime support If you need assistance from your Airtime Provider, check your Airtime subscription documents for a contact number to call.
System support If you need assistance with problems caused by one of your system units, please call a distributor in your area. A list of certified partners and distributors is available on Thrane & Thrane’s web site: www.thrane.com. Select Maritime and select Where to buy from the top menu bar.
67
Troubleshooting
This chapter gives guidelines for troubleshooting and provides an overview of the different means of status signaling. It has the following sections:
Chapter 4: Troubleshooting
Generating a diagnostic report To generate a diagnostic report, do as follows: 1. Select System. 2. Select Advanced at the bottom of the page.
3. Select Generate diagnostic report. 4. Choose the location where you want to save the file. You can save the file to a USB memory stick connected to the Message Terminal.
68
Generating a diagnostic report
Chapter 4: Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Remedy
The SAILOR 6006 has a remote on/off switch, so the power button is disabled.
If the SAILOR 6006 is using a remote on/off switch, use that instead of the power button.
There is no power on the input to the SAILOR 6006.
Check that all power cables between the ship power source and the SAILOR 6006 are connected correctly, and that the power source is on.
The Message Terminal cannot switch off.
Software error
Push and hold the Power button for 10 seconds.
There is no signal or weak signal from the satellite.
The view to the satellite is blocked.
Make sure the SAILOR 3027 has a clear view in all directions. See the installation manual for details.
The system is set up to use one specific satellite, but the system is outside coverage from that satellite.
Log into a satellite that covers your area.
The system cannot be switched on.
Troubleshooting guide
69
Troubleshooting
The below table provides information on some of the problems that might occur, including possible causes and remedies to solve the problems.
4444
Troubleshooting guide
Chapter 4: Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Remedy
No connection between SAILOR 6006 and SAILOR 3027
The CAN cables between the SAILOR 3027 and the SAILOR 6006 are damaged or are not properly connected.
Make sure the CAN cables are properly connected and that the cables and connectors are not damaged.
No battery information in the SAILOR 6006
The Ethernet connection from the power supply is not working.
Check the Link activity indicator at the connection points in the Ethernet switch. Check that the Ethernet cables are connected correctly and are not damaged.
No connection between SAILOR 6006 and printer
The USB cable is damaged or is not connected properly.
Check that the USB cable is connected correctly and is not damaged.
The Message Terminal shows “out of paper” although there is paper in the printer.
The paper is not placed correctly in the printer.
Adjust the paper to the left side of the printer.
70
Troubleshooting guide
Chapter 4: Troubleshooting
The SAILOR 6006 can show basic status and error messages. When an error occurs in the system, check the SAILOR 6006 for information first. The SAILOR 1252 Printer also has some status LEDs. For further information see Using the SAILOR 1252 Printer on page 64.
Status information The upper right corner of the display shows the most important status information. You can also enter the individual pages from the main menu to see more detailed status information.
4444
Status signaling
Troubleshooting
Information of events Popup windows When an event requires your attention, a popup window appears. Example:
When you have read the text, select OK to close the window.
Status signaling
71
Chapter 4: Troubleshooting
If the window indicates an error that requires your action, the warning or error icon will stay in the top right corner of the display as long as the problem persists.
List of active warnings and errors The top right corner of the display shows a short text about the current status. The icon in the corner can change depending on the situation. Green check mark: The system is logged in and there are no errors or warnings. Warning triangle: A warning is pending. Select the icon or press F1 to see a list of active warnings and errors. Red cross: A critical error is present. Select the icon or press F1 to see a list of active warnings and errors.
From the list of active warnings and errors you can access the event log.
72
Status signaling
Chapter 4: Troubleshooting
From the list of active errors or warnings, you can select Event log to see a complete list of events. The list holds 100 events, including Errors
•
Warnings
•
Informational events
•
Cleared warnings and errors.
Troubleshooting
•
4444
Event log
Status signaling
73
Chapter 4: Troubleshooting
74
Status signaling
AAAA
GNU License texts
A
GNU General Public License Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations. Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
75
GNU License texts
Appendix A
Appendix 5: GNU License texts Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
76
GNU General Public License
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it. 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royaltyfree redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
GNU General Public License
77
GNU License texts
AAAA
Appendix 5: GNU License texts
Appendix 5: GNU License texts 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to apply these terms to your new programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. Copyright (C) This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA. Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License.
78
GNU General Public License
GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1, February 1999 Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.] Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others. Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license. Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs. When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library. We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances. For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this
GNU Lesser General Public License
79
GNU License texts
AAAA
Appendix 5: GNU License texts
Appendix 5: GNU License texts case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License. In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system. Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run. GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you". A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) "Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified work must itself be a software library. b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
80
GNU Lesser General Public License
distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library. 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications. You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things: a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)
GNU Lesser General Public License
81
GNU License texts
AAAA
Appendix 5: GNU License texts
Appendix 5: GNU License texts b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with. c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute. 7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it. 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
82
GNU Lesser General Public License
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to apply these terms to your new libraries If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License). To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. Copyright (C) This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
GNU Lesser General Public License
83
GNU License texts
AAAA
Appendix 5: GNU License texts
Chapter 5: GNU License texts
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker. signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President of Vice
84
GNU Lesser General Public License
Glossary
B
C Controller-Area Network. A message based protocol designed to allow microcontrollers and devices to communicate with each other within a vehicle without a host computer.
Glossary
CAN
BBBB
Glossary
D DNIC
Data Network Identification Code
E EGC
Enhanced Group Call. A type of broadcast data for ships.
G GMDSS
Global Maritime Distress Safety System. The GMDSS system is intended to perform the following functions: alerting (including position determination of the unit in distress), search and rescue coordination, locating (homing), maritime safety information broadcasts, general communications, and bridge-to-bridge communications.
GNSS
Global Navigational Satellite System
GNU
GNU’s Not Unix. A Unix-like computer operating system developed by the GNU project, ultimately aiming to be a "complete Unix-compatible software system" composed wholly of free software
GPL
General Public License
GPS
Global Positioning System. A system of satellites, computers, and receivers that is able to determine the latitude and longitude of a receiver on Earth by calculating the time difference for signals from different satellites to reach the receiver.
85
Glossary
GT
Gross Ton
I IMO
International Maritime Organization. A UN organization developing and maintaining regulatory framework for shipping. This framework includes safety, environmental concerns, legal matters, technical co-operation, maritime security and the efficiency of shipping.
IMSO
International Maritime Satellite Organisation. An intergovernmental body established to ensure that Inmarsat continues to meet its public service obligations.
L LAN
Local Area Network. A computer network covering a small physical area, like a home, office, school or airport. The defining characteristics of LANs, in contrast to wide-area networks (WANs), include their usually higher data-transfer rates, smaller geographic area, and lack of a need for leased telecommunication lines.
LES
Land Earth Station
LGPL
Lesser General Public License
M MRCC
Maritime Rescue Co-ordination Centre
MSI
Maritime Safety Information. Maritime Safety Information. An internationally coordinated network of broadcasts of Maritime Safety Information from official information providers, such as National Hydrographic Offices, National Meteorological Offices, Rescue Co-ordination Centres (RCCs), and The International Ice Patrol, for Oceanic ice hazards.
86
N NAVAREA
The geographic areas in which various governments are responsible for navigation and weather warnings.
NCS
Network Coordination Station
BBBB
Glossary
PSDN
Public Switched Data Network
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network
Glossary
P
S SAC
Short Access Code
SAR
Search And Rescue
SARF
Service Activation Registration Form. A form used to register your mobile equipment for activation of the services you are going to use.
SOLAS
(International Convention for the) Safety Of Life At Sea. Generally regarded as the most important of all international treaties concerning the safety of merchant ships.
SSA
Ship Security Alert.The ship security alert system is provided to a vessel for the purpose of transmitting a security alert to the shore (not to other vessel!) to indicate to a competent authority that the security of the ship is under threat or has been compromised.
U USB
Universal Serial Bus. A specification to establish communication between devices and a host controller (usually personal computers). USB is intended to replace many varieties of serial
87
Glossary
and parallel ports. USB can connect computer peripherals such as mice, keyboards, digital cameras, printers, personal media players, flash drives, and external hard drives. UTC
88
Universal Time, Coordinated. The International Atomic Time (TAI) with leap seconds added at irregular intervals to compensate for the Earth’s slowing rotation. Leap seconds are used to allow UTC to closely track UT1, which is mean solar time at the Royal Observatory, Greenwich.
Index
CCCC
Index
C
E
activation of service, 11 auto-print of EGCs, 55
C
EGC deleting, 41 description of service, 7 printing, 41 printing automatically, 55 receiving, 38 reception, areas, 54 saving, 41 services, 54 settings, 54 event log, 73
clear protocol, 43 contacts, 35
G
D
GMDSS, 2 GNU General Public License, 75 GNU Lesser General Public License, 79
B buttons on SAILOR 1252 Printer, 66 on SAILOR 6006, 19
data file, sending, 28 data reporting and polling description of service, 10 deleting EGC, 41 message, 41 diagnostic report, 68 Distress buttons, testing, 61 description of service, 7 indications, clearing, 18 message, writing, 23 sending alert, 16 settings, 50 Distress LES number, 16, 52 Distress position, 53 document number this manual, i
Index
A
I Inbox, 32 indicators in printer front panel, 65
L LES number for Distress, 16, 52 list of supported, 31 link test, 43 login, 13, 43
89
Index
M
P
manual document number, i menu overview, 22 message deleting, 41 Inbox, 32 options, 29 Outbox, 33 printing, 41 saving, 30, 41 Sent items, 34 writing, 23, 26 messaging description of service, 9 mobile number entering, 58
position for Distress, 53 view current, 47 viewing, 47 position information, 10 position reporting description of service, 9 power status, 44 powering the system, 12 printer button functions, 66 front panel indicators, 65 printing EGC, 41 EGC automatically, 55 message, 41 protocol, clearing, 43
N NCS add, 59 edit, 60 network logging into, 13 login, 43 scan, 43 view status, 42 night mode, limits for, 46
O Outbox, 33 overview of menus, 22
90
R receiving EGCs, 38 registration, 11 reporting position, 10
S safety summary, iv SAILOR 1252 Printer button functions, 66 front panel indicators, 65 saving EGC, 41 message, 30, 41 scan, 43 Sent items, 34 service activation, 11
Index
services data reporting and polling, 10 Distress, 7 EGC, 7 Inmarsat C details, 7 messaging, 9 position reporting, 9 special access codes, 36 SSA option, 5 starting up, 12 status network, 42 power, 44 signaling, 71 support, 67 system overview local, 1 total, 3 system units, 4
CCCC
Index
T transmission, stop, 43 troubleshooting, 67 typography used in this manual, vii
U units in the system, 4 user interface, 6 navigating, 21
W writing messages, 23, 26
91
98-130753-A
Thrane & Thrane A/S
•
[email protected]
•
www.thrane.com
USER MANUAL
SAILOR 6300 MF/HF Radiotelex
SAILOR 6300 MF/HF Radiotelex User manual
Document number: 98-132519-A Release date: January 18, 2011
Disclaimer Any responsibility or liability for loss or damage in connection with the use of this product and the accompanying documentation is disclaimed by Thrane & Thrane. The information in this manual is provided for information purposes only, is subject to change without notice and may contain errors or inaccuracies. Manuals issued by Thrane & Thrane are periodically revised and updated. Anyone relying on this information should acquire the most current version e.g. from http://www.thrane.com or from the distributor. Thrane & Thrane is not responsible for the content or accuracy of any translations or reproductions, in whole or in part, of this manual from any other source.
Copyright © 2011 Thrane & Thrane A/S. All rights reserved.
GPL notification The software included in this product contains copyrighted software that is licensed under the GPL/LGPL. The verbatim licenses can be found online at: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0.html http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html You may obtain the complete corresponding source code from us for a period of three years after our last shipment of this product, which will be no earlier than December 31, 2015, by sending a money order or check for DKK 50 to: SW Technology/GPL Compliance, Thrane & Thrane A/S, Lundtoftegaardsvej 93D 2800 Lyngby DENMARK Please write "source for product SAILOR 6300 MF/HF Radiotelex" in the memo line of your payment. You may also find a copy of the source at http://www.thrane.com/foss. This offer is valid to anyone in receipt of this information.
Warranties Any attempt to install or execute software not supplied by Thrane & Thrane on this device will result in the warranty being void. Any attempt to modify the software on this device in a way not specified by Thrane & Thrane will result in the warranty being void.
Trademark Acknowledgements •
Thrane & Thrane is a registered trademark of Thrane & Thrane A/S in the European Union and the United States.
•
SAILOR is a registered trademark of Thrane & Thrane A/S in the European Union, the United States and other countries.
•
Other product and company names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners.
Safety summary The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment. Thrane & Thrane assumes no liability for the customer's failure to comply with these requirements. GROUND THE EQUIPMENT To minimise shock hazard, the equipment chassis and cabinet must be connected to an electrical ground and the cable instructions must be followed. DO NOT OPERATE IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE Do not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases or fumes. Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard. KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS Operating personnel must not remove equipment covers. Component replacement and internal adjustment must be made by qualified maintenance personnel. DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY EQUIPMENT Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the equipment. COMPASS SAFE DISTANCE Minimum compass safe distance: 1.3 m from the Message Terminal. Failure to comply with the rules above will void the warranty!
iv
1
About the manual
2
Manual overview This manual describes how to use the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF Radiotelex. Note that this manual does not cover installation of the system. For information on installation refer to the installation manuals [2] and [3] listed below. This manual has the following chapters: •
Introduction contains an overview of the Radiotelex system.
•
Using the system explains how to send Distress alerts and how to use the Radiotelex application for sending and receiving telex messages.
•
Troubleshooting contains a short troubleshooting guide and explains how to check the status of the system.
Related documents The below list shows the documents related to this manual and to the Radiotelex system. Document number
Ref
Title and description
[1]
SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC, User manual
98-131070
[2]
SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC, Installation manual
98-130890
[3]
SAILOR 6006 and SAILOR 6007 Message Terminal, Installation manual
98-130088
[4]
SAILOR 6081 PSU and Charger, Installation and user manual
98-130980
v
Typography In this manual, typography is used as indicated below: Bold is used for the following purposes: •
To emphasize words or sentences. Example: “Do not push the Distress button if you are not in distress”.
•
To indicate what the user should select in the user interface. Example: “Select Message > Inbox”.
Italic is used to emphasize the paragraph title in cross-references. Example: “For further information, see System overview on page 2”.
vi
Contents Chapter 1
Introduction System overview .................................................................2 The Radiotelex application .................................................3
Chapter 2
Using the system Before you start ..................................................................6 Sending a DSC Distress alert ..............................................7 Sending a Distress telex .....................................................8 Cancelling a Distress alert ..................................................9 Overview of the Radiotelex user interface ......................... 10 Setting up a telex call ........................................................13 Making a telex call ............................................................16 Messages ......................................................................... 23 Receiving telex messages .................................................26 Scanning frequencies ....................................................... 27 System settings ................................................................ 33 Power status .................................................................... 34
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting Getting support ................................................................ 37 Generating a diagnostic report .........................................38 Troubleshooting guide .....................................................39 Status signaling ................................................................41
vii
Chapter :
Glossary
.........................................................................................43
Index
.........................................................................................47
viii
1111
Chapter 1
Introduction With the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF Radiotelex system you can send and receive telex messages and send DSC Distress alerts over MF/HF radio. The Radiotelex program runs on a SAILOR 6006 Message Terminal with a keyboard.
The Message Terminal is connected to a SAILOR 6300 MF/HF radio, which transmits and receives the telex messages and transmits DSC Distress alerts. The units are further described in the installation manuals for the MF/HF radio [2] and the Message Terminal [3]. This chapter has the following sections: •
System overview
•
The Radiotelex application
1
Introduction
1
Chapter 1: Introduction
System overview The SAILOR 6300 MF/HF Radiotelex communicates on MF or HF radio frequencies. It is approved for shipboard installations to operate within the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS). Radiotelex supports worldwide ship-to-ship, ship-to-shore, and shore-to-ship communication. A coast station can act as a relay between the Radiotelex system and an end receiver without any telex capabilities. The Radiotelex system supports both 4- and 5-digit selective calls and 9-digit MMSI (Maritime Mobile Service Identity) numbers.
Coast station
Radiotelex
Radiotelex
Ship station
Ship station
Fax subscriber
Radiotelex is well suited for transmission over very long distances. It has global coverage, even including the North pole and the South pole.
2
System overview
1111
Chapter 1: Introduction
The Radiotelex application runs on the SAILOR 6006 Message Terminal. On the Message Terminal you can read and write telex messages and set up telex calls. The Message Terminal has a touch-screen and a keyboard for operating the Radiotelex system.
f
The Radiotelex application starts up automatically when the Message Terminal is powered. Note that the Message Terminal must always be powered in a GMDSS system. For details on how to operate the system, see Using the system on page 5.
The Radiotelex application
3
Introduction
The Radiotelex application
Chapter 1: Introduction
4
The Radiotelex application
Using the system
2222
Chapter 2 2
•
Before you start
•
Sending a DSC Distress alert
•
Sending a Distress telex
•
Cancelling a Distress alert
•
Overview of the Radiotelex user interface
•
Setting up a telex call
•
Making a telex call
•
Messages
•
Receiving telex messages
•
Scanning frequencies
•
System settings
•
Power status
Using the system
This chapter describes how to operate the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF Radiotelex. It has the following sections:
5
Chapter 2: Using the system
Before you start The SAILOR 6300 MF/HF Radiotelex system must be set up for telex. This involves the following steps:
At the time of installation 1. SAILOR 6006 is configurable to be either a mini-C GMDSS terminal or a Radiotelex terminal. At the first power-up you must set up the Message Terminal to be a Radiotelex terminal. 2. At first power up you must also configure the answer back string and the ID for your system. For further information, see the installation manual for the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC [2]. 3. The MF/HF radio must be enabled to use telex. This is done by entering a PIN code in the MF/HF transceiver. For further information, see the installation manual for the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC [2].
Before use 1. The Message Terminal must be on. 2. The MF/HF radio must be in telex mode: On the MF/HF radio, push the Mode button repeatedly until the display shows TLX. For details, see the user manual for the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC [1].
6
Before you start
Important
Only send a Distress alert if you are in immediate danger! The Distress alert can be compared to a MAYDAY call.
The Distress button procedure below is the same on the Message Terminal as on the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC. Note
If the subsequent communication is to be telex, use the ALERT function in the MF/HF radio to set up telex subsequent communication before pushing the button. Refer to the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC User manual for details on how to set up the MF/HF radio. When the DSC Distress alert is sent, a popup appears on the Message Terminal guiding you to the Call page, which is automatically set up to Broadcast FEC using the telex frequency matching the Distress alert.
To send a Distress alert, do as follows: 1. Open the cover for the Distress button. 2. Push and hold the button for more than 3 seconds to transmit an undesignated DSC Distress alert. While the button is pushed, the Message Terminal shows a popup with a countdown and the attached control unit(s) beep. To cancel a Distress alert, see Cancelling a Distress alert on page 9.
Sending a DSC Distress alert
7
Using the system
Sending a DSC Distress alert
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
Chapter 2: Using the system
Sending a Distress telex If telex subsequent communication is selected for the DSC Distress alert, a popup appears and guides you to the Call page, which is automatically set up to Broadcast FEC on the Distress frequency assigned by the MF/HF radio. You can now send a Distress telex as follows: 1. In the Call setup page, select Call at the bottom of the page. 2. Type in further information about the distress. Press Enter or select Send after each line. Include: •
Distress alert sent at xx:xx (time of the Distress alert)
•
Own MMSI and name of the ship
•
Own position
•
Information about your distress
3. When the message is complete, select Break to end the message. For further information on how to send a telex, see Setting up a telex call on page 13 and Making a telex call on page 16.
8
Sending a Distress telex
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
Cancelling a Distress alert 1. On the MF/HF radio, cancel the Distress alert by selecting the softkey ANNUL. For details, see the user manual for the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF DSC. 2. The radio sends a Distress cancel (on 1-6 channels).
3. The radio enters telex subsequent communication on the first telex distress frequency. 4. The Message Terminal shows that the system is engaged in DSC subsequent communication. 5. Select Call from the main menu. 6. In the Call page of the Message Terminal, select Call to send a Broadcast FEC message cancelling the Distress alert. In the message, include as a minimum: •
This is a Distress cancel for Distress alert sent at xx:xx (time of the Distress alert)
•
Own MMSI and name of the ship
•
Own position
•
The reason for cancelling the Distress alert
7. When the message is complete, select Break to end the message 8. On the MF/HF radio, press OK if more frequencies are involved, or QUIT to end the distress session if the whole procedure is completed. 9. If more frequencies are involved, the radio automatically switches to the next frequency. Repeat step 4 to step 8 for every frequency. For further information on how to send a telex, see Setting up a telex call on page 13 and Making a telex call on page 16.
Cancelling a Distress alert
9
Using the system
To cancel a Distress alert with telex subsequent communication, do as follows:
Chapter 2: Using the system
Overview of the Radiotelex user interface When the system is powered, the Message Terminal display shows the main menu and a status field. Below is an overview of the main screen in the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF Radiotelex. Name of current page
Power status
Status field
Main menu items
•
Name of current page: When you have entered a subpage, this field shows the name of the page.
•
Status field: This field shows a short status message next to the Status/warning icon.
•
Status/Warning icon: This icon can show: System is idle.
10
Status/warning icon
Overview of the Radiotelex user interface
System is scanning the frequencies selected in the scan list. ARQ connection.
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
Using the system
Outgoing selective FEC. Incoming FEC (selective or broadcast). Outgoing Broadcast FEC. Red arrows instead of green arrows in the above icons mean that the signal quality is poor. Together with each of these symbols one of the following icons may also appear: Error. Warning. For details of warnings/errors, see Information of events on page 41. •
Power status: Shows the status of the backup battery.
•
Main menu items: Select these items to access the subpages.
Overview of the Radiotelex user interface
11
Chapter 2: Using the system
Navigating the Radiotelex To navigate and select items, you can do one of the following: Touch screen: Select items by touching them with your finger on the screen. Keyboard: •
When an item has an underlined letter, you may type Alt + to select the item, e.g. type Alt+S to select the Scan menu.
•
Press Esc to go back one level in the menu system or to close the current window.
•
Use the tab and arrow keys to navigate through items.
•
Press Space to select items.
•
Press F1 to see the list of active errors and warnings.
Trackball (if fitted):
12
•
Use the trackball in the corner of the keyboard to move the cursor around on the screen.
•
Use the two buttons in the left corner the same way you use the left and right buttons on a mouse.
Overview of the Radiotelex user interface
Setting up a telex call The system must be configured and enabled before use. See Before you start on page 6.
Using the system
Note
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
Setting up the transmission mode The Radiotelex system has three transmission modes: •
ARQ (Automatic Repetition reQuest): A mode where two stations can communicate without breaking the connection. The direction is changed with an “over” command.
•
Selective FEC (Forward Error Correction): A one-way mode to one station.
•
Broadcast FEC: A one-way mode broadcast to all stations. E.g. used in distress situations or for news or coast station traffic lists.
Setting up a telex call
13
Chapter 2: Using the system
To set up the transmission mode, do as follows: 1. From the main menu, select Call. Note
If Telex is not selected in the MF/HF radio you get a warning that the radio is occupied. Use the Mode button on the radio to switch to Telex.
2. Select ARQ, Selective FEC or Broadcast FEC.
Selecting the frequency for the call You can select the frequency for your call in one of the following ways: •
14
Manual frequency: Allows you to type in the frequency in the Tx freq and Rx freq fields (Rx is only relevant for ARQ calls). When you select a coast station from the Coast stations list, the primary frequencies are listed, and you can select the frequency to use.
Setting up a telex call
•
ITU intership channel: Allows you to type in a channel number to use for ship-to-ship communication.
•
ITU coast station channel: Allows you to type in a channel number to use for communication with a coast station.
•
ITU distress/safety channel: Allows you to type in a channel number to use for distress or safety communication. If the entered channel is not a distress or safety channel, the display shows a warning. There are 6 dedicated distress frequencies for simplex FEC telex distress: 2174.5 kHz (Channel 1), 4177.5 kHz (Channel 411), 6268 kHz (Channel 611), 8376.5 kHz (Channel 801), 12520 kHz (Channel 1287) and 16695 kHz (Channel 1624).
When selecting a channel number the corresponding frequency is automatically displayed.
Selecting the recipient for the call Broadcast FECs are broadcast to all stations listening on the selected frequency, so you cannot specify recipients for broadcast calls. For ARQ or Selective FEC you must specify the recipient for your telex. •
If the recipient is in the Subscribers list or the Coast stations list, simply select the recipient from the list.
•
If the recipient is not in any of the lists, type in the recipient’s number in the Call code field. You can use either a 9-digit MMSI number or a 4-digit or 5-digit selective calling number.
Coast stations have either a 9-digit MMSI number starting with 00 or a 4-digit selective call (SelCall) number. Ship subscribers have either a 9-digit MMSI number or a 5-digit SelCall number.
Setting up a telex call
15
Using the system
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
Chapter 2: Using the system
Making a telex call When you have set up telex mode, frequency/channel and recipient as described in the previous section, you are ready to make a call. Do as follows: 1. Select at the bottom of the Call setup page to start your telex session. The display shows that the radio is trying to connect.
2. When the connection is established, the telex page opens.
If you have selected Automatic identification (DE/WRU), your answer back string is automatically sent. For ARQ calls, the answer back string is followed by a WRU command requesting the recipient’s answer back string. When the recipient has answered and has sent an Over command, you can start your message.
16
Making a telex call
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
3. You can send text in the following two ways: •
Type in your message directly in the text line at the bottom, using your connected keyboard or the on-screen keyboard, which is activated by pressing the text line on the screen and then the keyboard icon that appears in the right side of the text line.
Making a telex call
17
Using the system
For a description of all the items at the bottom of the page, see Options in the telex page on page 20.
Chapter 2: Using the system
•
Select Options > Transmit file and select the file you want to transmit. Note
The system begins to transmit immediately when the file is selected. Pressing OVER while a file is being transferred does not result in a change of direction until the entire file is transmitted. To stop the transmission, select Cancel file transfer. Then you can use the OVER command to change the direction.
You can combine the two methods by adding text before or after the file contents, and type text at the bottom while the file is being transmitted. If you transmitted a file and you do not want to add further text, skip the next step and go directly to step 5. For information on how to create a file for later transmission, see Writing message files for telex on page 23. 4. When you have finished your message, press Enter or select Send at the bottom of the page. The text is now transmitted. You can follow the progress in the inverted part of the message.
18
Making a telex call
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
Using the system
5. For ARQ only: when you want the recipient to write back, select Over at the bottom of the page, or type [OVER] or +?.
The recipient can now type in a message for you. The message will appear in the field just below your message. Note
If the remote station forces an OVER on your part while you are transmitting data, 1-2 characters may incorrectly be marked has having been sent while the remote station may not have received these characters. We do not recommend forcing a change of direction while the other station is sending data.
6. When the recipient has placed the [OVER] command too, you can type more text to continue the conversation. 7. To end the telex session, select Break. If you do not want to wait for exchange of DE/WRU, you can select Break now! in the popup that appears after Break is selected. The call is then disconnected. You can see all telex sessions initiated by you under Sent Items in the Message page. See Viewing Sent items on page 25.
Making a telex call
19
Chapter 2: Using the system
Options in the telex page Buttons The table below shows the functions of the buttons that can appear at the bottom of the page: Button
Function Transmits the text you have typed in the text line at the bottom. (ARQ only) Changes direction, so the recipient can write back. You cannot send any text after an Over command, until the direction is changed back to your side. However, if you send more text while the OVER command is waiting to be sent, the OVER is removed and replaced by your new text. Transmits your answer back string. The answer back string is stored in the MF/HF radio during installation, using the Identification page in the Message Terminal (System > Settings > Identification). In Call settings you can set up the system to automatically send DE/WRU (System > Settings > Call settings).
20
Making a telex call
Function (ARQ only) Inserts a WRU command (Who are you? request for identification) in your text. This command is automatically followed by [OVER], so that the recipient can answer back.
Using the system
Button
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
When the WRU command is sent, you cannot send any more text until the direction is changed back to your side. However, if you send more text while the WRU command is waiting to be sent, the WRU is removed and replaced by your new text. In the Call settings page you can set up the system to automatically send DE/WRU. Inserts a BELL command (can make e.g. a buzzer sound at the recipient). Opens the Options menu, described in the next section.
Stops the communication link.
Making a telex call
21
Chapter 2: Using the system
Options menu To open the Options menu in the telex page, select Options at the bottom of the page.
You now have the following options: •
22
Insert •
Date & Time: Inserts the current date and time (UTC format) in your message. The syntax of the Date and time is the format selected under Settings > Date and Time format.
•
[OVER]: Inserts an OVER command in your text, so that when you select Send or press Enter, your text is sent and the direction is changed to the recipient immediately after.
•
[BREAK]: Inserts a BREAK command in your text, so that when you select Send or press Enter, your text is sent and the communication is stopped immediately after.
•
Transmit file Allows you to select a text file to transmit. For information on how to write and save the text file, see Writing message files for telex on page 23.
•
Print Sends the text in the telex page to the printer.
Making a telex call
Writing message files for telex If you want to write longer messages, you can use the Message function. Note
You cannot send the message directly from the Message editor. To send the message you have to save it to a file and then make a telex call and load the file as described in Making a telex call on page 16.
To write a message, do as follows: 1. From the main menu, select Message. 2. Select New (if not already selected).
To make sure the text is properly formatted at the receiving end, we recommend starting the file with a few empty lines (press Enter).
Messages
23
Using the system
Messages
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
Chapter 2: Using the system
3. You now have two options: •
Type in the text using your keyboard or the on-screen keyboard in the top right corner. Note that you can only use telex characters.
•
Select Options > Load and select a file to load into the editor. You can then edit the text before you save it. Note that you cannot load a file if it contains characters that are not telex characters.
Supported characters are: a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 23456789 -?:().,'=/+ 4. When the message is complete, select Options.
5. Select Save to save the message to a file. You can save it to the Message Terminal or to a USB memory stick. 6. Select Print if you want to print the message on your connected printer. 7. If you want to clear the editor and start a new message, select New.
24
Messages
To see the Inbox, select Inbox at the bottom of the Message page.
The Inbox page shows all telex messages sent to you and initiated by another station. It shows both single messages and ARQ conversations initiated by the other part. Note
The Inbox can hold 1000 messages. The oldest messages are deleted when this limit is exceeded.
Viewing Sent items To see the Sent items, select Sent items at the bottom of the Message page. The Sent items page shows all telex communication initiated by you. Note
Sent items can hold 1000 messages. The oldest messages are deleted when this limit is exceeded.
Printing, saving or deleting messages Use the tools symbol to print, delete or save messages. You can use the tools symbol from within a message or from the list of messages (Inbox or Sent items).
From within a message To delete, print or save a message from within the message, do as follows: 1. Select the message you want to delete, save or print. 2. Select
in the top right corner of the display.
3. Select Delete, Print or save.
Messages
25
Using the system
Viewing the Inbox
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
Chapter 2: Using the system
From the Inbox or Sent items You can only print a message from within the message, as shown in the previous section. To delete or save messages from the Inbox or Sent items, do as follows: 1. Click
in the lower left corner of the display.
2. Select the messages you want to delete or save. You may use Select all to select all messages in the Inbox or Sent items, or Clear all to clear all selections. 3. Select Delete to delete the selected messages or Save to save the selected messages.
Receiving telex messages The system can receive telex messages on all MF and HF telex frequencies, including NAVTEX messages at 490 kHz, 518 kHz and 4209.5 kHz. Note
You can only receive telexes on frequencies that you are scanning. This means that the frequencies must be in the scan list, and a scanning must be started. See the next section for details. Exception for DSC subsequent communication: The radio will automatically enable scanning on the correct frequency and only on that frequency. When the DSC session is ended, the scan list of the Message Terminal is used again.
When a telex is received on your Message Terminal, the procedure is: 1. A popup appears and the telex page opens, showing the incoming message. 2. If the call is an ARQ call, you can continue the communication as described in Making a telex call on page 16. All received telex messages, whether they are ARQ telexes initiated by the other part or FEC telexes, are shown in the Inbox.
26
Receiving telex messages
When a scan is started, the system is ready to receive telex messages on the selected scan frequencies. The MF/HF radio scans every listed channel for 3 seconds. If no traffic is detected, it continues to the next channel. The scan list in the SAILOR 6300 MF/HF Radiotelex always shows the current telex frequency of the connected MF/HF radio (indicated with “MF/HF radio frequency”). In addition, you can add other telex frequencies that you want the system to scan. See Editing the scan list on page 28. Note
If the system is in DSC subsequent communication mode, only the frequency assigned by the MF/HF radio is scanned.
To start a frequency scan, do as follows: 1. From the main menu, select Scan.
2. To scan the frequencies shown, select Start scan. The Message Terminal informs the MF/HF radio to scan for the selected frequencies. The status field in the top right corner shows Scanning. 3. To stop scanning, select Stop scan.
Scanning frequencies
27
Using the system
Scanning frequencies
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
Chapter 2: Using the system
Editing the scan list The MF/HF scanning frequency is automatically listed and can only be changed from the MF/HF radio. You can add, change or delete additional scanning frequencies in the list. Note
Scanning on multiple frequencies is primarily intended for receiving ARQ calls. If many scan channels are specified you may not be able to receive all incoming FEC calls, because FEC uses a much shorter phasing sequence compared to ARQ.
To edit the scan list, do as follows: 1. At the bottom of the SCAN LIST page, select the Edit list button.
28
Scanning frequencies
Using the system
The list opens.
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
The green check marks show which frequencies are to be scanned. 2. To enable scanning of a frequency in the list, select the box next to the frequency. 3. Select OK.
To change or delete a frequency in the list 1. Open the scan list as shown above. 2. Select the frequency (not the box). The selected frequency is shown in the right side of the page. 3. To delete the frequency from the list, select Delete. Then select Yes.
Scanning frequencies
29
Chapter 2: Using the system 4. To change the frequency, select Edit.
5. Type in the Receive and Transmit frequencies or select from the list of Coast stations. Note
You must always type in both frequencies, even if you are only going to use the receive frequency. The transmit frequency is used to respond to incoming ARQ calls.
6. Select OK. 7. To stop editing the scan list, select OK again.
30
Scanning frequencies
To add a frequency to the list
Using the system
1. In the SCAN LIST page, select Edit list.
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
2. Select Add new in the top right corner.
Scanning frequencies
31
Chapter 2: Using the system 3. Type in the Receive and Transmit frequencies or select from the list of Coast stations. Note
You must always enter a transmit frequency, even if it is not used (e.g. for NAVTEX, which is receive only). The transmit frequency must be within a valid maritime frequency band specified by ITU. The receive frequency must be between 490 and 27500 kHz.
4. Select OK. 5. To stop editing the scan list, select OK again.
32
Scanning frequencies
System settings
Using the system
To access the system settings, select System > Settings.
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
In the System settings page you can set up: •
Date and time format. Set up how date and time is displayed.
•
Screen settings. Set the ambient light level for switching to night mode.
•
Call settings. Automatic DE/WRU and slave delay (the slave delay of 10 ms is adequate for almost all scenarios).
•
Identification. Configure call code and answer back string (DE). These settings require password and are normally set up during installation.
System settings
33
Chapter 2: Using the system
Power status Note
The Power status only shows information for the SAILOR 6081 PSU and charger. If you have a different power supply in your system, there is no information available.
1. To see the status of the power source, select System > Power.
34
Power status
Important
Using the system
2. To see the power settings, select Settings... in the lower right corner.
2222
Chapter 2: Using the system
The default settings are suitable for most installations. Do not change these settings unless you have a special battery type or installation that requires different settings. Only skilled personnel should change the power settings. For information on how to change the settings, refer to the installation manual for the MF/HF radio [2].
Power status
35
Chapter 2: Using the system
36
Power status
Chapter 3
3333
Troubleshooting
3
•
Getting support
•
Generating a diagnostic report
•
Troubleshooting guide
•
Status signaling
Troubleshooting
This chapter gives guidelines for troubleshooting and provides an overview of the different means of status signaling. It has the following sections:
Getting support If this manual does not provide the remedies to solve your problem, you may want to contact your local distributor. A list of certified partners and distributors is available on Thrane & Thrane’s web site: www.thrane.com. Select Maritime and select Where to buy from the top menu bar.
37
Chapter 3: Troubleshooting
Generating a diagnostic report To generate a diagnostic report, do as follows: 1. Select System. 2. Select Advanced at the bottom of the page.
3. Connect a USB memory stick to your Message Terminal. Note
Do not save the file on the Message Terminal itself; the file format is not supported. Use a USB memory stick instead.
4. Select Generate diagnostic report. 5. Select USB and browse to the location where you want your diagnostics file. 6. Select Save. 7. Select OK.
38
Generating a diagnostic report
The below table provides information on some of the problems that might occur, including possible causes and remedies to solve the problems. Problem The system cannot be switched on
No battery information in the Message Terminal
Possible cause
Remedy
The Message Terminal has a remote on/off switch, so the power button is disabled.
If the Message Terminal is using a remote on/off switch, use that instead of the power button.
There is no power on the input to the Message Terminal.
Check that all power cables between the ship power source and the Message Terminal are connected correctly, and that the power source is on.
The Ethernet connection from the power supply is not working.
Check the Link activity indicator at the connection points in the Ethernet switch. Check that the Ethernet cables are connected correctly and are not damaged.
The power supply is not a SAILOR 6081
Troubleshooting guide
None. Battery and power information is only shown if the power supply is a SAILOR 6081.
39
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting guide
3333
Chapter 3: Troubleshooting
Chapter 3: Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Remedy
No connection between Message Terminal and printer
The USB cable is damaged or is not connected properly.
Check that the USB cable is connected correctly and is not damaged.
No connection between Message Terminal and MF/HF radio
The CAN connection does not work.
Check that the CAN cables are connected correctly to the Message Terminal and the MF/HF radio, and that they are not damaged.
The MF/HF radio is not switched on
Check that the MF/HF radio is switched on and ready.
Other
Switch off the MF/HF radio and the Message Terminal and switch them back on.
The paper is not placed correctly in the printer.
Adjust the paper to the left side of the printer.
The Message Terminal shows “out of paper” although there is paper in the printer.
40
Troubleshooting guide
Status signaling The Message Terminal can show basic status and error messages. The upper right corner of the display shows the most important status information.
Information of events Popup windows When an event requires your attention, a popup window appears. When you have read the text, select OK or press Esc to close the window.
If the window indicates an error that requires your action, the warning or error icon will stay in the top right corner of the display as long as the problem persists. If the system uses a SAILOR 6081 PSU and Charger, the Message Terminal also shows errors or warnings related to the power supply. For information on the SAILOR 6081, see the manual for the SAILOR 6081 [4].
List of active warnings and errors The top right corner of the display shows a short text about the current status. The icon in the corner can change depending on the situation. The following icons may show: Antenna icon: The antenna icon can look different depending on the status. For details, see page 10 in Overview of the Radiotelex user interface. Error. Warning. Select the icon or press F1 to see the list of active warnings and errors. From the list of active warnings and errors you can access the event log.
Status signaling
41
Troubleshooting
3333
Chapter 3: Troubleshooting
Chapter 3: Troubleshooting
Event log From the list of active errors or warnings, you can select Event log to see a list of previous events. The list holds up to 100 events, including
42
•
Errors
•
Warnings
•
Cleared warnings and errors.
Status signaling
AAAA
Glossary Glossary A ARQ
Automatic Repetition reQuest. An error-control method for data transmission that uses acknowledgements and timeouts to achieve reliable data transmission over an unreliable service. If the sender does not receive an acknowledgment before the timeout, it usually re-transmits the frame/packet until the sender receives an acknowledgment or exceeds a predefined number of re-transmissions.
C CAN
Controller-Area Network. A message based protocol designed to allow microcontrollers and devices to communicate with each other within a vehicle without a host computer.
D DE
A command used in a telex message to insert an answer-back string identifying the sender of the message. The string should normally contain the call sign.
DSC
Digital Selective Calling. Primarily intended to initiate ship-toship, ship-to-shore and shore-to-ship radiotelephone and MF/HF radiotelex calls. Each DSC-equipped ship, shore station and group is assigned a unique 9-digit Maritime Mobile Service Identity. DSC distress alerts, which consist of a preformatted distress message, are used to initiate emergency communication with ships and rescue coordination centers.
F FEC
Forward Error Correction. A system of error control for data transmission, whereby the sender adds redundant data to its messages, also known as an error-correcting code. This allows
43
Glossary
A
Glossary
the receiver to detect and correct errors without the need to ask the sender for additional data. The advantage of forward error correction is that a back-channel is not required.
G GMDSS
Global Maritime Distress Safety System. The system is intended to perform the following functions: alerting (including position determination of the unit in distress), search and rescue coordination, locating (homing), maritime safety information broadcasts, general communication, and bridge-to-bridge communication.
GPL
General Public License
H HF
High Frequency. The frequency band between 3 and 30 MHz. Used for medium and long range terrestrial radio communication.
I ITU
International Telecommunication Union
L LGPL
Lesser General Public License
M MF
44
Medium Frequency. Radio frequencies (RF) in the range of 300 kHz to 3 MHz. Navtex, which is part of the current Global Maritime Distress Safety System occupies 518 kHz and 490 kHz for important digital text broadcasts.
Maritime Mobile Service Identity. A series of nine digits which are sent in digital form over a radio frequency channel in order to uniquely identify ship stations, ship earth stations, coast stations, coast earth stations, and group calls. These identities are formed in such a way that the identity or part thereof can be used by telephone and telex subscribers connected to the general telecommunications network to call ships automatically.
N NAVTEX
NAVigational TEleX. An international automated mediumfrequency direct-printing service for delivery of navigational and meteorological warnings and forecasts, as well as urgent marine safety information to ships.
P PIN
Personal Identification Number
T TLX
TeLeprinter eXchange - also called telex.
U USB
Universal Serial Bus. A specification to establish communication between devices and a host controller (usually personal computers). USB is intended to replace many varieties of serial and parallel ports. USB can connect computer peripherals such as mice, keyboards, digital cameras, printers, personal media players, flash drives, and external hard drives.
UTC
Universal Time, Coordinated. The International Atomic Time (TAI) with leap seconds added at irregular intervals to compensate for the Earth’s slowing rotation. Leap seconds are used to allow UTC to closely track UT1, which is mean solar time at the Royal Observatory, Greenwich.
45
Glossary
MMSI
AAAA
Glossary
Glossary
W WRU
46
Who are you? A command used in a telex message to request an answer-back string (DE) from the recipient of the telex message.
Index alarm voltage level, 34 answer back string define, 33 insert, 20
B battery charge max. voltage and current, 34 battery status, 34 Bell button, 21 Break button, 21 buttons on screen during call, 20
C call make a telex call, 16 select frequency, 14 select recipient, 15 set up, 13 call code for own system, 33 charge battery max. voltage and current, 34 coast station MMSI, 15
D date and time format, setting, 33 DE and WRU automatically insert, 33 DE button, 20
B
delete a message, 25 diagnostic report, 38 Distress cancel, 9 send alert, 7 telex subsequent communication, 8 document number, this manual, i documents, related, v
Index
A
BBBB
Index
E error messages, 41
F file, transmit, 22 float voltage, 34 frequency scan, 27 select, 14
I icons, 10 Identification, 33 identification request (WRU), 21 Inbox, 25 initial setup, 6 insert date and time, 22
M manual document number, i
47
Index
message delete, 25 print, 25 receive, 26 save, 25 MMSI coast station, 15 subscriber, 15
N night mode, 33
O options menu during call, 22 Over button, 20 overview system, 1 user interface, 10
recipient of call, 15 related manuals, v
S safety summary, iv save a message, 25 scan frequencies, 27 Send button, 20 Sent items, 25 slave delay, 33 status, 10 subscriber MMSI, 15 system overview, 1 system settings, 33
T
power alarm level, 34 status, 34 power source, 34 prepare the system for telex, 6 print current page, 22 message, 25
telex enable in radio, 6 make a call, 16 receive, 26 select frequency, 14 select recipient, 15 set up a call, 13 subsequent communication Distress, 8 time and date format, setting, 33 transmit a file, 22 troubleshooting, 39 typography used in this manual, vi
R
U
radiotelex overview, 2 receive telex, 26
user interface, 3 navigate, 12 overview, 10
P
48
for
V voltage alarm level, 34
W
BBBB
Index
Index
warnings and error messages, 41 WRU button, 21
49
98-132519-A
Thrane & Thrane A/S
•
[email protected]
•
www.thrane.com
TECHNICAL MANUAL
SAILOR H1252A/TT-3608A-220 Printer SAILOR H1252B/TT-3608A Printer
Please note Any responsibility or liability for loss or damage in connection with the use of this product and the accompanying documentation is disclaimed. The information in this manual is provided for information purposes only, is subject to change without notice, may contain errors or inaccuracies, and represents no commitment whatsoever. This agreement is governed by the laws of Denmark.
PART I
Contents PART I
H1252A / TT-3608A-220 H1252B / TT-3608A
1 General information ............................................................................ 2 2 Installation ........................................................................................... 3 2.1 Mounting possibilities .................................................................. 3
PART II
H1252B / TT-3608A
1 General information ............................................................................ 6 1.1 Introduction ................................................................................. 6 1.2 Principle of operation .................................................................. 6 1.3 Technical data ............................................................................ 6 2 Maintenance/modification .................................................................. 7 2.1 Disassembling to remove the mains transformer ....................... 7 2.2 Disassembling and mounting of the ON-OFF switch .................. 8 2.3 Mounting the DC power supply and reassembling ..................... 8 2.3.1 Mounting of the DC power supply ............................................... 9 2.3.2 Modification of the printer main control board ............................ 9 2.3.3 Reassembling of the printer ...................................................... 10 2.4 Electrical connections ............................................................... 11 3 Service ............................................................................................... 12 3.1 Printer selftest ........................................................................... 12 3.2 Module check of the DC power supply ..................................... 12 3.3 Check after repair ..................................................................... 12 4 Mechanical disassembling of printer .............................................. 13 5 Circuit description ............................................................................ 14 5.1 DC power supply .......................................................................... 14
0627
1
PART 1
1
General information
H1252A/TT-3608A-220 Hardcopy printer is an OKI MICROLINE 182/280 printer for 220/240V AC operation. H1252B/TT-3608A Hardcopy printer is an OKI MICROLINE 182/280 printer with built-in DC power supply for 10.5-32V DC operation. The printer is as standard delivered with a Roll Paper Stand, other paper types can also be used, please refer to the OKI manual for detailed information. The printer is as standard delivered with the mounting kit H1250, it can also be mounted on the H2192 GMDSS Console using the mounting plate which is delivered together with the H2192 GMDSS Console. Paper roll, Power cable and Centronics cable are supplied with the Printer.
501274
501279
501278
2
0627
PART I
2 2.1
Installation Mounting possibilities
240 mm
Mounting kit H1250
280 mm
371 mm
28709
Drilling plan
371 mm
290 mm
4 pcs ø6 mm
300 mm 341 mm 28711
0627
3
PART 1
240 mm
Mounting kit H2192
325 mm
442 mm
28699
256 mm
Drilling plan
118.5 mm
2 pcs 4 mm
428 mm 442 mm 28710
4
0627
PART II
Printer with mounting kit H1250
37
1m
m
29
0m
m
Self-cutting screws, 4 pieces 4.2 x 25 Washers, 4 pieces M4
m 0m m 1m 34
30
Screws, 3 pieces M4 x 20
28641A
Printer with mounting kit H2192
25
6m
m
11
8.5
mm
m
8m
42
m
2m
44
Self-cutting screws, 2 pieces 4.2 x 25 Washers, 2 pieces M4
Screws, 3 pieces M4 x 20 28697
0627
5
PART II
1
General information
1.1
Introduction
This section gives you all the necessary informations to maintaine the DC power supply module. It also specify how to modify the printer to operate on DC supply instead of AC supply.
1.2
Principle of operation
The power supply module is constructed to operate from a battery voltage of 10.5V DC to 32V DC to deliver the necessary voltages for the printer. The voltage conversion takes place in a “flyback” switch converter, which is controlled by a current mode controller. The regulation of the output voltage is controlled via a separate winding of the transformer, which also deliveres the power for the control circuit. At the input and at the output are placed filters to suppress the switch noise. Blockdiagram INPUT FILTER
SWITCH CONVERTER
OUTPUT FILTER
+
+30V
10.5V....32V
-
+10V 28480
PWM
1.3
Technical data
Input voltage range Current consumption Output voltages Noise from input terminals On/off Operating temperature
6
CONTROL CIRCUIT
: 10.5V DC to 32V DC : max. 4.5A (fuse = 6.3AT) : 10V DC / 0.3A : 30V DC / 0.8A : better than CEPT Rec. T/R 34-01 : by switch : -15o C to +55o C
0627
PART II
2
Maintenance/modification
This section is intended for use when modifying the printer to operate from DC supply instead of 220V AC supply.
2.1
Disassembling to remove the mains transformer
Remove the access cover by lifting up rear edge. Pull out the platen knob. Remove the two screws. Remove the top cover by lifting up the front and pushing it backward. Remove the transformer output cable from the printer Main Control Board. Remove the ground strap screw, but keep it for later use. Remove the two screws, that fix the transformer, but keep them for later use. Remove the transformer assembly with power PCB and AC cord receptable by lifting upwards. Remove the 220V~ label located at the panel cut out for the AC cord receptable.
1 2 3
5
4
3
28560
0627
7
PART II
2.2
Disassembling and mounting of the ON-OFF switch
It is necessary to remove the ON-OFF switch from the transformer assembly to use it again on the DC power supply module. Remove the filter and switch board from the transformer by pulling it off. Unsolder the ON-OFF Switch. Solder the switch to the two loose wires on the DC power supply module. Then twist the wires to the switch to suppress noise.
2.3
Mounting the DC power supply and reassembling
Remove the cover on the glue pad and when the power supply module is placed properly, the switch is placed in the slots in the cabinet and is pressed down to the glue pad. Ground connection is mounted under the mounting frame
The mounting frame is fixed with the two screws from the mains transformer
28556
8
0627
PART II
DC power supply circuit board is fixed to the mounting frame with four screws
The ON-OFF Switch is placed in the printer panel cutout and fixed to the PCB with a glue pad
28557
Note: Remove the " 220V ~ " label
2.3.1 Mounting of the DC power supply Place the ground connection over the rear transformer hole, and fix it with the ground screw. Place the mounting frame where the transformer was mounted, and fix it with the two screws from the transformer. Then place the DC power supply module on the mounting frame, and fix it with four screws. Be sure the power ON-OFF switch is correctly placed in the panel cut out slot. Press the plate with the DC input connector in to the panel cut out the formen AC cord receptable. Connect the output cable to the printer Main Control Board.
2.3.2 Modification of the printer main control board If the printer is equipt with a DC power supply module of other type than from ECI, it is necessary to modify the printer main board. As seen below, the diode D28 (D10) on the printer main board is short circuited. If the printer is equipt with a DC power supply module from ECI, module no. 628471 it is not recommended to short circuit the diode D28 (D10) on the printer main board. 0627
9
PART II
Run the printer selftest programme. Switch on the ON-OFF switch and simultaneously press down the “line feed” button. After a few seconds (at low input voltage) the printer starts the selftest printing routine, which means that the DC power supply is OK. Switch off the printer. D28 (D10)
Main Control Board
28479
2.3.3 Reassembling of the printer Place the top cover by lifting the front end and place holes in the rear end into the two small hooks in the bottom cabinet. To reassemble the printer, do the reverse procedure of the disassembling. Then run the selftest programme of the printer. (See above)
10
0627
PART II
2.4
Electrical connections
ON-OFF SWITCH FROM MAINS TRANSFORMER
OUTPUT CABLE RED GREEN
RED
BLACK
BLACK YELLOW/GREEN
DC INPUT CABLE 28558
0627
11
PART II
3 3.1
Service Printer selftest
To do a performance test of the DC power supply, a selftest programme in the printer can be used. Connect a DC power source of 10.5V to 32V to the DC input connector. Switch on the ON-OFF switch and simultaneously press down the “line feed” button. After a few seconds (at low input voltage) the printer starts the selftest a printing routine, which means that the power supply is OK. Switch off the printer.
3.2
Module check of the DC power supply
Connect a dummy load of 33Ω/30W to 30V output. Connect a dummy load of 33Ω/5W to 10V output. Connect a DC power source of 10.5V to the DC input connector. Switch on the power supply module. The module has to start up within 4 seconds. Connect a voltmeter to the 30V output and read 28 ±2V. Connect a voltmeter to the 10V output and read 9V ±1V. Connect a DC power source of 32V to the DC input connector. Switch on the power supply module. The module has to start up within 1 second. Connect a voltmeter to the 30V output and read 33V ±2V. Connect a voltmeter to the 10V output and read 10V ±1V. Disconnect the dummy load from the 30V output and read the voltage to 39V ±2V.
3.3
Check after repair
If any repair has occurred to the power supply module, then perform chapter 3.2 MODULE CHECK OF THE DC POWER SUPPLY.
12
0627
PART II
4
Mechanical disassembling of printer
1 2 3
5
4
3
28560
0627
13
PART II
5
Circuit description
5.1 DC power supply To suppress noise on the supply wires a filter is build around the current compensated choke L1. Furthermore the RC snubbers across the transformer prevent unwanted oscillations during transition time. The diode D7 in conjunction with R16 and C19 clamps the transient voltage spikes across the switch transistor Q1. When the supply is switched on, the capacitor C6 is charged by means of R1 and when the voltage exceeds approx. 8.7V the controller U1 turns on. After a few cycles power is delivered from the bootstrap winding of the transformer to maintain the supply to the controller U1. When switching of the supply voltage, the power from the transformer disappears. This means the supply voltage to U1 decreases to approx. 7.6V and the controller U1 switches off. The rectified voltage from the bootstrap winding is also used to regulate the output voltages, which mainly is determined by R8 and R11. The feedback voltage is led to U1 pin 2. The resistors R10 and R9 and the capacitor C17 form the compensating circuit for the voltage regulation. The controller is working at a fixed frequency of approx. 100 kHz, determined by R7 and C16. The switch current is sensed by R15 and led to U1 pin 3 after being filtered by R14 and C18. The current sense voltage is a ramp voltage, which is compared to a DC level determined by the voltage regulation circuit. When the ramp exceeds the DC level, the controller U1 switch off the FET Q1. This current sense circuit forms a current regulation loop, which is stabilizing the over all regulation and prevents high current to damage the switch transistor Q1. When Q1 is on, the output diodes D3 and D4 is reversed biased and current to the load is delivered from the capacitors C12 and C13. During the off time of Q1, the transformer outputs deliver the currents to the capacitors C12 and C13 and to the load. The chokes L2 and L3 are parts of lowpass filters to suppress voltage spikes. Because of the converter principle , which is a ringing choke flyback type, without direct feedback from the output the voltages, the output voltages are load dependent. At input voltage under approx. 15V and at full load, the converter "changes frequency" and gets an irregular duty-cycle. That is normal behaviour. At low input voltage the start up time can be as long as 4 seconds, depending on the load.
14
0627
PART II
Component location DC power supply
View from component side with upper side tracks.
View from component side with lower side tracks. PCB rev. 28471C 0627
15
PART II
Schematic diagram DC power supply
This diagram is valid for PCB rev.28471C
16
TT-98-124013-THR-A
Thrane & Thrane A/S
•
[email protected]
•
www.thrane.com
INSTALLATION & USER MANUAL
THRANE 6194 Terminal Control Unit
THRANE 6194 Terminal Control Unit Installation and user manual
Document number: 98-131593-B Release date: June 9, 2011
Disclaimer Any responsibility or liability for loss or damage in connection with the use of this product and the accompanying documentation is disclaimed by Thrane & Thrane. The information in this manual is provided for information purposes only, is subject to change without notice and may contain errors or inaccuracies. Manuals issued by Thrane & Thrane are periodically revised and updated. Anyone relying on this information should acquire the most current version e.g. from http://www.thrane.com or from the distributor. Thrane & Thrane is not responsible for the content or accuracy of any translations or reproductions, in whole or in part, of this manual from any other source.
Copyright © 2011 Thrane & Thrane A/S. All rights reserved.
Trademark acknowledgements •
Thrane & Thrane is a registered trademark of Thrane & Thrane A/S in the European Union and the United States.
•
Inmarsat is a registered trademark of the International Maritime Satellite Organisation (IMSO) and is licensed by IMSO to Inmarsat Limited and Inmarsat Ventures plc.
•
SAILOR is a registered trademark of Thrane & Thrane A/S in the European Union, the United States and other countries.
•
Other product and company names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners.
Safety summary
1
The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment. Thrane & Thrane assumes no liability for the customer's failure to comply with these requirements. GROUND THE EQUIPMENT To minimise shock hazard, the equipment chassis and cabinet must be connected to an electrical ground and the cable instructions must be followed. DO NOT OPERATE IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE Do not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases or fumes. Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard. KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS Operating personnel must not remove equipment covers. Component replacement and internal adjustment must be made by qualified maintenance personnel. Do not service the unit with the power cable connected. Always disconnect and discharge circuits before touching them. DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY EQUIPMENT Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the equipment. COMPASS SAFE DISTANCE 20 cm
iii
About the manual Intended readers This manual is primarily an installation manual for the THRANE 6194 Terminal Control Unit. The manual is intended for installers of the system and service personnel. Personnel installing or servicing the system must be properly trained and authorized by Thrane & Thrane. It is important that you observe all safety requirements listed in the beginning of this manual, and install the system according to the guidelines in this manual. The manual also describes some basic configuration and the use of SSA buttons. See also the user manual for the system in which the THRANE 6194 is installed, e.g. SAILOR 6120 SSA System. Related manuals are listed on the next page under Related documents.
Manual overview This manual has the following chapters:
iv
•
Introduction - a short description of the THRANE 6194.
•
Installation - a description of how to unpack, install and store the THRANE 6194.
•
Connecting cables - descriptions and pin-out for the connectors, guidelines for connecting the THRANE 6194 and descriptions of the buttons.
•
Using the THRANE 6194 - descriptions of how to configure the THRANE 6194 and how to use the SSA buttons.
•
Service - explains status indicators and describes how to update software in the THRANE 6194.
•
Specifications - technical specifications for the THRANE 6194.
2
Related documents The below list shows the documents related to this manual and to the THRANE 6194. Document number
Ref
Title and description
[1]
SAILOR 6006 and SAILOR 6007 Message Terminal, Installation manual
98-130088
[2]
THRANE 6194 Software Interface Reference Manual
98-132853
[3]
SAILOR 3027 Software Interface Reference Manual
98-132852
[4]
SAILOR 6110 GMDSS System, Installation manual
98-130752
[5]
SAILOR 6110 GMDSS System, User manual
98-130753
[6]
SAILOR 6120/6130/6140/6150 System, Installation manual
98-131589
[7]
SAILOR 6120/6130/6140/6150 System, User manual
98-131590
[8]
SAILOR 6081 Power Supply and Charger, Installation and user manual
98-130980
[9]
System 6000 GMDSS Console, Installation manual
98-131571
v
vi
Table of Contents Chapter 1
Introduction The THRANE 6194 Terminal Control Unit ............................. 1
Chapter 2
Installation Unpacking ..........................................................................4 Installing the THRANE 6194 ................................................5 Outline drawing .................................................................8 Installing Ship Security Alert (SSA) buttons ........................9 Installing Non-SOLAS Alarm Panels .................................. 11 Installing the Glonass option .............................................12
Chapter 3
Connecting cables Connector overview ...........................................................16 Power control (X1) .............................................................17 CAN interface (X2) ........................................................... 18 RS-232 interface (X5) ........................................................21 LAN interface (X6) ............................................................ 22 SSA and Alarm Panel (X7 to X14) ...................................... 23 Grounding the THRANE 6194 ............................................ 27 Cable requirements ..........................................................28
Chapter 4
Using the THRANE 6194 Status indicators .............................................................. 32 Configuration ................................................................... 37 Using SSA buttons .............................................................41
vii
Table of Contents
Using Non-SOLAS Alarm Panels .......................................43
Chapter 5
Service Updating software ............................................................46 Status signalling ...............................................................47 Setting a temporary fixed IP address ................................48 Returning units for repair .................................................49 Repacking for shipment ....................................................49
App. A
Specifications General specifications ...................................................... 51 Specifications for I/O pins .................................................52
Glossary
.........................................................................................55
Index
.........................................................................................59
viii
1111
Chapter 1
Introduction
Introduction
1
The THRANE 6194 Terminal Control Unit The THRANE 6194 is used for the following purposes: •
For connecting covert alert buttons for use in Ship Security Alert (SSA) systems, or SAILOR 6108 Non-SOLAS Alarm Panels or SAILOR 3042E Alarm Panels in Non-SOLAS Distress systems.
•
For connecting a SAILOR 3027 terminal, which has a CAN interface, with other equipment that has Ethernet or RS-232 interface.
You can also connect a switch for power control of the THRANE 6194, and with the optional Glonass module you can connect to a Glonass antenna. The power for the THRANE 6194 is supplied through the CAN connector (extended input range 10.5-32 V DC).
1
Chapter 1: Introduction
2
The THRANE 6194 Terminal Control Unit
Installation
2222
Chapter 2 2
•
Unpacking
•
What’s in the delivery
•
Installing the THRANE 6194
•
Outline drawing
•
Installing Ship Security Alert (SSA) buttons
•
Installing Non-SOLAS Alarm Panels
•
Installing the Glonass option
Installation
This chapter provides a description of how to unpack, store and install the THRANE 6194. It contains the following sections:
For information on cable connections, see Connecting cables on page 15.
3
Chapter 2: Installation
Unpacking Initial inspection Inspect the shipping carton immediately upon receipt for evidence of damage during transport. If the shipping carton is severely damaged or water stained, request that the carrier's agent be present when opening the carton. Save the carton packing material for future use. Warning! To avoid electric shock, do not apply power to the system if there is any sign of shipping damage to any part of the front or rear panel or the outer cover. Read the safety summary at the front of this manual before installing or operating the system. After unpacking the system, inspect it thoroughly for hidden damage and loose components or fittings. If the contents are incomplete, if there is mechanical damage or defect, or if the system does not work properly, notify your dealer.
What’s in the delivery The following items are included in the delivery:
4
•
THRANE 6194 Terminal Control Unit
•
NMEA2000 Micro Device Cable, 6 m
•
Mounting tool for spring-loaded terminals
•
Installation and user manual (this manual)
Unpacking
Installing the THRANE 6194 General installation requirements
2222
Chapter 2: Installation
•
indoors
•
not exposed to water
•
close to a ship ground connection point.
Installation
The THRANE 6194 must be installed in a location which is
Make sure the Compass Safe Distance is maintained. See General specifications on page 51.
Installing the THRANE 6194
5
Chapter 2: Installation
Mounting the THRANE 6194 The THRANE 6194 is designed to be mounted indoors on a flat surface, e.g. on a bulkhead. o tant
If the THRANE 6194 is not mounted on a surface with a good connection to ship ground, you must connect a separate cable for this purpose. See Grounding the THRANE 6194 on page 27.
To mount the THRANE 6194, do as follows: 1. Using four screws, mount the THRANE 6194 on the mounting surface. The mounting holes are Ø6. If you mount the THRANE 6194 on a vertical surface, make sure the cable relief is facing down as shown in the picture below.
Cable relief for CAN
2. Tighten the screws. 3. Connect all cables as described in Connecting cables on page 15 and fasten the cables to the cable relief with cable strips. You can fasten the CAN cable to the left side of the cable relief using a cable clamp with 4 M4 screws.
6
Installing the THRANE 6194
Installation
4. When all cables are installed, mount the cover for the spring-loaded terminals. Tighten the screws to 1.5 Nm.
2222
Chapter 2: Installation
Installing the THRANE 6194
7
Chapter 2: Installation
Outline drawing
Dimensions are in mm.
8
Outline drawing
Installing Ship Security Alert (SSA) buttons Placing the SSA buttons
To fulfil the IMO requirement on covert activation, the alert button installation must be concealed using appropriate covert installation techniques. One of the alert buttons must be placed on the ship’s navigation bridge. To make testing easier we recommend installing the test button close to one of the covert alert buttons, but in such a way that the constant light does not disturb navigation (night sight). The test button must be installed where it is easy to test the SSA installation at regular intervals.
Installing the SSA buttons When the place for installation is determined, do as follows: 1. Drill a hole with a diameter of 16 mm. 2. Place the mounting-nut and the large piece of heat-shrink 19x30 mm on the back of the hole. 3. Slip the wires from the covert alert button through the hole, the mounting nut, the heat-shrink, and all the way to the THRANE 6194. The 19x30 mm heat-shrink is for cable strain relief on the back of the button. 4. Tighten the mounting nut. 5. Bend the cable in an S shape on the side of the switch.
Installing Ship Security Alert (SSA) buttons
9
Installation
2222
Chapter 2: Installation
Chapter 2: Installation
6. Pull the heat-shrink to the back of the board where the button is installed.
7. Shrink the heat-shrink with heat.
For information on wiring, see GMDSS or SSA systems (SAILOR 6110 or SAILOR 6120) on page 23. For information on how to configure the SSA buttons, see Configuring SSA buttons on page 38. For information on how to use the SSA buttons, see Using SSA buttons on page 41.
10
Installing Ship Security Alert (SSA) buttons
2222
Chapter 2: Installation
Installing Non-SOLAS Alarm Panels
Installation
The Non-SOLAS Alarm Panel is used in Non-SOLAS Distress systems to send Distress alerts. You may use the SAILOR 6108 Non-SOLAS Alarm Panel or the SAILOR 3042E Alarm Panel.
The Non-SOLAS Alarm Panel can be mounted on a wall or desktop. For information on wiring, see Non-SOLAS Distress systems (SAILOR 6150) on page 25.
Installing Non-SOLAS Alarm Panels
11
Chapter 2: Installation
Installing the Glonass option An optional Glonass module is available for the THRANE 6194. The Glonass module enables the THRANE 6194 to receive a Glonass signal and make it available to other parts of the system.
Caution!
Before removing the cover enclosing the electronic circuits, first make sure you are wearing a wrist strap connected to the work place.
To install the Glonass module, do as follows: 1. Unscrew the screws holding the cover for the electronic circuits and remove the cover. 2. Mount the four threaded spacers in the positions shown below, through the main PCB and into the threaded bushings in the bottom of the THRANE 6194. Tighten them to 1 Nm. Spacers and screws x 4
12
Installing the Glonass option
3. Place the Glonass module over the four spacers and mount the four screws through the holes in the Glonass module and into the spacers. Tighten the screws to 1 Nm. 4. Connect the cable harness from the Glonass module to the connector J901 in the THRANE 6194.
Glonass Module
Coax Cable
Connector 8 pins
Glonass antenna connector 5 X STATUS LED’s
RS 232 DB9
J901 Ethernet Rj45
X5
X6
Glonass Connector
S700
1 GPIO
1 GPIO
1 GPIO
1 MISC+
2 GPI
2 GPI
2 GPI
2 MISC-
3 GND
3 GND
3 GND
3 DAC+
4 VCC
4 VCC
4 VCC
4 DAC-
X7
X9
X11
X13
5. Lead the external connector on the antenna cable through the hole indicated in the drawing below and fasten it to the cover with the nut on the connector.
Installing the Glonass option
13
Installation
2222
Chapter 2: Installation
Chapter 2: Installation
6. Connect the internal connector on the antenna cable to the antenna connector on the Glonass module as shown in the drawing in step 4. 7. Mount the cover and fasten the screws to 1.5 Nm.
14
Installing the Glonass option
Chapter 3
3333
Connecting cables
3
•
Connector overview
•
Power control (X1)
•
CAN interface (X2)
•
RS-232 interface (X5)
•
LAN interface (X6)
•
SSA and Alarm Panel (X7 to X14)
•
Grounding the THRANE 6194
•
Cable requirements
Connecting cables
This chapter provides a description of all connectors on the THRANE 6194 and gives guidelines to cabling. It has the following sections:
15
Chapter 3: Connecting cables
Connector overview The drawing below shows the connectors on the THRANE 6194 and the SD card slot for inserting an SD memory card (future use). X5 and X6 are standard connectors for RS-232 (9-pin D-sub) and Ethernet (RJ-45), all other connectors are spring-loaded terminals. ote
X3 and X13 are for future use.
SD card slot (future use)
16
Connector overview
Power control (X1) By default, when the system is powered on, the THRANE 6194 and the connected Mini-C Terminal are always on. If you want to change this behaviour, you must configure the X1 connector using a software command (Constant_On 0). For details see Setting up software controlled power management on page 39. o tant
If you have configured X1 with the command Constant_On 0, you cannot switch on the system until you connect pin 1 and 2 in X1 with a switch.
Remote on/standby When X1 is configured for power management, Pin 1 and 2 in the connector X1 can be used for switching between on and standby on the THRANE 6194 and the Mini-C Terminal. Connect a switch between the two pins if you want to be able to set the THRANE 6194 and the Mini-C Terminal in standby mode independently of the rest of the system. •
Open contact: The THRANE 6194 and the Mini-C Terminal are in standby mode.
•
Closed contact: The THRANE 6194 and the Mini-C Terminal are always on.
Pin 3 and 4 are for future use.
Power management (only SAILOR 6140 and SAILOR 6150) ote
Note that software controlled power saving functions are not available in GMDSS, SSA nor LRIT systems.
When X1 is enabled and the switch is open (standby), you can control the power management with software. See Setting up software controlled power management on page 39.
Power control (X1)
17
Connecting cables
3333
Chapter 3: Connecting cables
Chapter 3: Connecting cables
CAN interface (X2) The THRANE 6194 has one CAN interface (spring-loaded terminals) used for communicating with connected equipment, such as a Message Terminal and/or a mini-C GMDSS terminal. The CAN interface is located in the bottom left corner of the THRANE 6194 as shown below. o tant
te e
Do not connect the shield of the CAN cable to the chassis of the THRANE 6194, or to any other ship ground connection on the THRANE 6194. For safety reasons the CAN shield must only be connected to ship ground at the power supply.
nat on
nte a e
To connect the CAN interface, insert the wires as shown in the drawing above. Use the tool supplied with the THRANE 6194 to open the spring-loaded terminals.
Power input There are 3 different options for the power input: •
The THRANE 6194 can be powered through the CAN bus (extended range: 10.5-32 V DC). ote
18
If your power source is supplying more than 15 V, the system is not protected against incorrect wiring.
CAN interface (X2)
3333
Chapter 3: Connecting cables
•
In systems where CAN power is not available, you can connect your power supply to pin3 PWR+ and pin 4 PWR- shown in the drawing above, if the power supply is within the limits stated in General specifications on page 51.
•
You can connect a battery directly to PWR- and PWR+ on the THRANE 6194.
If your power source is a battery, you must configure an under-voltage protection for the battery. The battery may be damaged if the correct under-voltage protection is not applied! For details, see the next section, Under-voltage protection.
Connecting cables
Caution!
Under-voltage protection If the power source is a battery, you must configure the THRANE 6194 to the correct under-voltage protection as follows: 1. Connect a computer to the THRANE 6194 and start a terminal program as described in Using commands on page 37. 2. At the tt6194:/$ prompt, type in the relevant command, depending on the source voltage: •
Disable UVP: Type avr_uvp 0
•
24 V: Type avr_uvp 1
•
12 V: Type avr_uvp 2
•
CAN voltage: type avr_uvp 3
120 : termination for CAN interface A double jumper, J1 in the drawing above, connects a 120 : termination for the CAN interface. If you have terminated the CAN connection elsewhere and want to remove the termination in the THRANE 6194, you must remove the
CAN interface (X2)
19
Chapter 3: Connecting cables
jumper. To access the jumper you must first remove the cover by unscrewing the screws holding the cover. Caution!
20
Before removing the cover enclosing the electronic circuits, first make sure you are wearing a wrist strap connected to the work place in to avoid ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge).
CAN interface (X2)
3333
Chapter 3: Connecting cables
RS-232 interface (X5) Overview
ote
The default setup for the RS-232 interface is 115200 bps 8N1. You must use this setting the first time you connect.
Pin-out The figure and table below show the connector outline and pin assignments. Pin number
Pin function
1
Not Connected
2
RxD (Receive Data) Input
3
TxD (Transmit Data) output
4
Not Connected
5
GND
6
Not Connected
7
Not Connected
8
Not Connected
9
Not Connected
RS-232 interface (X5)
D-Sub, 9 pin male
21
Connecting cables
There is one RS-232 connector, 9-pin D-Sub, on the THRANE 6194. The RS-232 (DTE) interface can be used for entering commands or running scripts on the THRANE 6194.
Chapter 3: Connecting cables
LAN interface (X6) Overview There is one Ethernet (10/100 MB) connector on the THRANE 6194. The Ethernet interface can be used to connect a computer and use the easyMail program supplied on CD with the THRANE 6194 or a terminal program to access the THRANE 6194 or the connected SAILOR 3027. ote
To access the THRANE 6194 through the LAN interface you must know the IP address of the THRANE 6194. The Thrane & Thrane SNMP upload application lists all connected units with their IP addresses. For details, see Updating software on page 46. You may also define a temporary IP address for the THRANE 6194. See THRANE 6194 Software Interface Reference Manual [2].
Pin-out The figure and table below show the connector outline and pin assignments. Pin number
22
Pin function
1
Rx+
2
Rx-
3
Tx+
4
Not connected
5
Not connected
6
Tx-
7
Not connected
8
Not connected
LAN interface (X6)
RJ-45 female
SSA and Alarm Panel (X7 to X14) Some of the spring-loaded terminals can have different functions, depending on the system configuration.
3333
Chapter 3: Connecting cables
The general purpose inputs and outputs can be used for various applications, e.g. temperature sensors, trawl indicators, flow meters/level sensors or ignition ON indication. ote
For specifications of the general purpose inputs/outputs, see Specifications for I/O pins on page 52.
The following sections describe some of the possible configurations.
GMDSS or SSA systems (SAILOR 6110 or SAILOR 6120) You can use the THRANE 6194 for connecting alarm and test buttons for use in SSA systems. When a SAILOR 3027C or SAILOR 3027SSA terminal is connected, X7 to X14 are automatically configured as shown below. X13 is not used. o tant
If you are not using all terminal blocks assigned for SSA alarm buttons (X7 to X12), make sure pin 1 and 2 are shorted in the terminal blocks that are not used. This only applies to the alarm buttons X7 to X12, not to the test button X14.
SSA and Alarm Panel (X7 to X14)
23
Connecting cables
If only one satellite terminal is connected, the function of the I/O pins are automatically configured to match the connected type of satellite terminal. Depending on the connected terminal, some of the I/O pins are preconfigured, and some of the I/O pins are configurable.
Chapter 3: Connecting cables
The THRANE 6194 can connect up to 6 alarm buttons and 1 test button. The pin-out is shown below.
The following spring-loaded terminals are used for the buttons: •
SSA Alarm buttons: X7, X8, X9, X10, X11 and X12.
•
SSA Test button: X14. ote
Before inserting the wires into the terminals, make sure there is no jumper between pin 1 and 2 (Output and Input).
Connect the buttons as shown below:
Terminal Block X7-X12
PIN 1 Out PIN 2 In
Brown
1
3
Green
SSA Button 1-6
NC NO
PIN 3 GND PIN 4 3,3V
4
2
Yellow
Terminal Block X14
White
PIN 1 Out PIN 2 In
Green
PIN 3 GND
Yellow
1
PIN 4 3,3V Brown
24
SSA and Alarm Panel (X7 to X14)
a SSA Test Button
NO
2
b
3333
Chapter 3: Connecting cables
Note that there may also be a white wire in the cables for the SSA Alarm buttons. Do not connect the white wire from the red SSA alarm buttons - only from the Test button.
Non-SOLAS Distress systems (SAILOR 6150)
Connecting cables
The multi-purpose interface on the THRANE 6194 can also connect to NonSOLAS Alarm Panels e.g. in Non-SOLAS Distress installations. When a SAILOR 3027D is connected, X8, X10, X12 and X14 are automatically configured as shown below. X13 is not used.
Each Non-SOLAS Alarm Panel uses two connector blocks as shown in the drawing above. Note that X10 pin 1 is shared by the two Non-SOLAS Alarm Panels. The following spring-loaded terminals are used: •
Non-SOLAS Alarm Panels: X8, X10 and X12.
•
Buzzer/Mute button: X14
SSA and Alarm Panel (X7 to X14)
25
Chapter 3: Connecting cables
Non-SOLAS Alarm Panel Connect the Non-SOLAS Alarm Panel(s) as shown below: 6$,/25($ODUP3DQHO 7HUPLQDO %ORFN ;DQG ;
7HUPLQDO %ORFN ;
3,12XW 3,1,1 3,1*1' 3,19
3,12XW 3,1,Q
*UHHQ %URZQ
1& 1&
:KLWH 300 gross tonnage and mobile offshore drilling units. These ships/units must automatically report their position to their Flag
56
BBBB
Glossary
Administration at least 4 times a day. Other contracting governments may request information about vessels in which they have a legitimate interest under the regulation.
M Maritime Rescue Co-ordination Centre
Glossary
MRCC
N NMEA
National Marine Electronics Association (standard). A combined electrical and data specification for communication between marine electronic devices such as echo sounder, sonars, anemometer (wind speed and direction), gyrocompass, autopilot, GPS receivers and many other types of instruments. It has been defined by, and is controlled by, the U.S.-based National Marine Electronics Association.
S SMS
Short Message Service
SOLAS
(International Convention for the) Safety Of Life At Sea. Generally regarded as the most important of all international treaties concerning the safety of merchant ships.
SPST
Single-Pole Single-Toggle
SSA
Ship Security Alert. A system provided to a vessel for the purpose of transmitting a security alert to the shore (not to other vessel!) to indicate to a competent authority that the security of the ship is under threat or has been compromised.
57
Glossary
58
Index
alarm buttons, SSA configuring, 38 connecting, 24 connectors for, 23 installing, 9 using, 41 alarm panel, Non-SOLAS connecting, 26 using, 43
B Buzzer and Mute button installing, 26
C cable requirements, 28 cables securing, 6 CAN 120 Ohm termination, 19 cable requirements, 28 connector, 18 configuration method, 37 power management, 39 SSA buttons, 38 THRANE 6194, 38
C
connectors CAN, 18 for Non-SOLAS Alarm Panels, 25 for SSA buttons, 23 LAN, 22 multi-purpose IO, 23 overview, 16 power management, 17 RS-232, 21 covert alert buttons configuring, 38 connecting, 24 connectors for, 23 installing, 9 using, 41
Index
A
CCCC
Index
D dimensions, 8, 52 document number this manual, i
E Ethernet connector, 22
G grounding the THRANE 6194, 27
I indicators, function, 32 initial inspection, 4 installation, 5 IO connectors, 23
59
Index
L
RS-232 connector, 21
LAN connector, 22 light indicators, function, 32
S
M manual document number, i modes for power management, 39 mounting the THRANE 6194, 6
N Non-SOLAS Alarm Panel connecting, 26 using, 43
O options installing, 12 outline drawing, 8
P power connecting, 18 power management configuring, 39
R remote standby connector function, 17 repacking for shipment, 49 returning units, 49
60
safety summary, iii software update, 46 specifications, 51 SSA buttons configuring, 38 connecting, 24 connectors for, 23 installing, 9 using, 41 status indicators, 32
U unpacking, 4 updating software, 46
W warranty, 49
98-131593-B
[email protected]
•
thrane.com
This page left intentionally blank
Index divider: Section 4 N
Document Type:
Document name:
SYSTEM USER MANUAL
BRI – D54001 – 01IU
Project Title:
Date First Issue:
Author:
Revision:
14.09.2011
EKI
A
Sailor 6222 GMDSS VHF
Enclosed documents from sub-supplier & revision history: Revision: (A,B,C,……..)
Description / Enclosed documents:
Date: (dd.mm.yyyy)
Sign.:
A
Sailor_6222_VHF DSC_User manual 98-131184 Rev-B
14.09.2011
EKI
Component picture:
Ulstein Power & Control AS
This document and its content is the property of ULSTEIN. Nonpublic information contained herein shall be treated as Confidential Information. No use, copying, citation or publication of this document or its content is permitted without prior written consent from ULSTEIN. Any conflicts arising from unauthorized use shall be governed by the laws of Norway.
File Name:
Page:
BRI-D54001-01IU (A) System User Manual.doc
Page 1 of 1
USER MANUAL
SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC
SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC User manual
Document number: 98-131184-B Release date: May 6, 2011
Disclaimer Any responsibility or liability for loss or damage in connection with the use of this product and the accompanying documentation is disclaimed by Thrane & Thrane. The information in this manual is provided for information purposes only, is subject to change without notice and may contain errors or inaccuracies. Manuals issued by Thrane & Thrane are periodically revised and updated. Anyone relying on this information should acquire the most current version e.g. from http://www.thrane.com or from the distributor. Thrane & Thrane is not responsible for the content or accuracy of any translations or reproductions, in whole or in part, of this manual from any other source.
Copyright © 2011 Thrane & Thrane A/S. All rights reserved.
Trademark Acknowledgements •
Thrane & Thrane is a registered trademark of Thrane & Thrane A/S in the European Union and the United States.
•
SAILOR is a registered trademarks of Thrane & Thrane A/S.
•
Other product and company names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners.
GPL notification The software included in this product contains copyrighted software that is licensed under the GPL/LGPL. The verbatim licenses can be found online at: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0.html http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html You may obtain the complete corresponding source code from us for a period of three years after our last shipment of this product, which will be no earlier than December 31, 2015, by sending a money order or check for DKK 50 to: SW Technology/GPL Compliance, Thrane & Thrane A/S, Lundtoftegaardsvej 93D 2800 Lyngby DENMARK Please write "source for product SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC" in the memo line of your payment.
You may also find a copy of the source at http://www.thrane.com/foss. This offer is valid to anyone in receipt of this information.
Warranties Any attempt to install or execute software not supplied by Thrane & Thrane on this device will result in the warranty being void. Any attempt to modify the software on this device in a way not specified by Thrane & Thrane will result in the warranty being void.
Safety warning The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment. Thrane & Thrane assumes no liability for the customer's failure to comply with these requirements.
Ground the equipment To minimise shock hazard, the SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC unit must be connected to an electrical ground and the cable instructions must be followed.
RF exposure hazards and instructions Your Thrane & Thrane radio set generates electromagnetic RF (radio frequency) energy when transmitting. To ensure that you and those around you are not exposed to excessive amounts of energy and thus to avoid health hazards from excessive exposure to RF energy, all persons must be at least 3ft (0.9 m) away from the antenna when the radio is transmitting.
Warranty limitation IMPORTANT - The radio is a sealed waterproof unit (classified IPX8). To create and maintain its waterproof integrity it was assembled in a controlled environment using special equipment. The radio is not a user maintainable unit, and under no circumstances should the unit be opened except by authorized personnel. Unauthorized opening of the unit will invalidate the warranty.
Installation and service Installation and general service must be done by skilled service personnel.
Compass safe distance Minimum safety distance: 0.85 m from the SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC.
iv
1
Emergency calls
Lif ov er iftt CCov over Press RED Button until beep sounds continuously (more than 3 seconds) Press Use the HAND HANDSSET for voice calling
MAYDAY-M AYDAY-M AYDAY -MA -MA This is
NA ME-NA ME-NA ME NAME-NA ME-NAME-NA ME-NAME CAL ALLLSIGN
OWN ID SHIP‘s NAME: CALLSIGN:
or other IDENTIFICATION
M MSI
MMSI:
(If the initial alert is sent by DSC)
MAYDAY NA ME of the VESSEL in distress NAME CAL AT ION ALLLSIGN or other IDEN IDENTT IFIC IFICA M MS I (If the initial alert is sent by DSC)
POSIT ION ITION it ude and longit ude given as lat atit itude longitude or If latitude and longitude are not known or if time is insufficient, in relation to a known geographical location NA TURE of distress NATURE E required ANCE Kind of ASSISTANC OR MAT ION Any other useful INF INFOR ORM
DI OM MUNIC AT ION DISSTRE TRESSS and CCOM OMM UNICA FREQUENCIE FREQUENCIESS DSC Radi ot elephon NBDP adiot otelephon elephonyy ____________________________________ VHF Channel 70 Channel 16 ----MF 2187.5 kHz 2182.0 kHz 2174.5 kHz HF4 4207.5 kHz 4125.0 kHz 4177.5 kHz HF6 6312.0 kHz 6215.0 kHz 6268.0 kHz HF8 8414.5 kHz 8291.0 kHz 8376.5 kHz HF12 12577.0 kHz 12290.0 kHz 12520.0 kHz HF16 16804.5 kHz 16420.0 kHz 16695.0 kHz ____________________________________ Remember to use the correct HF-procedures Don‘t forget your EPIRB is the secondary means of alerting 99-132140
v
Preface
2
Radio for occupational use The SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC fulfils the requirements of the Marine Equipment Directive 96/98/EC and the amending Directive 2002/75/EC and is intended for use in maritime environment. SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC is designed for occupational use only and must be operated by licensed personnel only. SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC is not intended for use in an uncontrolled environment by general public. SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC is designed for installation by a skilled service person.
vi
Training information
3
The SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC is designed for occupational use only and is also classified as such. It must be operated by licensed personnel only. It must only be used in the course of employment by individuals aware of both the hazards as well as the way to minimize those hazards The radio is thus NOT intended for use in an uncontrolled environment by general public. The SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC has been tested and complies with the FCC RF exposure limits for Occupational Use Only. The radio also complies with the following guidelines and standards regarding RF energy and electromagnetic energy levels including the recommended levels for human exposure: •
FCC OET Bulletin 65 Supplement C, evaluating compliance with FCC guidelines for human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic fields.
•
American National Standards Institute (C95.1) IEEE standard for safety levels with respect to human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz
•
American National Standards Institute (C95.3) IEEE recommended practice for the measurement of potentially hazardous electromagnetic fields - RF and microwaves. Below the RF exposure hazards and instructions in safe operation of the radio within the FCC RF exposure limits established for it are described.
Warning Your Thrane & Thrane radio set generates electromagnetic RF (radio frequency) energy when it is transmitting. To ensure that you and those around you are not exposed to excessive amounts of that energy (beyond FCC allowable limits for occupational use) and thus to avoid health hazards from excessive exposure to RF energy, FCC OET bulletin 65 establishes an Maximum Permissible Exposure (MPE) radius of 3 ft. (0.9m) for the maximum power of your radio (25W selected) with an half wave omni-directional
vii
antenna having a maximum gain of 3 dB (5.2dBi). This means all persons must be at least 3 ft. (0.9m) away from the antenna when the radio is transmitting.
Installation 1. An omni-directional antenna with a maximum power gain of 5.2 dBi must be mounted at least 9.6 ft. (2.9m) above the highest deck where people may be staying during radio transmissions. The distance is to be measured vertically from the lowest point of the antenna. This provides the minimum separation distance which is in compliance with RF exposure requirements and is based on the MPE radius of 3 ft. (0,9m) plus the 6.6 ft. (2m) height of an adult. 2. On vessels that cannot fulfil requirements in item 1, the antenna must be mounted so that its lowest point is at least 3 ft. (0.9m) vertically above the heads of people on deck and all persons must be outside the 3 ft. (0.9m) MPE radius during radio transmission. •
Always mount the antenna at least 3ft (0.9m) from possible human access.
•
Never touch the antenna when transmitting
•
Use only authorized T&T accessories.
3. If the antenna has to be placed in public areas or near people with no awareness of the radio transmission, the antenna must be placed at a distance not less than 6 ft. (1.8m) from possible human access. Failure to observe any of these warnings may cause you or other people to exceed FCC RF exposure limits or create other dangerous conditions.
viii
Manual overview This manual has the following chapters and appendices:
Important
•
Introduction contains a description of the VHF radio.
•
Operation explains how to make and receive voice and DSC calls over VHF, including how to use and set-up scanning, watch and replay.
•
Service & maintenance contains support information including lists of accessories and a troubleshooting guide.
•
Appendix with Technical specifications and Maritime channels.
All installation information and instructions are not covered in this manual. Please download the SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC Installation manual (98-132904) at http://extranet.thrane.com/. In the installation manual you can read how to mount the VHF radio and how to connect accessories and external equipment, including detailed system configuration examples with cable specifications.
Related documents Title and description
Document number
SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC, Installation guide
98-132281
SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC Installation manual (download only)
98-132904
SAILOR 6101 and 6103 Alarm Panel, Installation and user manual
98-130981
Emergency call sheet
98-132369
ix
x
Table of Contents Chapter 1
Introduction VHF radio with DSC Class A ................................................ 1 Accessories available .........................................................4
Chapter 2
Operation Overview ............................................................................9 General use and navigation ............................................. 10 VHF radio communication .................................................15 Watch ................................................................................19 Scan ..................................................................................19 DSC calls ..........................................................................20 Handling multiple calls — DSC and voice .......................... 33 Phone book ...................................................................... 34 Replay function ................................................................ 37 Setup ...............................................................................38
Chapter 3
Service & maintenance Contact for support ........................................................... 47 Maintenance .................................................................... 47 Troubleshooting guide .....................................................49 Warranty and returning units for repair ...........................54
App. A
Technical specifications Transceiver unit SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC ............................. 57 General DSC specifications ...............................................60
xi
Table of Contents
NMEA data rates and formats .......................................... 60 SAILOR 6090 Power Converter 24—12 V ............................. 61
App. B
Maritime channels International channels (INT) .............................................63 US channels .....................................................................64 CA channels .....................................................................65 BI channels ......................................................................66
Glossary
.........................................................................................67
Index
........................................................................................ 69
xii
11111
Chapter 1 1
Introduction
Introduction VHF radio with DSC Class A SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC, your new VHF radio with full DSC functionality, is approved to MED, FCC and Industry Canada and is waterproof to the IPx8 and IPx6 standard. As part of the required safety equipment, use the SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC in an emergency situation. However the best way to guarantee functionality in an emergency situation, is to use the radio in daily communication on board.
The VHF radio is a simplex/semi duplex VHF radio. It is designed with an easyto-use menu-driven setup. You use the soft-keys and the keypad to enter the desired functions, you browse and select a setting using the right selection knob. The large display can be customized for optimum readability and visibility both day and night with several color themes. The VHF radio can replay the last 240 s of received voice messages. This is a useful feature to minimize misunderstandings and to record messages when the radio is unattended. With SAILOR connection boxes the VHF radio connects easily to external equipment like additional handsets, water proof hand microphones, control speaker microphone, alarm panel or external speaker. The Ethernet interface enables the VHF radio to be connected to ThraneLINK for remote control and service updates. For a list of accessories available for the VHF radio see Accessories available on page 4 and check with your nearest distributor.
1
Chapter 1: Introduction
Controls on the front plate 2
1
4
3
5 6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1. Loudspeaker. 2. Four soft keys with function title in the display. 3. Large display. 4. Keys 0 to 9 to enter numbers or text. 5. DW button to toggle the watch function (dual or triple). 6. 16/C quick selection key for channel 16 and the programmed call channel. 7. Connector for Handset or Handmicrophone. 8. Distress button for sending a Distress alert. 9. Squelch control to mute background noise. 10. Volume knob with key-press function for volume control and power on/off. 11. Selector and dim knob with key-press function for general operation, display color selection and dimming. 12. 1W button to toggle between high and low power. 13. Replay button to play back up to 240 s voice message.
2
VHF radio with DSC Class A
11111
Chapter 1: Introduction
The picture shows the display after start-up. The display holds various fields of information, depending on the currently selected function. 1. Functions you can select with the soft keys. If there are more than 4 functions in the list press the soft key MORE to display further functions.
1 CALL ALERT
2
Introduction
SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC display 3 LO
16
DISTRESS/CALL
DROBOS MMSI:123456789 LAT: N 12°34.5678 MORE LON:E 123°45.6789
4 INT RX
(GPS) 22:07
5 6 7
2. Current working channel. 3. System property icons with information relevant for the currently selected functions. 4. Channel properties next to the currently selected VHF channel (if any). 5. Service line containing current temporary information relevant for the current channel or function. 6. Current state: RX or TX 7. DSC window with DSC information (MMSI number, position information and UTC time of position and origin), or specific information relevant to other functions, e.g. Replay, etc.). For a detailed description of the information shown for each of the functions available see the chapter Operation on page 9.
VHF radio with DSC Class A
3
Chapter 1: Introduction
Accessories available Accessory
4
Description
SAILOR 6201 Handset with cradle (additional)
One SAILOR 6201 Handset with cradle is included in the delivery of the SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC. You can connect another 2 SAILOR 6201 Handsets.
SAILOR 6203 Handset with cradle
SAILOR 6203 Handset with cradle, waterproof to IPx6.
SAILOR 6202 Hand Microphone
You can use the SAILOR 6202 (waterproof to IPx6 and IPx8) Hand Microphone instead of the handset.
SAILOR 6204 Control Speaker Microphone
With the SAILOR 6204 Control Speaker Microphone you can control the VHF functions of the SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC.
SAILOR 6207 Connection Box for parallel handsets
The SAILOR 6207 Connection Box including Connection Cable 406209941 is used for easy installation of several SAILOR 6201/03 Handsets
Accessories available
SAILOR 6208 Control Unit Connection Box
Connection cables
Description Introduction
Accessory
11111
Chapter 1: Introduction
The SAILOR 6208 Connection Box including Connection Cable 406208941 is used for easy installation of external equipment and accessories: •
Max. 4 SAILOR 6204 Control Speaker Microphones
•
VDR
•
SAILOR 6270 External loudspeaker
•
Alarm panels and GPS input
5m connection cable for bulkhead mount: Use this cable in installations where the SAILOR 6201 or 6203 Handset is not connected directly to the SAILOR 6222 VHF, but located in a different position. 5m Connection cable, 1x10 pole: Use this cable in installations when connecting external equipment to the SAILOR 6222 VHF. This cable is included in the SAILOR 6207 Connection Box for parallel handsets. 5 m Connection cable for SAILOR 6204 Control Speaker Microphone, 1x12 pole (part number: 406204-940)
SAILOR 6270 External loudspeaker
If you need an additional external loudspeaker you can connect a SAILOR 6270 Loudspeaker. It provides 6 W output power.
SAILOR 6103 Multi Alarm Panel
With the SAILOR 6103 Multi Alarm Panel you can activate GMDSS Distress Alarms. The Multi Alarm Panel can be connected to the SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC via the Ethernet interface (LAN connector, ThraneLINK).
Accessories available
5
Chapter 1: Introduction
6
Accessory
Description
SAILOR 6197 Ethernet Switch
The SAILOR 6197 Ethernet Switch is used in installations with SAILOR 6103 GMDSS Alarm Panels and in installations with ThraneLINK. The Ethernet switch has 5 ports.
SAILOR 6090 Power Converter 24 V to 12 V DC
The SAILOR 6090 Power Converter is used to provide 12 V DC for the SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC from a 24 V DC power source.
Accessories available
11111
Chapter 1: Introduction
Introduction
System configuration — example The SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC can be customized to suit your installation. The following illustration is one example of a system. For further configuration examples see the installation manual, Appendix B, System configurations.
RX/DSC Aerial
RX/TX Aerial
SAILOR 6201/03 Handset
SAILOR 6204 Control Speaker Microphone (without DSC)
CTRL. Port
AUX. Port
SAILOR N163S Power Supply
ACC. Port
6222 VHF DSC
SAILOR 6202 Handmicrophone
Max 4 SAILOR 6204
SAILOR 6201/03 Handset Option
SAILOR 6201/03 Handset Option
SAILOR 6208 Connection Box
SAILOR 6090 Power Converter SAILOR 6207 Connection Box for Parallel Handsets
12V Battery
GPS, AIS, etc. (NMEA)
24V DC 12V DC
Power
Cable 406209-941
Cable 406209-940
110/220V AC 24V DC
LAN ETHERNET port Remote Control + Service
SAILOR 6103 Multi Alarm Panel
SAILOR 6208 Connection Box
Cable 406209-940
External Speaker (8 ohm)
Cable 406208-941 VDR AUX DSC Call Alarm
99-128194-J
GPS
Accessories available
7
Chapter 1: Introduction
8
Accessories available
22222
Chapter 2
Note
2
Before using the VHF radio make sure that the VHF and DSC antennas, power cable and other external equipment are connected properly. For installation instructions see the SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC Installation manual (download only).
Overview In this chapter you find detailed instructions and guidelines for: •
General use and navigation
•
VHF radio communication
•
Watch
•
Scan
•
DSC calls
•
Handling multiple calls — DSC and voice
•
Phone book
•
Replay function
•
Setup
9
Operation
Operation
Chapter 2: Operation
General use and navigation Power on and volume in handset and speaker The VHF radio has a dual-function on/off knob for power on/off and volume control. To power on the VHF radio press the on/off knob. To power off the VHF radio, press and hold the on/off knob and follow the instructions in the display. To adjust the speaker volume, turn the volume knob (clockwise = louder, counter clockwise = softer, until muted). When muted, is shown in the display. To adjust the volume of the handset earpiece see Radio setup on page 39.
Working channel and changing settings Use the selector knob to browse and select: •
To browse and select settings, turn the selector knob and press for accept.
•
To select a working channel use the selector knob or enter the channel number using the keypad. You can change channels whenever the channel designator is displayed.
Note
10
A single, short press on the 16/C key always brings you to channel 16, the international calling and distress channel, no matter what state the radio is in.
General use and navigation
The VHF radio can be equipped with the following speaker devices: •
SAILOR 6201/6203 Handset with cradle and PTT (Push To Talk) button.
•
SAILOR 6202 Handmicrophone with PTT button.
•
SAILOR 6204 Control Speaker Microphone with PTT button.
Operation
Speaker devices
22222
Chapter 2: Operation
See Radio setup on page 39 for controlling the connected speaker devices.
DSC and MMSI number The MMSI is a unique, 9-digit identifier assigned to your ship. When the VHF radio is powered on for the first time, the vessel’s MMSI number is programmed in the radio. This is typically done during installation of the radio and described in the installation manual. Important
The MMSI number must be programmed into the VHF radio to use any DSC functionality. The radio will prompt for the MMSI number at each power-up until the MMSI has been entered. You can use the radio in normal VHF mode. Caution!
Without a programmed MMSI number the Distress button will not work!
General use and navigation
11
Chapter 2: Operation
Position and MMSI number The position and MMSI number for the SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC radio is always shown in the DSC window (the lower half of the radio’s display) in stand-by mode. The display shows also the current (latest) position (if a GPS is connected), the UTC and position type and GPS Status.
CALL ALERT
10
INTERSHIP/PORT
DROBOS MMSI:123456789 LAT: N 12°34.5678 MORE LON:E 123°45.6789
INT (GPS) 22:07
Enter position manually (no GPS) If you need to enter the vessel’s position and UTC of position manually, do as follows: 1. Press the soft key SETUP. If it is not in the display, press the soft key MORE until SETUP appears. 2. Press the arrow soft key
or
to advance to DSC SETUP.
3. Press the selector knob to select Position & MMSI. 4. Enter the current position and UTC time: •
Latitude (LAT),
•
Longitude (LON)
•
UTC time (POS UTC)
Turn and press the selector knob to select the value you want to change. Then use the keypad or press and turn the selector knob to enter the current values for position and UTC time. You can clear all position data by pressing CLEAR. 5. Having entered the UTC time, the soft key SAVE appears. Press SAVE and then EXIT to return to normal operation. The display shows Man in the lower right corner. 6. After you have entered a value manually or overruled the GPS input, a soft key UseGPS appears in the display if the GPS is available. Press this soft key if you decide to use the data from the connected GPS.
12
General use and navigation
If the GPS was present and then disappears a warning appears in the display after 10 minutes, then you can enter the position and UTC time manually as described above.
22222
Chapter 2: Operation
A number of functions of the SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC are accessed and set using the four soft keys to the left of the display. The current function of a soft key is shown in the display next to the soft key. Use the soft key MORE to display further soft key functions.
CALL ALERT
16
DISTRESS/CALL
DROBOS MMSI:123456789 LAT: N 12°34.5678 MORE LON:E 123°45.6789
Operation
Soft-key functions
INT (GPS) 22:07
The following soft-key functions are available from top-level standby: Soft key
Function
CALL
To make DSC non-distress calls
ALERT
To make a distress call with assigned category
DROBOS
Make a distress relay call on behalf of someone else
SCAN
Scanning menu with start, stop and tag function
PHBOOK
Phone book
LOCAL
Local mode, 10 dB attenuation
SETUP
Setup pages for Radio setup, Channel setup, Power Supply, DSC setup, DSC call logs, System setup and Controller setup.
General use and navigation
13
Chapter 2: Operation
Changing the display light, night view Red text on black background is available for optimal night vision. To dim the display backlight, e.g. to give comfortable night vision, press, hold and turn the selector knob anti-clockwise. The display shows a brightness bar. At the brightness value 45 the display changes to night view with red text on black background. To return to day vision press, hold and turn CALL the selector knob clockwise until the display changes and it reaches the desired brightness. ALERT
16
INT The radio has two colour themes: Black text on DISTRESS/CALL a white background (default) or white text on DROBOS MMSI:123456789 black background. To change the color theme LAT: N 12°34.5678 (GPS) MORE LON:E 123°45.6789 22:07 see System setup on page 44. Alternative colour theme
Adjusting the squelch level With the Squelch control you can manually adjust and suppress noise in order to optimize the quality of the received radio communication. When hearing noise or an unwanted signal, turn the squelch button clockwise until the speaker is muted.
14
General use and navigation
22222
Chapter 2: Operation
VHF radio communication Basic VHF operation Note
Operation
You can make VHF calls using the Handset or another speaker device. A single, short press on the 16/C key always brings you to channel 16, the international calling and distress channel, no matter what state the radio is in.
Quick guide to radio telephone calls 1. Press the PTT button on the speaker device. When the TX indicator lights up in the display, the transmission is active.
TX RX
2. To enable reception of a radio signal release the PTT button. Note
Press PTT only when you are talking. Always say “Over.” just before releasing the PTT button. One transmission is limited to 5 minutes duration.
Receiving a radio telephone call on channel 16 When you hear your call name in the loudspeaker, proceed as follows:
CALL ALERT
16
1. The symbol RX shows that the radio is receiving on the channel displayed.
DROBOS
2. Lift the Handset or take another speaker device.
MMSI:123456789 LAT: N 12°34.5678 MORE LON:E 123°45.6789
DISTRESS/CALL
INT (GPS) 22:07
3. Press the PTT button. The symbol TX shows that the radio is transmitting on the channel displayed. 4. Repeat the name of the station calling you and say: “This is [your ship’s name]”.
VHF radio communication
15
Chapter 2: Operation
5. Suggest a working channel other than 16 by saying: “Channel [suggested channel number]”. 6. Say: “Over.” and release the PTT button to allow the caller to confirm the suggested new channel. 7. Switch to the new channel using the keypad or by turning the selector knob to the agreed channel and begin your conversation. Press PTT only when you are talking.
Making a radio telephone call on channel 16 To make a radio telephone call, proceed as follows:
CALL ALERT
1. Select channel 16.
16
DISTRESS/CALL
2. Lift the Handset or take another speaker device.
DROBOS MMSI:123456789 LAT: N 12°34.5678 MORE LON:E 123°45.6789
INT (GPS) 22:07
3. Press the PTT button. The symbol TX shows that the VHF radio is transmitting on the working channel displayed. 4. Say the name of the station you are calling three times. 5. Say: “This is [your ship’s name]”. 6. Say: “Over.” and release the PTT button to listen. The symbol RX shows that the radio is receiving on the working channel displayed 7. When answered, agree upon a working channel other than 16. 8. Switch to the new channel by entering the channel number to the agreed channel and begin your conversation.
VHF channels You can change channels whenever the channel designator is displayed. Enter the channel using the keypad or turn the selector knob to browse through all channels that are available in the selected channel table. Only valid channel numbers are accepted. When browsing channels they appear in the display in the following order:
16
VHF radio communication
•
Primary channels
•
Weather channels (if any)
•
Private channels (if any)
22222
Chapter 2: Operation
VHF channel table
Operation
With a long press on the 16/C key the radio changes to channel 16 for the channel tables INT and BI, and to channel 9 for the channel tables US and CA. Description
Primary channels (no prefix)
For details see Maritime channels on page 63. For instructions how to change a channel table see Channel setup on page 41.
Weather (WX)
Weather channels have the prefix W. (For US and CA channels only.)
Private (PRIV)
Up to 100 user-defined private channels.
For more information on how to setup channels setup see Channel setup on page 41. Contact your local dealer if you are interested in having private channels.
Channel information always available in the display For some functions and for setup pages, the channel and radio information has moved to the bottom section of the display. You can change channels whenever the channel designator is displayed.
EXIT
RADIO SETUP Scan Hang Time: OFF Scan Resume: 6 Watch Mode: DUAL Priority Scan: ON Atis Code:
10
The channel number displayed in this section always reflects the communication channel on (Example: Radio setup) which the radio is tuned into for communication. If PTT is pressed the radio transmits on the displayed channel. If a signal is received, it is received on the displayed channel.
VHF radio communication
17
Chapter 2: Operation
Engagement status The radio is engaged when you press PTT. This is indicated with the tab in the display. Engangement protects the communication from being interrupted other activities.
Reduced transmission power LO Press the key 1W to toggle the transmit power between low (1 W, LO is displayed) and high (25 W).
US channels: Local mode, 10 dB attenuation Press the soft key LOCAL to add 10 dB attenuation. If LOCAL is not in the display, press the soft key MORE until LOCAL appears in the display. Note
Local mode is automatically exited when using channel 16. If you want to use attenuation on channel 16 or a call channel, you must set it manually each time.
US channels: Overriding LOW power for channels 13 and 67 When running in US mode you can override low power on the alternative call channels 13 and 67. Do as follows: 1. With the VHF radio set to 13 and 67, press PTT on the speaking device. 2. Press the soft key OVRIDE to transmit with full power. When you release the PTT button, the transmission power goes back to low.
18
VHF radio communication
Watch
The SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC radio Dual watch Triple watch has a watch function with dual or triple watch. In dual watch, the working channel and channel 16 are watched. In triple watch the working channel, channel 16 and the programmed call channel are watched. You Working channel Working channel can select the working channel + channel 16 + channel 16 in any watch mode by turning + call channel the selector knob. If there is a signal in one of the watched channels, the display shows the channel in which the signal is received.
16
16
9
9
24
To start the watch function press the key DW. The radio enters the watch mode and the text WATCH with the channel numbers watched is shown below the current channel number. To stop the watch function press the key DW again or PTT on the speaking device.
VIEW
For instructions how to setup TRIPLE WATCH see Radio setup on page 39.
QUIT CALL
10
WATCH [16]
MMSI:123456789 LAT: N 12°34.5678 MORE LON:E 123°45.6789
INT (GPS) 22:07
Scan The radio has a scanning function for tagged voice channels. Any available voice channel, including weather and private channels, can be tagged and added to the scanning sequence. As default the radio scans with priority scanning of channel 16. If a signal is received while in any scanning mode, only channel 16 continues to be watched. If there is a signal in one of the scanned channels, the display shows the channel in which the signal is received. If PTT is pressed while scanning, the
Watch
19
Operation
22222
Chapter 2: Operation
Chapter 2: Operation
scanning stops, the radio is tuned into the displayed channel and transmission starts immediately on the displayed working channel. To start scanning press the soft key SCAN. The SCAN menu is shown. Press START to start scanning. To leave the SCAN menu, but not the scanning procedure, press EXIT. To stop scanning press SC STOP, QUIT if not in the SCAN menu, or press PTT on the speaking device. To tag a channel for scanning turn the selector knob until the wanted channel is in the display. Then press the soft key TAG. The display shows the channel number and the word TAG at the right side of the display.
EXIT START TAG
10
INT
INTERSHIP/PORT
MMSI: 123456789 LAT: N 12°34.5678 (GPS) MORE LON: E 123°45. 6789 22:07 EXIT SC STOP TAG
10
SCANNING[16]
INT
MMSI: 123456789 LAT: N 12°34. 5678 (GPS) MORE LON: E 123°45.6789 22:07
To remove a channel from the scanning sequence turn the selector knob until the tagged channel is displayed. Then press the soft key TAG to remove the tag. To see all tagged channels press the soft key FILTER and turn the selector knob. Press the soft key EXIT to leave the FILTER function.
For details how to set up the scanning function see Radio setup on page 39. Note
The displayed working channel is temporarily included in the scanning list (although no TAG icon is shown).
DSC calls In this section of the manual you find information on:
20
•
Sending, acknowledging and cancelling own distress
•
DROBOSE — Distress Relay on behalf of someone else
•
Receiving distress calls
•
DSC calls for communication
DSC calls
Sending, acknowledging and cancelling own distress
1. Lift the cover of the red distress button and press and hold the distress button for longer than 3 seconds. For short step-bystep instructions how to proceed when sending a distress message see Emergency calls on page v. When the distress signal is sent, CH70 and ANNUL Tx appear in the display. A two-seconds steady tone is heard. VIEW 2. The radio watches for a DSC acknowledgement transmission on channel 70.
PAUSE
16
Operation
To send a distress message
22222
Chapter 2: Operation
INT
!!! OWN DISTRESS !!! WAITING FOR REPLY ELAPSED TIME: 1:33 REPEAT IN: 2.15
3. To pause the automatic resend procedure press the soft key PAUSE. 4. To annul the distress message press the soft key ANNUL. See also To cancel own distress on page 23. 5. When a distress acknowledgement is received, a pop-up window is displayed. Start distress communication on channel 16 to inform about your distress situation. Note
If no distress acknowledgement is received within a period of 3,5 to 4,5 minutes, the distress message will automatically be retransmitted.
Having pressed the red distress button and sent the distress message, the following information is displayed: •
STATION: shows the radio’s MMSI number.
•
NAT: shows the nature of distress, see also ALERT: To send a distress message with specified nature.
•
LAT:, LON:, POS UTC: shows the distress position data as transmitted.
•
MODE: shows the communication mode.
•
Elapsed time after initiation of own distress.
DSC calls
21
Chapter 2: Operation
•
Time to next repeat of sending own distress.
If you sent a distress message, the VHF radio is automatically set to channel 16, the channel reserved for international distress, safety and calling.
ALERT: To send a distress message with specified nature When sending distress messages you can include the distress nature in the message. To include the distress nature in the distress message do as follows: 1. From top-level standby press the soft key EXIT ALERT. If it is not in the display, press the soft key MORE until ALERT appears. If the current position information is not correct, you can manually enter it by using the soft key POS.
DISTRESS CALL NAT: UNDESIGNATED LAT: 23°23.3234 N LON: 123°23.3234 W POS UTC: 12:34 PUSH DISTRESS
2. Press the selector knob, then turn it to select a natures of distress: FIRE, EXPLOSION FLOODING COLLISION GROUNDING LISTING (in danger of capsizing) SINKING DISABLED (and adrift) UNDESIGNATED ABANDONING (ship) PIRACY (armed robbery attack) MAN OVERBOARD 3. Press the selector knob to accept the selected nature of distress. 4. Then lift the cover of the red distress button and push the Distress button for 3 seconds.
22
DSC calls
16
When the SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC receives an acknowledgement of distress from another vessel or station, a 2-tone alarm sounds. The display shows a pop-up window with the MMSI number of the station who sent the distress acknowledgement call. •
Press SILENCE or any other key to switch off the 2-tone alarm.
QUIT
•
Press the soft key VIEW to display further data for this call.
HOLD
•
Press VIEW again to return to the working display.
VIEW
Operation
To receive acknowledgement of own distress
22222
Chapter 2: Operation
DISTRESS ACKN. CAT: DISTRESS FROM: 219005678 MMSI:223344556 LAT: N 12°34.5678 LON:E 123°45.6789 POS-TIME: 12:28 INT
16
MORE If the same Distress call comes in more than once, the 2-tone alarm sounds briefly and terminates automatically.
To cancel own distress If you need to cancel a sent distress message do as follows: 1. The display shows that a distress message has been sent. Press the soft key ANNUL. A pop-up window is displayed. 2. Press the soft key YES to go ahead with the cancelling process. At this stage you have the option to press the soft key NO to return to distress sending procedure. 3. The SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC will send the self-cancellation call on channel 70 and the display automatically shows the message that you should say when cancelling the distress with a radio message. Use the selector knob to scroll through all displays with information for the voice cancel. 4. Press the soft key OK to go to the acknowledged state. Own distress is cancelled now. 5. Press the soft key ANNUL to repeat the sending of the annul DSC message. 6. Having finished the voice cancelling of the annulment press the soft key QUIT to quit the annulment Distress procedure.
DSC calls
23
Chapter 2: Operation
Power failure while in distress In case of a power failure or switch-off during the transmission of a Distress the SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC gives an audible warning after power-up and automatically resumes sending Distress 10 seconds after power up. Within the 10 seconds you have the following options: •
Press the soft key QUIT to terminate the active distress procedure (acknowledged or unacknowledged).
•
Press the soft key CONFIRM (or wait and do nothing) to resume the sending Distress procedure.
Sending a Distress from the SAILOR 6103 Multi Alarm Panel The optional SAILOR 6103 Multi Alarm Panel will, when connected to the VHF radio, indicate in the SAILOR 6103 display that a Distress can be sent over VHF. To send a Distress alert from the SAILOR 6103 Multi Alarm Panel, do as follows: 1. Lift the cover of the Distress button marked VHF. 2. Press and hold the button until the light is steady and the buzzer stops (more than 3 seconds). The VHF radio is now in distress mode. Continue the distress traffic and procedures from the VHF radio front panel, if possible, in the same way as described for handling distress mode from the main VHF radio. Press the MUTE button on the Alarm panel to mute the audible alarm on incoming distress or urgency messages. Note
Only undesignated distress messages can be initiated from the Alarm Panel.
For further information see the Alarm Panel Installation and user manual.
24
DSC calls
DROBOSE — Distress Relay on behalf of someone else To send a distress message on behalf of someone else, do as follows:
2. Select one line at a time by pressing and turning the selector knob.
EXIT
DISTRESS RELAY Type: RELAY INDIV: DISTRESS MMSI: PHBOOK Unknown To: NAT: UNDESIGNATED LAT: Unknown
3. Enter the necessary information using the selector knob or the keypad: Relay items
Operation
1. From top-level standby press the soft key DROBOS. If it is not in the display, press the soft key MORE until DROBOS appears.
22222
Chapter 2: Operation
10
Description
TYPE:
Select RELAY ALL or RELAY INDIV. If yo select RELAY INDIV., the field TO appears in the display.
DISTRESS MMSI:
Enter the MMSI number of the vessel in distress, if known, or else “unknown”
TO:
Enter the MMSI number of the vessel or coast station you send the relay to.
NATURE:
Select the nature of distress: FIRE, EXPLOSION FLOODING COLLISION GROUNDING LISTING (in danger of capsizing) SINKING DISABLED (and adrift) UNDESIGNATED ABANDONING (ship) PIRACY (armed robbery attack) MAN OVERBOARD EPIRB
LAT: LON: POS UTC:
Enter the position and UTC information or unknown of the vessel in distress.
DSC calls
25
Chapter 2: Operation
4. Lift the cover of the red distress button and push the Distress button for 3 seconds.
Receiving distress calls When the radio receives a distress call, the 2- SILENCE tone alarm sounds. Types of distress calls are DSC Call Received DISTRESS, DISTRESS ACK, DISTRESS RELAY DISTRESS ACTIVE FROM: 776655443 and DISTR. RELAY ACK. SSBFIRE, CH 402 VIEW D V EXPLOSION COMMS CHANGE 10s 1. To switch off the 2-tone alarm press the DISTRESS RX WAIT FOR ACKN. 0:05 soft key SILENCE. A press on any other key also switches off the 2-tone alarm.
4360.0 4068.0
2. Press the soft key VIEW to display further information. If engaged in other communications press ACTIVE to engage in the received DSC call. 3. Monitor channel 16 as a coast station may require your assistance. If the radio is not on channel 16, turn the selector knob or use the key 16/C to go to channel 16. 4. Then the radio receives the first distress acknowledgement call and the 2-tone alarm sounds again. To switch off the 2tone alarm press the soft key SILENT. A press on any other key also switches off the 2-tone alarm.any key. 5. If you decide to acknowledge the Distress press MORE until DISACK is shown in the display.
QUIT HOLD VIEW MORE
16
D DISTRESS RX ACKNOWLEDGED FROM: 987654321
0:25
Distress call with errors If a distress call contains errors, it is still received. Press the soft key VIEW for more information. Errors are marked with underscores (_).
26
DSC calls
DSC Call Received GROUP (ERR) FROM: 123456789 CAT: DISTRESS
Distress call log As long as you are part of a distress session, i.e. you have not pressed QUIT, you receive distress messages and can track all distress messages for the current distress event.
22222
Chapter 2: Operation
2. Press the soft key
or
Operation
1. Press the soft key HIST. If it is not in the display, press the soft key MORE until HIST appears. to browse the received Distress messages.
3. Press the soft key EXIT to leave the event HISTORY.
DSC calls for communication With a DSC call you can establish a radio communication with one or several specific radios on a suggested VHF channel. 1. DSC call message from Radio A to Radio B 2. DSC acknowledge from Radio B to Radio A 3. Radio A + B go on the agreed VHF channel Radio A
Radio B
4. Press PPT and start talking
To make a DSC call, do as follows:
EXIT
1. Press the soft key CALL. 2. Turn and press the selector knob to select the call type: Depending on the DSC call type you can enter category, MMSI number and channel for the following communication. DSC call type INDIVIDUAL (default)
Cat.
To:
Ch.
X
X
X
DSC calls
DSC CALL Type: INDIVIDUAL Cat: ROUTINE PHBOOK To: Ch: 9
Session icon R or S
10 DSC call category Routine (default) or safety calls, calls to a ship or a station
27
Chapter 2: Operation
DSC call type
Session icon
Cat.
To:
Ch.
DSC call category
SAFETY TEST
—
X
—
S
Test call, check of safety equipment
POSITION
—
X
—
S
?
GROUP
—
X
X
R
Routine
ALL SHIPS
X
—
X
S or U
Safety (default) or urgency
3. In the field CAT: select a DSC call category, depending on the call type. 4. In the field TO: enter the 9-digit MMSI number of the vessel you want to contact or use the phone book (PHBOOK) to select a contact. 5. In the field CH: enter the suggested VHF channel for following communication. 6. Press the soft key SEND to make the call.
What is a Session? A DSC session is defined as a collection of DSC calls (transmitted and/or received) that are related to the same event (e.g. a distress event) or established call (e.g. an individual call request followed by an acknowledgement). A session can be either active or on hold. The active session has control over the radio transmitter. A session can have a purpose. For example if the purpose is to establish a communication on a working channel. The non-DSC VHF communication is considered as a session that can be active (engaged) or on hold (dis-engaged). See also Engagement status on page 18.
28
DSC calls
In the DSC window the type of session, the current state, MMSI number of the other party and lapsed time since the reception of a call request or an acknowledgment is shown.
Session state Session line
VIEW
Session status QUIT MORE
67
INT INTERSHIP/PORT R INDIVIDUAL TX IN COMMUNICATION MMSI: 123456789 0:27
The session state icons, in the example V and R, show the state of the session: •
ACTIVE — inverted, transmitter tuned into the communication channel in the example R , a DSC Routine call).
•
HOLD — normal view, parked session (in the example communication.
, VHF voice
For more information on the session state icons see Session state icons D, U, S, R and V on page 34. The session line can be one of the following: Session line
Explanation
OWN DISTRESS
The ship is in own distress. See also To send a distress message on page 21.
DISTRESS RX
You watch or participate in a distress communication for another station in distress
RELAY calls (numerous) You watch or participate in a distress communication for another station in distress ALL SHIPS TX/RX
You have sent / received an all ships call
GROUP TX/RX
You have sent / received a group call
INDIVIDUAL TX/RX
You have either sent a call request to a station to establish contact, or another station has made a call to you to establish contact. The call needs a reply.
DSC calls
29
Operation
Display for a session
22222
Chapter 2: Operation
Chapter 2: Operation
Session line
Explanation
TEST TX/RX
You either have sent a SAFETY TEST call or have received a SAFETY TEST call from another station that needs to be replied.
POSITION TX/RX
A position request was either sent or received.
The session status can be one of the following: Session status
Explanation
WAIT FOR ACKNOWLEDGE
You made an individual call to a station and are awaiting a reply to establish connection.
OCCUPIED
The DSC transmission mechanism waits until the DSC channel (70) is free.
TRANSMITTING
Transmission of a DSC message is ongoing.
IN COMMUNICATION WITH
The communication has been established in a routine call.
ACKNOWLEDGED
The call requiring (or not requiring) an acknowledgement has been acknowledged.
Soft keys to control DSC sessions Call or session types vary in control options, and options may also change if a session changes its state. The following table gives an overview of the DSC soft key commands available: Soft key — DSC session Radio function
30
QUIT
Terminates the DSC session
HOLD
Puts the DSC session hold if it is active (return to other non-DSC functions)
ACTIVE
Activates the DSC session
VIEW
Shows details about the DSC call
DSC calls
RESEND NEWCH
UNABLE
Transmits an identical call if available Replies with a new channel if an individual call is received with a communication channel specified which is not available in the radio, or the operator decides to change the channel. Constructs a reply to the caller if an individual call is received which is not compatible with the radio modes.
SILENT
Silences alarms. Any key silences the alarm but this soft key function will do only this.
ACK
Acknowledges a received call request with the suggested parameters.
POS (Own Distress)
A shortcut to own position data information.
PAUSE (Own Distress)
Pauses the automatic repetition of distress transmissions
RESUME (Own Distress)
Resumes automatic repetition of distress transmissions (if paused)
DIST ACK
Distress acknowledgement.
DROBOS
Distress Relay on behalf of someone else.
ANNUL (Cancel Own Distress)
Cancels an inadvertently transmitted distress
CONFIRM (Cancel Own Confirms action and proceed sequence, used in Distress) cancel distress procedure INFO (in Cancel Own Distress)
Turns page of text message.
HIST (Received distress)
A filtered version of the log displaying received calls relevant to the current distress event.
See also Handling multiple calls — DSC and voice on page 33.
DSC calls
31
Operation
Soft key — DSC session Radio function
22222
Chapter 2: Operation
Chapter 2: Operation
Detail information for DSC sessions (soft key: INFO) A DSC session is updated based on DSC calls received or transmitted. Press the soft key VIEW to show the details for the current session. For distress events a sequence of calls may contribute to the complete view and status of the session. Detailed fields for distress are: INFO — DSC
Explanation
DISTR-MMSI
The vessel in distress
NAT
Nature of Distress
LAT
Latitude position of station in distress
LON
Longitude position of station in distress
POS UTC
Time of position
MODE
Communication mode (Simplex/Semi-duplex Telephony supported)
For other session types the soft key function INFO typically shows the details from a single call. Detail fields for other calls than distress are: INFO —other calls Explanation
32
CALL Type
(on received call) – This may be shown on call reception
CAT
Category of the call: Urgency, Safety or Routine
FROM
The initiator of the call
TO
The intended receiver of the call (unless All Ships)
MODE
Communication mode (Simplex/Semi-duplex Telephony supported)
CHANNEL
Subsequent communication channel
LAT
Latitude position returned upon a position request
LON
Longitude position of station in distress
POS UTC
Time of position
DSC calls
If the radio is in stand-by mode, i.e. not engaged in another session, and a DSC call is received the call details are shown on the display. After having silenced the alarm you can acknowledge the call, put it on hold or display more information. If you put the call on hold, the session icon for this call will flash until you have acknowledged the call.
QUIT HOLD VIEW MORE
19
INT PORT-PUBLIC R S GROUP RX COMM WITH 123456789 0:12
Handling multiple calls — DSC and voice The SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC can control multiple DSC sessions simultaneously with a VHF communication session. All sessions can keep track of their session state and the communication channel used. They are handled in their respective sessions, in the order as they are started up. Note
Note that there is only one active session at a time. The active session controls the radio transmitter.
You can toggle between the Session QUIT ongoing calls/sessions, that means icons that a call — or session — can be on ACTIVE hold or active. If there are several INT PORT-PUBLIC calls ongoing, they are shown in R the display with their respective VOICE COMM CHANNEL: 10 state (active, on hold, requiring MORE attention). Use the soft key to Multiple sessions leaf through all ongoing calls or sessions. The DSC sessions on hold can receive calls that are pertinent to the session, even when the session is not displayed.
10
The example on this page shows that two sessions are ongoing, the inverted R is a routine DSC call (active), is a non-DSC initiated voice
Handling multiple calls — DSC and voice
33
Operation
Receiving DSC calls
22222
Chapter 2: Operation
Chapter 2: Operation
communication (on hold). Press the soft key ACTIVE to make the voice session active and put the DSC call session on hold.
Session state icons D, U, S, R and V Session icons in the session view inform you of the category of the DSC call or Voice communication: •
D — Distress
•
U — Urgency
•
S — Safety
•
R — Routine
•
V — Voice (VHF voice call, non-DSC) State of session icon
Meaning for the current call (DSC or voice)
R (inverted)
Active call/session
R
Call on hold
Phone book Use the phone book when making a DSC call. You can enter up to 200 contacts. A contact has the following details: •
Name (up to 20 characters)
•
Type (SHIP, GROUP or COAST STATION)
•
MMSI number
•
Channel
•
Position Auto Acknowledge (yes or no) or Listen to Group
The phone book is always sorted alphabetically by contact names. Use the soft key FILTER to toggle between CONTACTS - ALL, COAST, SHIP or GROUP. After having selected a contact, the phone book closes automatically.
34
Phone book
To call a contact in the phone book do as follows: 1. Press the soft key CALL. If it is not in the display, press the soft key MORE until CALL appears. The DSC call composer is shown in the display. 2. Press the soft key PHBOOK. 3. Turn the selector knob to scroll to the phone book entry that you want to call, press the selector knob to select the contact. 4. Press the soft key SEND to make the call.
Adding a contact to the phone book To add a contact to the phone book do as follows: 1. Press the soft key PHBOOK. If it is not in the display, press the soft key MORE until PHBOOK appears in the display. 2. Press the soft key ADD and fill in the details for the new contact. Contact
Description
NAME
Enter the name by turning the selector knob to the desired letter, press the selector knob to accept the letter and advance to the next letter. To finish press the soft key OK.
TYPE
Press and turn the selector knob to select SHIP, GROUP or COAST STATION.
MMSI
Turn and press the selector knob to enter the contact’s MMSI number (9 digits), press the soft key OK to accept. For coast station contacts you can also enter a DSC channel.
Ch (optional)
Press and turn the selector knob to select the preferred channel for this contact, press the soft key OK.
Phone book
35
Operation
Using the phone book to make a DSC call
22222
Chapter 2: Operation
Chapter 2: Operation
Contact
Description
Position Auto Ack For SHIP or COAST STATION: Press and turn the selector knob to select YES or NO for this contact, press the soft key OK. This will allow auto-ack of position requests for this contact. Listen to Group
Still in? For GROUP: Press and turn the selector knob to select YES or NO for this contact, press the soft key OK. The radio will respond to calls to the specified group.
3. Press the soft key SAVE to save the contact information. 4. Press the soft key EXIT to leave the phone book.
Editing a contact 1. Press the soft key PHBOOK. If it is not in the display, press the soft key MORE until PHBOOK appears. 2. Press the soft key EDIT. 3. Press and turn the selector knob to browse through the details of the contact and continue as described in Adding a contact to the phone book from step 2 onwards.
Deleting a contact 1. Press the soft key PHBOOK. If it is not in the display, press the soft key MORE until PHBOOK appears. 2. Turn the selector knob to browse to the contact you want to delete. 3. Press the soft key MORE until DELETE appears. 4. Press the soft key DELETE. 5. Press EXIT to leave the phone book and return to VHF operation.
36
Phone book
Replay function
22222
Chapter 2: Operation
The recorded channel is displayed. The message length is shown in seconds. The display shows how old the message is. If the 240 s storage limit is reached, the oldest data is overwritten. Note
The replay function can be started even in a distress situation. If a DSC call is received the replay function continues the playback. Acknowledgement of the DSC call immediately initiates and activates the DSC session. You can initiate replay again from any session afterwards.
Replaying recorded messages To replay a message do as follows: 1. Press the Replay button (short press). The latest message (message) is repeated. Information about this message is shown in the display. 2. To stop replaying the message press the soft key STOP. 3. To rewind through the recorded messages make a long press on the Replay button. 4. To stop replaying a message press STOP or the PTT button on the speaking device. If a signal is received while in replay mode the display shows display.
Replay function
in the
37
Operation
Replay allows the operator to playback received voice messages in the loudspeaker. Recording is activated automatically when a signal is received. Recording is not possible during playback. Up to 60 tracks or 240 seconds can be handled. During a power cycle the recorded tracks are deleted.
Chapter 2: Operation
Setup The following setup pages are described in this section of the manual: •
Radio setup
•
Channel setup
•
Power Supply
•
DSC setup
•
DSC call logs
•
System setup
•
Controller setup
Accessing a setup page To change a setting in one of the SETUP pages, do as follows 1. Press the soft key SETUP. If it is not in the display, press the soft key MORE until SETUP appears. 2. Press the arrow soft key edit.
or
to advance to SETUP page you want to
3. Turn the selector knob to go to a setting, then press the selector knob to change the setting. 4. Press EXIT to return to normal radio operation.
38
Setup
Parameter
Description
Scan Hang Scan hang time, in seconds on an active receiving working Time channel. The time is measured from the signal is detected. The radio remains on the channel for the set time interval, if a signal was detected. OFF: Resumes scanning when signal disappears (default) 4, 6, 8, 10: Hang time in seconds. Scan Resume
Scan resume time, in seconds. When the programmed time of inactivity has elapsed, and when watch/scan has been aborted using a press on PTT, or after power-up, scan or watch is resumed. OFF: Automatic resume is deactivated (default) 3, 6, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30: Resume time in seconds.
Watch Mode
DUAL: Dual watch monitoring the working channel and the priority channel (channel 16, default for international channels). TRIPLE: Triple watch. The working channel is watched with the priority channel (channel 16) and the programmed call channel (if any, otherwise dual watch).
Priority Scan
ON: All channels tagged for scanning are scanned while monitoring channel 16. (default). OFF: Only the channels tagged for scanning are scanned in sequence, not channel 16, unless it is tagged for scanning. Channel 01
Channel 16
Channel 02
Channel 16
Channel 03
Channel 16
Channel 04
Channel 16
Priority scan: On
Channel 01
Channel 02
Channel 03
Channel 04
Channel 05
Priority scan: Off (normal scan)
Setup
39
Operation
Radio setup
22222
Chapter 2: Operation
Chapter 2: Operation
Parameter
Description
ATIS code The ATIS code (Automatic Transmitter Identification System) is used for identification to marine coast and inland stations and its use is mandatory in a number of European inland waterways such as e.g. the river Rhine. Like the MMSI number the ATIS number is issued by the relevant authority. ATIS for foreign leisure crafts: For ships coming from states which are not member of the Regional Arrangement the ATISCode is based on the MMSI with a 9 as the first digit.a Note: The ATIS number can be programmed once. If a wrong number has been entered and stored, or if there is a requirement to change it, contact your authorized dealer. a. The Committee Rainwat in its 12.Meeting (October 2008) decided to change the building rules of the ATIS code for vessels coming from a country outside the RAINWAT arrangement.
40
Setup
Channel setup Parameter
Description
Channel Mode
To select the channel table for the primary channel. Channel tables available: INT, BI, US, CA. See also VHF channel table on page 17.
Bandwidth
Selection of the bandwidth for the fixed pre-programmed channels. This is recommended from Radio Regulations: Wide: Wide band is 25kHz channel bandwidth (default) Narrow: Narrow band defines a channel bandwidth of 12.5kHz
INT. Channels
You can view the channel settings. EXIT Press the soft key to advance the channel numbers. Bandwidth: WIDE (default) or NARROW Tagged for scan: OFF (default) or ON
INT. Channels Ch: 1 Rx: 160.6500 MHz Tx: 156.0500 MHz PORT-PUBLIC Bandwidth:WIDE Tagged for scan: OFF
10
If there is a requirement to change a setting, contact your authorized dealer. Press the soft key EXIT to return to CHANNEL SETUP. BI. Channels
As described above.
US. Channels
As described above.
CA. Channels
As described above.
Setup
41
Operation
22222
Chapter 2: Operation
Chapter 2: Operation
Power Supply Parameter Monitor
Description Set this to ENABLED if the radio is connected to a SAILOR 6081 Power Supply Unit and Charger. Set this to DISABLED for any other power supply.
Status
Visible if ENABLED. Current status of the connected power supply.
Voltage
Visible if ENABLED. Current voltage.
Current
Visible if ENABLED. Current current.
DSC setup DSC setting
42
Description
Position & MMSI
Available position information. Here you can enter position data and UTC time manually. See also Position and MMSI number on page 12 for a step-by-step description.
DSC Groups
Shows DSC groups. You can also add, edit, filter and delete groups here.
Auto-Ack Test
Auto-acknowledgement of test DSC messages. OFF or ON (default)
Auto-Ack Polling
Auto-acknowledgement of polling DSC messages. OFF or ON (default)
Auto-Ack Position
Auto-acknowledgement of position DSC messages. OFF (default) or ON
Setup
Description
Auto-Ack Individual Auto acknowledgement of individually addressed, non distress DSC messages OFF or ON (default) Non-Distr. Inactivity Inactivity time-out to exit non-distress functions (e.g. in setup) without automatic time-out (OFF): Range: OFF, 1 to 30 minutes, in 1 min. steps Default: 15min. Distress Inactivity
Inactivity time-out for received distress DSC automated procedures without automatic time-out: Range: OFF, 1 to 30 minutes, in 1 min. steps Default: OFF
Comm Inactivity
Inactivity time-out of non DSC communication (VHF). Range: 10 to 600 seconds, in 10 s steps Default: 30sec
Non-Distr.Alarms
Non-distress DSC alarms OFF: Disabled ON: Enabled (default)
Medical transport
ON: This option is available in DSC calls of the type Urgency. OFF (default)
Neutral crafts
ON: This option is available in DSC calls of the type Urgency. OFF (default)
Print DSC
For printing of DSC messages on a printer connected to the system. ON or OFF: (default)
DSC Self Test
You can set the radio to run a DSC self test. OFF: Disabled (default) RUN: Run test. For further details about this test see DSC routine testing on page 50.
Setup
43
Operation
DSC setting
22222
Chapter 2: Operation
Chapter 2: Operation
DSC call logs Use the soft keys
and
to leaf through all logs.
DSC call log
Description
Received Distress
Shows a log of up to 20 received distress calls.
Transmitted Calls
Shows a log of up to 20 transmitted calls.
Received Calls
Shows a log of all received non distress calls.
System setup SYSTEM SETUP
Description
System time & Date
View and set system time and date
Inactivity timeout
Inactivity time-out to exit functions (e.g. in setup) and return to the application. Range: 1 to 30 minutes, in 1 minute steps Default: 10 min.
44
Language
English
Color theme
Changes the display colour. 0: Black text on white background 1: White text on black background
NMEA input (baud rate)
4800 (cannot be edited)
Factory Defaults
Resets the radio to factory defaults. Press the selector knob and confirm the reset to factory default.
Radio Info:
SW Version: Software version of the radio S/N: Serial number of the radio TU IP: IP address of the radio
Setup
SYSTEM SETUP
Description
Password
If you need to change the identity of the radio (MMSI number or ATIS code), contact your local dealer.
22222
Chapter 2: Operation
Operation
Controller setup Each of the controlling devices connected and powered has its own setting. Controlling device Handset 1 vol:
Description Adjust earpiece volume for handset 1: ON, can be adjusted OFF and from 5 to 100, in steps of 5. Note: The handset connected to the front connector has top priority and is configured to ON. The volume can be adjusted from 0 to 500, in steps of 5.
Handset 2 vol:
Adjust earpiece volume for handset 2: OFF, can be adjusted from 5 to 100, in steps of 5. Note: If a handset is connected to the rear connector this value must be configured to a value (1-14).
Ext. speaker
FIX: Fixed level is set for external speaker REL: Relative level following volume adjustment of the internal speaker
Ext. fixed vol:
External speaker fixed volume: OFF, 5 to 100 in steps of 5
The available settings may vary from controllers applied.
Setup
45
Chapter 2: Operation
Top-level standby soft-key functions and setup pages TOP-LEVEL STAND-BY
SETUP PAGES
CALL
EXIT PHBOOK
RADIO SETUP
ALERT
EXIT POS
Scan Hang Time Scan Resume Watch mode Priority Scan ATIS code
DROBOS
EXIT PHBOOK
CHANNEL SETUP
SCAN
EXIT START TAG FILTER
PHBOOK
EXIT ADD FILTER
Channel Mode Bandwidth Int. Channels BI. Channels US. Channels CA. Channels ALT. Channels Private Channels
POWER SUPPLY
Monitor :
DSC SETUP
Positon & MMSI DSC groups Auto-Ack Test Auto-Ack Polling Auto-Ack Position Auto-Ack Individual Non-Distr. Inactivity Distress Inactivity Comm Inactivity Non-Distr. Alarms Medical transport Neutral craft Print DSC DSC Self Test
DSC CALL LOGS
Received Distress Transmitted Calls Received Calls
SYSTEM SETUP
System time & date Inactivity timeout Language Colour theme NMEA in (baud ) Factory Defaults Password Radio Info
CONTROLLER SETUP
Handset 1 vol: Handset 2 vol: Ext. Speaker Ext. fixed vol:
LOCAL SETUP
46
EXIT
Setup
33333
Chapter 3
Contact for support Contact your authorized dealer for technical service and support of the VHF radio. Before contacting your authorized dealer you can go through the troubleshooting guide to solve some of the most common operational problems.
3
Service & maintenance
Service & maintenance
Maintenance Preventive maintenance Maintenance of the SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC can be reduced to a maintenance check at each visit of the service staff. Inspect the radio for mechanical damages, salt deposits, corrosion and any foreign material. Due to its robust construction and ruggedness the radio has a long lifetime. Anyway it must carefully be checked at intervals not longer than 12 months - dependent on the current working conditions.
Salt deposits In case the equipment has been exposed to sea water there is a risk of salt crystallization on the keys and knobs and they may become inoperable. Clean the VHF radio and speaker microphones with fresh water.
Error messages and warnings Errors and warning messages are shown in the display and are read-only.
47
Chapter 3: Service & maintenance
DSC self test To run a control routine DSC self test, do as follows: 1. Press the soft key SETUP. If it is not in the display, press the soft key MORE until SETUP appears. 2. Press the arrow soft key
or
to advance to DSC SETUP.
3. Turn the selector knob to select DSC Self Test. Press and turn the selector knob to select RUN. The test will check the ability to encode/decode DSC signalling on RF level. The radio will automatically transmit a DSC safety test call to its own MMSI number without enabling the transmitter power amplifier. In parallel the radio decodes and compares the received call to be the same as the transmitted. The display shows the result of TEST RESULT TEST RESULT the test. 4. Press the soft key OK to acknowledge the test result and resume normal operation. Important
DSC loopback test passed
DSC loopback test FAILED
If the DSC loopback test fails, this indicates the DSC functionality does not work correctly — including the ability to send a DISTRESS message. Contact your dealer immediately for further advice.
48
Maintenance
Action
Symptom
Remedy
The radio will not turn on
The display is empty.
Check if power is present. Check fuse which is placed in the power connector. Check performance of power supply if connected to one.
No communication
The loudspeaker is mute.
Check the antenna installation. Check antenna cable. Check handset/Handmicrophone and cable.
GPS
Position requested.
If the VHF, despite being connected to a GPS/position source, prompts for entering the position and time information, the automated update has most likely been lost either due to missing data on the line, broken cabling or the GPS/position source has failed. Refer to the installation section in the back of this manual for installation and connection details. Until the automatic position update from GPS/position source is restored position and time must be entered manually when prompted by a (four hour) timer in VHF. In the DSC SETUP, Position Info, you can verity the position data. If data is present Lat/Lon/UTC will be displayed.
Troubleshooting guide
49
Service & maintenance
Troubleshooting guide
33333
Chapter 3: Service & maintenance
Chapter 3: Service & maintenance
Action
Symptom
DSC routine testing
Remedy Check the DSC function regularly. Verify the complete DSC installation, with antennas, by transmitting a Safety Test call to another station (coast or ship). The test call is generated using the DSC call flow via menu CALL. The call should normally be replied by the receiving station without questioning. The default configuration of a DSC VHF radio is auto-acknowledgement of any received Safety test call requests. If a ship is equipped with multiple radios a second radio can be the station to check up against. The transmitting radio will not receive its own transmitted calls. If there is only a single radio on a vessel, a facility is built into the unit where the DSC engine can be verified using a test call that is internally looped without activating the radio transmitter PA. The test is executed via menu SETUP, DSC SETUP. The call sequence that is verified, is an Individual Safety Test Call directed to own MMSI. The test status is read in the display.
Missing MMSI
50
DSC operation is not working
When powering up the VHF for the first time after leaving factory there is no MMSI number in the VHF radio. For the DSC operation to function the MMSI number must be entered in the VHF radio. For further details see the installation manual.
Wrong MMSI number
If a wrong number has been entered and stored, or if there is a requirement to change it, contact your authorized dealer.
Troubleshooting guide
Symptom
Remedy
Radio time
DSC logs are sorted with wrong time stamp or radio time is incorrect
A wrong radio time indication should occur only if GPS position source is not connected or providing correct time data. A valid GPS time signal will update the UTC time used for time stamping the DSC logs. If a GPS/position source is not connected to the VHF radio and hence position and time is entered manually, you must enter the "radio time" also manually, at least after power up. This will ensure correct time stamping of the DSC logs. The UTC time is the suggested time to be entered when prompted for entering position and time manually (every four hours).
The transmission of a DSC call which is not of DSC Channel DSC not free transmission category distress will be postponed if the VHF delayed radio is in the process of decoding an incoming DSC call. As soon as this decoding process has finalized the transmission will take place. Handset configuration
No sound in earpiece
The earpiece volume may be configured to OFF. See section Controller setup in the user manual on how to adjust the earpiece volume of the handset.
Troubleshooting guide
51
Service & maintenance
Action
33333
Chapter 3: Service & maintenance
Chapter 3: Service & maintenance
Action
Symptom
Device failure
Remedy If any of the checks and tests described in this section do not assist in resolving the difficulties experienced in the operation and/or performance of the VHF installation, a fault may have developed in the VHF radio itself. When contacting an authorized Thrane & Thrane representative be sure to provide as much information as possible describing the observed behavior - also including the type of the VHF radio, its serial number, and software release version (both found in the setup menu Controller Setup).
WARNING: POWER SUPPLY LOST CONTACT
52
Power supply status cannot be monitored.
In Setup, Power Supply, set Monitor to disabled. You can only monitor the power supply if the radio is powered by a SAILOR 6081 Power Supply Unit and Charger.
Troubleshooting guide
Replacing the fuse in the power connector One fuse is installed in the power connector. If the fuse is blown, do as follows: 1. Track down why the fuse was blown and solve the problem. 2. Take out the old fuse.
Service & maintenance
3. Insert the new fuse. The fuse rating is 10 A T.
33333
Chapter 3: Service & maintenance
Replacing the fuse in the SAILOR 6090 Power Converter One fuse is installed in the SAILOR 6090 Power Converter. If the fuse is blown, do as follows: 1. Track down why the fuse was blown and solve the problem. 2. Take out the old fuse.
Troubleshooting guide
53
Chapter 3: Service & maintenance
3. Insert the new fuse. The fuse rating is 10 A T.
Warranty and returning units for repair Should your Thrane & Thrane product fail, please contact your dealer or installer, or the nearest Thrane & Thrane partner. You will find the partner details on www.thrane.com where you also find the Thrane & Thrane Self Service Center web-portal, which may help you solving the problem. Your dealer, installer or Thrane & Thrane partner will assist you whether the need is user training, technical support, arranging on-site repair or sending the product for repair. Your dealer, installer or Thrane & Thrane partner will also take care of any warranty issue.
Repacking for shipment Should you need to send the product for repair, please read the below information before packing the product. The shipping carton has been carefully designed to protect the SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC and its accessories during shipment. This carton and its associated packing material should be used when repacking for shipment. Attach a tag
54
Warranty and returning units for repair
Note
Correct shipment is the customer’s own responsibility.
If the original shipping carton is not available, the following general instructions should be used for repacking with commercially available material. 1. Wrap the defective unit in heavy paper or plastic. Attach a tag indicating the type of service required, return address, part number and full serial number.
2. Use a strong shipping container, e.g. a double walled carton of 160 kg test material. 3. Protect the front- and rear panel with cardboard and insert a 7 cm to 10 cm layer of shock-absorbing material between all surfaces of the equipment and the sides of the container. 4. Seal the shipping container securely. 5. Mark the shipping container FRAGILE to ensure careful handling. Failure to do so may invalidate the warranty.
Warranty and returning units for repair
55
Service & maintenance
indicating the type of service required, return address, part number and full serial number. Mark the carton FRAGILE to ensure careful handling.
33333
Chapter 3: Service & maintenance
Chapter 3: Service & maintenance
56
Warranty and returning units for repair
AAAAA
Technical specifications
A
Transceiver unit SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC Item
Specification
Weight SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC
< 1.50 kg (3.3 lbs) approximately
Box weight SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC
3.8 kg (8.4 lbs) approximately, including SAILOR 6201 Handset and wall mount cradle, SAILOR 6090 Power Converter and Installation and user manual in box.
Dimensions
Height: Outer dimension 107 mm, hole height for flush mount 89 mm Width: Outer dimension 241 mm, hole width for flush mount 227 mm Depth: Outer dimension from front of knobs 132 mm, depth for flush mount 94 mm
Operating temperature
-25°C to 55°C (5°F to 131°F)
Storage temperature
-30°C to 80°C (-22°F to 176°F)
Power supply
12 VDC Nominal (10,8– 15,6 VDC)
Current consumption
Max. 7 A
Current consumption at 12 VDC without any accessories connected
RX: 0.5 A TX: 5 A
57
Technical specifications
Appendix A
Appendix A: Technical specifications Item
Specification
Current consumption at 12 VDC with all accessories connected
RX: 0.7 A
Frequency range
TX: 156,000 MHz — 157,425 MHz, RX: 156,000 MHz — 163.425 MHz
Item
TX: 7 A
Specification
Channel spacing
12.5 kHz and 25 kHz, all international maritime channels
Number of P channels
The radio may be programmed with up to 100 private channels that can be managed in all channel modes.
Modulation 25 kHz 12.5 kHz Antenna
16K0G3E, 16KOG2B (DSC) 8K05G3E 50 Ohm antenna, 50 Ohm female SO239 for PL259 plug 2-antenna operation for VHF and DSC communication
Water ingress
IPx8 and IPx6 all over. For flush-mount installations a sealing gasket is included in the delivery.
Transmitter Transmit power
Hi/Lo: 25 W and 1 W
RF output power
High: 25 W +0 dB / - 1.5 dB Low: 1 W +0 dB / - 1.5 dB
58
Transceiver unit SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC
Technical specifications
Item
AAAAA
Appendix A: Technical specifications
Specification
RF output power, Canada
High: 21 W ±0.75 dB Low: 0.8 W ±0.75 dB
Frequency error
Below 500 Hz
Adjacent channel power
Below 75 dB
Conducted spurious emission
Below 0.25 PW
Distortion
Below 3%
S/N ratio
Better than 46 dB
Receiver Sensitivity
< -119 dBm typically @ 20 dB SINAD CCITT weighted
LF power
Built-in loudspeaker: 6 W (at 5 kHz dev./1 kHz tone) External loudspeaker: 6 W / 8 Ohm
Distortion
Below 5%
S/N ratio
Better than 43 dB
Spurious emissions
Below 2 nW
Spurious response rejection
More than 74 dB
Intermodulation response
More than 73 dB
Co-channel rejection
Better than —10 dB
Adjacent channel selectivity
More than 74 dB
Blocking level
More than 94 dBPV
Transceiver unit SAILOR 6222 VHF DSC
59
Appendix A: Technical specifications
General DSC specifications Item
Description
DSC operation
According to Rec. ITU-R M.541-9 and Rec. ITU-R M.689-2, EN 300338-2
DSC protocol
According to Rec. ITU-R M.493-13 Class A
Navigator interface
According to IEC 61162-1 GLL, RMC, ZDA, GGA, VTG, GNS
Symbol error rate
Below 1x10-2 —113 dBm or 0.20 PV p.d.
Modulation
1700 Hz ± 400 Hz. 1200 baud
Frequency error
Below ± 1 Hz
Residual modulation
Below —26 dB
NMEA data rates and formats Item
Value
61162-1
4800,8,n,1
61162-2
38400,8,n,1
Table 1: NMEA data rates and formats
60
General DSC specifications
Technical specifications
AAAAA
Chapter A: Technical specifications
SAILOR 6090 Power Converter 24—12 V Item
Description
Weight
300 g
Dimensions
Height: 33 mm Width: 190 mm Depth: 85 mm
Operating temperature
-25°C to 55°C (5°F to 131°F)
Storage temperature
-30°C to 80°C (-22°F to 176°F)
Input voltage
21—32 VDC
Output voltage
12.5 VDC
Output current (max.)
8A
Table 2: SAILOR 6090, technical specifications
SAILOR 6090 Power Converter 24—12 V
61
Chapter A: Technical specifications
62
SAILOR 6090 Power Converter 24—12 V
BBBBB
Appendix B
Maritime channels
B
Channels 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
TX MHz 156,050 156,100 156,150 156,200 156 250 156,250 156,300 156,350 156,400 156,450 156,500 156,550 156,600 156 600 156,650 156,700 156,750 156,800 156,850 156,900 156,950 157,000 157,050 157,100 157,150 157,200 157,250 157,300 157,350 157,400
RX SIMPLEX MHz Intership Port 160,650 160,700 160,750 160,800 160 850 160,850 156,300 160,950 156,400 156,450 156,500 156,550 156,600 156 600 156,650 156,700 156,750 156,800 Distress and calling 156,850 161,500 161,550 161,600 161,650 161,700 161,750 161,800 161,850 161,900 161,950 162,000
DUPLEX Port Public
Channels 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88
TX MHz 156,025 156,075 156,125 156,175 156 225 156,225 156,275 156,325 156,375 156,425 156,475 156,525 156,575 156 575 156,625 156,675 156,725 156,775 156,825 156,875 156,925 156,975 157,025 157,075 157,125 157,175 157,225 157,275 157,325 157,375 157,425
RX SIMPLEX MHz Intership Port 160,625 160,675 160,725 160,775 160 825 160,825 160,875 160,925 156,375 156,425 156,475 156,525 DSC DSC 156,575 156 575 156,625 156,675 156,725 156,775 156,825 156,875 161,525 161,575 161,625 161,675 161,725 161,775 161,825 161,875 161,925 157,375 157,425
Maritime channels
International channels (INT) DUPLEX Port Public
L) L)
*) *)
L) 1 W TX power *) Channel 87 and 88 became simplex channels following the introduction of AIS1 at 161.975 MHz and AIS2 on 162.025 MHz.
These are the default channels. Additional narrowband channels can be enabled, see Channel setup on page 41.
63
Appendix B: Maritime channels
US channels Channels 1A 2 3 4 5A 6 7A 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15B 16 17 18A 19A 20 20A 21A 22A 23A 24 25 26 27 28
TX RX SIMPLEX MHz MHz 156,050 156,050
DUPLEX
B) B) B) 156,250 156,300 156,350 156,400 156,450 156,500 156,550 156,600 156,650 156,700 156,800 156,850 156,900 156,950 157,000 157,000 157,050 157,100 157,150 157,200 157,250 157,300 157,350 157,400
156,250 156,300 156,350 156,400 156,450 156,500 156,550 156,600 156,650 L) 156,700 RX) 156,750 156,800 Distress and calling 156,850 156,900 156,950 161,600 157,000 157,050 !) 157,100 !) 157,150 !) 161,800 161,850 161,900 161,950 162,000
Channels 60 61 62 63A 64 65A 66A 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78A 79A 80A 81A 82A 83A 84 85 86 87A 88A
TX MHz
RX MHz
SIMPLEX
DUPLEX
Channels
B) B) B)
W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7
156,175 156,175 B) 156,275 156,325 156,375 156,425 156,475 156,525 156,575 156,625 156,675 156,725
156,275 156,325 156,375 156,425 156,475 156,525 156,575 156,625 156,675 156,725
RX MHz 162,550 162,400 162,475 162,425 162,450 162,500 162,525
L)
DSC L)
B) B) 156,875 156,925 156,975 157,025 157,075 157,125 157,175 157,225 157,275 157,325 157,375 157,425
156,875 156,925 156,975 157,025 157,075 157,125 157,175 161,825 161,875 161,925 157,375 157,425
!) !) !)
*) *)
L) 1 W TX power. Channels 13, 67 and 77 are limited to low transmission power. B) Channels 2, 3, 4, 60, 61, 62, 64, 75 and 76 cannot be selected in US mode. !) Channels 21A, 22A, 23A, 81A, 82A and 83A may be legally used in some circumstances but not by the general public in US waters. RX) Only RX: transmissions are blocked. *) Channels 87 and 88 became simplex channels following the introduction of AIS1 at 161.975 MHz and AIS2 on 162.025 MHz.
These are the default channels. Additional narrowband channels can be enabled, see Channel setup on page 41.
64
US channels
Channels 1 2 3 4A 5A 6 7A 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18A 19A 20 21A 21B 22A 23 24 25 26 27 28
TX MHz 156,050 156,100 156,150 156,200 156,250 156,300 156,350 156,400 156,450 156,500 156,550 156,600 156,650 156,700 156,750 156,800 156,850 156,900 156,950 157,000 157,050 157,100 157,150 157,200 157,250 157,300 157,350 157,400
RX SIMPLEX DUPLEX MHz 160,650 160,700 160,750 156,200 !) 156,250 !) 156,300 156,350 156,400 156,450 156,500 156,550 156,600 156,650 156,700 156,750 L) 156,800 Distress and calling 156,850 L) 156,900 156,950 !) 161,600 L) 157,050 !) 161,650 RX) 157,100 !) 161,750 161,800 161,850 161,900 161,950 162,000
Channels 60 61A 62A 63A 64 64A 65A 66A 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78A 79A 80A 81A 82A 83A 83B 84 85 86 87 88
TX MHz 156,025 156,075 156,125 156,175 156,225 156,225 156,275 156,325 156,375 156,425 156,475 156,525 156,575 156,625 156,675 156,725 156,775 156,825 156,875 156,925 156,975 157,025 157,075 157,125 157,175 157,225 157,275 157,325 157,375 157,425
RX MHz 160,625 156,075 156,125 156,175 160,825 156,225 156,275 156,325 156,375 156,425 156,475 156,525 156,575 156,625 156,675 156,725 156,775 156,825 156,875 156,925 156,975 157,025 157,075 157,125 157,175 161,775 161,825 161,875 161,925 157,375 157,425
SIMPLEX
!) !) !)
L) L) !)
DUPLEX
Channels W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7
RX MHz 162,550 162,400 162,475 162,425 162,450 162,500 162,525
DSC !) !) L) L) L)
!) !) !) RX)
*) *)
L) 1 W TX power. Channels 15, 17, 20, 65, 66, 75, 76 and 77 are limited to 1 W transmission power. !) Channels 4A, 6, 19A, 21A, 22A, 61A, 62A, 63A, 67, 72, 73, 81A, 82A and 83A may be legally used in some circumstances but not by the general public in CA waters. RX) Only RX: transmission is blocked. *) Channels 87 and 88 became simplex channels following the introduction of AIS1 at 161.975 MHz and AIS2 on 162.025 MHz.
These are the default channels. Additional narrowband channels can be enabled, see Channel setup on page 41.
CA channels
65
Maritime channels
CA channels
BBBBB
Appendix B: Maritime channels
Appendix B: Maritime channels
BI channels Channels 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
TX MHz 156,050 156,100 156,150 156,200 156,250 156,300 156,350 156,400 156,450 156,500 156,550 156,600 156,650 156,700 156,750 156,800 156,850 156,900 156,950 157,000 157,050 157,100 157,150 157,200 157,250 157,300 157,350 157,400
RX SIMPLEX MHz Intership Port 160,650 160,700 160,750 160,800 160,850 L) 156,300 160,950 L) 156,400 156,450 L) L) 156,500 156,550 L) 156,600 L) 156,650 L) L) 156,700 L) 156,750 L) L) 156,800 Distress and calling 156,850 L) L) 161,500 161,550 161,600 161,650 161,700 161,750 161,800 161,850 161,900 161,950 162,000
DUPLEX Port Public
Channels 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88
TX MHz 156,025 156,075 156,125 156,175 156,225 156,275 156,325 156,375 156,425 156,475 156,525 156,575 156,625 156,675 156,725 156,875 156,925 156,975 157,025 157,075 157,125 157,175 157,225 157,275 157,325 157,375 157,425
RX SIMPLEX MHz Intership Port 160,625 160,675 160,725 160,775 160,825 160,875 160,925 156,375 156,425 156,475 156,525 DSC DSC 156,575 L) 156,625 L) 156,675 156,725 L) B) B) 156,875 L) 161,525 161,575 161,625 161,675 161,725 161,775 161,825 161,875 161,925 157,375 *) 157,425 *)
DUPLEX Port Public
L) 1 W TX power on channels 6, 8, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 17, 71, 72, 74 and 77. B) Channels 75 and 76 cannot be selected in BI mode. *) Channels 87 and 88 became simplex channels following the introduction of AIS1 at 161.975 MHz and AIS2 on 162.025 MHz. NB! The ATIS function is enabled on all channels. Dual Watch & Scanning modes are disabled.
Alternative channels If the radio is used in regions where neither of the four described standard channels are allowed, a reduced channel table with international channel designators and frequencies can be made. Contact your local dealer for programming the alternative channels.
Private channels Up to 100 licensed private channels for non-DSC purposes may be specified. For programming the private channels contact your local dealer.
66
BI channels
CCCCC
Glossary Glossary
C
A AIS
Automatic Identification System, a short range coastal tracking system used on ships and by Vessel Traffic Services for identifying and locating vessels by electronically exchanging data with other nearby ships.
ATIS
Automatic Transmission Identification System
DROBOS
Distress Relay On Behalf Of Someone else
DSC
Digital Selective Calling
Glossary
D
E EPIRB
Emergency Position-Indicating Radio Beacon. Distress radio beacons, also known as emergency beacons are tracking transmitters which aid in the detection and location of boats, aircraft, and people in distress.
G GPL
General Public License
GPS
Global Positioning System
L LGPL
Lesser General Public License
P PTT
Push To Talk
67
Glossary
T TU
Transceiver Unit
U UTC
Coordinated Universal Time. The International Atomic Time (TAI) with leap seconds added at irregular intervals to compensate for the Earth’s slowing rotation. Leap seconds are used to allow UTC to closely track UT1, which is mean solar time at the Royal Observatory, Greenwich.
V VDR
Voyage Data Recorder, a data recording system designed for all vessels required to comply with the IMO’s International Convention SOLAS Requirements in order to collect data from various sensors on board the vessel.
VHF
Very High Frequency
68
DDDDD
Index Index Numerics
B
16/C, 10, 15 90 s replay, 37
background sessions DSC, 33 backlight, 1 dim, 10 Bi, 66 Bi channels, 66 browse channels, 10
A acknowledgement, distress, 23 action line, display, 3 activate scan resume, 39 scanning, 20 watch, 19 ADD, 35 add a contact, 35 adjust speaker volume, 10 squelch, 14 Alarm Panel manual, ix alarm panel Distress, 24 ALERT, 22 ALT, 66 ALT channel table, 41 ATIS code, 40 change, 45 attenuation control, 18 Auto-Ack Individual, 43 Polling, 42 Position, 42 Test, 42
C CA channel table, 41 CA channels, 65 CALL, 35 call Distress procedure, v DSC, 20 call log, DSC, 44 cancelling distress, 23 change dual and triple watch, 19 channel add to scan, 20 remove from scan, 20 select, 10, 11 working, 10, 11 channel table ALT, 41, 66 Bi, 66 CA, 41, 65 INT, 63 PRIV, 41, 66 US, 41, 64
Index
D
69
Index
channels Bi, 66 CA, 65 international, 63 primary, 17 private, 17 US, 64 weather, 17 Colour theme, 44 Comm Inactivity, 43 configuration system example, 7 contact, 47 adding, 35 deleting, 36 editing, 36 control over radio transmitter, 28 controls, front plate, 2 cradle for 6201, installation, 4
D data rate NMEA, 60 deactivate watch, 19 default reset, 44 DELETE, 36 delete contact, 36 dim, 10 display, 3 display colour change, 44
70
distress acknowledgement, 23 cancelling, 23 display, 21 message relay, 25 nature, 21 power failure, 24 received calls, 26 send from alarm panel, 24 time since activation, 21 distress alert, 22 distress button, 21 distress channel, 10, 15 Distress procedure, v Distress timeout, 43 document number, this manual, i DROBOS, 13, 25 DSC background sessions, 33 call log, 27, 44 calls, 20 loopback test, 48 multiple calls, 33 session definition, 28 DSC alarms non distress, 43 DSC call logs setup, 44 DSC self test, 43 DSC session, 28 typical display, 29 DSC soft keys, 30 DSC window, 29 dual watch, 39 change to triple, 19
E
I
editing a contact, 36 Emergency call sheet, ix emergency calls, v engagement status, 18 enter position manually, 12 EPIRB nature in DROBOS, 25 error messages, 47
icons session state, 29 input NMEA, 44 installation cradle for 6201, 4 handset cradle, 4 installation guide, A3, ix installation manual, ix Alarm Panel, ix INT, 63 IP address, 44 IP rating, 58
factory defaults, 44 FILTER, 20 frequency range, VHF, 58 front plate, controls, 2 fuse Power Converter, 53 VHF radio, 53
G GPS data, 12 GPS position display, 12
H Handmicrophone, 11 handset cradle installation, 4 hang time, 39 how to replace, 53
K Index
F
DDDDD
Index
key 16/C, 10, 15 keys on front plate, 2 knob selector, 2 volume, 2
L license software, ii LO/HI, 18 LOCAL, 18 louder, volume, 10 low power override, 18 set to 1 W, 18
M manual, document number, i
71
Index
maritime channels, 63 MAYDAY, v medical transport, 43 menu, overview, 46 message replay, 37 MMSI change, 45 wrong number in the radio, 50 monitor power supply, 42 MORE, 13 multiple calls, DSC, 33 mute speaker, 14
N nature of distress, 21 neutral crafts, 43 night vision, how to dim, 10 NMEA data rate, 60 input, 44 Non-dist Inactivity, 43 Non-distr.alarms, 43
O overriding low power, 18
P password, 45 PHBOOK, 35 phone book, 34 add contact, 35 delete a contact, 36 edit a contact, 36
72
position enter manually, 12 position data enter manually, 42 position Info, 42 power fuse, 53 off, 10 on, 10 Power Converter fuse, 53 power failure distress, 24 power supply monitor, 42 Print DSC, 43 priority scan, 39 PRIV, 66 channel table, 41 private channels, 17, 58, 66 PTT button, 15
R radio call making, 16 receiving, 15 radio transmitter control, 33 control over, 28 received distress calls, 26 relay distress message on someone else, 25 replay, 1, 37 button, 2 reset to default, 44 resume time, 39
behalf
of
S safety summary, iv salt deposits, 47 scan add channel, 20 hang time, 39 priority, 39 remove channel, 20 resume time, 39 resume, activate, 39 start, 20 selector knob, 2, 10 self test, 48 DSC, 43 semi duplex, 1 serial number, 44 service line, display, 3 session INFO key, 32 line, 29 soft keys, 30 state icons, 29 status, 30 what is, 28 setup controller, 45 DSC call logs, 44 overview, 46 parameters, 46 Radio, 39 system, 44 watch, 39 simplex, 1
soft key, 13 ADD, 35 ALERT, 22 CALL, 35 DELETE, 36 DISACK, 26 DROBOS, 13, 25 DSC, 30 FILTER, 20 LOCAL, 18 MORE, 13 OVRIDE, 18 PHBOOK, 35 RELAY, 25 STOP, 37 TAG, 20 WATCH, 19 soft keys, 13 softer, volume, 10 software license, ii Software version, 44 speaker volume, 10 speaking devices, 11 specifications, 57 squelch, 14 squelch control, 2, 14 STOP, 37 stop replaying a message, 37 watch or scan, 19, 20 support, 47 system configuration example, 7 system setup, 44
Index
RF exposure hazards, iv run DSC self test, 43
DDDDD
Index
73
Index
T
W
TAG, 20 remove, 20 tagged channels view, 20 technical data, 57 temperature operational, 57, 61 storage, 57, 61 theme colour, change, 44 timeout, 44 Distress, 43 non distress, 43 VHF and other non distress, 43 triple watch, 39 change to dual, 19
warnings, 47 warranty, 54 limitation, iv WATCH, 19 watch dual and triple, 19 dual or triple, 39 setup, 39 start, 19 stop, 19 water ingress, 58 weather channels, 17 weight, 57, 61 working channel, 10, 11
U US, 64 US channel table, 41, 64 Use GPS, 12 UTC time, 3 enter manually, 12
V VHF channels, 16 frequency range, 58 volume louder, 10 softer, 10 speaker, 10 Volume knob, 2
74
98-131184-B
Thrane & Thrane A/S
•
[email protected]
•
www.thrane.com
This page left intentionally blank
Index divider: Section 5 N
Document Type:
Document name:
SYSTEM USER MANUAL
BRI – D55001 – 01IU
Project Title:
Date First Issue:
Author:
Revision:
22.09.2011
EKI
A
Furuno NX-700B Navtex
Enclosed documents from sub-supplier & revision history: Revision: (A,B,C,……..)
Description / Enclosed documents:
Date: (dd.mm.yyyy)
Sign.:
A
Furuno_NX-700_Navtex_Operator manual_Rev-D3
22.09.2011
EKI
Component picture:
Ulstein Power & Control AS
This document and its content is the property of ULSTEIN. Nonpublic information contained herein shall be treated as Confidential Information. No use, copying, citation or publication of this document or its content is permitted without prior written consent from ULSTEIN. Any conflicts arising from unauthorized use shall be governed by the laws of Norway.
File Name:
Page:
BRI-D55001-01IU (A) System User Manual.doc
Page 1 of 1
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
NAVTEX RECEIVER MODEL
NX-700A/B
www.furuno.co.jp
The paper used in this manual is elemental chlorine free.
・FURUNO Authorized Distributor/Dealer 9-52 Ashihara-cho, Nishinomiya, 662-8580, JAPAN Telephone : +81-(0)798-65-2111 Fax
: +81-(0)798-65-4200
All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan
A : MAY 2005 D3 : APR . 30, 2009
Pub. No. OME-56490-D3 (HIMA )
NX-700A/B
*00015280413* *00015280413* * 0 0 0 1 5 2 8 0 4 1 3 *
IMPORTANT NOTICE General •
The operator of this equipment must read and follow the descriptions in this manual. Wrong operation or maintenance can cancel the warranty or cause injury.
•
Do not copy any part of this manual without written permission from FURUNO.
•
If this manual is lost or worn, contact your dealer about replacement.
•
The contents of this manual and equipment specifications can change without notice.
•
The example screens (or illustrations) shown in this manual can be different from the screens you see on your display. The screens you see depend on your system configuration and equipment settings.
•
Save this manual for future reference.
•
Any modification of the equipment (including software) by persons not authorized by FURUNO will cancel the warranty.
•
All brand and product names are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of their respective holders.
How to discard this product Discard this product according to local regulations for the disposal of industrial waste. For disposal in the USA, see the homepage of the Electronics Industries Alliance (http://www.eiae.org/) for the correct method of disposal.
How to discard a used battery Some FURUNO products have a battery(ies). To see if your product has a battery(ies), see the chapter on Maintenance. Follow the instructions below if a battery(ies) is used. In the European Union The crossed-out trash can symbol indicates that all types of batteries must not be discarded in standard trash, or at a trash site. Take the used batteries to a battery collection site according to your national legislation and the Batteries Directive 2006/66/EU.
Cd
In the USA The Mobius loop symbol (three chasing arrows) indicates that Ni-Cd and lead-acid rechargeable batteries must be recycled. Take the used batteries to a battery collection site according to local laws.
Ni-Cd
Pb
In the other countries There are no international standards for the battery recycle symbol. The number of symbols can increase when the other countries make their own recycling symbols in the future.
i
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read these safety instructions before you operate the equipment.
WARNING
Indicates a condition that can cause death or serious injury if not avoided.
CAUTION
Indicates a condition that can cause minor or moderate injury if not avoided.
Warning, Caution
Mandatory Action
Prohibitive Action
Safety information for the Operator WARNING
CAUTION
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
A warning label is attached to the equipment. Do not remove the label. If the label is missing or damaged, contact a FURUNO agent or dealer about replacement.
Do not open the equipment. Only qualified personnel should work inside the equipment.
WARNING
Do not disassemble or modify the equipment.
To avoid electrical shock, do not remove cover. No user-serviceable parts inside.
Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can result. Immediately turn off the power at the switchboard if the equipment is emitting smoke or fire. Continued use of the equipment can cause fire or electrical shock. Contact a FURUNO agent for service. Keep heater away from equipment. A heater can melt the equipment's power cord, which can cause fire or electrical shock. Use the proper fuse. Fuse rating is shown on the equipment. Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage to the equipment.
ii
Name: Warning Label (1) Type: 86-003-1011-1 Code No.: 100-236-231
Safety information for the Installer CAUTION
WARNING Do not open the equipment unless totally familiar with electrical circuits and service manual. ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
Observe the following compass safe distances to prevent deviation of a magnetic compass. Standard Steering
Only qualified personnel should work inside the equipment.
Display unit
NX-700A
1.45 m
0.95 m
NX-700B
0.30 m
0.30 m
1.15 m
0.75 m
Receiver unit NX-7001
Turn off the power at the mains switchboard before beginning the installation.
Attach securely protective earth to the ship's body.
Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can result if the power is left on or is applied while the equipment is being installed.
The protective earth is required to the power supply to prevent electrical shock.
iii
FOREWORD Congratulations on your choice of the FURUNO NX-700A/B NAVTEX Receiver. We are confident that you will enjoy many years of operation with this fine piece of equipment. For over 60 years, Furuno Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for quality and reliability throughout the world. Our extensive global network of agents and dealers furthers this dedication to excellence. The NX-700A/B is just one of the many Furuno developments in the field of marine radio communication. NX-700A: Display unit w/printer NX-700B: Display unit w/o printer This NX-700A/B provides cost-effective price, high sensitivity and simple operation in one compact and light-weight unit. In addition to its fundamental function of receiving NAVTEX broadcasts, this unit can also function as nav data display when connected to navigation equipment. This unit is designed and constructed to ensure the user many years of trouble-free operation. To obtain full performance from the equipment, however, you should carefully read and follow the recommended procedures for installation, operation and maintenance. No machine can perform its intended functions unless it is installed and maintained properly. Thank you for considering and purchasing FURUNO equipment.
iv
Features NAVTEX (Navigational Telex) is a world wide coastal telex broadcasting system. Coastal NAVTEX broadcasting stations with specific ID’s transmit Navigational warnings. Meteorological warnings, Search and Rescue (SAR) information and other navigational information for NAVTEX receiver-equipped vessels sailing in coastal waters. The FURUNO NX-700 NAVTEX receiver receives NAVTEX messages and automatically displays them together with station ID and message category information. If ship’s position data is fed from navigation equipment, the NX-700 automatically decides in which NAVAREA the vessel is navigating, and selects stations. (NAVAREAs are geographical zones defined by the international Maritime Organization.) -Meets the following standards and regulations MSC.148 (77) IMO A.694 (17) IEC61097-6 Ed. 2 (2005-12) IEC 60945 Ed. 3 and 4 IEC 61162-1 and 2 EN 300 065 V 1.1.3 EN 301 011 V 1.1.1 (1998-09) ITU-R M.540-2 ITU-R M.625-3 -Receives 518 kHz and another (490 or 4209.5 kHz) at the same time -5” LCD display -Prints out the message selected -Bright 76 x 100 mm, monochrome LCD, 240 x 320 dots with adjustable contrast and brilliance -Low power consumption -Displays the NAV data (date, own ship’s position, speed and course) or distance (distance between own ship’s position and information mentioned in the message) at the bottom of screen
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS EQUIPMENT LISTS ........................................................................................... viii SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS .............................................................................. x 1. PRINCIPLE OF NAVTEX SYSTEM ............................................................... 1-1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
How NAVTEX Works ................................................................................................. 1-1 NAVTEX System Operation....................................................................................... 1-1 Message Format ....................................................................................................... 1-2 NAVTEX Station Map ................................................................................................ 1-3 NAVTEX Station List.................................................................................................. 1-4
2. OPERATION................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13 2.14 2.15 2.16
Operating Controls .................................................................................................... 2-1 Turn the Unit On/Off .................................................................................................. 2-1 Adjusting LCD Dimmer.............................................................................................. 2-2 Confirming the New Message.................................................................................... 2-3 Sample Messages..................................................................................................... 2-4 Choosing the Receive Mode ..................................................................................... 2-5 Choosing the Local Frequency .................................................................................. 2-6 Editing the Setting for Station and Message .............................................................. 2-6 Switching the Frequency to Display........................................................................... 2-8 Alarm Messages........................................................................................................ 2-8 Processing Messages ............................................................................................... 2-9 Printing Messages....................................................................................................2-11 Editing the NAVTEX Station List .............................................................................. 2-12 Icons ....................................................................................................................... 2-15 Messages List ......................................................................................................... 2-16 Other Functions....................................................................................................... 2-17
3. MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................... 3-1 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5
Maintenance.............................................................................................................. 3-1 Replacement of Fuse, Battery and Thermal Paper .................................................... 3-2 Troubleshooting......................................................................................................... 3-4 Diagnostics................................................................................................................ 3-5 Restoring All Default Settings .................................................................................... 3-6
4. INSTALLATION .............................................................................................. 4-1 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7
Display Unit ............................................................................................................... 4-1 Receiver Unit............................................................................................................. 4-3 Antenna Unit ............................................................................................................. 4-4 Printer (NX-700B only) .............................................................................................. 4-5 Wiring........................................................................................................................ 4-5 Setting of Printer...................................................................................................... 4-10 Digital Interfacing......................................................................................................4-11
vi
MENU TREE.................................................................................................... AP-1 SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................... SP-1 PACKING LISTS ............................................................................................... A-1 OUTLINE DRAWINGS ...................................................................................... D-1 INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM.......................................................................S-1
vii
EQUIPMENT LISTS Standard Supply Name Display Unit Receiver Unit Antenna Unit
Installation Materials
Spare Parts Accessories
Type NX-700A NX-700B NX-7001 NX-7H CP08-01810 CP08-01820 CP08-01870 CP08-01880 CP08-01890
Code No. 000-040-180 000-040-210 000-040-350 000-040-362 000-040-363
CP08-01860
000-040-349
CP08-01863*
004-514-530
CP08-01864*
004-514-540
CP08-01861* SP08-02101* FP08-00800*
004-514-350 004-514-370 000-040-396
viii
Qty 1
Remarks w/printer w/o printer
1 1 10 m cable, CP08-01811 20 m cable, CP08-01811* 1 30 m cable, CP08-01811* 40 m cable, CP08-01811* 50 m cable, CP08-01811* DSUB25P cable, between 1 Display and Receiver Units For Antenna Unit w/o antenna 1 cable For Antenna Unit w/ antenna cable. 1 For Display Unit 1 Fuse for Receiver Unit* 1 For NX-700A *: See the back of this manual.
Optional Supply Name Thermal Paper Flush Mount Kit AC-DC Power
Type TP058-30CL OP08-19 OP08-20 PR-240
Code No. 000-154-047 004-515-260 004-515-270 000-053-373 000-041-174 000-041-175 000-041-176 000-041-177 000-041-178 005-948-250 005-948-260 005-948-270 005-948-280 005-948-290 000-563-048 000-126-000 000-126-001 000-152-698 000-152-699 000-152-700 000-152-701
Qty 1 set 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
No.13-QA330
000-803-239
1
No.13-QA310
000-803-240
No.13-RC5160
000-806-114
CP20-01111 NX-700A NX-700B
004-365-780 -
OP04-2 Extension Cable Kit OP08-12
Coaxial Cable
RG-10/U-Y
Cable Assy
DSUB25P-DSUB25P
Right Angle Mounting Base L-Angle Mounting Base Handrail Mounting Base Mast Mounting Kit Display Unit
ix
1 1 1 1
Remarks For NX-700A For NX-700A For NX-700B 10 m, w/connector 20 m, w/connector 30 m, w/connector 40 m, w/connector 50 m, w/connector 10 m 20 m 30 m 40 m 50 m 30 m 40 m 50 m 3m 5m 10 m 15 m For antenna unit NX-7H
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS DISPLAY UNIT NX-700A
DISPLAY UNIT NX-700B
ANTENNA UNIT NX-7H
or
Max. 15 m
Max. 100 m
RECEIVER UNIT NX-7001
External Alarm Rectifier PR-240
Printer (NX-700B only) INS (Integrated Navigation System) or Navigator
Power supply 100-115/ 200-230 VAC. 1 , 50/60 Hz
Power supply 12-24 VDC
: Standard : Option : User supply
Environmental Category Antenna unit
To be installed in an exposed area
Display unit Receiver unit
To be installed in a protected area
x
1.
PRINCIPLE OF NAVTEX SYSTEM
1.1
How NAVTEX Works NAVTEX is an acronym meaning Navigational Telex, and as its name shows, it is a kind of narrow band radio teletype system for sending (by frequency shift keying) text messages expressed in a 7-unit code. The difference is that a NAVTEX transmitter transmits nine control characters (header code) ahead of the main message, so that the receiver can identify the station, message type and serial number automatically.
1.2
NAVTEX System Operation For navigation purposes, the world is divided into 16 areas as shown in the figure below. Each Navtex station has an identification code, from “A” to “Z”. The frequency assigned to Navtex are 518 kHz and another (490 or 4209.5 kHz), and many stations exist in the same service coverage.
If the stations were to transmit without any rule, the system would collapse due to mutual interference. To avoid this problem, the following rules apply.
• The transmission schedule is determined so that two or more stations having a common service area may not overlap in time. • Each station transmits with minimum required power to cover its service area (200 to 400 nautical miles nominal).
1-1
1. PRINCIPLE OF NAVTEX SYSTEM
1.3
Message Format For automatic identification of messages, each message starts with nine control characters, called “Header codes”. The first five characters are always “ZCZC_“ and common to all messages. This part is used for message synchronization. The latter four characters are designed as B1, B2, B3 and B4 indicate origin, category and serial number of the message. Character B1 is the identification letter of the Navtex station “A” thru “Z”. Character B2 indicates the type of message. “A” thru “Z”, as listed below. Character B3 and B4 indicate the serial number of the message. The serial numbers are counted up from “01” to “99”, and starts from “01” again. Number “00” is specially reserved for important emergency messages. The end of each message is indicated by “NNNN” (four successive N’s). General message format is summarized below.
Header code ZCZC
B1 B2 B3 B4
main message
Start code (sync)
Main message
NNNN Termination code
Serial number "00": Emergency message "01" - "99": Normal message Type of message "A" - "Z" (See the list below.) Station ID "A" - "Z"
1-2
A:
[Type of message (category)] navigational warning
I:
reserved presently not used
B:
meteorological warning
J:
SATNAV message
C:
ice report
K:
other electronic navigational aid system message
D:
search and rescue information/piracy L: and armed robbery
navigational warning (additional)
E:
meteorological forecast
M to Y:
reserved presently not used
F:
pilot message
G:
AIS
H:
LORAN-C message
Z:
QRU (no message on hand)
1. PRINCIPLE OF NAVTEX SYSTEM
1.4
NAVTEX Station Map
1-3
1. PRINCIPLE OF NAVTEX SYSTEM
1.5 NAV area I
NAVTEX Station List Station
Country
Longitude
Freq.
Area Station
(kHz)
(nm)
ID
Broadcast schedule (UTC)
Belgium
Oostende
51 11 N
02 48 E
518
55
T
0310, 0710, 1110, 1510, 1910, 2310
Estonia
Tallinn
59 30 N
24 30 E
518
250
U
0320, 0720, 1120, 1520, 1920, 2320
518
550
R
0250, 0650, 1050, 1450, 1850, 2250
Iceland
Reykjavik Radio
64 05 N
21 51 W 490
550
R
0318, 0718, 1118, 1518, 1918, 2318
Ireland
Valentia
51 27 N
09 49 W
518
400
W
0340, 0740, 1140, 1540, 1940, 2340
Malin Head
55 22 N
07 21 W
518
400
Q
0240, 0640, 1040, 1440, 1840, 2240
France
Niton
50 35 N
01 18 W
518
270
K
0140, 0540, 0940, 1340, 1740, 2140
Netherlands
Den Helder
52 06 N
04 15 E
518
110
P
0230, 0630, 1030, 1430, 1830, 2230
Norway
Bodo Radio
67 16 N
14 23 E
518
450
B
0010, 0410, 0810, 1210, 1610, 2010
Rogaland Radio
58 48 N
05 34 E
518
450
L
0150, 0550, 0950, 1350, 1750, 2150
Vardoe Radio
70 22 N
31 06 E
518
450
V
0330, 0730, 1130, 1530, 1930, 2330
Svalbard
78 04 N
13 38 E
518
450
A
0000, 0400, 0800, 1200, 1600, 2000
Orlandet
63 40 N
09 33 E
518
450
N
0210, 0610, 1010, 1410, 1810, 2210
Bjuroklubb
64 28 N
21 36 E
518
300
H
0110, 0510, 0910, 1310, 1710, 2110
Gislovshammar
55 29 N
14 19 E
518
300
J
0130, 0530, 0930, 1330, 1730, 2130
Grimeton
57 06 N
12 23 E
518
300
D
0030, 0430, 0830, 1230, 1630, 2030
518
270
G
0100, 0500, 0900, 1300, 1700, 2100
Cullercoats
55 02 N
01 26 W 490
270
U
0320, 0720, 1120, 1520, 1920, 2320
518
270
O
0220, 0620, 1020, 1420, 1820, 2220
490
270
C
0020, 0420, 0820, 1220, 1620, 2020
518
270
E
0040, 0440, 0840, 1240, 1640, 2040
490
270
I
0120, 0520, 0920, 1320, 1720, 2120
518
150
M
0200, 0600, 1000, 1400, 1800, 2200
518
300
A
0000, 0400, 0800, 1200, 1600, 2000
490
300
E
0040, 0440, 0840, 1240, 1640, 2040
Sweden
United Kingdom
Portpatrick
Niton
II
Latitude
France
Portugal
Spain
54 51 N
50 35 N
05 07 W
01 18 W
Oostende
51 11 N
02 48 E
Cross Corsen
48 28 N
05 03 W
Niton
50 35 N
01 18 W
490
270
T
0310, 0710, 1110, 1510, 1910, 2310
Horta
38 32 N
28 38 W
518
640
F
0050, 0450, 0850, 1250, 1650, 2050
518
530
R
0250, 0650, 1050, 1450, 1850, 2250
Monsanto
38 44 N
09 11 W 490
530
G
0100, 0500, 0900, 1300, 1700, 2100
Coruna
43 21 N
08 27 W
518
400
D
0030, 0430, 0830, 1230, 1630, 2030
Tarifa
36 01 N
05 34 W
518
400
G
0100, 0500, 0900, 1300, 1700, 2100
Las Palmas
28 10 N
15 25 W
518
400
I
0120, 0520, 0920, 1320, 1720, 2120
(Continued on next page)
1-4
1. PRINCIPLE OF NAVTEX SYSTEM
NAV area III
Country
Latitude
Longitude
Freq.
Area
Station
(kHz)
(nm)
ID
Broadcast schedule (UTC)
Bulgaria
Varna
43 04 N
27 46 E
518
350
J
0130, 0530, 0930, 1330, 1730, 2130
Croatia
Split radio
43 30 N
16 29 E
518
85
Q
0240, 0640, 1040, 1440, 1840, 2240
Cyprus
Cypradio
35 03 N
33 17 E
518
200
M
0200, 0600, 1000, 1400, 1800, 2200
Egypt
Alexandria
31 12 N
29 52 E
518
350
N
0210, 0610, 1010, 1410, 1810, 2210
Serapeum
30 28 N
32 22 E
4209.5
400
X
0750, 1150
518
250
W
0340, 0740, 1340, 1540, 1940, 2340
Toulon
43 06 N
05 59 E 490
250
S
0300, 0700, 1100, 1500, 1900, 2300
France
Greece
Iraklion
35 20 N
25 07 E
518
280
H
0110, 0510, 0910, 1310, 1710, 2110
Kerkyra
39 37 N
19 55 E
518
280
K
0140, 0540, 0940, 1340, 1740, 2140
Limnos
39 52 N
25 04 E
518
280
L
0150, 0550, 0950, 1350, 1750, 2150
Israel
Haifa
32 49 N
35 00 E
518
200
P
0020, 0420, 0820, 1220, 1620, 2020
Italy
Roma
41 48 N
12 31 E
518
320
R
0250, 0650, 1050, 1450, 1850, 2250
Augusta
37 14 N
15 14 E
518
320
V
0330, 0730, 1130, 1530, 1930, 2330
Cagliari
39 14 N
09 14 E
518
320
T
0310, 0710, 1110, 1510, 1910, 2310
Trieste
45 41 N
13 46 E
518
320
U
0320, 0720, 1120, 1520, 1920, 2320
Malta
Malta
35 49 N
14 32 E
518
400
O
0220, 0620, 1020, 1420, 1820, 2220
Russian Federation
Novorossiysk
44 42 N
37 44 E
518
300
A
0300, 0700, 1100, 1500, 1900, 2300
Spain
Cabo de la Nao
38 43 N
00 09 E
518
300
X
0350, 0750, 1150, 1550, 1950, 2350
Turkey
Istanbul
41 04 N
28 57 E
518
300
D
0030, 0430, 0830, 1230, 1630, 2030
Samsun
41 17 N
36 20 E
518
300
E
0040, 0440, 0840, 1240, 1640, 2040
Antalya
36 53 N
30 42 E
518
300
F
0050, 0450, 0850, 1250, 1650, 2050
Izmir
38 22 N
26 36 E
518
300
I
0120, 0520, 0920, 1320, 1720, 2120
Mariupol
47 06 N
37 33 E
518
280
B
0100, 0500, 0900, 1300, 1700, 2100
Odessa
46 29 N
30 44 E
518
280
C
0230, 0630, 1030, 1430, 1830, 2230
Bermuda
32 23 N
64 41 W
518
280
B
0010, 0410, 0810, 1210, 1610, 2010
Riviere-au-Renard
50 11 N
66 07 W
518
300
C D
0020, 0420, 0820, 1220, 1620, 2020 0035, 0435, 0835, 1235, 1635, 2035
Wiarton
44 20 N
81 10 W
518
300
H
0110, 0510, 0910, 1310, 1710, 2110
St. Johns
47 30 N
52 40 W
518
300
O
0220, 0620, 1020, 1420, 1820, 2220
Thunder Bay
48 25 N
89 20 W
518
300
P
0230, 0630, 1030, 1430, 1830, 2230
Sydney, NS
46 10 N
60 00 W
518
300
Q
0240, 0640, 1040, 1440, 1840, 2240
J
0255, 0655, 1055, 1455, 1855, 2255
Yarmouth
43 45 N
66 10 W
518
300
U
0320, 0720, 1120, 1520, 1920, 2320
V
0335, 0735, 1135, 1535, 1935, 2335
Ukraine
IV
Station
Bermuda (UK) Canada
(Continued on next page)
1-5
1. PRINCIPLE OF NAVTEX SYSTEM
NAV area IV
Country Canada
United States
Netherlands Antilles
Station
Latitude
Longitude
Labrador
53 42 N
57 01 W
Iqaluit, NU
63 43 N
68 33 W
518
300
X
0350, 0750, 1150, 1550, 1950, 2350
518
300
T
0310, 0710, 1110, 1510, 1910, 2310
490
300
S
0300, 0700, 1100, 1500, 1900, 2300
Broadcast schedule (UTC)
518
240
A
0000, 0400, 0800, 1200, 1600, 2000
Boston
41 43 N
70 30 W
518
200
F
0445, 0845, 1245, 1645, 2045, 0045
New Orleans
29 53 N
89 57 W
518
200
G
0300, 0700, 1100, 1500, 1900, 2300
Portsmouth
36 43 N
76 00 W
518
280
N
0130, 0530, 0930, 1330, 1730, 2130
Isabella
18 28 N
67 04 W
518
200
R
0200, 0600, 1000, 1400, 1800, 2200
Savannah, GA
32 08 N
81 42 W
518
200
E
0040, 0440, 0840, 1240, 1640, 2040
Curacao
12 10 N
68 52 W
518
400
H
0110, 0510, 0910, 1310, 1710, 2110
NIL Argentina
Uruguay
IX
ID
80 23 W
Ushaia
54 48 S
68 18 W
518
280
M
0200, 0600, 1000, 1400, 1800, 2200
Rio Gallegos
51 37 S
65 03 W
518
280
N
0210, 0610, 1010, 1410, 1810, 2210
45 51 S
67 25 W
518
280
O
0220, 0620, 1020, 1420, 1820, 2220
Bahia Blanca
38 43 S
62 06 W
518
280
P
0230, 0630, 1030, 1430, 1830, 2230
Mar del Plata
38 03 S
57 32 W
518
280
Q
0240, 0640, 1040, 1440, 1840, 2240
Buenos Aires
34 36 S
58 22 W
518
560
R
0250, 0650, 1050, 1450, 1850, 2250
518
280
F
0050, 0450, 0850, 1250, 1650, 2050
La Paloma
34 40 S
54 09 W 490
280
A
0000, 0400, 0800, 1200, 1600, 2000
Rivadavia
VIII
Station
(nm)
25 37 N
Comodoro
VII
Area
Miami
V VI
Freq. (kHz)
Namibia
Walvis Bay
23 03 S
14 37 E
518
378
B
0010, 0410, 0810, 1210, 1610, 2010
South Africa
Cape Town
33 40 S
18 43 E
518
500
C
0020, 0420, 0820, 1220, 1620, 2020
Port Elizabeth
34 02 S
25 33 E
518
500
I
0120, 0520, 0920, 1320, 1720, 2120
Durban
30 00 S
31 30 E
518
500
O
0220, 0620, 1020, 1420, 1820, 2220
Mumbay
19 05 N
72 50 E
518
250
G
0100, 0500, 0900, 1300, 1700, 2100
Madras
13 08 N
80 10 E
518
400
P
0230, 0630, 1030, 1430, 1830, 2230
Mauritius
Mauritius Radio
20 10 S
57 28 E
518
400
C
0020, 0420, 0820, 1220, 1620, 2020
Bahrain
Hamala
26 09 N
50 28 E
518
300
B
0010, 0410, 0810, 1210, 1610, 2010
518
200
X
0350, 0750, 1150, 1550, 1950, 2350
Egypt
Serapeum
30 28 N
32 22 E 4209.5
200
X
0750, 1150
India
Iran
Kosseir
26 06 N
34 17 E
518
400
V
0330, 0730, 1130, 1530, 1930, 2330
Bushehr
28 59 N
50 50 E
518
300
A
0000, 0400, 0800, 1200, 1600, 2000
Bandar Abbas
27 07 N
56 04 E
518
300
F
0050, 0450, 0850, 1250, 1650, 2050
(Continued on next page)
1-6
1. PRINCIPLE OF NAVTEX SYSTEM
NAV area IX
Station
Country
Latitude
Longitude
Freq. (kHz)
Area (nm)
Station ID
Saudi Arabia
Jeddah
21 23 N
39 10 E
518
390
H
0705, 1305, 1905
Oman
Muscat
23 36 N
58 30 E
518
270
M
0200, 0600, 1000, 1400, 1800, 2200
Pakistan
Karachi
24 51 N
67 03 E
518
400
P
0230, 0630, 1030, 1430, 1830, 2230
X XI
Broadcast schedule (UTC)
NIL China
Indonesia
Japan
Korea, Republic of
Sanya
18 14 N
109 30 E
518
250
M
0200, 0600, 1000, 1400, 2200
Guangzhou
23 08 N
113 32 E
518
250
N
0210, 0610, 1010, 1410, 2210
Fuzhou
26 01 N
119 18 E
518
250
O
0220, 0620, 1020, 1420, 2220
Shanghai
31 08 N
121 33 E
518
250
Q
0240, 0640, 1040, 1440, 2240
Dalian
38 52 N
121 31 E
518
250
R
0250, 0650, 1050, 1450, 2250
Jayapura
02 31 S
140 43 E
518
300
A
0000, 0400, 0800, 1200, 1600, 2000
Ambon
03 42 S
128 12 E
518
300
B
0010, 0410, 0810, 1210, 1610, 2010
Makassar
05 06 S
119 26 E
518
300
D
0030, 0430, 0830, 1230, 1830, 2030
Jakarta
06 06 S
106 54 E
518
300
E
0040, 0440, 0840, 1240, 1640, 2040
Otaru
43 19 N
140 27 E
518
400
J
0130, 0530, 0930, 1330, 1730, 2130
Kushiro
42 57 N
144 36 E
518
400
K
0140, 0540, 0940, 1340, 1740, 2140
Yokohama
35 14 N
139 55 E
518
400
I
0120, 0520, 0920, 1320, 1720, 2120
Moji
34 01 N
130 56 E
518
400
H
0110, 0510, 0910, 1310, 1710, 2110
Naha
26 05 N
127 40 E
518
400
G
0100, 0500, 0900, 1300, 1700, 2100
518
200
V
0330, 0730, 1130, 1530, 1930, 2330
Chukpyong
37 03 N
129 26 E 490
200
J
0130, 0530, 0930, 1330, 1730, 2130
518
200
W
0340, 0740, 1340, 1540, 1940, 2340
490
200
K
0140, 0540, 0940, 1340, 1740, 2140
Pyongsan
Malaysia
35 36 N
126 29 E
Penang
05 26 N
100 24 E
518
350
U
0320, 0720, 1120, 1520, 1920, 2320
Miri
04 28 N
114 01 E
518
350
T
0310, 0710, 1110, 1510, 1910, 2310
Sandakan
05 54 N
118 00 E
518
350
S
0300, 0700, 1100, 1500, 1900, 2300
Singapore
Singapore
01 25 N
103 52 E
518
400
C
0020-0030, 0420-0430, 0820-0830, 1220-1230, 1620-1630, 2020-2030
Thailand
Bangkok Radio
13 43 N
100 34 E
518
200
F
0050, 0450, 0850, 1250
United States
Guam
13 29 N
144 50 E
518
100
V
0100, 0500, 0900, 1300, 1700, 2100
(Continued on next page)
1-7
1. PRINCIPLE OF NAVTEX SYSTEM
NAV area XI
Vietnam
Taiwan Associate Member of IMO XII
Canada
United States
XIII
Station
Country
Russian Federation
Latitude
Longitude
Ho Chi Minh City
10 47 N
106 40 E
Haiphong
20 44 N
106 44 E
XVI
Area
Station
(nm)
ID
518
400
X
0350, 0750, 1150, 1550, 1950, 2350
490
400
W
0340, 1540
4209.5
400
W
0230, 0630, 1030, 1430, 1830, 2230 0140, 0540, 0940, 1340, 1740, 2140
Broadcast schedule (UTC)
Danang
16 05 N
108 13 E
518
400
K
Kaohsiung
22 29 N
120 25 E
518
216
P
Hong Kong
22 13 N
114 15 E
518
400
L
0150, 0550, 0950, 1350, 1750, 2150
Prince Rupert
54 20 N
130 20 W
518
300
D
0030, 0430, 0830, 1230, 1630, 2030
Tofino
48 55 N
125 35 W
518
300
H
0110, 0510, 0910, 1310, 1710, 2110
San Francisco
37 55 N
122 44 W
518
350
C
0400, 0800, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2400
Kodiak
57 46 N
152 34 W
518
200
J
0300, 0700, 1100, 1500, 1900, 2300
Honolulu
21 22 N
158 09 W
518
350
O
0040, 0440, 0840, 1240, 1640, 2040
Cambria
35 31 N
121 03 W
518
350
Q
0445, 0845, 1245, 1645, 2045, 0045
Astoria
46 10 N
123 49 W
518
216
W
0130, 0530, 0930, 1330, 1730, 2130
Kholmsk
47 02 N
142 03 E
518
300
B
0010, 0410, 0810, 1210, 1610, 2010
Murmansk
68 46 N
32 58 E
518
300
C
0020, 0420, 0820, 1220, 1620, 2020
Arkhangelsk
64 51 N
40 17 E
518
300
F
0050, 0450, 0850, 1250, 1650, 2050
Astrakhan
45 47 N
47 33 E
518
250
W
0340, 0740, 1140, 1540, 1940, 2340
A H
0400, 1200, 2000 0000, 0800, 1600
B
0410, 1210, 2010
I
0010, 0810, 1610
C
0420, 1220, 2020
J
0020, 0820, 1620
D
0430, 1230, 2030
K
0030, 0830, 1630
E
0440, 1240, 2040
L
0040, 0840, 1640
XIV
XV
Freq. (kHz)
0230, 0630, 1030, 1430, 1830, 2230
NIL
Chile
Peru
Antofagasta
23 40 S
70 25 W
518
300
Valparaiso
32 48 S
71 29 W
518
300
Talcahuano
36 42 S
73 06 W
518
300
Puerto Montt
41 30 S
72 58 W
518
300
Punta Arenas
53 09 S
70 58 W
518
300
Isla de Pascua
27 09 S
109 25 W
518
300
Paita
05 05 S
81 07 W
518
Callao
12 03 S
77 09 W
Mollendo
17 01 S
72 01 W
F
0450, 1250, 2050
G
0050, 0850, 1650
200
S
0300, 0700, 1100, 1500, 1900, 2300
518
200
U
0320, 0720, 1120, 1520, 1920, 2320
518
200
W
0340, 0740, 1140, 1540, 1940, 2340
Note: The list shows the stations listed at Longwave Navtex Broadcasts (Oct. 2004).
1-8
2.
OPERATION
2.1
Operating Controls Registers items on menus.
Cursor pad -Shifts the cursor and display. -Selects items on menus. ENT
MENU ESC
Opens menu/Returns to the previous display.
LIST
Opens the LIST options.
PRINT
Opens the PRINT options.
DIM
Turns the power on/off.
Adjusts the panel and LCD dimmer. +: Raises the dimmer. - : Decreases the dimmer.
Display unit, front view
2.2
Turning the Unit On/Off Press the key to turn the unit on. A beep sounds and the equipment shows the start up display, where the ROM and RAM are checked for proper operation and the program no. is displayed. The results of the check are shown as OK or NG (No Good). When the results are OK, the list display is shown after five seconds after completion of the check, with frequency last used before turning the power off.
DUAL CHANNEL NAVTEX NX-700 FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. ROM : OK RAM : OK Program No. 0850196-XX
XX: Program version No.
2-1
2. OPERATION
At the default setting, the equipment functions as below; When the results of the check are OK, ALL MESSAGE display for 518 kHz appears. This screen shows all messages received in 518 kHz. You can switch 518 kHz (International message) and 490 kHz (local message) to display. The NX-700A is preset to print all received message out. I L1
All message display (518 kHz) Note 1: To display all received messages in 490 kHz, press ◄ or ►. Note 2: To cancel the printing all received messages out, see page 2-11. To turn the power off, press the
key again.
Note: If NG appears for any test, try to press any key to go to the next stage. The equipment, however, may not be operated properly. Contact your dealer if the problem persists.
2.3
Adjusting LCD Dimmer You can adjust LCD and panel dimmer with the + DIM – key. The adjustment range is 0 (dark) to 9 (bright). +: Raises the dimmer. -: Decreases the dimmer.
2-2
2. OPERATION
2.4
Confirming the New Message When you receive a new message, do one of the following depending on message received. SAR (Search and Rescue) message 1. When an SAR message is received, the audible alert sounds and details for the SAR message appear. Icon for SAR message I
2. Press any key other than
L1
key to silence the alarm.
Other messages 1. When a message other than an SAR message is received, the display shows one of the following windows. Received new int'l msg.
Received new local msg.
Display new msg ? Yes No
Display new msg ? Yes No
International message
Local message
2. If you want to read the message immediately, press ◄ to choose “Yes” and then press the ENT key to display the message To read the message later, choose “No”, and then press the ENT key to close the window.
2-3
2. OPERATION
2.5
Sample Messages Press ▲ or ▼ on the cursor pad to choose a message, and then press the ENT key to show the detailed information for that message. The message list and detailed message displays can be switched by pressing the ENT key. Station ID, type of message, serial No. (two digits, paragraph 1.3)
Frequency (paragraph 2.9) Status icon (paragraph 2.14)
No. of saved messages Category of messages (paragraph 2.11)
I
Status icon (paragraph 2.14) Error rate I
L1
L1
Receiving date
New
ENT key
Old
Operation guide Message icon (paragraph 2.14)
Message list
Detailed message
Note 1: The operation guide at the bottom of screen shows the functions of the keys available for use with the current screen. Note 2: The character size can be changed. For detail, see page 2-18. Key ▲▼ ◄► MENU ENT LIST PRINT
2-4
Display mode List Detailed List Detailed List Detailed List Detailed List Detailed List Detailed
Function Scrolls the list. Scrolls the message. Switches the international and local lists. Shows the newer (◄) or older (►) message. Shows the main menu. Shows the detailed message selected. Shows the message list. Shows the list options. Shows the print options.
2. OPERATION
2.6
Choosing the Receive Mode The NAVTEX menu allows you to select what station to receive, automatically, manually. The Auto mode requires navigation data, and stations are automatically selected according to the distance between own ship and NAVTEX stations. If navigation data is not input, all stations are selected. The manual mode lets you freely stations to receive. The INS mode allows you to set the station, message and local channel from the external equipment (ex. Integrated Navigation System, using NRM or PFEC sentence) connected. Note that Manual should be chosen if you intend to not use the command from the external equipment. 1. Press the MENU/ESC key to show the main menu. Menu NAVTEX System Display Service
Main menu 2. Press ▲ or ▼ to choose NAVTEX. 3. Press the ENT key or ► to open the NAVTEX menu. NAVTEX Mask Mode Manual Auto Rcv Mask On Local Channel 490kHz Rcv Mask INS Output Mask Printer Mask
NAVTEX menu 4. Press ▲ or ▼ to choose Mask Mode, and then press the ENT key or ► to show the mask mode options.
INS Manual Mask mode options 5. Press ▲ or ▼ to choose INS (for INS mode) or Manual (for Auto or Manual mode) as appropriate, and then press the ENT key. When choosing INS, Auto Rcv Mask and Local Channel are disappeared from the NAVTEX menu. 6. For Auto and Manual modes, do the follows. a) Choose Auto Rcv Mask, and then press the ENT key. b) Press ▼ to choose “On” for Auto or “Off” for Manual, and then press ENT key. 7. Press the MENU/ESC key several times to close the menu.
2-5
2. OPERATION
2.7
Choosing the Local Frequency You can choose 490 kHz or 4209.5 kHz as the local frequency on Auto or Manual mode. 1. Press the MENU/ESC key to show the main menu. 2. Press ▲ or ▼ to choose NAVTEX, and then press the ENT key or ►. 3. Press ▲ or ▼ to choose Local Channel, and then press the ENT key or ► to show the local channel options.
490kHz 4209.5kHz Local channel options 4. Press ▲ or ▼ to choose the frequency 490 kHz or 4209.5 kHz, and then press the ENT key. 5. Press the MENU/ESC key several times to close the menu.
2.8
Editing the Settings for Station and Message Stations and messages for receiving/displaying on each station (message) can be edited as below. (NAVTEX menu) Rcv Mask Station You can receive messages by station in Manual mode. Message You can choose the messages to receive in Manual or Auto mode. Note that A/B/D/L cannot be rejected. INS Output Mask You can choose the stations and messages to output to the external equipment. Note that A/B/D/L cannot be rejected. Printer mask Choose the type of message to be print automatically when it is received. Note that A/B/D/L cannot be rejected. (Display Menu) User Select Station & Msg You can choose the type of stations and messages to display on SELECT MESSAGES display (shown by choosing “User Selected Message” after pressing LIST key.) For detail, see page 2-9.
2-6
2. OPERATION
1. Press the MENU/ESC key to show the main menu. 2. Press ▲ or ▼ to choose NAVTEX (for Rcv Mask, INS Output Mask and Printer mask) or Display (for User Select Station & Msg), and then press the ENT key. 3. Press ▲ or ▼ to choose “Rcv Mask”. “INS Output Mask”, “Printer Mask” or “User Select Station & Msg”. 4. Press the ENT key to open the appropriate editing window. (Below is the Rcv Mask editing window.) Receive mode
Rcv Mask Internaitional frequency
[Auto]
[518] Station
Station
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
Message
Message
ABCDEF - H - JKL - - - - - - - - - V - - - Z Local frequency*
[490] Station ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
Message ABCDEF - H - JKL - - - - - - - - - V - - - Z [ ][ ] MOVE [ENT] EDIT [MENU] RETURN TO MENU
*: Local channel selected at Paragraph 2.7.
Edit window (ex. Rcv Mask) 5. Press ▲ or ▼ to choose the item to edit, and then press the ENT key to show the alphabet selection window. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ Cursor
6. Press ◄ or ► to choose the alphabet desired, and then press ▲ or ▼ to choose to receive or not. The alphabet you have chosen not to receive is marked with “-“ (hyphen). 7. Press the ENT key. 8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 to complete. 9. Press the MENU/ESC key to close the window.
2-7
2. OPERATION
2.9
Switching the Frequency to Display With showing the message list, you can switch the frequency to 518 kHz or 490 (or 4209.5) kHz by pressing ◄ or ► key.
Press 518
490 (4209)
Switching the frequency to display
2.10
Alarm Messages The sequence of events when an alarm message is received is as shown below. When receiving SAR (Search and Rescue) message: The audible alarm beep sounds, and the SAR message is shown. Note that All Messages list appears if other list option is chosen when the ENT key is pressed. (See paragraph 2.11.) The aural alarm sounds medium beep. When receiving WARNING message (A/B/L): When the Warn Msg Alm on System menu is set to On, the audible alarm sounds and the message for receiving appears. The aural alarm sounds long beep. Note: When both alarms are received, the aural alarm sounds short beeps. Silencing audible alarm Press any key (except
2-8
key).
2. OPERATION
2.11
Processing Messages Choosing messages to display You can choose which category of messages to display: All, Alarm, User Selected and Good messages. 1. With the message list or detailed message shown, press the LIST key to show the list options. All Messages Alarm Messages User Selected Messages Good Messages Lock Message
List options 2. Press ▲ or ▼ to choose the item. All Messages: Shows all messages received. Alarm Messages: Shows only SAR/WARNING messages. User Selected Messages: Shows messages arranged at User Select Station & Msg on Display menu. Good Messages: Shows messages whose error rate is less than 4%. 3. Press the ENT key to close the window. The list chosen at step 2 appears. Note: When the following messages appear, set the List window to All Messages to show. Urgent message: “Message not chosen for display received; it is a int’l (or local) 00 message. Choose “All Message” (LIST menu) to display.” Normal message: Int’l (or local) message not chosen for display received. Choose “All Message” (LIST menu) to display.”
2-9
2. OPERATION
Protecting message from deleting Messages are automatically deleted from the memory under the following conditions. -66 hours passed from the moment when received. -Older than No. 200 To prevent a message from being deleted, do the follows; 1. Choose the message at the list display. 2. Press the LIST key to show the list options.
All Messages Alarm Messages User Selected Messages Good Messages Lock Message List options 3. Choose Lock Message from the list window. The protect icon ( ) appears next to the message selected. Note 1: To unlock a message, choose it and then select Unlock Message in the list window. (The protect icon disappears.) Note 2: When you unlock a message which was received 66 hours ago or a message that is older than No. 200, it will be deleted promptly when unlocked. Note 3: Maximum each 50 messages for International and local (or 25% of each memory) can be protected.
2-10
2. OPERATION
2.12
Printing Messages Received messages can be printed automatically or manually, from the built-in printer (NX-700A) or external printer (NX-700B). Printing all messages displayed All messages chosen on paragraph 2.11 can be printed out. 1. Press the PRINT key with showing all messages.
Print Cancel Print Print options 2. Press ▲ or ▼ to choose “Print”. 3. Press the ENT key to print. Note: When a message is received while printing some messages, the new one cannot be printed. Printing each message 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to choose the desired message from the list. Press the ENT key to show the detailed information. Press the PRINT key. Press ▲or ▼ to choose “Print” from the window. Press the ENT key to print.
Canceling printing When a menu is displayed, you cannot cancel the printing. 1. Press the PRINT key while showing the messages to open the print window. 2. Press ▼ to choose “Cancel Print” and then press the ENT key.
2-11
2. OPERATION
2.13
Editing the NAVTEX Station List Maximum 300 NAVTEX stations can be registered into the memory. Note: To cancel editing of a NAVTEX station, press the MENU/ESC key. The message “Exit without saving?” appears. Choose “Yes”, and then press ENT key. Adding NAVTEX station You may add a NAVTEX station to the NAVTEX station list as follows: 1. Press the MENU/ESC key to show the main menu. 2. Press ▲ or ▼ to choose Service, and then press the ENT key.
Service INS Input Speed 4800bps INS Output Speed 4800bps Print Header On Edit Station List Default Setting Test Rcv Monitor Service menu 3. Press ▲ or ▼ to choose Edit Station List, and then press the ENT key. Frequency NAV Area
Station name
518kHz NavArea
01
[ New ] Oostende Tallinn Reykjavik Radio Valentia Malin Head Niton Den Helder Bodo Radio Rogaland Radio Vardoe Radio Svalbard
T, - , U, - , R, - , W,- , Q, - , K, - , P, - , B, - , L, - , V, - , A, - , -
[ ][ ] CHANGE NAVAREA [LIST] CHANGE FREQ [ENT] EDIT [MENU] RETURN TO MENU
Edit station list display 4. Confirm that New is chosen, and then press the ENT key to show the addition window appears.
2-12
2. OPERATION
NAV Area Station Name Latitude Longitude Station ID Sertvice Area
NavArea Station Latitude Longitude 518kHz 490kHz 4209.5kHz Range
1 0 00'N 0 00'E ID1: - ID2: - ID3: ID1: - ID2: - ID3: ID1: - ID2: - ID3: 400nm
Save data ? New addition window 5. Confirm that NavArea is chosen, and then press the ENT key to show the area No. window. 6. Press ▲ or ▼ to choose a Nav area No. (1 to 16, and EXT), and then press the ENT key. For NAV area No., see paragraph 1.4. EXT is reserved for future use. 7. Confirm that Station is chosen, and then press ENT key. 8. Enter a station name (Max. 18 characters), and then press the ENT key. a) Press ▲ or ▼ to choose a character. Each press of ▲ shows A -> … -> Z -> a -> … -> z -> 0 -> … -> 9 -> _ -> - -> space in that sequence. b) Press ► to move the cursor to next digit. c) Repeat steps a) and b) to complete the station name. 9. Confirm that Latitude is chosen, and then press the ENT key. 10. Enter the latitude for station, and then press the ENT key. Use ▲ or ▼ to switch to North and South. 11. Confirm that Longitude is chosen, and then press the ENT key. 12. Enter the longitude for station, and then pres the ENT key. Use ▲ or ▼ to switch to East and West. 13. Choose 518kHz, 490kHz or 4209.5kHz, and then press the ENT key. 14. Enter the station ID (A to Z), and then press the ENT key. For multiple stations, fill in ID2 and ID3. 15. Confirm that Range is chosen, and then press the ENT key. 16. Enter the service area (1 to 999 nm), and then press the ENT key. 17. Confirm that Save data? is chosen, and then press the ENT key. The message “Save new station?” appears. 18. Press ◄ to choose “Yes”, and then press ENT key to close the new addition window disappears. Note: If the station ID was not entered at step 14, the message “Enter ID data.” appears. Press any key, and then enter the station ID. 19. To enter another NAVTEX station, repeat steps 4 through 18. 20. Press the MENU/ESC key several times to close the menu.
2-13
2. OPERATION
Editing NAVTEX station Existing NAVTEX station may be edited as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Press the MENU/ESC key to show the main menu. Press ▲ or ▼ to choose Service, and then press the ENT key. Press ▲ or ▼ to choose Edit Station List, and then press the ENT key. Press ◄ or ► to choose the NAV area to be changed (01 to 16, EXT). Press the LIST key to choose the frequency to be changed (518kHz, 490kHz or 4209.5kHz). 6. Press ▲ or ▼ to choose the station, and then press the ENT key.
Edit Delete 7. Press ▲ to choose “Edit”, and then press ENT key to show the edit window appears.
Oostende NAV Area Station Name Latitude Longitude Station ID Service Area
NavArea 1 Station Oostende Latitude 51 11'N Longitude 2 48'E 518kHz ID1: T ID2: - ID3: 490kHz ID1: - ID2: - ID3: 4209.5kHz ID1: A ID2: - ID3: Range 55nm Save data ?
Edit window (Ex. NAVTEX station Oostende) 8. Edit data as appropriate. 9. Confirm that Save station? is chosen, and then press the ENT key. 10. Press ◄ to choose “YES”, and then press the ENT key to erase the edit window. 11. Press the MENU/ESC key several times to close the menu. Deleting NAVTEX stations You may delete unnecessary NAVTEX stations as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Press the MENU/ESC key to show the main menu. Press ▲ or ▼ to choose Service, and then press the ENT key. Press ▲ or ▼ to choose Edit Station List, and then press the ENT key. Press ◄ or ► to choose the NAV area to be deleted. (01 to 16, EXT). Press the LIST key to choose the frequency to be deleted (518kHz, 490kHz or 4209.5kHz). 6. Press ▲ or ▼ to choose the station name to be deleted, and then press ENT key. The item window appears.
2-14
2. OPERATION
Edit Delete 7. Press ▲ or ▼ to choose Delete, and then press the ENT key. The message “Delete station?” appears. 8. Press ◄ to choose “Yes”, and then press the ENT key to close the edit window. 9. Press the MENU/ESC key several times to close the menu.
2.14
Icons The NX-700 shows various icons to denote equipment status, and these are as shown in the table below. Icon
Status
Meaning
Status icon (shown at the tip of display) Blinking
L1
Blinking
L2
Blinking
I
Blinking
L1
Blinking
L2
Blinking
I
Lighting
L1
Lighting
L2
Lighting
Shows that an International frequency (518 kHz) message has not been read. Shows that a Local frequency message has not been read. L1: 490 kHz, L2: 4209.5 kHz While receiving a message. I: International frequency (518 kHz) L1: 490 kHz L2: 4209.5 kHz Appears when the equipment is ready to receive the International frequency. Appears when the equipment is ready to receive the local frequency (L1: 490 kHz, L2: 4209.5 kHz)
Lighting
Displayed when the voltage of the internal battery is low. The message “Battery error” also appears on the display.
X
Lighting
Print error (no paper, not connected to the printer, etc.). The message “Printer error” also appears on the display.
P R
Lighting
While printing.
Message icon (shown next to messages)
NEW
Lighting
Displayed when message is displayed for the first time. (This icon disappeared after showing the detail or 24 hours has passed.)
SAR
Lighting
Displayed when message type D (SAR) is displayed.
Lighting
Appears when message type A, B or L (Warning) is displayed.
Lighting
Protected message
!!
2-15
2. OPERATION
2.15
Messages List In addition to the message “Received new local (int’l) msg.” the following message-related messages may appear on the display. Message New message received. Oldest message deleted to free up memory. Same message with lower error rate received. Currently displayed message will be deleted. Term of validity expired. Currently displayed message will be deleted. Message not chosen for display received; it is a int’l 00 message. Choose “All Message”(LIST menu) to display. Message not chosen for display received; it is a local 00 message. Choose “All Message”(LIST menu) to display. Int’l message not chosen for display received. Choose “All Message”(LIST menu) to display. Local message not chosen for display received. Choose “All Message”(LIST menu) to display.
2-16
Meaning Appears when the oldest message is deleted to make space for the latest one. Appears when two messages have the same ID are received and the latter’s error rate is lower than the former. Appears when 66 hours has passed after receiving the currently displayed message. Appears when receiving an international message not specified for display (00) at the SELECT MESSAGES display. Appears when receiving a local message not specified for display (00) at the SELECT MESSAGES display. Appears when receiving an international message not specified for display (Normal) at the SELECT MESSAGES display. Appears when receiving a local message not specified for display (Normal) at the SELECT MESSAGES display.
Remedy Press any key.
Press any key.
Press any key.
Press any key, and then choose All Message in the List window.
2. OPERATION
2.16
Other Functions This paragraph describes the various options which allow you to set up your unit to suit your needs. NAVTEX menu Item Mask Mode Auto Rcv Mask* Local Channel* Rcv Mask* INS Output Mask* Printer Mask*
Description Chooses the receiving mode. (See paragraph 2.6.) Turns Auto mode on/off.
Setting INS, Manual
Chooses the local channel.
490kHz, 4209.5kHz
Off, On
Receives messages in the category. Sets the station and type of message to output to the INS. Chooses the station and message to print out automatically (See paragraph 2.8.) *: Not available on INS mode.
System menu Item
Description Turns the audible alarm on/off when receiving a Warn Msg Alm Warning message (A, B, and L). Turns the audible alarm for monitoring of Rx signal on/off. Signal Monitor Off: Disables monitoring. Int’l: Monitors international frequency. Local: Monitors local frequency. Key Beep Turns key beep on/off. If a GPS receiver feeds nav data to the NAVTEX, you may use local time instead of UTC time. Time Offset Enter the time difference between local time and UTC time. Units
Printer
Setting Off, On
Off, Int’l, Local
Off, On -13:30 to +13:30
nm, kt, Chooses units of measurement (distance and km, km/h, ship speed) to be shown on the User Display. mi, mi/h None, NX-700A, Sets the printer type. (See paragraph 4.6.) Upright, Inverted
2-17
2. OPERATION
Display menu Item
Scrolling
Font Size Time Display
Description Selects the speed of scrolling by pressing ▲ or ▼. Slow: Scrolls by one line. Fast: Scrolls by half of screen. Skips to $$: Scrolls line by line in list display; Skips to $$ position in detailed display.
Setting
Slow, Fast, Skip to $$
Small, Medium, Large 24 hour, 12 hour
Selects the size of characters. Selects the time format.
MMM DD YYY,
Date Display
Selects the date format.
DD MMM YYYY, YYYY MMM DD
Selects the type of data as user display to be shown at the bottom of the display. Nav Data Date Own ship's position Ship's speed
MAY 07 2005 00:00:18 12 34. 001 ' N 123 45. 001 ' E SOG 1. 6 kt COG 56. 9
Course
[ ][ ] SCROLL [ ][ ] CHANGE FREQ [MENU] MENU [ENT] SHOW MESSAGE [LIST] LIST MENU [PRINT] PRINT MENU
User Display
Off, Nav Data, Distance
Distance Distance between the positions shown in the message and own ship's when receiving.
DISTANCE
23.4nm
[ ][ ] SCROLL [ ][ ] CHANGE FREQ [MENU] MENU [ENT] SHOW MESSAGE [LIST] LIST MENU [PRINT] PRINT MENU
Speed Display Contrast User Select Station & Msg
2-18
Selects the speed format to be displayed. SOG: Speed Over Ground STW: Speed Through Water Sets the display contrast. Choose the type of messages and stations to display on SELECT MESSAGES display (shown by choosing “User Selected Message” after pressing LIST key.) For detail, see section 2.8.
SOG, STW 0 to 9 -
2. OPERATION
Service menu Item INS Input Speed
INS Output Speed
Print Header
Description
Setting 4800, 9600, Selects the data transmission speed at which to input data 19200, from INS. 38400 bps 4800, 9600, Selects the data transmission speed to output data to the INS. 19200, 38400 bps Turns the header (Own ship’s position, date, frequency, error rate and distance information when receiving a message) for printing on/off. Receiving date Own ship's poisition when receiving
518kHz Error Rate: 0.0% Received MAY 07 2005 01:12:53 Position 34 28'N 134 03'E Distance 23.4nm
Header
Off, On
ZCZC AA10 Distance between the positions shown in the messasge and own ship's when receiving.
Edit Edits/deletes stations. (See paragraph 2.13.) Station List Default Restores all default settings. (See paragraph 3.5.) Settings Test Starts the diagnostic test. (See paragraph 3.4.) Shows the status for International and Local receiving.
-
-
International message
Rcv Monitor
Local message
-
2-19
2. OPERATION
This page is intentionally left blank.
2-20
3.
MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter provides information necessary for keeping your unit in good working order and remedying simple problems.
NOTICE
WARNING Do not open the equipment. Hazardous voltage which can cause electrical shock exists inside the equipment. Only qualified personnel should work inside the equipment.
Do not apply paint, anti-corrosive sealant or contact spray to coating or plastic parts of the equipment. Those items contain organic solvents that can damage coating and plastic parts, especially plastic connectors.
3.1 Maintenance Regular maintenance is important for optimum performance. A maintenance program should be established and should at least include the items shown in the table below. Maintenance program Item
Check point
Remedy
Display unit connectors
Check for tight connection.
Tighten loosened connectors.
LCD
The LCD will, in time, accumulate a coating of dust which tends to dim the picture. Wipe LCD lightly with soft cloth to remove dust.
Wipe the LCD carefully to prevent scratching, using tissue paper and an LCD cleaner. To remove dirt or salt deposits, use an LCD cleaner, wiping slowly with tissue paper so as to dissolve the dirt or salt. Change paper frequently so the salt or dirt will not scratch the LCD. Do not use solvents such as thinner, acetone or benzene for cleaning.
Ground terminal
Check for tight connection and Clean or replace ground wire corrosion. as necessary.
3-1
3. MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING
3.2
Replacement of Fuse, Battery and Thermal Paper Fuse The fuse inside the receiver unit protects the equipment from overcurrent or reverse polarity. If the fuse blows, contact your dealer about replacement. Name Fuse
Type FGMB 125V 2A PBF
Code No. 000-157-479-10
WARNING Use the proper fuse. Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage to the equipment or cause fire.
Battery A battery is installed inside the display unit, and it preserves data when the power is turned off. The life of the battery is about 5-10 years, and its voltage is checked when the power is turned on. When its voltage is low, the BATTERY ( ) icon appears on the display to alert you. When this happens, contact your dealer to request replacement of the battery. Note: When the battery is dead, all default settings are restored. Name BATT
Type Code No. CR2450-F2ST2L 000-144-941
WARNING Ensure battery polarity is correct. Wrong polarity may cause the batteries to explode.
LCD Display The life of the LCD is approx. 20,000 hour. When the LCD has expired, the brilliance cannot be raised.
3-2
3. MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING
Thermal paper (NX-700A only) When the thermal paper runs out completely, the message “Printer error” (center of screen) and the X icon (at the right-hand top corner) appear. Replace the paper as follows. Name Thermal paper
Type TP058-30CL
Code No. 000-154-047
1. Turn off the power. 2. Press the button shown below to open the paper holder cover. Eject button
3. Peel the tape from the end of new paper.
Tape
4. Set the new paper in the paper container in the direction shown below. Paper holder
New paper
Paper holder cover
5. Pull the end of the paper by 2 to 3 cm (as shown above), and then close the cover.
3-3
3. MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING
3.3
Troubleshooting This section provides simple troubleshooting procedures which the user can follow to restore normal operation. If you cannot restore normal operation do not attempt to check inside the unit. Any trouble should be referred to a qualified technician. If . . .
then . . . -ask serviceman to replace the blown fuse. you cannot turn on the power -check battery for proper voltage output. the equipment receives unwanted confirm that Manual mode is chosen. messages. (See paragraph 2.6.) check equipment by the diagnostic test. check the broadcasting schedule. NAVTEX signal cannot be received. check that the D-sub connector is firmly fastened. check that the antenna cable is firmly fastened. paper does not advance. (NX-700A only) load paper correctly. paper feeds but no recording. (NX-700A check if correct thermal paper is being only) used. keep the paper in a well-ventilated and paper has darkened. (NX-700A only) cool place. check the setting of Printer on the System menu. check the printer cable. the recording is not proper for the external check that the power of printer is printer. (NX-700B only) turned on. check that the printer is available. check that paper is set properly.
3-4
3. MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING
3.4
Diagnostics The memory test checks ROM, RAM, data port, battery, keyboard and LCD for proper operation and displays program version numbers. 1. Press the MENU/ESC key to open the main menu. 2. Press ▼ to choose Service, and then press the ENT key. 3. Press ▲ or ▼ to choose Test, and then press the ENT key. The message “Start test?” appears. 4. Press ◄ to choose “Yes”, and then press the ENT key. Memory Test Program No Boot ROM SRAM DRAM CPU RAM EEPROM Battery
: 0850196-**** : 0850192-**** : OK : OK : OK : OK : OK : OK (3.2V)
[PRINT] Print [ENT] Continue
*: Program version no.
Memory test For any NG (No Good), contact your dealer. 5. When the message “[ENT] Continue” appears at the bottom of screen, press ENT key to show the key test screen.
Key Test
If there is no operation for 10 s, the screen changes. Key test 6. Press each key (except key) one by one. A key is functioning properly if its on-screen location fills in black when the key is pressed. 7. After all keys have been tested or no key is pressed after 10 seconds, the equipment starts the LCD test by showing the white and black display (level 0 to 9).
3-5
3. MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING
8. When the message “Hit any key” appears on the screen, press any key (except key) to show the Rx test screen. The alarm for receiving monitor sounds while the Rx test is being conducted.
[PRINT] Print [ENT] Finish
Rx test 9. When the message “[ENT] Finish” appears on the screen, press any key or wait for one minute with no operation to finish. Also the test message is printed by pressing PRINT key when the item other than “None” at Printer on System menu. 10. Press the MENU/ESC key several times to close the menu.
3.5
Restoring all Default Settings This operation restores all default settings. The following two settings, however, are not disturbed. -Received messages -NAVTEX stations list (See paragraph 2.13.) 1. Press the MENU/ESC key to show the main menu. 2. Press ▼ to choose Service, and then press the ENT key. 3. Press ▲ or ▼ to choose Default Setting, and then press ENT key. The message “Restore default settings?” appears. 4. Press ◄ to choose “Yes”, and then press the ENT key. The Service menu appears. 5. Press the MENU/ESC key several times to close the menu.
3-6
4.
INSTALLATION
4.1
Display Unit The display unit can be installed on a tabletop, on the overhead, or in a panel. Refer to the outline drawings at the back of this manual for installation instructions. When selecting a mounting location, keep in mind the following points.
• Locate the unit away from exhaust pipes and vents. • Locate it of direct sunlight, (or in a suitable, ventilated enclosure) to prevent heat which can build up inside the cabinet. • The mounting location should be well ventilated. • Mount the unit where shock and vibration are minimal. • Allow sufficient maintenance space at the sides and rear of the unit and leave sufficient slack in cables, to facilitate maintenance and servicing. • Compass safe distances are: NX-700A (Standard: 1.45 m, Steering: 0.95 m) NX-700B (Standard: 0.30 m, Steering: 0.30 m) Tabletop, overhead mounting 1. Fix the hanger by using four self-tapping screws (5x20). 2. Screw knob bolts in display unit, set it to the hanger, and tighten the knob bolts. Note: For the overhead mounting, reinforce the mounting location for the weight of the display unit (NX-700A: 3.3 kg, NX-700B: 0.7 kg) and secure the hanger, with bolts, nuts and washers (local supply).
NX-700A
NX-700B
4-1
4. INSTALLATION
Flush mounting The display unit can be installed flush mounted in a console or panel by using the optional flush mount kit. (For NX-700A) Type: OP08-19 Code No.: 004-515-260 Name Type Code No. Qty Remarks Mounting metal 08-023-1019 100-326-960 1 Self-tapping screw 5X20 000-802-081 6 Hex. bolt M8x15 000-862-144 2 Spring washer M8 000-864-262 2 1. Cut out a hole with dimensions as shown below in the mounting location.
156+1
30+1
168+0.5
284+0.5
7
7 275+1
4 Fixing hole
2. Attach the fixing metal to the display unit with two hex. bolts (M8x15, supplied with optional kit) and spring washers (supplied with optional kit). 3. Fasten six self-tapping screws to fix the display unit to the mounting location.
144+1
155+0.5
(For NX-700B) Type: OP08-20 Code No.: 004-515-270 Name Type Code No. Qty Remarks Mounting metal 08-023-2011 100-327-010 1 Self-tapping screw 5x20 000-802-081 4 Pan head screw M4x12 000-802-130 4 1. Cut out a hole with dimensions as shown below in the mounting location.
156+1
155+0.5
4 Fixing hole
2. Attach the fixing metal to the display unit with four pan head screws (M4X12, supplied with the optional kit). 3. Fasten four self-tapping screws (supplied with the optional kit) to fix the display unit to the mounting location.
4-2
4. INSTALLATION
Receiver Unit General mounting considerations
• The mounting location should be well ventilated and dry. • The unit can be mounted on bulkhead or the desk. • Secure the maintenance space shown in drawing at the back of this manual for ease of maintenance and service. • Compass safe distances are: Standard: 1.15 m, Steering: 0.75 m Mounting Method Fasten the receiver unit with four self-tapping screws (5x20, supplied as installation material). For bulkhead mounting, do the follows. 1. Tighten lower self-tapping screws so there is 5 mm clearance between bottom of screw head and bulkhead. 2. Hook the receiver unit on the lower screws. 3. Tighten upper screws followed by the lower screws. 210+1
205+1
Fixing hole 2- 6
8
4.2
6 210+1
Notch
4-3
4. INSTALLATION
4.3
Antenna Unit Mounting considerations Install the antenna unit referring to the antenna installation diagram at the back of this manual. When selecting a mounting location for the antenna unit, keep in mind the following points:
• Do not shorten the antenna cable. • Do not install the antenna unit within beamwidth of the radar.
Coat here with silicone sealant to prevent breakage of the cable by vibration.
Wrap the vinyl sheet to prevent the breakage of the cable, and then fix the hose clamp.
4-4
4. INSTALLATION
4.4
Printer (NX-700B only) Prepare the printer by locally as shown below for the NX-700B. -Serial RS-232C -Serial printer -Baud Rate: 9600 bps -Character length: 8 bit -Parity: No -Flow control: Xon/Xoff -32 characters/line or more
4.5
Wiring Display unit NX-700A or B
Antenna ubit NX-7H
Ground wire IV-1.25sq (Local supply) Antenna cable 04S4168 10/20/30/40/50m DSUB25P-DSUB25P cable (3m) Ground wire IV-1.25sq (Local supply)
Receiver unit NX-7001
Power cable DPYC-2.5 (Local supply)
-INS or Navigator -Printer (for NX-700B only) -Alarm
12-24VDC
4-5
4. INSTALLATION
Receiver unit All cables are gathered to the receiver unit. Connect cables at inside of the receiver unit as shown below.
RCV Board 08P3227
TB401 TB402 (+) (-)
J402* 1
2
3
4
5
J403 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
J401
Antenna cable (to Antenna unit) TTYCS-1Q (to Navigator or INS )
DPYC-2.5 (to ship's battery)
Printer cable (to Printer, NX-700B only) DPYC-1.5 (to External alarm)
DSUB25P-DSUB25P-3M cable (to Display unit)
Receiver unit, inside view Use the following JIS cable (Japan Industrial Standard) or equivalent to connect power source, INS and external alarm appropriately. DPYC-2.5
DPYC-1.5
Armor
Armor
Sheath
Sheath
TTYCS-1Q (Four core twisted)
Armor Sheath
φ = 12.5 mm
Conductor S = 2.5 mm 2 φ = 2.01 mm
φ = 11.7 mm
Conductor S = 1.5 mm 2 φ = 1.56 mm
For printer, use the cable supplied with the printer.
4-6
Shield φ = 11.3 mm Conductor S = 0.75 mm2 φ = 1.11 mm
4. INSTALLATION
Fabricate these cables as below to connect to the receiver unit. DPYC-1.5 (For external alarm) Vinyl sheath 5 mm 100 mm
25 mm
Soldering
Vinyl wire
Scrape the paint off the cable where the cable contacts the cable clamp.
TTYCS-1Q (For Navigator or INS) Shield
5 mm 100 mm
25 mm
Soldering Vinyl sheath
Vinyl wire
Scrape the paint off the cable where the cable contacts the cable clamp.
DPYC-2.5 (For ship’s battery) 5 mm 100 mm
25 mm
Crimp-on lug (M4, local supply)
Vinyl sheath Scrape the paint off the cable where the cable contacts the cable clamp.
How to use J402 and 403 connector 1. Insert the terminal opener (attached in the receiver unit) into the connector. 2. Insert a wire in terminal while pressing and holding the terminal opener. 3. Release the terminal opener. Pull wire to confirm that it is connected firmly. Terminal opener
Wire
4-7
4. INSTALLATION
Antenna cable Be sure to leave some slack in the cable for future service and maintenance. For RG-10/UY, RG-214 cable When using the coaxial cable, type RG-10/UY or RG-214, attach the FM-MP-7 connector (supplied as installation material) or PL-259 (local supply) as below. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Remove the sheath by 30 mm. Bare 23 mm of the center conductor. Trim braided shield by 5 mm and tin. Slide coupling ring onto cable. Screw the plug assembly on the cable. Solder plug assembly to braided shield through solder holes. Solder contact sleeve to conductor. 6. Screw coupling ring into plug assembly. 30 mm
Sheath
5 mm
Plug assembly
Contact sleeve
2 mm
Solder here.
Conductor Braided shield
Insulator Coupling ring
Solder both sides of hole.
Cut conductor here.
Note: When the RG-214 cable is used, care must be exercised to prevent damage to the cable as it has no armor.
4-8
4. INSTALLATION
Extending antenna cable length When connecting two cables for extension, use optional extension cable kit OP-04-2. Code No.: 000-041-174 (10 m), 000-041-175 (20 m), 000-041-176 (30 m), 000-041-177 (40 m), 000-041-178 (50 m) Name
Cable assy
Connector Insulating tape
Type
Code No. Qty 005-948-320 005-948-330 04S4168 1 005-948-340 005-948-350 005-948-360 FMA-1 000-152-964-10 1 U tape 0.5x19x5M 000-800-985 1
Remarks 10 m w/connectors 20 m w/connectors 30 m w/connectors 40 m w/connectors 50 m w/connectors
OP04-2 To Receiver unit
FMA-1 connector Grounding The ground wire (local supply) should be 1.25 sq or larger. The ground wire should be as short as possible.
4-9
4. INSTALLATION
4.6
Setting of Printer After the connection completely, the setting of printer should be done for NX-700B as shown below. (For NX-700A, use the default setting as is.) key to turn the power on. 1. Press the 2. Press the MENU key to show the main menu.
Menu NAVTEX System Display Service 3. Press ▼ to choose System, and then press the ENT key or ► to activate the System menu.
System Warn Msg Alm Signal Monitor Key Beep Time Offset Units Printer
Off Off Off +00:00 nm, kt NX-700A
4. Press ▼ to choose Printer, and then press the ENT key or ► to show the item window.
None NX-700A Upright Inverted 5. Press ▲ or ▼ to choose the appropriate setting, and then press the ENT key. None: When no printer is connected. NX-700A: For NX-700A only. Upright: When NX-700B is connected to an upright-type printer which ejects paper in bottom to top direction. Inverted: When NX-700B is connected to a bulkhead mount printer which ejects paper in top to bottom direction. 6. Press the MENU key several times to close the menu.
4-10
4. INSTALLATION
4.7
Digital Interfacing This equipment can receive navigation data in IEC 61162-1 Ed2/2 format. Priority TIME＆DATE L/L SOG STW COG
ZDA GNS > GGA > RMC > GLL VTG > VBW > RMC VHW > VBW VTG > RMC
Input data sentence description GGA: GPS position fixing condition $--GGA,hhmmss.ss,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M,x.x,M,x.x,xxxx*hh | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +-- 11 | | | | | | | | | | | | | +---- 10 | | | | | | | | | | | | +--------- 9 | | | | | | | | | | +---+------------ 8 | | | | | | | | +---+------------------ 7 | | | | | | | +------------------------- 6 | | | | | | +---------------------------- 5 | | | | | +------------------------------- 4 | | | +----+--------------------------------- 3 | +---+--------------------------------------------- 2 +------------------------------------------------------------- 1 1. UTC of position 2. Latitude, N/S 3. Longitude, E/W 4. GPS quality indicator (see note) 5. Number of satellite in use,00-12, may be different from the number in view 6. Horizontal dilution of precision 7. Antenna altitude above/below mean sealevel, m 8. Geoidal separation, m 9. Age of differential GPS data 10. Differential reference station ID, 0000-1023 11. Checksum NOTE 0 = fix not available or invalid 1 = GPS SPS mode, fix valid 2 = differential GPS, SPS mode, fix valid 3 = GPS PPS mode, fix valid 4 = Real Time Kinetic. Satellite system used in RTK mode with fixed integers 5 = Float RTK. Satellite system used in RTK mode with floating fingers 6 = Estimated (dead reckoning) mode 7 = Manual input mode 8 = Simulator mode The GPS quality indicator shall not be a null field.
4-11
4. INSTALLATION
GLL: Latitude and longitude $--GLL,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,hhmmss.ss,A,a*hh | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +------- 6 | | | | | | +--------- 5 | | | | | +----------- 4 | | | | +---------------- 3 | | +------+----------------------- 2 +---+----------------------------------- 1 1. Latitude, N/S 2. Longitude, E/W 3. UTC of position 4. Status: A=data valid, V=data invalid 5. Mode indicator (see note) 6. Checksum NOTE Positioning system Mode indicator: A = Autonomous D = Differential E = Estimated (dead reckoning) M = Manual input S = Simulator N = Data not valid The Mode indicator field supplements the Status field. The Status field shall be set to V=invalid for all values of Operating Mode except for A=Autonomous and D=Differential. The positioning system Mode indicator and Status field shall not be null fields.
4-12
4. INSTALLATION
NRM: NAVTEX receiver mask This command is used to manipulate the configuration masks that control which messages are stored, printed and sent to the INS port of te NAVTEX receiver. $--NRM,x,x,hhhhhhh,hhhhhhh*hh
message type mask (SEE NOTE 4)
transmitter coverage area mask (SEE NOTE 3) frequency table indes, 1 to 9 (SEE NOTE 2) function code, 0 to 9 (SEE NOTE 1) NOTE 1: The function code is used to further identify the purpose of the sentence. The meaning of the function code is as follows: 0 - request messages for the given mask 1 - set/report the storage mask 2 - set/report the printer mask 3 - set/report the INS mask 4 to 9 - reserved for future use NOTE 2: The frequency indicator identifies the frequency that the NAVTEX message was received on: 1 = 490 kHz 2 = 518 kHz 3 = 4209.5 kHz 4 through 9 are reserved for future use NOTE 3: The transmitter coverage area mask is defined as a 32 bit hex field where the least signification bit represents transmitter coverage area "A", the next bit is "B" and so on up to bit 25 which is "Z". Bits 31 through 26 are reserved for future use and are set to zero. To select a transmitter coverage aera, its corresponding bit should be set to one. To deselect a transmitter coverage area its corresponding bit should be set to zero. NOTE 4: The message type mask is defined as a 32 bit hex field where the least significant bit represents message type "A", the next bit is "B" and so on up to bit 25 which is "Z". Bits 31 through 26 are reserved for future use and are set to zero. To select a message type its corresponding bit should be set to zero. When another device (for example an INS) wishes to set one or more of the bit masks it sends one or more NRM sentences to the NAVTEX receiver. When another device wishes to determine the current values of the bit masks it sends a query sentence to the NAVTEX receiver as follows: $--CRQ, NRM*hh On receiving this query, the NAVTEX receiver will respond with one NRM sentences for each mask type and frequency combination that it supports. For example a NAVTEX receiver which support separate storage, printer and INS masks for each of three receiver frequencies will return a total of nine NRM sentences in response to the above query. Example $INNRM,2,1,00001E1F, 00000023*57 This example specifies that message identifiers "A", "B" and "F", received from transmitter areas "A" to "E" and "J" to "M" on 490 kHz should be sent to the printer port when they are received. Note that this command sets the printer mask for future use; there is no immediate output generated as a result of receiving this command. Example $INNRM,0,2,00001E1F,0FFFFFF*21 This example requests that all currently stored messages of all message type, received from transmitter areas "A" to "E" and "J" to "M" on 518 kHz should be immediately returned to the requesting device as a series of NRX sentences. Note that this command does not update any of the stored masks.
4-13
4. INSTALLATION
RMC: Recommend Minimum Specific GNSS Data $--RMC,hhmmss.ss,A,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x.x,x.x,xxxxxx,x.x,a,a*hh | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +--- 10 | | | | | | | | | | | +----- 9 | | | | | | | | | +--+------- 8 | | | | | | | | +--------------- 7 | | | | | | | +--------------------- 6 | | | | | | +------------------------- 5 | | | | +---+---------------------------- 4 | | +---+---------------------------------------- 3 | +--------------------------------------------------- 2 +---------------------------------------------------------- 1 1. UTC of position fix 2. Status: A=data valid, V=navigation receiver warning 3. Latitude, N/S 4. Longitude, E/W 5. Speed over ground, knots 6. Course over ground, degrees true 7. Date: dd/mm/yy 8. Magnetic variation, degrees E/W 9. Mode indicator (see note) 10. Checksum NOTE Positioning system Mode indicator:
A = Autonomous D = Differential E = Estimated (dead reckoning) M = Manual input S = Simulator N = Data not valid The Mode indicator field supplements the Status field. The Status field shall be set to V=invalid for all values of Operating Mode except for A=Autonomous and D=Differential. The positioning system Mode indicator and Status field shall not be null fields.
4-14
4. INSTALLATION
ZDA: Time and date $--ZDA,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,xxxx,xx,xx*hh | | | | | | | | | | | | | +--------- 7 | | | | | +----------- 6 | | | | +-------------- 5 | | | +------------------ 4 | | +---------------------- 3 | +------------------------- 2 +--------------------------------- 1 1. UTC 2. Day, 01 to 31(UTC) 3. Month, 01 to 12(UTC) 4. Year(UTC) 5. Local zone hours, 00h to +-13h 6. Local zone minutes, 00 to +59 as local hours 7. Checksum
4-15
4. INSTALLATION
ACK: Acknowledge
$--ACK,xxx*hh | | | + ------------------------2 +-----------------------------1 1. Local alarm number(identifier) 2. Checksum GNS: $--GNS,hhmmss.ss,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,c--c,xx,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x*hh | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +--- 11 | | | | | | | | | | | +------ 10 | | | | | | | | | | +---------- 9 | | | | | | | | | +-------------- 8 | | | | | | | | +------------------ 7 | | | | | | | +---------------------- 6 | | | | | | +------------------------- 5 | | | | | +------------------------------ 4 | | | +-----+--------------------------------- 3 | +-----+--------------------------------------------- 2 +------------------------------------------------------------- 1
1. UTC of position 2. Latitude, N/S 3. Longitude, E/W 4. Mode indicator 5. Total number of satllite in use,00-99 6. HDOP 7. Antenna altitude, metres, re:mean-sea-level (geoid) 8. Geoidal separation 9. Age of differential data 10. Differential reference station ID 11. Checksum
4-16
4. INSTALLATION
VHW: Water speed and heading
$--VHW,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K*hh | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +--------- 5 | | | | | | +--+----------- 4 | | | | +--+----------------- 3 | | +---+----------------------- 2 +---+----------------------------- 1 1. Heading, degrees true 2. Heading, degrees magnetic 3. Speed, knots 4. Speed, km/h 5. Checksum VTG: Course over ground and ground speed $--VTG,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K,a*hh | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +------- 6 | | | | | | | | +--------- 5 | | | | | | +--+----------- 4 | | | | +--+----------------- 3 | | +--+----------------------- 2 +--+----------------------------- 1 1. Course over ground, degrees true 2. Course over ground, degrees magnetic 3. Speed over ground, knots 4. Speed over ground, km/h 5. Mode indicator (see note) 6. Checksum NOTE Positioning system Mode indicator: A = Autonomous D = Differential E = Estimated (dead reckoning) M = Manual input S = Simulator N = Data not valid The positioning system Mode indicator field shall not be a null field.
4-17
4. INSTALLATION
VBW: Dual ground/water speed
$--VBW,x.x,x.x,A,x.x,x.x,A,x.x,A,x.x,A*hh | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +--- 11 | | | | | | | | | +----- 10 | | | | | | | | +-------- 9 | | | | | | | +----------- 8 | | | | | | +-------------- 7 | | | | | +----------------- 6 | | | | +-------------------- 5 | | | +------------------------ 4 | | +--------------------------- 3 | +------------------------------ 2 +---------------------------------- 1 1. Longitudial water speed, knots 2. Transverse water speed, knots 3. Status: water speed, A=data valid V=data invalid 4. Longitudial ground speed, knots 5. Transverse ground speed, knots 6. Status: ground speed, A=data valid V=data invalid 7. Stern transverse water speed, knots 8. Status: stern water speed, A=data valid V=data invalid 9. Stern transverse ground speed, knots 10. Status: stern ground speed, A=data valid V=data invalid 11. Checksum PFEC,nxfrq : LOCAL FREQUENCY $PFEC,nxfrq,x*hh 5 4 3 2 1 1. Proprietary sentence ID 2. Manufacturer's Mnemonic code: Furuno Electoric Co.,ltd. 3. Manufacturer's Data: Local frequency setting command 4. Manufacturer's Data: Local frequency indicator (SEE NOTE) 5. Checksum NOTE Local frequency indicator: 0 = 490kHz 1 = 4209.5kHz
4-18
4. INSTALLATION
Output data description NRX: NAVTEX received message
NOTE 1: The total number of sentences required to transfer the NAVTEX message from the NAVTEX radio receiver. The first field specifies the total number of sentences used for a message, minimum value 1. The Sentence Number field identifies the older of this sentence in the message, minimum value 1. All sentences contain the same number of fields. For efficiency it is recommended that null fields be used in the additional sentences where the data is unchanged from the first sentence (this applies to fields 4 through 12). NOTE 2: The sequential message identifier provides a unique identifier for each NAVTEX message represented by a group of sentences. Though the message code (field 4) contains a NAVTEX message serial number, there are special cases when the message serial number is set to 00 and has a different meaning or when the same message code can occur more than once. When these conditions occur, the sequential message identifier can be relied upon to uniquely identify this NAVTEX message from other NAVTEX messages with the same message code. NOTE 3: The NAVTEX message code contains three related entities. The first character identifies the transmitter coverage area and the second character identifies the type of message. Both these characters are as defined in Table I of Recommendation ITU-R M.625-3, combination numbers 1-26. Transmitter identification characters are allocated by the IMO NAVTEX manual (IMO publication 951E). The remaining two characters are restricted to numerals with a range of 00 to 99 and represent a serial number for each type of message. The value of 00 is a special case and not considered a serial number. NOTE 4: The frequency indicator identifies the frequency that the NAVTEX message was received on: 0 = not received over air (eg test messages) 1 = 490 kHz 2 = 518 kHz 3 = 4209,5 kHz 4 through 9 are reserved for future use NOTE 5: The total number of characters indicates the expected size of the message body sent in this sequence of NRX sentences. It does not include the additional overhead for reserved characters found in table 1 of IEC 61162-1. NOTE 6: Status “A” is used for syntactically correct message reception. Status “V” is used for syntactically incorrect message reception, e.g. end characters NNNN missing. NOTE 7: The message body may contain reserved characters as defined in IEC 61162-1.
4-19
4. INSTALLATION
ALR: Set alarms $CRALR,hhmmss.xxx,A,A,c--c | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +----------------- 5 | | | +-------------------- 4 | | +---------------------- 3 | +------------------------- 2 +--------------------------------- 1 1. Time of alarm condition change, UTC 2. Local alarm number(identifier) (SEE NOTE.) 3. Alarm condition(A=threshold exceeded, V=not exceeded) 4. Alarm's acknowledge state, A=acknowledged V=unacknowledged 5. Alarm's description text (SEE NOTE.)
NOTE: “2. Local alarm number (identifier)” B2 (Type of message): A or L
001
NAVTEX: Navigational warning
B2 (Type of message): B
002
NAVTEX: Meteorological warning
B2 (Type of message): D
003
NAVTEX: Search and rescue information
Printer Error
051
NAVTEX: Printer Error
Battery Error
052
NAVTEX: Battery Error
Errors other than above
006
NAVTEX: General failure
Serial Interface
4-20
“5. Alarm’s description text”
MENU TREE MENU/ESC Key
LIST key
PRINT key
NAVTEX
Mask Mode (INS, Manual) Auto Rcv Mask (Off, On) Local Channel (490kHz, 4209.5kHz) Rcv Mask INS Output Mask Printer Mask
System
Warn Msg Alm (Off, On) Signal Monitor (Off, Int'l, Local) Key Beep (Off, On) Time Offset (-13:30 to +13:30, 0:00) Units (nm, kt, km, km/h, mi, mi/h) Printer (None*, NX-700A, Upright, Inverted)
Display
Scrolling (Slow, Fast, Skip To $$) Font Size (Small, Medium, Large) Time Display (24hour, 12hour) Date Display (MMM DD YYYY, DD MMM YYYY, YYYY MMM DD) User Display (Off, Nav Data, Distance) Speed Display (SOG, STW) Contrast (0 to 9, 5) User Select Station & Msg
Service
INS Input Speed (4800, 9600, 19200, 38400bps) INS Output Speed (4800, 9600, 19200, 38400bps) Print Header (Off, On) Edit Station List Default Setting Test Rcv Monitor
*: Default setting for NX-700B.
All Messages Alarm Messages User Selected Messages Good Messages Lock Message
Print Cancel Print
AP-1
FURUNO
NX-700A/B
SPECIFICATIONS OF NAVTEX RECEIVER NX-700A/B 1
NAVTEX RECEIVER
1.1
Receiving frequency
518 kHz and 490 kHz (or 4209.5 kHz), receive both frequencies simultaneously
1.2
Mode of reception
F1B
1.3
Sensitivity
2 μV e.m.f. (50 ohms), 4% error rate or less
1.4
Input protection
Withstands 30 Vrms for 15 minutes or more (w/ pre-amp unit)
1.5
Spurious emission
1nW or less
1.6
Message category
A: navigational warning B: meteorological warning C: ice report D: earch and rescue information/piracy and armed robbery E: meteorological forecast F: pilot message G: AIS H: LORAN-C message I: reserved presently not used J: SATNAV message K: ohter electronic navigational aid system message L: navigational warning (additional) M to Y: reserved presently not used Z: QRU (no message on hand)
2
DISPLAY UNIT
2.1
Display system
5-inch, 76 (W) x 100 (H) mm, monochrome LCD, 240 x 320 dots
2.2
Display modes
Message selection mode Message display mode
2.3
Message storage
200 messages x 2 channels (100,000 characters x 2 channels)
3
PRINTER SECTION (FOR NX-700A ONLY)
3.1
Printing system
Line thermal head printing system
3.2
Printing paper
Thermal paper (58 mm x 30 m)
3.3
Printing width
48 mm
3.4
Character format
24 x 12 dot
3.5
Dot pitch
8 dots/ mm
3.6
Number of characters
32 characters/line
3.7
Print speed
Approx. 20 mm/sec.
SP - 1
E5649S01F-M
FURUNO
NX-700A/B
4
ANTENNA UNIT
4.1
Antenna type
NX-7H: H-field antenna
4.2
Output impedance
50 ohms
4.3
Power supply
+7 V to +9 V (thru co-ax cable)
5
INTERFACE
5.1
Input data
IEC61162-1, -2 GGA, GLL, RMC, ZDA, ACK, GNS, VHW, VTG, VBW, NRM, CRQ, PFEC
5.2
Output data
NRX, ALR, NRM
5.3
Alarm
Normal close, contact closure signal (floating, max. 80 mA, 50 V) for SAR alert
6
POWER SUPPLY
6.1
NX-700A
12-24VDC: 1.5-0.8A
6.2
NX-700B
12-24VDC: 0.7-0.4A
7
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION
7.1
Ambient temperature Antenna unit
-25°C to +70°C
Receiver / Display unit
-15°C to +55°C
7.2
Relative humidity
95% at 40°C (without dew condensation)
7.3
Waterproofing
7.4
Antenna unit
IP66
Receiver / Display unit
IP20 (NX-700B: IP25 for front panel)
Vibration
- 2Hz to 5 Hz and up to 13.2 Hz with an excursion of ±1 mm ±10% (7 m/s2 maximum acceleration at 13.2 Hz); - above 13.2 Hz and up to 100 Hz with a constant maximum acceleration of 7 m/s2
8
COATING COLOR
8.1
Display unit
N3.0
8.2
Receiver unit
N3.0
8.3
Antenna unit
N9.5
SP - 2
E5649S01F-M
0#/'
176.+0'
176.+0'
3 6;
#9:
#9:
䋨⇛࿑䈱ኸᴺ䈲䇮ෳ⠨୯䈪䈜䇯㩷㩷㪛㪠㪤㪜㪥㪪㪠㪦㪥㪪㩷㪠㪥㩷㪛㪩㪘㪮㪠㪥㪞㩷㪝㪦㪩㩷㪩㪜㪝㪜㪩㪜㪥㪚㪜㩷㪦㪥㪣㪰㪅䋩
:575
%2
0:$*-4
&'5%4+26+10%1&'ͳ
䋨⇛࿑䈱ኸᴺ䈲䇮ෳ⠨୯䈪䈜䇯㩷㩷㪛㪠㪤㪜㪥㪪㪠㪦㪥㪪㩷㪠㪥㩷㪛㪩㪘㪮㪠㪥㪞㩷㪝㪦㪩㩷㪩㪜㪝㪜㪩㪜㪥㪚㪜㩷㪦㪥㪣㪰㪅䋩
+056#..#6+10/#6'4+#.5
70+6
㪫㪮㪦㩷㪫㪰㪧㪜㪪㩷㪘㪥㪛㩷㪚㪦㪛㪜㪪㩷㪤㪘㪰㩷㪙㪜㩷㪣㪠㪪㪫㪜㪛㩷㪝㪦㪩㩷㪘㪥㩷㪠㪫㪜㪤㪅㩷㩷㪫㪟㪜㩷㪣㪦㪮㪜㪩㩷㪧㪩㪦㪛㪬㪚㪫㩷㪤㪘㪰㩷㪙㪜㩷㪪㪟㪠㪧㪧㪜㪛㩷㪠㪥㩷㪧㪣㪘㪚㪜㩷㪦㪝㩷㪫㪟㪜㩷㪬㪧㪧㪜㪩㩷 㪧㪩㪦㪛㪬㪚㪫㪅㩷㪨㪬㪘㪣㪠㪫㪰㩷㪠㪪㩷㪫㪟㪜㩷㪪㪘㪤㪜㪅
5'.(6#22+0)5%4'9
㩎㩡㩇㩊㨹㩕㩩㩧㩒㩆㩨ޓ㩆㨷
0#/'
A-2
#9:
ဳᑼ㪆䍘䍎䍢䍼⇟ภ䈏䋲Ბ䈱႐ว䇮ਅᲑ䉋䉍Ბ䈮ઍ䉒䉎ㆊᷰᦼຠ䈪䈅䉍䇮䈬䈤䉌䈎䈏䈦䈩䈇䉁䈜䇯䇭䈭䈍䇮ຠ⾰䈲ᄌ䉒䉍䉁䈞䉖䇯
Ꮏ᧚ᢱ
&+52.#;70+6
ᜰ␜ㇱ
࡙࠾࠶࠻
0:$0:$*-0:$4
㧼㧭㧯㧷㧵㧺㧳ޓ㧸㧵㧿㨀
㪫㪮㪦㩷㪫㪰㪧㪜㪪㩷㪘㪥㪛㩷㪚㪦㪛㪜㪪㩷㪤㪘㪰㩷㪙㪜㩷㪣㪠㪪㪫㪜㪛㩷㪝㪦㪩㩷㪘㪥㩷㪠㪫㪜㪤㪅㩷㩷㪫㪟㪜㩷㪣㪦㪮㪜㪩㩷㪧㪩㪦㪛㪬㪚㪫㩷㪤㪘㪰㩷㪙㪜㩷㪪㪟㪠㪧㪧㪜㪛㩷㪠㪥㩷㪧㪣㪘㪚㪜㩷㪦㪝㩷㪫㪟㪜㩷㪬㪧㪧㪜㪩㩷 㪧㪩㪦㪛㪬㪚㪫㪅㩷㪨㪬㪘㪣㪠㪫㪰㩷㪠㪪㩷㪫㪟㪜㩷㪪㪘㪤㪜㪅
3 6;
A-1
ဳᑼ㪆䍘䍎䍢䍼⇟ภ䈏䋲Ბ䈱႐ว䇮ਅᲑ䉋䉍Ბ䈮ઍ䉒䉎ㆊᷰᦼຠ䈪䈅䉍䇮䈬䈤䉌䈎䈏䈦䈩䈇䉁䈜䇯䇭䈭䈍䇮ຠ⾰䈲ᄌ䉒䉍䉁䈞䉖䇯
%2
%2
62%.
(2
0:#*-4
&'5%4+26+10%1&'ͳ
㪈㪅䍘㪄䍢䍼⇟ภᧃየ䈱㪲㪁㪁㪴䈲䇮ㆬᛯຠ䈱ઍ䍘䍎䍢䍼䉕䈚䉁䈜䇯 㪚㪦㪛㪜㩷㪥㪬㪤㪙㪜㪩㩷㪜㪥㪛㪠㪥㪞㩷㪮㪠㪫㪟㩷㩹㪁㪁㩹㩷㪠㪥㪛㪠㪚㪘㪫㪜㪪㩷㪫㪟㪜㩷㪚㪦㪛㪜㩷㪥㪬㪤㪙㪜㪩㩷㪦㪝㩷㪩㪜㪧㪩㪜㪪㪜㪥㪫㪘㪫㪠㪭㪜㩷㪤㪘㪫㪜㪩㪠㪘㪣㪅
+056#..#6+10/#6'4+#.5
#%%'5514+'5
70+6
#9:
㪈㪅䍘㪄䍢䍼⇟ภᧃየ䈱㪲㪁㪁㪴䈲䇮ㆬᛯຠ䈱ઍ䍘䍎䍢䍼䉕䈚䉁䈜䇯 㪚㪦㪛㪜㩷㪥㪬㪤㪙㪜㪩㩷㪜㪥㪛㪠㪥㪞㩷㪮㪠㪫㪟㩷㩹㪁㪁㩹㩷㪠㪥㪛㪠㪚㪘㪫㪜㪪㩷㪫㪟㪜㩷㪚㪦㪛㪜㩷㪥㪬㪤㪙㪜㪩㩷㪦㪝㩷㪩㪜㪧㪩㪜㪪㪜㪥㪫㪘㪫㪠㪭㪜㩷㪤㪘㪫㪜㪩㪠㪘㪣㪅
+056#..#6+10/#6'4+#.5
Ꮏ᧚ᢱ
Ꮏ᧚ᢱ
4'%14&+0)2#2'4
ᗵᾲ⸥㍳⚕
ઃዻຠ
&+52.#;70+6
ᜰ␜ㇱ
࡙࠾࠶࠻
0:#0:#*-0:#4
㧼㧭㧯㧷㧵㧺㧳ޓ㧸㧵㧿㨀
&1%7/'06
4'%'+8'470+6+056#..#6+10/#6'4+#.5
+056#..#6+10/#6'4+#.5
4'%'+8'470+652#4'2#465
15
1/
%2
%2
&57$2&57$2/
%2
52
52
0:
&1%7/'06
4'%'+8'470+6+056#..#6+10/#6'4+#.5
+056#..#6+10/#6'4+#.5
15
1/
%2
%2
&57$2&57$2/
%2
52
52
0:
&'5%4+26+10%1&'ͳ
#9:
#9:
䋨⇛࿑䈱ኸᴺ䈲䇮ෳ⠨୯䈪䈜䇯㩷㩷㪛㪠㪤㪜㪥㪪㪠㪦㪥㪪㩷㪠㪥㩷㪛㪩㪘㪮㪠㪥㪞㩷㪝㪦㪩㩷㪩㪜㪝㪜㪩㪜㪥㪚㪜㩷㪦㪥㪣㪰㪅䋩
䋨⇛࿑䈱ኸᴺ䈲䇮ෳ⠨୯䈪䈜䇯㩷㩷㪛㪠㪤㪜㪥㪪㪠㪦㪥㪪㩷㪠㪥㩷㪛㪩㪘㪮㪠㪥㪞㩷㪝㪦㪩㩷㪩㪜㪝㪜㪩㪜㪥㪚㪜㩷㪦㪥㪣㪰㪅䋩
3 6;
㪫㪮㪦㩷㪫㪰㪧㪜㪪㩷㪘㪥㪛㩷㪚㪦㪛㪜㪪㩷㪤㪘㪰㩷㪙㪜㩷㪣㪠㪪㪫㪜㪛㩷㪝㪦㪩㩷㪘㪥㩷㪠㪫㪜㪤㪅㩷㩷㪫㪟㪜㩷㪣㪦㪮㪜㪩㩷㪧㪩㪦㪛㪬㪚㪫㩷㪤㪘㪰㩷㪙㪜㩷㪪㪟㪠㪧㪧㪜㪛㩷㪠㪥㩷㪧㪣㪘㪚㪜㩷㪦㪝㩷㪫㪟㪜㩷㪬㪧㪧㪜㪩㩷 㪧㪩㪦㪛㪬㪚㪫㪅㩷㪨㪬㪘㪣㪠㪫㪰㩷㪠㪪㩷㪫㪟㪜㩷㪪㪘㪤㪜㪅
㪈㪅䍘㪄䍢䍼⇟ภᧃየ䈱㪲㪁㪁㪴䈲䇮ㆬᛯຠ䈱ઍ䍘䍎䍢䍼䉕䈚䉁䈜䇯 㪚㪦㪛㪜㩷㪥㪬㪤㪙㪜㪩㩷㪜㪥㪛㪠㪥㪞㩷㪮㪠㪫㪟㩷㩹㪁㪁㩹㩷㪠㪥㪛㪠㪚㪘㪫㪜㪪㩷㪫㪟㪜㩷㪚㪦㪛㪜㩷㪥㪬㪤㪙㪜㪩㩷㪦㪝㩷㪩㪜㪧㪩㪜㪪㪜㪥㪫㪘㪫㪠㪭㪜㩷㪤㪘㪫㪜㪩㪠㪘㪣㪅
12'4#614 5)7+&'
ᠲⷐ㗔ᦠ
12'4#614 5/#07#.
ขᛒ⺑ᦠ
࿑ᦠ
+056#..#6+10/#6'4+#.5
Ꮏ᧚ᢱ
ฃାㇱᎿ᧚
%#$.'#55;
㩃㨺㩖㩨㩣⚵ຠ
Ꮏ᧚ᢱ
52#4'2#465
੍ຠ
176.+0'
4'%'+8'470+652#4'2#465
70+6
ဳᑼ㪆䍘䍎䍢䍼⇟ภ䈏䋲Ბ䈱႐ว䇮ਅᲑ䉋䉍Ბ䈮ઍ䉒䉎ㆊᷰᦼຠ䈪䈅䉍䇮䈬䈤䉌䈎䈏䈦䈩䈇䉁䈜䇯䇭䈭䈍䇮ຠ⾰䈲ᄌ䉒䉍䉁䈞䉖䇯
ฃାㇱ੍ຠ
4'%'+8'470+6
ฃାㇱ
࡙࠾࠶࠻
㪫㪮㪦㩷㪫㪰㪧㪜㪪㩷㪘㪥㪛㩷㪚㪦㪛㪜㪪㩷㪤㪘㪰㩷㪙㪜㩷㪣㪠㪪㪫㪜㪛㩷㪝㪦㪩㩷㪘㪥㩷㪠㪫㪜㪤㪅㩷㩷㪫㪟㪜㩷㪣㪦㪮㪜㪩㩷㪧㪩㪦㪛㪬㪚㪫㩷㪤㪘㪰㩷㪙㪜㩷㪪㪟㪠㪧㪧㪜㪛㩷㪠㪥㩷㪧㪣㪘㪚㪜㩷㪦㪝㩷㪫㪟㪜㩷㪬㪧㪧㪜㪩㩷 㪧㪩㪦㪛㪬㪚㪫㪅㩷㪨㪬㪘㪣㪠㪫㪰㩷㪠㪪㩷㪫㪟㪜㩷㪪㪘㪤㪜㪅
3 6;
#9:
ဳᑼ㪆䍘䍎䍢䍼⇟ภ䈏䋲Ბ䈱႐ว䇮ਅᲑ䉋䉍Ბ䈮ઍ䉒䉎ㆊᷰᦼຠ䈪䈅䉍䇮䈬䈤䉌䈎䈏䈦䈩䈇䉁䈜䇯䇭䈭䈍䇮ຠ⾰䈲ᄌ䉒䉍䉁䈞䉖䇯
㩿㪁㪈㪀ශ䈱࿑ᦠဳᑼ䇸㪌㪍㪋㪐㪈䇹䈲䍹䍚䍏ะ䈔ኾ↪䈫䈭䉍䉁䈜䇯 㪫㪟㪜㩷㪦㪧㪜㪩㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥㩾㪪㩷㪤㪘㪥㪬㪘㪣㩷㪌㪍㪋㪐㪈㩷㪤㪘㪩㪢㪜㪛㩷㩿㪁㪈㪀㪠㪪㩷㪬㪪㪜㪛㩷㪝㪦㪩㩷㪩㪬㪪㪪㪠㪘㪥㩷㪤㪦㪛㪜㪣㪅
㪈㪅䍘㪄䍢䍼⇟ภᧃየ䈱㪲㪁㪁㪴䈲䇮ㆬᛯຠ䈱ઍ䍘䍎䍢䍼䉕䈚䉁䈜䇯 㪚㪦㪛㪜㩷㪥㪬㪤㪙㪜㪩㩷㪜㪥㪛㪠㪥㪞㩷㪮㪠㪫㪟㩷㩹㪁㪁㩹㩷㪠㪥㪛㪠㪚㪘㪫㪜㪪㩷㪫㪟㪜㩷㪚㪦㪛㪜㩷㪥㪬㪤㪙㪜㪩㩷㪦㪝㩷㪩㪜㪧㪩㪜㪪㪜㪥㪫㪘㪫㪠㪭㪜㩷㪤㪘㪫㪜㪩㪠㪘㪣㪅
12'4#614 5)7+&'
ᠲⷐ㗔ᦠ
12'4#614 5/#07#.
ขᛒ⺑ᦠ
࿑ᦠ
+056#..#6+10/#6'4+#.5
Ꮏ᧚ᢱ
ฃାㇱᎿ᧚
%#$.'#55;
㩃㨺㩖㩨㩣⚵ຠ
Ꮏ᧚ᢱ
52#4'2#465
੍ຠ
ฃାㇱ੍ຠ
4'%'+8'470+6
ฃାㇱ
70+6
&'5%4+26+10%1&'ͳ
㧼㧭㧯㧷㧵㧺㧳ޓ㧸㧵㧿㨀 0#/'
࡙࠾࠶࠻
176.+0'
A-3
0#/'
0:## $#
#9:
0:#0 $0 4
㧼㧭㧯㧷㧵㧺㧳ޓ㧸㧵㧿㨀
A-4
+056#..#6+10/#6'4+#.5
70+6
176.+0'
5 /
5 /
%2
%2
0:*
&'5%4+26+10%1&'ͳ
#9:
㧔⇛࿑ߩኸᴺߪޔෳ⠨୯ߢߔ&ޕ+/'05+105+0&4#9+0)(144'('4'0%'10.;㧕
㪉㪅㩿㪁㪀ශ䈱䍗㪄䍪䍼䍷⚵ຠ䈲ㆬᛯ᧪䉁䈜䇯 㩿㪁㪀㩷㪤㪘㪩㪢㪜㪛㩷㪚㪘㪙㪣㪜㪪㩷㪘㪩㪜㩷㪪㪜㪣㪜㪚㪫㪘㪙㪣㪜㪅
㪈㪅䍘㪄䍢䍼⇟ภᧃየ䈱㪲㪁㪁㪴䈲䇮ㆬᛯຠ䈱ઍ䍘䍎䍢䍼䉕䈚䉁䈜䇯 㪚㪦㪛㪜㩷㪥㪬㪤㪙㪜㪩㩷㪜㪥㪛㪠㪥㪞㩷㪮㪠㪫㪟㩷㩹㪁㪁㩹㩷㪠㪥㪛㪠㪚㪘㪫㪜㪪㩷㪫㪟㪜㩷㪚㪦㪛㪜㩷㪥㪬㪤㪙㪜㪩㩷㪦㪝㩷㪩㪜㪧㪩㪜㪪㪜㪥㪫㪘㪫㪠㪭㪜㩷㪤㪘㪫㪜㪩㪠㪘㪣㪅
%#$.'#55;
㩃㨺㩖㩨㩣⚵ຠ
%#$.'#55;
㩃㨺㩖㩨㩣⚵ຠ
+056#..#6+10/#6'4+#.5
Ꮏ᧚ᢱ
Ꮏ᧚ᢱ
#06'00#
㨻㩧㩍㩏
࡙࠾࠶࠻
0#/'
0:**-0:**-
㧼㧭㧯㧷㧵㧺㧳ޓ㧸㧵㧿㨀
#9:
3 6;
A-5
5'.(6#22+0)5%4'9
㩎㩡㩇㩊㨹㩕㩩㩧㩒㩆㩨ޓ㩆㨷
ฬޓޓ⒓ 0#/' ⇛ޓޓ࿑ 176.+0'
%1&' 01
:575
ဳฬ㧛ⷙᩰ &'5%4+26+105
ᢙ㊂ 3 6;
%2
6;2'
↪ㅜ㧛⠨ 4'/#4-5
#9:
㧲㨁㧾㨁㧺㧻ޓ㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀㧾㧵㧯ޓ㧯㧻ޓ㧚㧘㧸㨀㧰
㧔⇛࿑ߩኸᴺߪޔෳ⠨୯ߢߔ&ޓޕ+/'05+105+0&4#9+0)(144'('4'0%'10.;㧕 #9:
ဳᑼ㩄㨺㩎㩨⇟ภ߇㧞Ბߩ႐วޔਅᲑࠃࠅᲑߦઍࠊࠆㆊᷰᦼຠߢࠅޔ߅ߥޓޕߔ߹ߡߞ߇߆ࠄߜߤޔຠ⾰ߪᄌࠊࠅ߹ߖ ࠎޕ 6916;2'5#0&%1&'5/#;$'.+56'&(14#0+6'/6*'.19'4241&7%6/#;$'5*+22'&+02.#%'1(6*'722'4 241&7%637#.+6;+56*'5#/'
⇟ภ 01
+056#..#6+10/#6'4+#.5
Ꮏ᧚ᢱ
%1&'01
A-6
4'&7%'4 .
㨻㩊㩨㩖㩩㩊 หゲ㧕
4'&7%'4 5
㨻㩊㩨㩖㩩㩊 หゲ
%1#:+#.%100'%614 / 6;2'
㩄㩒㩂㩊㧔/
5'.(6#22+0)5%4'9
㩎㩡㩇㩊㨹㩕㩩㩧㩒㩆㩨ޓ㩆㨷
ฬޓޓ⒓ 0#/'
%1&' 01
/2/#
%1&' 01
)5%#&
/2/#
)5%#&
%1&' 01
)5%/2
%1&' 01
:575
㧲㨁㧾㨁㧺㧻ޓ㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀㧾㧵㧯ޓ㧯㧻ޓ㧚㧘㧸㨀㧰
㧔⇛࿑ߩኸᴺߪޔෳ⠨୯ߢߔ&ޓޕ+/'05+105+0&4#9+0)(144'('4'0%'10.;㧕 #9:
ဳᑼ㩄㨺㩎㩨⇟ภ߇㧞Ბߩ႐วޔਅᲑࠃࠅᲑߦઍࠊࠆㆊᷰᦼຠߢࠅޔ߅ߥޓޕߔ߹ߡߞ߇߆ࠄߜߤޔຠ⾰ߪᄌࠊࠅ߹ߖ ࠎޕ 6916;2'5#0&%1&'5/#;$'.+56'&(14#0+6'/6*'.19'4241&7%6/#;$'5*+22'&+02.#%'1(6*'722'4 241&7%637#.+6;+56*'5#/'
⇟ภ 01
%1#:+#.%100'%614 / 6;2'
㩄㩒㩂㩊㧔/
5'.(6#22+0)5%4'9
㩎㩡㩇㩊㨹㩕㩩㩧㩒㩆㩨ޓ㩆㨷
ฬޓޓ⒓ 0#/' ⇛ޓޓ࿑ 176.+0'
ဳฬ㧛ⷙᩰ &'5%4+26+105
%2
%1&' 01
)5%/2
%1&' 01
ᢙ㊂ 3 6;
:575
6;2'
%1&'01
↪ㅜ㧛⠨ 4'/#4-5
#9:
A-8
㧲㨁㧾㨁㧺㧻ޓ㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀㧾㧵㧯ޓ㧯㧻ޓ㧚㧘㧸㨀㧰
㧔⇛࿑ߩኸᴺߪޔෳ⠨୯ߢߔ&ޓޕ+/'05+105+0&4#9+0)(144'('4'0%'10.;㧕 #9:
ဳᑼ㩄㨺㩎㩨⇟ภ߇㧞Ბߩ႐วޔਅᲑࠃࠅᲑߦઍࠊࠆㆊᷰᦼຠߢࠅޔ߅ߥޓޕߔ߹ߡߞ߇߆ࠄߜߤޔຠ⾰ߪᄌࠊࠅ߹ߖ ࠎޕ 6916;2'5#0&%1&'5/#;$'.+56'&(14#0+6'/6*'.19'4241&7%6/#;$'5*+22'&+02.#%'1(6*'722'4 241&7%637#.+6;+56*'5#/'
⇟ภ 01
+056#..#6+10/#6'4+#.5 ↪ㅜ㧛⠨ 4'/#4-5
+056#..#6+10/#6'4+#.5 ᢙ㊂ 3 6;
#9:
Ꮏ᧚ᢱ
ဳฬ㧛ⷙᩰ &'5%4+26+105
%2
6;2'
Ꮏ᧚ᢱ
⇛ޓޓ࿑ 176.+0'
%1&'01
A-7
⇟ภ 01
%#$.'#55;
㩃㨺㩖㩨㩣⚵ຠ
%#$.'#55;
㩃㨺㩖㩨㩣⚵ຠ
%#$.'#55;
㩃㨺㩖㩨㩣⚵ຠ
%#$.'#55;
㩃㨺㩖㩨㩣⚵ຠ
%#$.'#55;
㩃㨺㩖㩨㩣⚵ຠ
⇛ޓޓ࿑ 176.+0'
0:#$
%1&'01
5 /
%1&'01
5 /
%1&'01
5 /
%1&'01
5 /
%1&'01
5 /
ဳฬ㧛ⷙᩰ &'5%4+26+105
ᢙ㊂ 3 6;
#9:
ㆬᛯޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ 61$'5'.'%6
ㆬᛯޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ 61$'5'.'%6
ㆬᛯޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ 61$'5'.'%6
ㆬᛯޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ 61$'5'.'%6
ㆬᛯޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ 61$'5'.'%6
↪ㅜ㧛⠨ 4'/#4-5
#9:
㧲㨁㧾㨁㧺㧻ޓ㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀㧾㧵㧯ޓ㧯㧻ޓ㧚㧘㧸㨀㧰 㧔⇛࿑ߩኸᴺߪޔෳ⠨୯ߢߔ&ޓޕ+/'05+105+0&4#9+0)(144'('4'0%'10.;㧕
ฬޓޓ⒓ 0#/'
+056#..#6+10/#6'4+#.5
Ꮏ᧚ᢱ
6;2'
%1&'01
A-9
5'.($10&+0)6#2'
⛘✼㩍㨺㩖㩩
ฬޓޓ⒓ 0#/' ⇛ޓޓ࿑ 176.+0'
%1&' 01
7㩍㨺㩖㩩ޓ::/
7㩍㨺㩖㩩ޓ::/
ဳฬ㧛ⷙᩰ &'5%4+26+105
%2
ᢙ㊂ 3 6;
↪ㅜ㧛⠨ 4'/#4-5
#9:
㧲㨁㧾㨁㧺㧻ޓ㧱㧸㧱㧯㨀㧾㧵㧯ޓ㧯㧻ޓ㧚㧘㧸㨀㧰
㧔⇛࿑ߩኸᴺߪޔෳ⠨୯ߢߔ&ޓޕ+/'05+105+0&4#9+0)(144'('4'0%'10.;㧕 #9:
ဳᑼ㩄㨺㩎㩨⇟ภ߇㧞Ბߩ႐วޔਅᲑࠃࠅᲑߦઍࠊࠆㆊᷰᦼຠߢࠅޔ߅ߥޓޕߔ߹ߡߞ߇߆ࠄߜߤޔຠ⾰ߪᄌࠊࠅ߹ߖ ࠎޕ 6916;2'5#0&%1&'5/#;$'.+56'&(14#0+6'/6*'.19'4241&7%6/#;$'5*+22'&+02.#%'1(6*'722'4 241&7%637#.+6;+56*'5#/'
⇟ภ 01
+056#..#6+10/#6'4+#.5
Ꮏ᧚ᢱ
6;2'
%1&'01
A-10
(75'
㩕㨷㨺㩇㩨
()/$8# 2$(
2'4 8'5
#9:
ဳᑼ㩄㨺㩎㩨⇟ภ߇㧞Ბߩ႐วޔਅᲑࠃࠅᲑߦઍࠊࠆㆊᷰᦼຠߢࠅޔ߅ߥޓޕߔ߹ߡߞ߇߆ࠄߜߤޔຠ⾰ߪᄌ ࠊࠅ߹ߖࠎޕ 6916;2'5#0&%1&'5/#;$'.+56'&(14#0+6'/6*'.19'4241&7%6/#;$'5*+22'&+02.#%'1(6*' 722'4241&7%637#.+6;+56*'5#/'
5'652'4 8'55'.
$1:012
4'/#4-5%1&'01
#9:
52#4'
㧔⇛࿑ߩኸᴺߪޔෳ⠨୯ߢߔ&ޓޕ+/'05+105+0&4#9+0)(ޓ144'('4'0%'10.;㧕
&9)01
2'4 5'6
914-+0)
37#06+6;
75'
52
6;2'
&9)01 14 6;2'01
(74701'.'%64+%%1.6&
176.+0'
52#4'2#465.+56(14
0#/'1( 2#46
/(4 50#/'
+6'/ 01
5*+201
%1&'01
A-11
D
アンテナケーブル ANTENNA CABLE
固定ボルト FIXING BOLT
0° -5°
33°
-5° - 33°
ANTENNA BASE No.13-QA330 TYPE コード番号 000-803-239 CODE No.
アンテナ 直型アンテナベース ベース型式 RIGHT ANGLE ANTENNA BASE
MOUNTING METHOD
装備方法
INCLINATION
傾斜
000-803-240
No.13-QA310
L-TYPE ANTENNA BASE
L型アンテナベース
0°
32°
65°
32° - 65°
オプションのアンテナベースを使う。 USE OPTIONAL ANTENNA BASE No.13-QA330/QA310.
0°
65° 98°
65° - 98°
C)取付ける場所が傾斜しているとき ANTENNA BASE MOUNTING
90ﾟ
4
φ76
φ61
4-M5 皿穴 COUNTERSUNK
DWG. No.
SCALE
APPROVED
CHECKED
φ156
ケーブル固定板 CABLE FIXTURE
5
表2参照 SEE TABLE 2.
C5629-G05- F
1/2
MASS
Y. Hatai
TAKAHASHI.T
E.MIYOSHI
08-021-310G- 1
NX-700 NX-300 質量は10mケーブルを含む。 MASS W/ 10m CABLE.
１）指定外の寸法公差は表１による。 １. TABLE 1 INDICATES TOLERANCE OF DIMENSIONS WHICH IS NOT SPECIFIED.
DRAWN Oct. 13, '05
注記 NOTE
THREAD PER 25.4mm (1 INCH): 14 PITCH: 1.8143 mm THREAD LENGTH: 15.17 mm PITCH DIAMETER: 24.17 mm
1-14UNS1B ねじ山数(25.4mmにつき)： 14 ピッチ： 1.8143 mm オネジ有効長さ： 15.17 mm オネジ有効径： 24.17 mm
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS OF ANTENNA BASE
アンテナベース基部
注記 1）パイプ(アンテナベース)はアンテナユニットにねじ込んだ後に固定する。 2）アンテナを固定するときはパイプ（アンテナベース）をアンテナにねじ込むこと。 アンテナ側をねじるとコネクタ部やケーブルに無理がかかり、故障の原因となる。 NOTE 1. FASTEN PIPE(ANTENNA BASE) TO ANTENNA UNIT FIRST THEN FIX THEM TO MAST OR HANDRAIL. 2. WHEN FIXING ANTENNA, TURN PIPE OR ANTENNA BASE; NOT THE ANTENNA. TURNING THE ANTENNA MAY TWIST THE CABLE AND PLACE STRESS ON CONNECTOR.
アンテナベース ANTENNA BASE
USE HANDRAIL MOUNTING BASE No.13-RC5160 (CODE No.000-806-114, OPTION). THE DIAMETER OF THE HANDRAIL SHOULD BE FROM φ19mm TO φ32mm. テープを巻く WIND TAPE
KEEP CABLE ASIDE TO AVOID INJURY FROM PIPE.
CABLE TIE (LOCAL SUPPLY)
WIND TAPE
テープを巻く
3
コンベックス (現地手配）
パイプで傷つかないよう ケーブルを脇へよける。
PIPE
パイプ
HANDRAIL MOUNTING
コンベックス (現地手配）
CABLE TIE (LOCAL SUPPLY)
パーカー クランプ HOSE CLAMP
ケーブル固定板 CABLE FIXTURE
USE A PIPE ONLY.
b)パイプのみを使うとき
レール用アンテナベース No.13-RC5160（取付可能レール直径：φ19∼φ32） (コード番号：000-806-114）
B)スタンションやパルピットにつけるとき
LEAVE SLACK HERE TO RELIEF STRESS ON CONNECTOR.
コネクタに力がかからない よう、余裕を持たせる。
MOUNTING BRACKET
取付補助金具
115
C
ANTENNA CABLE
120
アンテナケーブル
PIPE
パイプ
WIND TAPE
テープを巻く
USE MAST MOUNTING KIT CP20-01111.
173
B
2
a)マスト取付金具CP20-01111(工事材料)でマストに固定する。
MAST MOUNTING
173
A
1
A)マストへの取付け
116 NAME
名称
TITLE
外寸図
NX-3H-D/NX-7H 空中線部/アンテナ部
OUTLINE DRAWING
ANTENNA UNIT
0.6
MAIN MAST メインマスト
NAVTEX ANTENNA ナブテックスアンテナ
NX-7H(NX-700)
型式 質量(kg) TYPE MASS(±10％) NX-3H-D(NX-300) 0.94
TABLE 2
±３
表 2
±２．５
公差(mm) TOLERANCE ±１．５
TABLE 1
50 ＜ Ｌ ≦ 100
レーダービームに入らないこと DO NOT MOUNT WITHIN RADAR BEAM.
MOUNTING LOCATION
取付位置
表 １ 寸法区分(mm) DIMENSIONS 0 ＜ Ｌ ≦ 50 100 ＜ Ｌ ≦ 500
6
D
C
B
A
Ｄ-６
45ﾟ
C
B
A
*1 DPYC-1.5 *1 DPYC-1.5
AC IN + DC - IN
*1
*1
AC/DC電源ﾕﾆｯﾄ AC/DC POWER DC + SUPPLY UNIT OUT PR-240 *2 E
NOTE *1. SHIPYARD SUPPLY. *2. OPTION. *3. SELECT OUTPUT OF PRINTER SIGNAL FROM MENU.
*1 IV-2sq.
プリンタ RS-232C CABLE PRINTER (NX-700Bのみ) (NX-700B ONLY)
FG 3
*1
*1
*1 TTYCS-1,MAX.50m
TTYCS-1Q
TTYCS-1Q
注記 ＊１）造船所手配。 ＊２）オプション。 ＊３）プリンタ信号出力はメニューにて選択。
100-115/ 200-230VAC 1φ,50/60Hz
12-24 VDC
航法装置 NAVIGATOR
INS
アラームユニット NAVTEX ALARM UNIT ALM-H 1 IC-350 *2 ALM-C 2
1
受信部 RECEIVER UNIT NX-7001
25/Aug/08
DWG.No.
SCALE
T.TAKENO
T.YAMASAKI
C5649-C01- H
MASS
30/Sep/08 R.Esumi
25/Aug/08 APPROVED
CHECKED
DRAWN
JBC-25P 1 14 2 15 3 16 4 17 5 18 6 19 7 20 8 21 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13
ANT
GND *1 IV-1.25sq.
J402(WAGO) J401 1 TD-A SD *3 2 TD-B(IEC61162-2) RD 3 GND-ISO TD-A 4 RD-A TD-B 5 RD-B RD-A 6 FG RD-B ALARM-H ALARM-C J403(WAGO) 1 ALARM-H TEST-RD-A 2 ALARM-C TEST-RD-B 3 FG FRQ-RD-A 4 SD *3 FRQ-RD-B 5 RD 490-TD-A 6 SG 490-TD-B 7 FG 518-TD-A 8 FG 518-TD-B 12V+ 0V SG TB401 0V GND-ISO (+) TB402 DC+ DC+ (-) DC+ DCDCDCB2 RCV 08P3227
2 PL-259(*1) M-P-7
04S4168,10/20/30/40/50m,φ5.5 M-P-3
FMA-1 M-P-3 04S4168,φ5.5 M-P-3 10/20/30/40/50m
延長ケーブルキット OP04-2 *2 EXTENSION CABLE KIT
RG-214(*1) 200m MAX. RG-10/UY *1
0.6m
アンテナ部 ANTENNA UNIT NX-7H
4
REF.No.
08-001-3157-A
NAME
名 称
TITLE
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
NAVTEX RECEIVER
相互結線図
NX-700A/B ナブテックス受信機
GND *1 IV-1.25sq.
*2 DSUB25P-DSUB25P-5M/10M/15M,5/10/15m JBC-25S RECEIVER DSUB25P-DSUB25P-3M,3m,φ10 1 SD/NC P (NC: NX-700B ONLY) 14 RD/NC 2 TD-A P 指示部 15 TD-B DISPLAY UNIT 3 RD-A P 16 RD-B NX-700A/B 4 ALARM-H P 17 ALARM-C 5 TEST-RD-A P 18 TEST-RD-B 6 FRQ-RD-A P 19 FRQ-RD-B 7 490-TD-A P 20 490-TD-B 8 518-TD-A P 21 518-TD-B 9 12V+ P 22 0V SG 10 0V GND-ISO 23 DC+ 11 DC+ P 24 DC+ P 12 DCP 25 DC13 DC-
M-P-3
PL-259(*1) FM-MP-7
3
INDEX Editing..................................................... 2-14
A Alarm message ............................................. 2-9
O C
Output Speed.............................................. 2-19
Contrast ...................................................... 2-18
P D Date............................................................ 2-21 Default Settings ............................................ 3-6 Diagnostics ................................................... 3-5
F Font Size .................................................... 2-18 Frequency..................................................... 2-8
Power ........................................................... 2-1 Printer Setting ............................................. 4-10 Printing ....................................................... 2-10 all messages........................................... 2-10 canceling ................................................ 2-11 each messages....................................... 2-11 Print header ................................................ 2-19 Protecting ................................................... 2-10
R I Icons........................................................... 2-15 Input Speed ................................................ 2-19
Rcv Monitor................................................. 2-19 Receive Mode............................................... 2-5 Replacement................................................. 3-2
K
S
Keys ............................................................. 2-1 Key Beep.................................................... 2-17
Scrolling...................................................... 2-18 Speed Display............................................. 2-18
L
T
LCD dimmer ................................................. 2-2
Time Display ............................................... 2-18 Time Offset ................................................. 2-17 Troubleshooting ............................................ 3-4
M Maintenance ................................................. 3-1 Menu Tree ................................................. AP-1 Message Sample ..................................................... 2-4 Format ...................................................... 1-2 List.......................................................... 2-16 New .......................................................... 2-3 Processing ................................................ 2-9
U Units ........................................................... 2-17
N NAVTEX ....................................................... 1-1 NAVTEX Station Map .................................... 1-3 NAVTEX Station List ..................................... 1-4 Adding .................................................... 2-12 Deleting .................................................. 2-14
IN-1
9-52 Ashihara-cho, Nishinomiya, 662-8580, Japan Tel: +81 (798) 65-2111 Fax: +81 (798) 65-4200 www.furuno.co.jp
Publication No. DOC-1097
Declaration of Conformity
0560
We FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------(Manufacturer)
9-52 Ashihara-Cho, Nishinomiya City, 662-8580, Hyogo, Japan ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------(Address)
declare under our sole responsibility that the product NAVTEX receiver Types: NX-700A (display with printer) and NX-700B (display only) consisting of Display unit NX-700-A (for NX-700A) or NX-700-B (for NX-700B), Receiver unit NX-7001, Active ferrite loop antenna NX-7H and optional Alarm unit IC-350 and Power supply unit PR-240 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------(Model name, type number)
to which this declaration relates conforms to the following standard(s) or normative document(s) IMO Resolution MSC.148(77) IEC 61097-6 2nd edition: 2005-12 IMO Resolution A.694(17) EN 61162-1: 2000-07 (IEC 61162-1 2nd edition: 2000-07) ITU-R Recommendation M.540-2 EN 61162-2: 1998-09 (IEC 61162-2 1st edition: 1998-09) ITU-R Recommendation M.625-3 EN 60945: 2002 (IEC 60945 4th edition: 2002-08) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------(title and/or number and date of issue of the standard(s) or other normative document(s))
For assessment, see • EC type-examination (Module B) certificate No 05212003/AA/03 of 20 August 2008 issued by Telefication, The Netherlands • Production Quality System (Module D) certificate No. P 112 of 4 December 2008 issued by Telefication, The Netherlands • Test reports 99624530 of 25 May 2005 and 99770230 of 6 July 2006 prepared by Telefication, The Netherlands • Test Report No. FLI 12-05-020 of 17 May 2005 prepared by Furuno Labotech International Co., Ltd., Nishinomiya, Japan
This declaration is issued according to the provisions of European Council Directive 96/98/EC on marine equipment modified by Commission Directive 2008/67/EC.
On behalf of Furuno Electric Co., Ltd.
Nishinomiya City, Japan February 26, 2009 ------------------------------------------------------
Hiroaki Komatsu Manager, International Rules and Regulations ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Place and date of issue)
(name and signature or equivalent marking of authorized person)
This page left intentionally blank
Index divider: Section 6 N
Document Type:
Document name:
SYSTEM USER MANUAL
BRI – D56005 – 01IU
Project Title:
Date First Issue:
Author:
Revision:
15.05.2012
EKI
B
Jotron Tron 60S/GPS GMDSS EPIRB
Enclosed documents from sub-supplier & revision history: Revision: (A,B,C,……..)
Description / Enclosed documents:
Date: (dd.mm.yyyy)
Sign.:
A B
Jotron Tron 60S_Installation and user_manual Added “GPS” to product name. No changes in enclosed documents. Jotron Tron 60S_GPS_Installation and user_manual
15.05.2012 21.11.2012
EKI FKO
Component picture:
Ulstein Power & Control AS
This document and its content is the property of ULSTEIN. Non-public information contained herein shall be treated as Confidential Information. No use, copying, citation or publication of this document or its content is permitted without prior written consent from ULSTEIN. Any conflicts arising from unauthorized use shall be governed by the laws of Norway.
File Name:
Page:
BRI-D56005-01IU (B) System User Manual.doc
Page 1 of 1
USERS MANUAL
Tron 60S Tron 60GPS www.jotron.com
www.jotron.com
AMENDMENT RECORDS Amendment no
By
Date
Page(s)
Vers. Reason for change
1
TH
23.12.2010
Total 32
A
New Manual
2
TH
25.02.2011
Ch. 3.1.2
B
Changed battery info
3
TH
18.04.2011
Page 13-29
C
Re-arranged pictures/drawings
4
TH
19.09.2011
Page 15, 22-25
D
Info update
5
BR
10.11.2011
Page 24
E
Info update on test
6
TH
20.01.2012
Page 16-18, 30
F
Update text and images
7
ØE
08.02.2012
6,16, 18, 20, 22 and 24
G
Update text
8
2
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
www.jotron.com
EC Declaration of Conformity, available at www.jotron.com
ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS BAUD Transmission rate unit of measurement for binary coded data (bit per second) BIT Short form of Binary Digit. The smallest element of data in a binary-coded value BPS Bits Per Second COSPAS COsmicheskaya Sistyema Poiska Avariynich Sudov (Space System for the Search of Vessels in Distress) EPIRB Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacon GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS) The NAVSTAR Global Positioning System, which consists of orbiting satellites, a network of ground control stations, and user positioning and navigation equipment. The system has 24 satellites plus 3 active spare satellites in six orbital planes about 20,200 kilometers above the earth. IEC International Electro-technical Commission IMO International Maritime Organization IBRD International 406MHz Beacon Registration Database ITU International Telecommunication Union
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
3
www.jotron.com
LED Light Emitting Diode LUT Local User Terminal (Ground Station) MCA Marine and Coastguard Agency (UK) MCC Mission Control Centre NOAA National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (USA) RCC Rescue Coordination Centre SARSAT Search and Rescue Satellite-Aided Tracking System SBM Shore Based Maintenance – as required by SOLAS regulation IV/15.9.2 of SOLAS 1974 as amended with, in accordance with MSC/Circ. 1039 guidelines for Shore-Based Maintenance (SBM) of Satellite EPIRBs within 5 years if: Passenger ships (> 12 passengers) and cargo ships (> 300GT) engaged in International voyages, shall perform SBM as follows: Latest by the date of the EPIRB label with this text, or the battery Label, whichever is first. When this EPIRB becomes due for SBM in accordance with national requirements. VHF Very High Frequency -A set of frequencies in the 30-300MHz region.
4
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
www.jotron.com
IMPORTANT The information in this book has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies. This equipment contains CMOS integrated circuits. Observe handling precautions to avoid static discharges which may damage these devices. Jotron AS reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products or modules described herein to improve reliability, function or design. Jotron AS does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of the described product.
WARNING / IMPORTANT Jotron AS is a prime manufacturer of safety equipment designed for rescue of human lives and their property. For safety equipment to be effective in line with the design parameters it is important that they are handled, stowed and maintained in compliance with the manufacturers instructions. Jotron AS can not be held responsible for any damage caused due to incorrect use of the equipment or breach of laid down procedures or for failure of any specific component or other parts of the equipment. The chapter covering battery replacement is added for information only. Jotron AS does not take any responsibility for improper disassembling/assembling of the beacon. We strongly recommend all service to be done by authorized Jotron AS agents. In addition to normal service, Jotron AS agents have the necessary equipment and education to test the operational functions of the beacon. Nonoriginal maintenance and/or service parts may destroy the equipment function and performance.
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
5
www.jotron.com
PRODUCT SAFETY DATA SHEET PRODUCT NAME:
Energizer Battery
TYPE NO.:
L91, L92, EA91, EA92 Volts: 1.5
TRADE NAMES:
ULTIMATE (L91, L92); ADVANCED (EA91, EA92)
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT:
7.6 g. (L92, EA92) – 14.5 g. (L91, EA91)
CHEMICAL SYSTEM:
Lithium/Iron Disulfide
DESIGNED FOR RECHARGE:
No
HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION Under normal conditions of use, the battery is hermetically sealed. Ingestion: Swallowing a battery can be harmful. Inhalation: Contents of an open battery can cause respiratory irritation. Skin Contact: Contents of an open battery can cause skin irritation. Eye Contact: Contents of an open battery can cause severe irritation. FIRST AID MEASURES Ingestion: Do not induce vomiting or give food or drink. Seek medical attention immediately. CALL NATIONAL BATTERY INGESTION HOTLINE for advice and follow-up (202-625-3333) collect day or night. Inhalation: Provide fresh air and seek medical attention. Skin Contact: Remove contaminated clothing and wash skin with soap and water. Eye Contact: Immediately flush eyes thoroughly with water for at least 15 minutes, lifting upper and lower lids, until no evidence of the chemical remains. Seek medical attention. Note: Carbon black is listed as a possible carcinogen by International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC). FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES In case of fire where lithium batteries are present, flood area with water or smother with a Class D fire extinguishant appropriate for lithium metal, such as Lith-X. Water may not extinguish burning batteries but will cool the adjacent batteries and control the spread of fire. Burning batteries will burn themselves out. Virtually all fires involving lithium batteries can be controlled by flooding 6
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
www.jotron.com
with water. However, the contents of the battery will react with water and form hydrogen gas. In a confined space, hydrogen gas can form an explosive mixture. In this situation, smothering agents are recommended. A smothering agent will extinguish burning lithium batteries. Emergency Responders should wear self-contained breathing apparatus. Burning lithium-iron disulfide batteries produce toxic and corrosive lithium hydroxide fumes and sulfur dioxide gas. HANDLING AND STORAGE Storage: Store in a cool, well ventilated area. Elevated temperatures can result in shortened battery life. In locations that handle large quantities of lithium batteries, such as warehouses, lithium batteries should be isolated from unnecessary combustibles. Mechanical Containment: If potting or sealing the battery in an airtight or watertight container is required, consult your Energizer Battery Manufacturing, Inc. representative for precautionary suggestions. Do not obstruct safety release vents on batteries. Encapsulation of batteries will not allow cell venting and can cause high pressure rupture. Handling: Accidental short circuit for a few seconds will not seriously affect the battery. Prolonged short circuit will cause the battery to lose energy, generate significant heat and can cause the safety release vent to open. Sources of short circuits include jumbled batteries in bulk containers, metal jewelry, metal covered tables or metal belts used for assembly of batteries into devices. Damaging a lithium battery may result in an internal short circuit. The contents of an open battery, including a vented battery, when exposed to water, may result in a fire and/or explosion. Crushed or damaged batteries may result in a fire. If soldering or welding to the battery is required, consult your Energizer representative for proper precautions to prevent seal damage or short circuit. Charging: This battery is manufactured in a charged state. It is not designed for recharging. Recharging can cause battery leakage or, in some cases, high pressure rupture. Inadvertent charging can occur if a battery is installed backwards. Labeling: If the Energizer label or package warnings are not visible, it is important to provide a package and/or device label stating: 85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
7
www.jotron.com
- WARNING: Battery can explode or leak and cause burns if installed backwards, disassembled, charged, or exposed to water, fire or high temperature. Where accidental ingestion of small batteries is possible, the label should include: - WARNING: (1) Keep away from small children. If swallowed, promptly see doctor. Battery can explode or leak and cause burns if installed backwards, disassembled, charged, or exposed to water, fire or high temperature.
TEST AND MAINTENANCE RECORD DATE
N/T/B
SIGN
INSP
N= New EPIRB installed, T= Test, B= New battery
TEST OF RADIO EQUIPMENT Monthly: Float-free and manual EPIRBs to be checked using the means provided for testing on the equipment. Check data for periodical maintenance requirement for float-free EPIRB. False alerts transmitted by EPIRB False alerts are a serious problem for the rescue service. Nearly 90% of EPIRB initiated distress alerts turn out to be false alarms. If for any reason, your EPIRB should cause a false alarm, it is most important that you contact the nearest search and rescue authority and tell them it was a false alarm. They can then stand down any rescue service (coast radio station 8
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
www.jotron.com
or appropriate CES or RCC). Use any means at your disposal to make contact. Switch off the distress alarm by de-activating your EPIRB, as soon as possible. If your beacon is activated in a non-distress situation or a distress situation which has been resolved and you no longer require assistance, contact the nearest search and rescue authorities via the most expeditious means available with the following information: Beacon ID number (15 character UIN): Position (At time of activation): Date of Activation: Time of Activation (Time zone): Duration of Activation: Beacon marke and model: Vessel Name/lD: Circumstances/cause (if known):
USA The United States search and rescue authority is the U.S. Coast Guard. The primary points of contact are: Pacific Ocean Area USCG Pacific Area Command Centre Tel: +1 (510)-437-3701 Atlantic Ocean / Gulf of Mexico Area USCG Atlantic Area Command Centre Tel: +1 (757)-398-6231 From Any Location USCG Headquarters Command Centre Tel: +1 (800)-323-7233
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
9
www.jotron.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
10
1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.1 TRON 60S/GPS 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 SIGNAL DETECTION 1.2.2 DISTRESS LOCATION DETERMINATION 1.2.3 EPIRB REGISTRATION
12 12 13 13 14 15
2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.1 GENERAL 2.2 COSPAS-SARSAT TRANSMITTER 2.3 NAVIGATION DEVICE 2.4 HOMING TRANSMITTER 2.5 BRACKETS 2.5.1 FLOAT FREE BRACKET FB-60 2.5.2 MANUAL BRACKET MB-60
16 16 16 16 16 17 17 17
3
EPIRB DESCRIPTION 3.1 GENERAL 3.1.1 MAIN MODULE WITH ANTENNA 3.1.2 BATTERY MODULE
18 18 18 18
4
INSTALLATION 4.1 BRACKETS 4.1.1 FLOAT FREE BRACKET FB-60 4.1.2 MANUAL BRACKET MB-60 4.1.3 MOUNTING THE FB-60/MB-60 BRACKETS
19 19 19 20 20
5
OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS 5.1 MANUAL OPERATION 5.1.1 OUT OF BRACKET 5.1.2 FLOAT FREE BRACKET FB-60 5.2 AUTOMATIC OPERATION - FLOAT FREE BRACKET FB-60 5.3 TEST
22 22 22 23 24 24
6
PERIODICAL CONTROL 6.1 SERVICE PROCEDURE 2011
26 28
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
www.jotron.com
7
MAINTENANCE 7.1 EPIRB MODULE / BATTERY MODULE 7.1.1 CHANGE OF BATTERY 7.2 HYDROSTATIC RELEASE REPLACEMENT 7.2.1 REPLACING THE RELEASE MECHANISM IN FB-60 BRACKET
29 29 29 29
8
SPARE PARTS
30
9
SERVICE AGENTS
31
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
29
11
www.jotron.com
1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Tron 60S/GPS is emergency equipment consisting of: Tron 60S/GPS Cospas-Sarsat emergency EPIRB One of the following brackets: FB-60 - Automatic float free bracket. MB-60 - Manual bracket. The Tron 60S/GPS EPIRB is developed to meet the regulations and rules for use on vessels and life rafts in the maritime service. Tron 60S/GPS meets the following specifications for 406 MHz EPIRBs for use in search and rescue operations at sea. See “Declaration of Conformity” document at www.Jotron.com for information of required standards. 1.1 TRON 60S/GPS The Tron 60S/GPS is buoyant, and is designed to automatically release and activate in case of an emergency where the EPIRB and its bracket is submerged into the sea. The Tron 60S/GPS can also be operated as a manual EPIRB, by manually releasing it from its bracket and then activating it. Two different brackets are currently available for the Tron 60S/GPS. MB-60 is the manual bracket and FB-60 is the automatic bracket with cover. The manual bracket comes without the hydrostatic release mechanism and is used to store the beacon inside the wheelhouse or other protected places. The automatic bracket is mounted in a free space outside where the beacon can be released automatically. The purpose of the Tron 60S/GPS is to give a primary alarm to the search and rescue authorities. The EPIRB gives an immediate alarm when activated, transmitting the ID of the ship in distress. Care must be taken not to activate the EPIRB unless in an emergency situation, in such cases the user will be held responsible. For periodic testing a test function is implemented. During the test cycle the EPIRB does a self-test on the transmitters and on the battery status. No emergency signal is transmitted during the self-test. The battery of the EPIRB will last for at least 48 hours from activation of the EPIRB. 12
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
www.jotron.com
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The Cospas-Sarsat system was introduced in 1982 as a worldwide search and rescue system with the help of satellites covering the earth’s surface. Since the introduction of the system more than 28000 persons have been rescued by the Cospas-Sarsat system (2009). Currently the system consists of 5 functional satellites in a polar orbit constellation, these satellites cover the entire earth’s surface and receive the emergency signal from the 406 MHz transmitter within the Tron 60S/GPS, more polar orbiting satellites will be available in the future, giving a faster location and rescue time. In addition several geostationary satellites are equipped with a 406 MHz transponder, these satellites are not able to locate the Tron 60S/GPS but will give an early warning to the rescue forces, minimising the time from an emergency occurs till the rescue forces are at the site. Each emergency EPIRB in the system is programmed with its own unique code, therefore it is vital that the ships data that is given to the dealer you obtained your Tron 60S/GPS, is correct. It is also important that your EPIRB is registered in the database for each country. This database is normally located in the same country that the ship is registered. 1.2.1 SIGNAL DETECTION When the Tron 60S/GPS is activated (manually or automatically) it transmits on the frequencies 121.5 MHz and 406.037 MHz. An analogue signal is emitted on 121.5 MHz and a digital signal is transmitted on 406.037 MHz. After the Tron 60S/GPS is activated, the next passing satellite will detect the transmitted signal and relay it to an antenna at a ground station, called LUT. The International Cospas-Sarsat System has ceased satellite processing of 121.5/243 MHz beacons from 1 February 2009.
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
13
www.jotron.com
1.2.2
DISTRESS LOCATION DETERMINATION The location of the distress signal is determined by taking measurements of the doppler shift of the EPIRB frequency when the satellite first approach and then pass the EPIRB.
The actual frequency is heard at the time of closest approach (TCA). Knowing the position of the satellite and using the received doppler signal information, it is possible to determine the location of the Tron 60S/GPS from the satellite at the TCA. At the LUT, actually two positions are calculated. One is the actual position (A) and the other is the mirror image (B) position. A second satellite pass confirms the correct location (A). Doppler-only accuracy is within 5 km (3 mi) (3.1 statute miles or 2.6 nautical miles)— that is, the position is sufficiently accurate for SAR purposes even after only one pass. What’s more, the most likely of the two ’mirror’ positions can be determined valid with 98.5% accuracy after only one satellite pass. This accuracy can be increased to 99.3% using so-called ”combined Leo-Geo processing,” and this technique also enables accurate positions to be generated with as little as two or three bursts from the beacon (i.e. less than 4 minutes of transmission) and thus greatly increases the chances of being found even if the beacon is ultimately consumed by fire or is otherwise destroyed 1.2.2.1 GPS ADVANTAGE Tron 60GPS has been designed to operate with the Cospas-Sarsat system and will enhance further the lifesaving capabilities of conventional beacons. Please see below comparison between Tron 60S and Tron 60GPS depending on detection by polar orbiting or geostationary satellites.
14
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
www.jotron.com
GPS position is updated every 5 minutes, and can also be tested in SELF TEST (On previous models, position updates was only allowed every 20 minutes and NOT allowed to be tested in SELF TEST) 1.2.3 EPIRB REGISTRATION Normally the MCC will contact the vessel or the contact person registered in a shipping register and/or an EPIRB register (Ships owner, family member etc.) before alerting the RCC. This is to determine if the alarm from the EPIRB for some reason is a false alarm, and an expensive rescue operation can be avoided. Because of this it is important that the ships data is correct in the shipping register or in the EPIRB database. You should register your beacon with the national authority associated with the country code in the hexadecimal identification (15 Hex ID) of your beacon. You can register your beacon online with the Cospas-Sarsat IBRD if your country does not provide a registration facility and your country has allowed direct registration in the IBRD: www.406registration.com If your country operates a national beacon registry, consult the document C/S S.007 ”Cospas-Sarsat Handbook of Beacon Regulations” available at www. cospas-sarsat.org to obtain the point of contact. Some EPIRB registration links: USA: http://www.beaconregistration.noaa.gov UK: http://www.mcga.gov.uk (search for ”EPIRB registration”) USA Vessel owners shall advise NOAA in writing upon change of vessel or EPIRB ownership. Transfer of EPIRB to another vessel, or any other change in registration information, NOAA will provide registrants with proof of registration and change of registration postcards.
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
15
www.jotron.com
2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 GENERAL Battery: Housing: Dimensions: x Height: x Max diameter: x Weight: Materials: Compass safe distance: Temperature operating: Temperature storage: Operating life:
Lithium/iron disulfide, 12V/2900 mAh, 5 years service life Glass reinforced Polycarbonate 340 mm 128mm 680 gram Polycarbonate 0,85 m -20°C to + 55°C -40°C to + 65°C Minimum 48 hours at -20°C
2.2 COSPAS-SARSAT TRANSMITTER Frequency: 406.037 MHz ±2 ppm Output power: 5W ±2 dB Protocols: Tron 60S/GPS: Maritime, Serialized, Radio Call sign, Location protocols Modulation: Phase modulation 1.1 ±0.1 rad Data encoding: Bi Phase L Stability: Short term: 2 x10e -9 Medium term: 10e-9 -9 Residual noise: 3 x10e Bit rate: 400 b/s Antenna: Omni directional 2.3 NAVIGATION DEVICE Type: 22 Channel GPS Receiver Antenna: Chip type 2.4 HOMING TRANSMITTER Frequency: 121.500 MHz Output power: Up to 100 mW Modulation: A9, AM sweep tone between 300Hz and 1600Hz Sweep range: 700 Hz Sweep rate: 2.5 Hz Stability: 10 ppm over temperature range Antenna: Omni directional 16
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
www.jotron.com
2.5
BRACKETS
2.5.1 FLOAT FREE BRACKET FB-60 Materials: Luran S/ ABS Dimensions (hwd): (385 x 151 x 148) cm Weight: 850 g Release mechanism: Jotron HRU kit (part. no. 86218)
2.5.2 MANUAL BRACKET MB-60 Materials: PA6 + 30% fibre glas (Polyamide) Dimensions (hwd): (156x 134 x 98.5) cm Weight: 150 g
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
17
www.jotron.com
3
EPIRB DESCRIPTION
3.1 GENERAL The Tron 60S/GPS consists of upper and lower house mounted together withan equator ring with gasket. Tron 60S/GPS consists of the following main parts: Main module with antenna Battery module 3.1.1 MAIN MODULE WITH ANTENNA The EPIRB module consists of: The main board including all electronic circuitry and the main switch Antenna with flash LED 3.1.2 BATTERY MODULE The Battery module supplies the EPIRB module with 12 V power to keep the EPIRB transmitters active for 48 hours when activated, and for test sequences. The battery pack is attached inside the lower house. The seawater contacts are mounted in the battery module. The batteries are mounted in a plastic battery holder.
18
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
www.jotron.com
4
INSTALLATION
4.1 BRACKETS Two different brackets are currently available for the Tron 60S/GPS. 4.1.1
FLOAT FREE BRACKET FB-60
WARNING: DO NOT INSTALL THE EPIRB NEAR STRONG MAGNETIC FIELDS THAT COULD ACTIVATE THE BEACON When the Tron 60S/GPS is mounted in the float-free bracket, FB-60, it will operate as an automatic float free unit. The satellite float-free EPIRB should be located/installed so that the following requirements are fulfilled: The EPIRB should, with greatest possible probability, float-free and avoidbeing caught in railings, superstructure, etc., if the ship sinks. The EPIRB should be located so that it may be easily released manually and brought to the survival craft by one person. It should therefore not be located in a radar mast or any other places which can only be reached by vertical ladder. The location should be well protected from environmental conditions such as direct seaspray, chemicals, oil, exhaust and vibrations.
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
19
www.jotron.com
4.1.2 MANUAL BRACKET MB-60 When the Tron 60S/GPS is mounted in the MB-60 bracket, it will operate as a manual unit. This bracket is typically used to store the EPIRB inside the wheelhouse or other protected areas of the ship. When the Tron 60S/GPS is mounted in the MB-60 bracket, the EPIRB can be activated as described in 5.1.1, but the sea water contacts are deactivated in the bracket. The bracket should be mounted in an easily accessible place where it can be removed in a hurry in case of an emergency.
M5 bolts x 3
4.1.3 MOUNTING THE FB-60/MB-60 BRACKETS The bracket is mounted with 5mm bolts according to the drawing. Use the bolts supplied with the bracket. The bracket could be mounted in either a vertical or horizontal position, whichever is the best regarding maintenance and operation. A vertical position is recommended.
20
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
www.jotron.com
www.jotron.com
5
OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING USE ONLY DURING SITUATIONS OF GRAVE AND IMMINENT DANGER REPLACE THE BATTERY AFTER THE SATELLITE EPIRB IS OPERATED FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN A TEST The Tron 60S/GPS is designed to be operated either manually or automatically. The EPIRB is always armed, that is the EPIRB will automatically start to transmit when the EPIRB is out of the bracket and deployed into water. In the EPIRB there is an automatic safety switch. This switch prevents the seawater contacts from operating the EPIRB (caused by ice, sea-spray etc.) as long as the EPIRB is placed in its bracket. 5.1
MANUAL OPERATION
5.1.1
OUT OF BRACKET
1
2
3
Regarding the 3 pictures above, follow instructions from 4-5 on page 23.
22
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
www.jotron.com
5.1.2
FLOAT FREE BRACKET FB-60
WARNING The EPIRB can drop out of the FB-60 bracket when releasing top cover
For operation of the beacon in the bracket please follow instructions 1 to 7. It is not recommended to operate the beacon inside a life raft or under a cover or canopy. Do NOT tie the lanyard to the ship in distress, as this will prevent the unit to functioning if the ship sinks. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Remove the locking pin from the bracket (FB-60) Remove the FB-60 cover Take out the EPIRB from the bracket Pull the locking pin holding the main switch. Move main switch to the left, to ON position. The LED indicator, located at the top of the antenna, will start to flash, indicating that the EPIRB is operating. 6. Tie the beacon lanyard to you or to the survival craft 7. If possible keep the EPIRB in an open area, away from any metal objects (ship construction etc.) that may limit the satellite coverage. This is especially important for Tron 60GPS, since it needs good reception to obtain a GPS position. NOTE: To stop transmission, move the main switch to READY position.
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
23
www.jotron.com
5.2
AUTOMATIC OPERATION - FLOAT FREE BRACKET FB-60
1. The Tron 60S/GPS will automatically release from the bracket, float to the surface and start to transmit when the EPIRB, in its bracket is deployed into water at a depth of app. 2-4 meters (6 - 13 feet). 2. Transmission will continue until the EPIRB is lifted out of the water, and dried off. The transmission can also be stopped by placing the EPIRB in the bracket. 5.3 TEST To perform the self-test, the EPIRB has to be removed from the bracket. FB-60 bracket: Release FB-60 top cover by removing the locking pin. 1. Push and hold switch in TEST position for 15 seconds. Keep hands and other objects away from the antenna. 2. Test passed after one single flash only! 3. Release the switch and put the EPIRB back into the bracket
WARNING The EPIRB can drop out of the FB-60 bracket when releasing top cover
Only 1 flash = OK
Release the switch after 15 sec.
Hold 15 sec.
1
24
2
3
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
www.jotron.com
GPS TEST: NOTE: Limit this test to max. once/month as this test will reduce lifetime of EPIRB battery! The Tron60 GPS has maximum 60 GPS TESTs that can be performed during battery lifetime. 1. Move Switch to TEST twice within 3 seconds and release 2. EPIRB will BEEP shortly every 3 seconds until GPS position acquired 3. OK = 2 BEEPS (see below description if Not OK) 4. Normal SELFTEST is performed after GPS TEST and position transmitted on 406.037 MHz. GPS position may be received on an EPIRB Tester for verification There are two possible error conditions during this test: a) 5 BEEPS = Did not acquire GPS position b) 10 -” - = Number of GPS TEST above limit (>60) EPIRB ERROR MESSAGES If the self test detects a fault in the EPIRB module, one or more of the following indications are shown: Number of flashes:
Fault indication:
1
NONE
2
Low power on 406 MHz transmitter
3
Low battery voltage
4
Low power on 121.5 MHz transmitter
5
PLL on 406 MHz transmitter out of lock
6
PLL on 121.5 MHz transmitter out of lock
7
EPIRB module not programmed or programming not complete
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
25
www.jotron.com
6
PERIODICAL CONTROL
Every Month: Perform EPIRB self-test. What the self-test actually does is to send out a short test signal on 121,5 and 406,037MHz, testing the output of the transmitter. While transmitting the test signal, the battery voltage, output power and phase lock is tested. During the test of the 406MHz transmitter a test message is transmitted, this test message is coded with a special synchronization code and will not be recognized as real alert by the Cospas-Sarsat satellites. Carry out visual inspection for defects on both the Tron 60S/GPS and Bracket. The Tron 60S/GPS should be easily removed and replaced in the Bracket. Make sure that the Tron 60S/GPS and Bracket is not painted or otherwise covered with chemicals, oil, etc. Check the expiry date of the EPIRB Battery and the Hydrostatic Release Mechanism. Check the presence of a firmly attached lanyard in good condition and that it is neatly stowed and is not tied to the vessel or the mounting bracket. If the Tron 60S/GPS is the main EPIRB on board, these rules must be followed: Every 12th month: If the Tron 60S/GPS is the main EPIRB on board and the ship falls under national regulation and/or the SOLAS regulations of SBM, these rules must be followed: Perform extended annual test according to IMO’s MSC/Circ.1040 (Annual testing of 406 MHz satellite EPIRBs) as required by SOLAS IV/15.9.This test can be carried out by one of Jotron AS authorized representatives or any other service provider in possession of a Tron UNIDEC, Tron DEC or any other Cospas/Sarsat EPIRB tester/decoder. Every 2ndYear: Hydrostatic Release Mechanism including Plastic Bolt on the Float Free Brackets must be replaced. (Check expiry date on label). Every 5thYear: Battery change SBM (see 7.1)
26
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
www.jotron.com
www.jotron.com
6.1
SERVICE PROCEDURE 2011
WARRANTY CLAIM Warranty claims are valid until 5 years from delivery from our warehouse. The warranty is valid as long as service and battery replacement are carried out by authorized Jotron distributors or agents. All products are warranted against workmanship and factory defect, in material. Any warranty claims must be sent to Jotron, in writing. Jotron reserve the right to decide whether a defective unit is within warranty terms and conditions. If Jotron make a decision of repairing a defective product, a written description of the claim and a Jotron RMA number, should follow the unit when returning it back to Jotron’s factory. Please be noted that un-protective electronics board MUST be packed in antistatic bag, before returning to Jotron’s factory. Any costs related to transportation and/or workmanship linked up to the return of the product being repaired shall be covered by the customer. Jotron’s obligations during warranty replacement; Replace defective unit, including any programming Delivery terms: DAP Incoterms 2010 by regular freight to “Place” (Airport) Service agent’s obligations during warranty claims: Supply replacement unit from own stock if available If agreed, return defective unit to Jotron Electronic units must be shipped in antistatic bags or covered with Jotron’s plastic cover SERVICE – NOT WARRANTY CLAIM Service, such as testing, installation, programming, replacement, marking and battery exchange are provided by an authorized Jotron service agent. Jotron do not meet the cost for services mentioned above. Distributor or service agent should stock the most commonly needed spare parts.
28
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
www.jotron.com
7
MAINTENANCE
7.1 EPIRB MODULE / BATTERY MODULE If the EPIRB is fitted on a vessel which requires GMDSS compliant equipment, the EPIRB shall be tested and approved as required by SOLAS regulation IV/15.9.2 of SOLAS 1974 as amended with, in accordance with MSC/Circ.1039 guidelines for shore-based maintenance of Satellite EPIRBs within 5 years, or by the date of battery expiry, whichever comes first. 7.1.1 CHANGE OF BATTERY The Tron 60S/GPS battery must be changed at Jotron SBM authorized workshop to be GMDSS compliant. If your Tron 60S/GPS is not under any international or national regulations, battery can be change by authorized Jotron representatives/partners/dealers. 7.2
HYDROSTATIC RELEASE REPLACEMENT
WARNING Only Jotron approved hydrostatic release is acceptable for use
7.2.1
REPLACING THE RELEASE MECHANISM IN FB-60 BRACKET
1. Release and remove FB-60 top cover by removing the locking split pin (1). WARNING! The EPIRB can drop out of the FB-60 bracket when releasing the top cover. Remove the EPIRB from the bracket. 2. Press down the spring-loaded bracket plate and remove the hydrostatic unit by sliding it out of its locking slot. See arrow for direction.(2). 3. Check the expiry date of the new hydrostatic release mechanism (3). The date should be approximately two years from the date of purchase. 4. Install a new hydrostatic unit by pressing down the spring loaded bracket plate and sliding the unit into its locking slot (4). 5. Refit the EPIRB and the FB-60 top cover. Be sure that the top cover is locked at the bottom end and that the top end are fixed at hydrostatic release mechanism rod. Replace The locking split pin (1)
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
29
www.jotron.com
1
2
3
4
8
SPARE PARTS
86225 86218 85621 85620
Battery kit, Tron 60S/Tron 60GPS Hydrostat kit FB-60 MB-60
NOTE: Keep the original satellite EPIRB packaging, since it may be needed if the EPIRB has to be shipped for servicing. UN requirements for shipping some batteries as hazardous goods require certain packaging standards and labelling
30
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
www.jotron.com
9
SERVICE AGENTS
Please look at www.jotron.com for Marine Service Agents. Jotron Group subsidiary companies: Jotron UK Ltd. Crosland Park Cramlington NE23 1LA United Kingdom Tel +44 1670 712000 Fax +44 1670 590265 E-mail: [email protected] Jotron Asia Pte. Ltd. Changi Logistics Center 19 Loyang Way #04-26 Singapore 508724 Tel +65 65426350 Fax +65 65429415 E-mail: [email protected] Jotron USA, Inc. 10645 Richmond Avenue, Suite 170 Houston, TX 77042 USA Tel +1 713 268 1061 Fax +1 713 268 1062 E-mail: [email protected]
85525_UM_60S/GPS_G
31
CONTACT INFORMATION Jotron AS
Jotron Phontech AS
Jotron Consultas AS
Jotron Satcom AS
P.O.Box 54 3281 Tjodalyng Norway Tel: +47 33 13 97 00 Fax: +47 33 12 67 80 [email protected]
P.O.Box 274 3192 Horten Norway Tel: +47 33 08 35 00 Fax: +47 33 08 35 01 [email protected]
P.O.Box 743 3196 Horten Norway Tel: +47 33 03 07 00 Fax: +47 33 03 07 10 [email protected]
Dølasletta 7 3408 Tranby Norway Tel: +47 32 84 53 87 Fax: +47 32 84 55 30 [email protected]
Jotron UK Ltd.
Jotron Asia Pte. Ltd.
Jotron USA, Inc.
Crosland Park Cramlington NE23 1LA United Kingdom Tel: +44 (0) 1670 712000 Fax: +44 (0) 1670 590265 [email protected]
19 Loyang Way Changi Logistics Centre Rear Office Block 04-26 Singapore 508724 Tel: +65 65426350 Fax: +65 65429415 [email protected]
10645 Richmond Avenue Suite 170 Houston, TX 77042 USA Tel: +1 713 268 1061 Fax: +1 713 268 1062 [email protected]
v.G
This page left intentionally blank
Index divider: Section 7 N
Document Type:
Document name:
SYSTEM USER MANUAL
BRI – D57001 – 01IU
Project Title:
Date First Issue:
Author:
Revision:
25.11.2011
EKI
A
Sailor SP3520 GMDSS VHF portable
Enclosed documents from sub-supplier & revision history: Revision: (A,B,C,……..)
Description / Enclosed documents:
Date: (dd.mm.yyyy)
Sign.:
A
Sailor SP3520_User manual
25.11.2011
EKI
Component picture:
Ulstein Power & Control AS
This document and its content is the property of ULSTEIN. Nonpublic information contained herein shall be treated as Confidential Information. No use, copying, citation or publication of this document or its content is permitted without prior written consent from ULSTEIN. Any conflicts arising from unauthorized use shall be governed by the laws of Norway.
File Name:
Page:
BRI-D57001-01IU (A) System User Manual.doc
Page 1 of 1
USER MANUAL
SAILOR SP3520 VHF GMDSS
Mayday procedure •
Remove the top-seal of the yellow emergency battery package.
•
Insert the battery package into the handheld transceiver.
•
Turn the knob at the top of the radio clockwise. The display lights up showing the last used channel and the battery level.
•
To select channel 16 (Distress or Safety), press the 16/C key.
•
Press the PTT and say: — “MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY”, — “this is”..... — the 9-digit identity and the call sign or other identification of the ship, — The ship’s position in latitude and longitude or other reference to a known geographical location, — the nature of distress and assistance wanted, — any other information which might facilitate the rescue. — “OVER” Release PTT and listen for answer.
•
SP3520 VHF GMDSS Document number: TT 98-124294-A Release date: January, 2007 Copyright: © 2007 Thrane & Thrane A/S. All rights reserved.
Trademark Acknowledgements • SAILOR is a registered trademark of Thrane & Thrane A/S. • Other product and company names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners.
Warranty limitation IMPORTANT - The radio is a sealed waterproof unit. To create and maintain its waterproof integrity it was assembled in a controlled environment using special equipment. The radio is not a user maintainable unit, and under no circumstances should the unit be opened except by authorized personnel. Unauthorized opening of the unit will invalidate the warranty.
Disclaimer Any responsibility or liability for loss or damage in connection with the use of this product and the accompanying documentation is disclaimed by Thrane & Thrane. The information in this manual is provided for information purposes only, is subject to change without notice, may contain errors or inaccuracies, and represents no commitment whatsoever by Thrane & Thrane. This agreement is governed by the laws of Denmark. Manuals issued by Thrane & Thrane are periodically revised and updated. Anyone relying on this information should satisfy himself/herself as to the most current version. Providers with access to Thrane & Thrane's Extranet may obtain current copies of manuals at: http://extranet.thrane.com. Thrane & Thrane is not responsible for the content or accuracy of any translations or reproductions, in whole or in part, of this manual from any other source.
0703
i
Safety summary Only use original Thrane & Thrane battery packs. Make sure they are clean and dry before attaching the transceiver. Be careful not to damage any gaskets. Only use the original Thrane & Thrane charger for the rechargeable battery. Be very careful when handling the Lithium batteries. With correct use they are safe but any misuse might cause dangerous situations. Never short circuit the battery terminals, never expose the transceiver and the batteries to extreme temperature or fire and never use any kind of violence. Avoid close contact between the antenna and parts of the human body. The top of the antenna must never be closer than 5 cm to the body when transmitting. Do not submerge the transceiver more than 1 m for 30 minutes. Keep the transceiver at least 0.5 m away from the magnetic compass.
ii
0643
Training information SAILOR SP3520 VHF GMDSS is designed for "occupational use only". It must be operated by licensed personnel only. The SP3520 complies with the FCC RF exposure limits for "Occupational Use Only". • FCC OET Bulletin 65 Supplement C, evaluating compliance with FCC guidelines for human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic fields. • American National Standards Institute (C95.1) IEEE standard for safety levels with respect to human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz. • American National Standards Institute (C95.3) IEEE recommended practice for the measurement of potentially hazardous electromagnetic fields - RF and microwaves.
Warning! Your Thrane & Thrane VHF radio generates electromagnetic RF (radio frequency) energy when transmitting. To ensure that you are not exposed to excessive amounts of energy and thus to avoid health hazards from excessive exposure to RF energy, all persons must be at least 5 cm away from the antenna when the radio is transmitting. Correct use For best performance, hold the radio vertically and 10 cm away from the head when talking into the microphone.
0703
iii
iv
0641
Contents Chapter
Introduction Your VHF GMDSS .................................................................1 Performance .......................................................................2 Channels ............................................................................2
Chapter
Operation Controls ..............................................................................3 Keys and buttons ................................................................3 The display .........................................................................5 Using the VHF GMDSS ........................................................6 Basic functions ...................................................................6 Other functions ...................................................................9 Configuring the VHF GMDSS ..............................................10 Entering and using configuration mode ............................10 Configuration settings ....................................................... 11
Chapter
Batteries Battery types .....................................................................13 The primary battery ...........................................................13 The secondary battery .......................................................14 Battery level indication ......................................................14 Removing and inserting the battery pack ...........................14 The battery charger ...........................................................15 Installing the charger ........................................................15 Recharging the secondary battery .....................................16
0643
v
Chapter
Equipment and accessories External equipment ........................................................... 17 List of equipment ............................................................... 17 Connecting external equipment .........................................17 Impact on radio operation .................................................18 Accessories .......................................................................19 List of accessories ..............................................................19 Attaching and removing the belt clip ................................ 20 Attaching the lanyard ....................................................... 20
Chapter
Troubleshooting Displaying errors ...............................................................21
App.
Technical specifications Technical data .................................................................. 23 General ............................................................................ 23 Transmitter ....................................................................... 24 Receiver ........................................................................... 24 Battery life guidelines ...................................................... 25 Primary battery (non-rechargeable) ................................. 25 Secondary battery (rechargeable) ..................................... 25 Dimensional drawing, transceiver .................................... 26 Dimensional drawing, charger ......................................... 27
vi
0643
Chapter 1
Introduction Your VHF GMDSS SP3520, your new SAILOR portable VHF transceiver, is approved to fulfil the GMDSS requirements for portable VHF radios for Safety at Sea and is waterproof to the IP67 standard. As part of the required safety equipment, the SAILOR SP3520 is to be used in an emergency situation. However the best way to guarantee functionality in an emergency situation, is to use the radio in daily communication on board. The SP3520 is designed for daily use and it connects easily to external equipment like headsets and fist mikes, making the SP3520 suitable for any noisy environment. The unique battery concept makes the radio suited for both daily use and emergency situations. The primary emergency battery is to be stored for emergency situations and a secondary rechargeable battery can be used for daily communication in your new portable VHF transceiver. The radio is designed with a unique man machine interface, an excellent grip even with gloves, and large tactile buttons.
0641
1
Introduction
The display has red adjustable backlight which makes the display visible even at night. The radio is equipped with a lanyard and a belt clip. A huge accessory program comes with the SAILOR SP3500 series. Please find the nearest SAILOR distributor on www.thrane.com.
Performance For best performance of the transceiver keep the following in mind: •
Keep clear of metal environment.
•
Hold the transceiver vertically and 10 cm from lips and push the PTT when transmitting.
•
In receive mode carry the transceiver vertically with belt clips.
•
To preserve battery power, adjust squelch to close the loudspeaker when there is no signal.
•
If you are in a lifeboat keep the antenna as high as possible.
Channels This radio operates with the following channels:
2
6
11
15
68
73
77
Notes:
8
12
16
69
74
87
•
All channels are Simplex.
9
13
17
71
75
88
•
Tx power is limited to 1 W on channels 75 and 76.
10
14
67
72
76
0703
Chapter 2
Operation Controls Keys and buttons 1 1.
On/off/volume
2. Light/Lock 3. Push To Talk (PTT) 4. Up key 5. Down key
2 3
6. Hi/Lo output power 7.
Squelch
4
7
5
8
6
9
8. Scan 9. Priority channel (16)/ Call channel
0641
3
Operation
Key presses Pressing and holding certain keys gives access to additional functions, shown in the table below.
Key
Short press (1 beep) Show next available item in the list (up or down). Default: Channel selection
Long press (2 beeps) Run through available items, or select tagged channels A (T) or B (S).
Activate Squelch control (Adjust with up/down arrows).
Monitor function. Open Squelch completely.
1 press: Activate/ terminate Dual/Triple watch.
Add/Delete channel from memory scan.
Extra long press (3 beeps) Run through available items if an A or B channel is tagged
2 presses: Activate memory scan. Toggle between high and low transmitter power. Select channel 16.
4
Select programmed Call channel.
Program Call channel.
0703
Operation
The display The display holds various fields of information, explained below. 4
5
6
3 2
7 8
1
9
10 1.
Current working channel.
2. Current channel mode. 3. “Lo”: Reduced transmitter power. Full transmitter power is not shown in display. 4. Dual watch activated. 5. Current working channel is marked for scanning. 6. Keypad is locked. 7.
Battery level indicator.
8. Transmitting (Tx) /Receiving (Rx). 9. Accessory is connected. 10. Service line for various purposes. In this example the volume level.
0643
5
Operation
Using the VHF GMDSS Basic functions Note
Before using the radio, mount the antenna at the top of the radio. The antenna is delivered with the radio.
Switching the radio on and off •
To switch the radio on, turn the knob at the top of the radio clockwise. The display lights up showing the last used channel and the battery level.
•
To switch the radio off, Turn the knob back counter-clockwise until it clicks.
Selecting the working channel •
To select channel 16 (Distress or Safety), press the 16/C key.
•
To select the Call channel, use a long press on 16/C.
•
To select among all available channels, press S or T on the keypad. For fast selection, press and hold S or T.
The display shows the currently selected channel. Note
6
Long press on S or T can also be used to select preferred channels. For information on how to program preferred channels, see Configuring the VHF GMDSS on page 10.
0643
Operation
Activating a call To activate a call to the selected channel, press and hold the PTT button on the side of the radio. The radio transmits as long as the PTT button is pressed. A small Tx sign next to the channel number indicates when the radio is in transmit mode.
Adjusting the volume •
To increase the volume, turn the on/off knob at the top of the radio clockwise.
•
To decrease the volume, turn the knob counter-clockwise.
The display shows the level of the volume, e.g. “VOL 5”, while it is adjusted.
Using Squelch control •
To activate Squelch control, press the SQ key.
•
To set the Squelch level, press S (closing) or T (opening). The display shows the Squelch level while it is adjusted, e.g. “SQ 5”.
Adjusting the display backlight •
To turn on the backlight, press the Light/Lock button on the side of the radio.
•
To adjust the backlight level, press S or T within 3 seconds after turning on the light. The display shows the level while it is adjusted, e.g. “DIM MED”.
0643
7
Operation
Using Dual watch To activate Dual watch, press the SCN key. The display shows “Dual” at the top and “16” at the bottom right. The radio toggles between the selected channel and channel 16. •
To terminate Dual watch, press SCN again.
Scanning channels •
To activate channel memory scanning, press 2 times SCN within 2 seconds. During scanning, the display shows “SC” in the channel field. The radio toggles between channel 16 and each of the channels marked for scanning.
•
To terminate scanning, press SCN once.
Changing the transmitter power To change the transmitter power, press the Hi/Lo key. The display shows “Lo” when power is set to low. Otherwise maximum power is used.
Locking the keypad •
To lock the keypad, press and hold the Light/Lock button. The display shows a key symbol when the keypad is locked.
•
To unlock the keypad, press and hold the Light/Lock button again.
8
0703
Operation
Other functions Programming the Call channel To program the Call channel, do as follows: 1.
Press and hold 16/C until the current Call channel number is flashing.
2. Select the channel with S or T. 3. Press 16/C to confirm.
Programming the channel memory To add a channel to the channel memory, select the channel and then press and hold the SCN key until the display shows MEM at the top. To remove a channel from the channel memory, select the channel and then press and hold the SCN key until the MEM sign disappears from the display.
0643
9
Operation
Configuring the VHF GMDSS Entering and using configuration mode Note
The radio is not operational in configuration mode.
•
To enter configuration mode, press and hold the Light/Lock button while turning on the radio. The bottom line of the display shows the current menu item/setting.
•
To exit configuration mode, turn off the radio or press any key except S, T and the Light/Lock button. Using the PTT button or leaving the radio inactive for 10 seconds also causes the radio to exit configuration mode.
•
To change a setting, press S or T.
•
To confirm the current setting and go to the next menu item, press the Light/Lock button.
10
0643
Operation
Configuration settings Configuration mode is used to program preferred channels and volume of key beep and battery alarm. The following settings are available in configuration mode. BEEP
PREFA
MAX
Status click/beep sound on key press, long press (settings/programming saved) and battery alarm. Maximum level.
MIN
Status click/beep sound on key press, long press (settings/programming saved) and battery alarm. Minimum level.
OFF
All beeps off.
OFF
Remove tag “A” for current working channel.
ON
Tag current working channel with “A”. If another channel was previously tagged “A”, this is overruled. • The working channel can now be selected with a long press on T.
PREFB
OFF
Remove tag “B” for current working channel.
ON
Tag current working channel with “B”. If another channel was previously tagged “B”, this is overruled. • The working channel can now be selected with a long press on S.
VER
0703
X.XX.XX
Software version. Read-only.
11
Operation
12
0643
Chapter 3
Batteries Battery types •
The yellow primary battery pack contains a non-rechargeable Lithium battery. This battery pack is only to be used in case of emergency.
•
The black secondary battery pack contains a rechargeable battery. This battery pack is for daily use.
The primary battery Important
The yellow primary battery pack is only for emergency use, and is not rechargeable.
Before using the primary battery, remove the seal on the battery pack. Then do as follows: 1.
Attach the battery pack to the radio as shown.
2. Lock the battery with the safety lock at the bottom. The primary battery is capable of providing sufficient power for 8 hours of operation. When the primary pack is not in use it must always be placed in the dedicated rear position in the charger cradle, see The battery charger on page 15.
1 2
0643
13
Batteries
The secondary battery Battery level indication The black secondary battery pack is for daily use of the radio. When the battery level is low, you should recharge the battery.
The radio display shows the battery status. When the battery symbol is empty and flashing, the battery should be recharged as soon as possible.
Removing and inserting the battery pack To remove the battery pack, do as follows: 1.
Open the safety lock as shown.
2. Remove the battery. To insert the battery pack, attach the battery and close the safety lock as shown on the previous page.
2 1
14
0643
Batteries
The battery charger The charger has two compartments. •
A rear compartment for storing a spare battery. It does not have a charger function.
•
A front compartment for recharging the battery alone or while attached to the radio.
Installing the charger Mounting the charger There are several options for mounting one or more chargers on a table or a wall. For information on dimensions and screw positions, refer to Dimensional drawing, charger on page 27. When mounting the charger, make sure it is placed in a dry place and away from direct sunlight. The charger is not waterproof.
0643
15
Batteries
Connecting to power The charger can be supplied with DC or AC. DC: Connect the 12-24VDC Connection Cable between the DC supply and the connector on the underside of the charger. AC: Connect the AC/DC adapter to the connector on the underside of the charger. Then connect the AC/DC adapter to the AC outlet.
Recharging the secondary battery Important
Do not attempt to recharge the yellow primary battery!
To recharge the secondary battery, do place the radio1 with battery or the battery alone in the front position of the charger cradle. The light indicators on the charger cradle show the status as follows: •
Green light: Power is connected to the charger.
•
Slow red flash: Charging in progress.
•
Rapid red flash: Charging error, e.g. battery defect or temperature out of range.
•
Steady red light: Charging completed. Trickle charge mode.
If the radio is on during the charging process, the battery indicator in the upper right corner of the display is “filled” from right to left to show that the battery is charging.
1.
16
You can leave the radio on or switch it off during the recharge process. 0643
Chapter 4
Equipment and accessories External equipment List of equipment The following equipment can be connected to the radio: •
SAVOX 400E Push-To Talk unit
•
SAVOX C500 Fist Mike
•
SAVOX NC/400 Noise-com
•
SAVOX HC-E Helmet-com
•
SAVOX K53004 Helmet unit
•
Peltor MT7H79 Headset
We recommend to remove all accessories during emergency use.
Connecting external equipment Connect the dedicated interface cable between the external equipment and the top connector on the radio. Interface cable
Order number
For SAVOX 400E
403500-940
For SAVOX C500
403500-950
For Peltor FL5214
403500-951
0703
17
Equipment and accessories
When external equipment is connected to the radio, the right side of the display will show a headset.
Impact on radio operation The external equipment can have a built-in PTT, speaker and microphone. Thus connecting it to the radio will have the following impact on the radio operation: •
If a microphone is built into the detected external equipment, the external equipment microphone is used, and the internal radio microphone is disabled.
•
If a speaker or earpiece is built into the detected external equipment, the external equipment sound device is used, and the internal radio speaker is disabled.
•
If a PTT or VOX is built into the detected external equipment, the external equipment PTT control is used, and the radio PTT button is disabled.
18
0703
Equipment and accessories
Accessories List of accessories The following accessories are delivered with your radio: Accessory
Part number
Primary battery (yellow, non-rechargeable), B3501
403501A
Secondary battery (black, rechargeable), B3502
403502A
Charger, CH3507
403507A
AC/DC converter, (100-240V~ /12VDC out), length 150cm
88-124371
12-24VDC Connection cable, length 150cm
37-124381
Belt clip
62-124320
Antenna
88-124370
Lanyard
41-124375
SP3520 User Manual (this manual)
98-124294
Batteries, charger, AC/DC Converter and 12VDC Connection are described in Batteries on page 13. To mount the antenna, simply screw it into the threaded bush at the top of the radio.
0703
19
Equipment and accessories
Attaching and removing the belt clip To attach the belt clip, slide the belt clip upwards into the rails at the back of the radio until it locks. To remove the belt clip, press the projection at the top of the belt clip to release the lock and slide the belt clip downwards out of the rails. Release lock
Attaching the lanyard Do as follows: Top view 1.
Take the lanyard through the eye at the top of the radio.
2. Put one end of the lanyard through the loop at the other end of the lanyard and pull to tighten.
20
0643
Chapter 5
Troubleshooting Displaying errors Some errors result in an error message in the display. These error messages are listed below. Display text
Err EMPTY BAT
Err
Problem
Actions
Change/recharge Severe. The battery voltage is Radio is non- the battery. below a critical level, functional. where further operation would damage the battery. Hardware error.
Service required. Severe. Radio is nonfunctional.
Context fails operation. This text will appear on the following occasions:
Fail operation
HW ERR
ILLEGAL
Type
Consider operation in a different context.
• Multiple watch is selected on channel 16, or in channel regions where it is not allowed. • High power is selected on a channel where it is prohibited. • Transmission on blocked channels
0703
21
Troubleshooting
22
0703
Appendix A
Technical specifications Technical data General Item
Specification
RX frequency range
155.000 - 163.425 MHz
TX frequency range
155.000 - 161.450 MHz
Modulation
16K0G3E
Power
7.2 VDC special Li battery
Current drain at 2 W TX
1.4 A
Current drain at 1 W TX
0.8 A
Current drain RX max audio
0.25 A
Primary Battery
Lithium Iron Disulfide, 3000 mAh
Secondary Battery
Lithium-Ion, 1800 mAh rechargeable
Operating temperature
-20°C to +55° C
Water ingress protection
IP67
Frequency stability
< ±0.7 kHz
Weight with emergency battery
340 g
0703
23
Technical specifications
Transmitter Item
Specification
RF output power
2 W /1 W
Max deviation
±5 kHz
Spurious emission
< 0.25 uW
Adjacent channel power
> 70 dB
Receiver Item
Specification
Sensitivity (20 dB SINAD)
-117 dBM typical
Intermodulation
70 dB typical
Spurious response
> 70 dB
Adjacent channel selectivity
> 70 dB
Audio output, internal
0.5 W at 10% dist.
Audio output, external
0.5 W/8 Ohm
24
0643
Technical specifications
Battery life guidelines Primary battery (non-rechargeable) The primary non-rechargeable battery pack is capable of providing sufficient power for the specified 8 hours according to regulations. The battery is marked with an expiry date. Replace the battery at or before this date. To ensure a long lifetime keep the battery in the store position in the charger and avoid high temperature and direct sunlight.
Secondary battery (rechargeable) Note
New batteries should be fully charged and fully discharged several times to achieve full capacity.
During daily use, always keep the battery fully charged and away from hot areas. Keep the battery terminals dry and clean. Never overcharge or discharge beyond the specifications of the battery. Battery life depends on usage. Generally, the more the radio is transmitting, the faster it will drain the battery. Also, the “Hi” power setting will drain the battery faster than the “Lo” setting. Approximate values are: •
Stored at 25qC and up to 25% charge: 4 to 6 months.
•
Normal use at 25qC and fully charged: 5 to 9 hours.
0643
25
Technical specifications
Dimensional drawing, transceiver
26
0643
Technical specifications
Dimensional drawing, charger
Mounting Possibillities Desktop mounting, top view
0703
Wall mounting, rear view
27
Technical specifications
28
0643
TT-98-124294-A
Issue: A/0703
Thrane & Thrane A/S • [email protected] • www.thrane.com
This page left intentionally blank
